Responsive search ads are revolutionizing the digital marketing landscape, with many brands reporting explosive growth. For Example, Optmyzr.com saw a 4x increase in website even with a lower conversion rate, they still saw a 400% lift in impressions netting incremental conversions after adopting responsive search ads. This cutting-edge ad style transforms possibilities for businesses seeking enhanced visibility.
The power of responsive search ads lies in their adaptability. They can automatically adjust their content and format based on what’s most likely to achieve your advertising goals.
However, leveraging these dynamic ads effectively requires an understanding of how they work and how to optimize them for maximum results. That’s where Google’s advanced tools come into play, offering unprecedented control over ad performance.
Table of Contents:
Using AI for Better Performance in Responsive Search Ads
AI to Create Catchy Google Ad Titles and Descriptions
Saving Time with Machine Learning
Optimizing Performance Using Google’s Latest AI Capabilities
Mastering the Art of Ad Strength in RSAs
A Deep Dive Into How Ad Strength Ratings Work
Tweaking Your Strategy Based On Ad Strength
Evaluating Performance: Going Beyond Traditional Metrics
Prioritizing Business Outcomes Over Other Metrics
Analyzing Individual Asset Rating For In-depth Insights
Mastering Google Ads Editor for Streamlined Management
Achieving Campaign Efficiency with Google Ads Editor
Navigating Multiple Ad Groups Effectively
Generating High-Quality Assets with Tools & Tips from Google
Utilizing Google’s Asset Suggestion Tool
Leveraging Auto-Generated Assets
Evaluating Performance of Responsive Search Ads
Focusing on Business Results When Evaluating RSAs’ Performance
Analyzing Individual Asset Ratings: A Key Step In the Evaluation Process
Conclusion
Using AI for Better Performance in Responsive Search Ads
AI is changing the game in responsive search ads, offering a new level of optimization and effectiveness. For the first time, each item of an advertisement is considered an “asset” rather than a separate piece. Google then uses these assets to discover the ideal headline and body content combination for a campaign’s aim.
AI to Create Catchy Google Ad Titles and Descriptions
The success of your Google ads campaign hinges on how well you connect with potential customers. This connection begins with an attention-grabbing title followed by an intriguing description – elements that can be challenging to manually tailor for each advertisement.
This is where Google’s advanced AI capabilities shine. By testing various combinations of headlines and descriptions based on user behavior data, it determines what works best for every individual search query.
Saving Time with Machine Learning
Beyond creating compelling content, machine learning algorithms also save precious time by automating routine tasks involved in managing advertisements. For instance, they automatically test multiple variations of your text ads across different audience segments without requiring any manual intervention from you.
This automation allows small business owners like yourself more freedom to focus on strategic decisions rather than getting entangled in day-to-day operational tasks related to running an advertising campaign.
Optimizing Performance Using Google’s Latest AI Capabilities
Powered by cutting-edge machine learning techniques, Google’s latest AI capabilities continuously learn from past performance data – including click-through rates (CTR), conversion rates (CVR), etc., adjusting bids accordingly so that your responsive search ads are shown at optimal times when they’re most likely going to convert.
This intelligent bidding strategy maximizes return-on-investment while minimizing wasted spend due to its ability to adapt quickly to changes in market conditions or consumer behaviors.
These three aspects – generating captivating ad copy, efficiently managing campaigns, and optimizing their performances – all demonstrate the power of harnessing Artificial Intelligence in marketing efforts today’s world where competition is fierce and the need to stand out is crucial more than ever before. Smaller companies can still have a significant effect in the digital realm with the correct instruments and approaches set up.
The value of Ad Strength is paramount when it comes to responsive search ads. This dynamic tool provides actionable insights into your ad’s performance, helping you optimize and refine your advertising strategy.
A Deep Dive Into How Ad Strength Ratings Work
In Google Ads’ world, each RSA receives an exclusive rating known as ‘Ad Strength’. It ranges from “Poor” to “Excellent”, shedding light on how well your ad assets such as headlines and descriptions are performing.
The more unique and relevant these elements are, the better ratings they earn.
Diversity also plays a pivotal role here; different headlines should not merely rephrase one concept but rather cover various facets or selling points related to what you’re offering. After all, variety truly spices up things.
Tweaking Your Strategy Based On Ad Strength
Leveraging this feature for continuous improvement can be game-changing for businesses like yours. If low ratings catch your eye – don’t panic. Consider tweaking aspects such as copywriting style or diversifying messages until improvements start surfacing.
If your ad strength rating is “Average”, try A/B testing headlines that focus on different benefits or urgent calls-to-action like “Sign up now” vs “Learn more”. This can help discover messages that resonate best with your audience. Remember that even minor changes informed by the wisdom of ‘Ad strength’ could significantly boost user engagement rates while maximizing return-on-investment (ROI).
Evaluating Performance: Going Beyond Traditional Metrics
To evaluate RSAs effectively requires looking beyond conventional metrics like click-through rates (CTR) or conversion numbers.
Prioritizing Business Outcomes Over Other Metrics
Rather than focusing solely on superficial indicators, give precedence to outcomes directly linked with business objectives.
Depending upon what aligns best with specific business goals – key parameters such as cost per acquisition (CPA), revenue generated per click, lifetime customer value etc., deserve special attention.
Analyzing Individual Asset Rating For In-depth Insights
In the Assets tab of Google Ads, you can view ratings for each headline and description used. Aim for at least “Average” ratings, with “Good” or “Great” being ideal. Low ratings signal that asset should be reworked or replaced.
Mastering Google Ads Editor for Streamlined Management
In the realm of digital marketing, efficiency is paramount. One way to enhance your ad campaign management process is through leveraging a powerful tool – Google Ads Editor.
Achieving Campaign Efficiency with Google Ads Editor
The first step in maximizing productivity and effectiveness lies in setting up campaigns using this software. With its ability to allow bulk changes and simultaneous editing across multiple ads, it’s an invaluable resource when crafting responsive search ads (RSAs).
Beyond mere setup, strategic utilization can yield substantial benefits such as time savings from copying information between similar campaigns or products. Additionally, employing advanced search functions within the editor enables quick location and modification of specific items – further amplifying operational speed.
Navigating Multiple Ad Groups Effectively
Moving beyond individual campaigns into broader scope operations involving numerous ad groups requires another layer of expertise. Fortunately, that’s where mastering functionalities offered by Google Ads Editor becomes crucial.
This comprehensive platform allows downloading entire account structures offline – providing uninterrupted access even without internet connectivity which enhances overall workflow continuity.
Focusing on RSAs specifically amidst other advertisement types managed via this interface necessitates understanding how AI complements human input: automated systems generate variations based on provided headlines/descriptions while marketers monitor performance metrics like click-through rates (CTRs) and conversion values then adjust strategy accordingly through subsequent modifications made possible due largely because everything needed resides right here inside one single application suite known simply yet aptly enough just “Editor”. This synergy results in optimal business outcomes over traditional metric-based evaluations – underscoring why prioritizing business results remains critical during RSA assessment processes.
Analyzing Individual Asset Ratings For Effective Adjustments
To fully capitalize on what works best within an advertising campaign demands scrutinizing individual asset ratings alongside monitoring overarching business impact; thereby ensuring all components align seamlessly towards achieving desired objectives.
By integrating these strategies effectively you will not only manage but masterfully navigate your advertisements journey leading ultimately towards greater profitability for your small businesses’ online presence.
Generating High-Quality Assets with Tools & Tips from Google
The performance of your responsive search ads (RSAs) is directly influenced by the quality of assets you create. Luckily, Google offers a plethora of tools and guidance to help generate high-quality content for your advertisements.
Utilizing Google’s Asset Suggestion Tool
An invaluable tool provided by Google is their asset suggestion feature. This functionality assists in formulating effective headlines and descriptions that resonate deeply with your target demographic. The suggestions are derived from information about your business, past ad performances, as well as successful ads across various industries.
This not only conserves time but also enhances performance because it employs machine learning algorithms to suggest creative ideas proven successful previously. However, while using this resourceful tool, remember to scrutinize all suggestions meticulously before integrating them into campaigns since they may not always perfectly align with brand voice or marketing strategy.
Leveraging Auto-Generated Assets
Beyond manually created assets, enabling auto-generated ones can significantly amplify the relevance of RSAs. Auto-generation deploys artificial intelligence technology offered by the system behind Google Ads, which generates variations on existing text elements within an advertisement campaign.
Auto-generated headlines and descriptions are tailored according to individual user needs, thus increasing engagement rates due to its personalization approach towards each potential customer’s interests or previous online behaviors. Although these generated texts cannot be edited directly after creation, effectiveness can still be evaluated through metrics such as click-through rates (CTR), conversions, etc., offering valuable insights for future ad optimizations.
1. Create diversity: Having diverse unique headlines and descriptions allows AI systems more options when matching relevant combinations against specific queries.
2. Prioritize clarity over creativity: While catchy phrases might attract attention initially, clear concise messaging ensures better understanding leading to a higher conversion rate.
3. Avoid repetition: Duplicating similar messages across multiple lines does not add value; rather, it decreases overall impact due to a lack of variation presented to users during their browsing experience.
Assessing the performance of your responsive search ads (RSAs) is not a straightforward task. It’s easy to be captivated by metrics like click-throughs and views, yet they may not directly relate to business success.
To truly understand how well your RSAs are performing, you need to shift focus towards tangible outcomes that directly impact your bottom line – conversions. This means looking beyond surface-level data and delving deeper into what each ad brings in terms of leads or sales.
Focusing on Business Results When Evaluating RSAs’ Performance
The most significant metric when assessing RSA performance is undoubtedly conversions – be it form submissions, online purchases, or calls made to your business. These actions have a direct bearing on revenue generation and hence provide an accurate measure for gauging success.
If one particular ad consistently drives more conversions than others within the same campaign or across different campaigns, this indicates that its messaging resonates with the target audience effectively. Such insights can then guide the creation of future ads using similar themes/language styles, thereby enhancing overall marketing strategy effectiveness.
Analyzing Individual Asset Ratings: A Key Step In the Evaluation Process
In addition to examining broader campaign statistics such as conversion rate and cost per acquisition (CPA), analyzing individual asset ratings provided by Google’s platform itself holds equal importance too. An ‘asset rating’ varies from “low” through “best”, reflecting the frequency at which an asset appears in high-performing advertisements compared against other assets belonging to the same category, i.e., headline versus description, etc.
A comprehensive analysis allows advertisers to identify top-performing elements present within their ads so they can replicate these winning formulas during subsequent campaigns while phasing out underperforming components over time, thus improving efficiency and effectiveness long term.
So next time you’re evaluating RSA performance, remember to prioritize those crucial business results above all else.
Key Takeaway:
Don’t get lost in the weeds of click-through rates and impressions when evaluating responsive search ads. The real proof is in the pudding – focus on conversions, tangible outcomes that boost your bottom line. Remember to also scrutinize individual asset ratings for a comprehensive analysis.
Conclusion
Responsive search ads are transforming the way businesses advertise online.
They’re dynamic, adaptable, and powered by Google’s advanced AI technology.
This makes them a powerful tool for reaching your target audience with highly relevant content.
The key to success lies in understanding how these ads work and optimizing them effectively.
You’ve learned about harnessing AI for better ad performance, using Ad Strength ratings to optimize RSAs, managing campaigns efficiently with Google Ads Editor, generating high-quality assets with tools from Google, and evaluating RSA performance based on business results rather than just metrics.
Are you eager to take your promotion efforts up a notch?
Data analysis isn’t just a buzzword. By leveraging data analytics, marketers can gain insight into consumer behavior and craft more tailored messages to better engage with them.
With proper data analytics at play, you’re not shooting arrows blindfolded; instead, you have clear targets – understanding consumer behavior and creating tailored messages to resonate with them better. So let’s explore how this works.
Using data to personalize content
In today’s digital age where consumers are bombarded with information overload every day, personalization is more than just a nice-to-have—it’s expected. And guess what? You can achieve it by analyzing consumer interaction while creating content.
You see, research suggests that personalized experiences lead to higher customer satisfaction rates and increased brand loyalty. When businesses use segmentation or predictive modeling techniques for their data analysis, they’re able to create highly targeted messages which hit home runs each time because these align perfectly with individual needs and interests.
And when users feel understood and valued, chances of conversion skyrocket too. Now THAT’S a power-packed punch right there.
Boosting user engagement through data-driven strategies
If we had a dollar for every marketer who said “Content is King,” we would probably be lounging on a beach somewhere sipping margaritas now… But jokes aside: Yes, indeed, content is king, but only to its relevant audience.
This relevance comes from using original data collected from various sources like social media platforms and Google Analytics to make informed business decisions about an organization’s results. Studies show that investing time to analyze existing data allows you to identify the type of material that resonates best with your audiences—be it blog posts on specific topics or interactive infographics—and optimize future campaigns accordingly for maximum impact.
Note: Analyzing past performance doesn’t mean replicating the exact same thing over again and expecting a different result (That’s the definition of insanity, remember?). Instead, it gives insights into potential improvements moving forward based on patterns and trends observed during the evaluation period.
Encouraging audience loyalty with tailored messaging
Capturing attention is increasingly challenging for brands given the overwhelming amount of information consumers receive on a daily basis. However, here lies an opportunity: Tailored messaging fosters deeper connections between companies and customers by addressing their unique characteristics and analyzing behavioral patterns over time.
Accordingly, organizations utilize these insights within strategic planning to enhance retention levels, largely due to effectively communicating value propositions closely alongside aspirations—thereby strengthening overall relationships for prolonged periods and driving repeat purchases from satisfied clients.
In essence, there is a greater likelihood of sustained interest from recipients, leading to ultimately heightened conversions and subsequent profitability from a long-term perspective.
Therefore, utilizing comprehensive analytical tools capable of identifying distinct demographic characteristics allows you to fine-tune your approaches consistently, hitting the right notes regardless of the goal, whether it revolves around boosting sales figures or simply wanting to foster a stronger sense of community among your online followers.
Key Takeaway:
Stop shooting arrows blindfolded. Data analysis in content creation is the secret weapon to hit your marketing targets. It personalizes experiences, boosts user engagement and fosters audience loyalty by understanding consumer behavior and creating tailored messages that resonate with them.
Tools for Streamlining the Ideation Process
The digital marketing landscape is constantly changing and requires quick responses. The demand for fresh, engaging content can be overwhelming. Yet with innovative tools designed to streamline the ideation process, content creators are able to keep pace without compromising on quality.
Importance of Quick Turnarounds in Digital Marketing
In this competitive landscape where speed often trumps all else, data analysis becomes a critical ally. A delay in publishing new material could mean missed opportunities or even lost revenue.
This allows us to quickly identify trending topics or consumer interests that should guide our next piece of original data-driven content creation efforts. Beyond traditional methods though lies an array of AI-powered tools such as HubSpot’s Content Strategy Tool. This tool enables marketers to swiftly pinpoint relevant keywords and topic clusters, thereby expediting the brainstorming phase while ensuring high-quality output remains intact.
Maintaining Quality During Rapid Content Production
A swift turnaround time doesn’t necessitate sacrificing quality within your organization’s content marketing results. Rather, it presents an opportunity to leverage technology alongside human creativity for optimal outcomes. To ensure consistent standards during accelerated production cycles, consider using style guides – documents outlining preferred spelling conventions and tone guidelines specific to each brand – thus providing consistency across different writers and team members.
Another way to maintain consistent quality is through performance reviews based on metrics obtained from Google Analytics, which provide insight into what works (and what doesn’t), helping you make informed business decisions about future strategies.
Furthermore, leveraging machine learning algorithms to analyze past successful articles and identify common traits can be replicated across future projects, maintaining consistency amidst rapid timelines.
To summarize: By combining human ingenuity and artificial intelligence, we are now better equipped than ever before to not just meet, but exceed expectations around both speed and substance in our respective fields.– Anonymous Data Analyst at Top-tier Tech Company
Key Takeaway:
Embrace data analysis and AI tools in content creation for a quick, yet quality-driven approach. They’ll help pinpoint trends, expedite brainstorming, ensure consistency across teams and inform future strategies based on past successes.
Personalized Content Aligned with Business Objectives
By tailoring content to fit your company’s goals, you can create a powerful user experience that positively impacts consumer perception. This customization not only enhances user experience but also shapes consumer perception of your brand in a positive light.
Crafting Compelling Narratives for Businesses
A compelling narrative can be an effective tool to drive customer engagement and loyalty. But how do you create such narratives? The answer lies in understanding the needs, preferences, and behaviors of your target audience through comprehensive data analysis.
This process enables businesses to produce content that resonates deeply on both emotional and intellectual levels with their audiences. For instance, when we analyze consumer behavior while creating content, it’s possible to identify common pain points or interests among customers which then become key themes within our storytelling efforts.
The importance here isn’t just about telling engaging stories; it’s ensuring those stories reflect the values and mission statement of your organization authentically – because authenticity matters. Audiences are more likely drawn towards brands they perceive as genuine.
Scaling Solutions to Meet Growing Demand
In today’s rapidly changing environment where demand is escalating quickly, businesses must have solutions that can be adapted to meet the needs. So how does one achieve this scalability?
Leveraging AI-powered tools: These help automate parts of the content creation process without compromising quality or personalization.
Data-driven marketing strategies: They enable organizations’ ability to analyze consumer interaction during tailored pieces’ creation at scale.
Finding top writers who understand how data informs effective copywriting practices: Having skilled creators who know exactly what role original data plays in guiding blog posts ensures consistency across all channels even during periods high demand.
All these components combined allow businesses to continually refine messaging based on real-time feedback from Google Analytics and social media platforms like Facebook Insights (Hootsuite Blog).
Key Takeaway:
Master the art of data analysis to craft personalized content that aligns with your business goals, creates compelling narratives and scales up as demand grows. Remember – authenticity is key. Leverage AI tools, employ data-driven strategies and hire skilled writers for consistent, quality output.
Evolution of Copywriting In the Digital Age
The digital age has revolutionized the way we approach copywriting. The once solely creative process now heavily relies on data analysis, transforming how content creators interact with their target audience.
Transition from Traditional to Modern-Day Copywriting
Gone are the days when intuition and experience were enough for creating compelling narratives that resonate with audiences. While these elements still hold value, they’ve been supplemented by a more precise tool – data analysis.
In today’s world, effective content creation efforts involve utilizing insights derived from tools like Google Analytics, social media channels, or customer surveys. This allows marketers not just to understand but predict consumer behavior while creating tailored messages that hit home.
This shift towards using original data ensures higher engagement rates as it aligns perfectly with user preferences and needs. It fosters stronger connections between brands and consumers by making every interaction count in this era of personalized experiences.
Role of Technology in Reshaping Copywriting
We can’t talk about the evolution without mentioning the instrumental role played by technology within the digital marketing services landscape, especially analytics tools which help businesses perform proper data analysis informing existing strategies inspiring new ones.
Social media platforms provide real-time feedback loops where organizations can analyze consumer interactions, thereby improving future campaigns based on observed trends and patterns.
Beyond merely shaping what type of message should be conveyed, technology also dictates how it is delivered too. Modern algorithms optimize everything from post timings to hashtag usage, ensuring maximum visibility and reach among desired demographics, enhancing an organization’s content marketing results significantly.
Finally, AI-powered writing assistants have emerged as powerful allies, helping writers generate high-quality copies at unprecedented speeds without compromising creativity and originality. These intelligent systems offer suggestions regarding style, tone, grammar, punctuation, and word choice, thus empowering authors to take charge over the entire narrative structure, maintaining consistency and coherence throughout the piece.
In essence, the transformation seen in the field is largely driven by the relentless pursuit of delivering personalized experiences to users, making every interaction count. As we move forward, we can expect to see further innovations shaping how we communicate digitally, pushing the boundaries of conventional storytelling and exploring uncharted territories in engaging interactive and dynamic ways.
Key Takeaway:
Modern copywriting has evolved from solely relying on creativity to incorporating data analysis, thanks to digital technology. This shift ensures content aligns with user preferences, fostering stronger brand-consumer connections. Analytics tools and AI-powered writing assistants are key players in this transformation, enhancing visibility and quality of content while maintaining its originality.
FAQs in Relation to Data Analysis in Content Creation
How does data analytics influence content creation?
Data analytics provides insights into audience preferences, behaviors, and trends. These insights help in crafting personalized and relevant content that resonates with the target audience.
How to use data in content creation?
Data can be used to identify trending topics, understand user behavior, personalize messages, optimize SEO strategies, and measure the effectiveness of your content strategy.
Why is data analysis essential for content strategy?
Data analysis helps you understand what works best for your audience. It enables strategic decision-making on creating engaging, effective, and targeted content that drives business growth.
What are the types of data analysis in research content analysis?
The main types include descriptive (understanding patterns), diagnostic (exploring causes), predictive (forecasting future trends), and prescriptive (advising on possible outcomes).
Conclusion
So, we’ve taken a deep dive into the world of Data Analysis in Content Creation.
We learned how it’s revolutionizing businesses by tailoring messages and boosting user engagement.
The power that data analysis holds in content creation is truly remarkable, right?
We also explored some cutting-edge tools that streamline the ideation process for copywriters. These tools are game-changers – they maintain quality while ensuring swift turnarounds.
Personalized content? Yes, we touched on that too! It aligns perfectly with business objectives and shapes customer perception to drive growth.
And let’s not forget about the evolution of copywriting in this digital age. Technology has reshaped traditional practices with an increased emphasis on personalized content and faster turnaround times.
If you’re ready to leverage these insights for your own business success…
Our AI Marketing Services can help you harness the full potential of Data Analysis in Content Creation.
Data Analysis in Content Creation is a game-changer, folks.
With how fast the internet is growing (daily), most businesses don’t realize when its time to capitalize on hyper-relevant topics to boost engagement and drive growth, leaving ideation to content creators who are left scratching their heads…
Data Analysis in Content Creation. It sounds intimidating, right?
Without taking advantage of the potential offered by data analysis, you’re neglecting chances for your business to grow.
Table of Contents:
The Power of Ai in Copywriting
By Unleashing Creativity Through AI
Boosting user engagement through data-driven strategies
Encouraging audience loyalty with tailored messaging
Tools for Streamlining the Ideation Process
Importance of Quick Turnarounds in Digital Marketing
Quality & Efficiency with AI Copywriting
The Power of Personalized AI Copywriting
Crafting Compelling Narratives for Businesses
Scaling Your Business with AI Copywriting
Evolution of Copywriting In the Digital Age
Transition from Traditional to Modern-Day Copywriting
Role of Technology in Reshaping Copywriting
FAQs in Relation to Data Analysis in Content Creation
How does data analytics influence content creation?
How to use data in content creation?
Why is data analysis essential for content strategy?
What are the types of data analysis in research content analysis?
That’s all folks! To sum it all up…
The Power of AI in Copywriting
Artificial intelligence has transformed many industries, including copywriting. AI tools like Content at Scale, use machine learning to analyze user data and engagement. This enables the software to generate personalized and compelling content that resonates with target audiences.
With proper data analytics at play, you’re not shooting arrows blindfolded; instead, you have clear targets – understanding consumer behavior and creating tailored messages to resonate with them better.
How’s it all work? Glad you asked!
By Unleashing Creativity Through AI
AI copywriting tools liberate creators by automating tedious tasks like keyword research. This allows writers to focus their efforts on crafting engaging narratives. The technology can even spark new creative directions by suggesting unique angles tailored to brands’ voices and audience insights.
You see, research suggests that personalized experiences lead to higher customer satisfaction rates and increased brand loyalty. When businesses use segmentation or predictive modeling techniques for their data analysis, they’re able to create highly targeted messages which hit home runs each time because these align perfectly with individual needs and interests.
And when users feel understood and valued, chances of conversion skyrocket too. Now THAT’S a power-packed punch right there.
Boosting user engagement through data-driven strategies
If we had a dollar for every marketer who said “Content is King,” we would probably be lounging on a beach somewhere sipping margaritas now… But jokes aside: Yes, indeed, content is king, but only to its relevant audience.
Do some research and collect some data from various sources like Google, Facebook or Instagram – wherever you produce content consistently.
Taking time to analyze existing data helps identify content that resonates most with your target audiences, whether that’s blog posts on specific topics, engagement from social media or a video on YouTube. This analysis enables you to optimize future content to maximize engagement and impact with your readers.
Pro tip: Using and analyzing past website or social media performance data doesn’t mean replicating the exact same thing (that worked once) and replicate it repeatedly and expecting a different result (That’s the definition of insanity, remember?).
Instead, it gives insights into potential improvements moving forward based on patterns and trends observed during the evaluation period.
Encouraging audience loyalty with tailored messaging
Capturing attention is increasingly challenging for brands given the overwhelming amount of information consumers receive daily. However, here lies an opportunity: Tailored messaging fosters deeper connections between companies and customers by addressing their unique characteristics and analyzing behavioral patterns over time.
Accordingly, organizations utilize these insights within strategic planning to enhance retention levels, largely due to effectively communicating value propositions closely alongside aspirations thereby strengthening overall relationships for prolonged periods and driving repeat purchases from satisfied clients.
In essence, there is a greater likelihood of sustained interest from recipients, leading to ultimately heightened conversions and subsequent profitability from a long-term perspective.
Using analytics tools that identify your audience’s demographics and preferences allows you to tailor your messaging for different goals. For example, you can optimize content to increase sales among one group, while building a sense of community with another set of followers. This consistent fine-tuning based on data helps you resonate with each audience.
Key Takeaways: Stop shooting arrows blindfolded. Data analysis in content creation is the secret weapon to hit your marketing targets. It personalizes experiences, boosts user engagement and fosters audience loyalty by understanding consumer behavior and creating tailored messages that resonate with them.
Tools for Streamlining the Ideation Process
The digital marketing landscape is constantly changing and requires quick responses. The demand for fresh, engaging content can be overwhelming. That’s why these emerging tools from large software providers are incorporating Ai into their wheelhouse to help your business streamline the ideation process, without compromising on quality.
Importance of Quick Turnarounds in Digital Marketing
In this competitive landscape where speed often trumps all else, data analysis becomes a critical ally. A delay in publishing new material could mean missed opportunities or even lost revenue.
This allows us to quickly identify trending topics or consumer interests that should guide our next piece of original data-driven content creation efforts. Beyond traditional methods though lies an array of AI-powered tools such as HubSpot’s Content Strategy Tool. This tool enables marketers to swiftly pinpoint relevant keywords and topic clusters, thereby expediting the brainstorming phase while ensuring high-quality output remains intact.
Quality & Efficiency with AI Copywriting
For nimble marketing teams, AI copywriting software allows scaling content production without losing quality. The technology can quickly generate high volumes of copy at speeds unmatched by human writers. This empowers brands to launch campaigns faster and meet tight deadlines.
Pro tip: Use Google Analytics, it can provide insights into what content is working (and which content can be redirected or improved), helping you make informed business decisions about future strategies.
Furthermore, leveraging machine learning algorithms to analyze past successful articles and identify common traits can be replicated across future projects, maintaining consistency amidst rapid timelines.
To summarize: By combining human ingenuity and artificial intelligence, we are now better equipped than ever before to not just meet but exceed expectations around both speed and substance in our respective fields. – Anonymous Data Analyst at Top-tier Tech Company
Key Takeaways: Embrace data analysis and AI tools in content creation for a quick, yet quality-driven approach. They’ll help pinpoint trends, expedite brainstorming, ensure consistency across teams, and inform future strategies based on past successes.
The Power of Personalized AI Copywriting
In today’s crowded digital space, personalized content is crucial for engagement. AI tools analyze user data to develop targeted messaging that stands out. This makes tailoring copy to individual users’ needs achievable.
Crafting Compelling Narratives for Businesses
A compelling narrative can be an effective tool to drive customer engagement and loyalty. But how do you create such narratives?
The answer lies in understanding the intent and what problem you’re attempting to solve. Then using data to understand the user’s preferences and behaviors when they engage with your content.
This process enables businesses to produce content that resonates deeply on both emotional and intellectual levels with their audiences. For instance, when we analyze consumer behavior while creating content, it’s possible to identify common pain points or interests among customers which then become key themes within our storytelling efforts.
The importance here isn’t just about telling engaging stories; it’s ensuring those stories reflect the values and mission statement of your organization authentically – because authenticity matters. Audiences are more likely drawn towards brands they perceive as genuine.
Scaling Your Business with AI Copywriting
AI enables copywriting to scale with business needs without compromising quality or efficiency. The technology can produce consistent, high-quality copy even at full capacity. This allows businesses to grow their content demands while maintaining excellence.
Leveraging AI-powered tools: Automate parts of the content creation process without compromising quality or personalization.
Data-driven marketing strategies: They enable organizations’ ability to analyze consumer interaction during tailored pieces’ creation at scale.
Finding top writers who understand how data informs effective copywriting practices: Having skilled creators who know exactly what role original data plays in guiding blog posts ensures consistency across all channels even during periods high demand.
All these components combined allow businesses to continually refine messaging based on real-time feedback from Google Analytics and social media platforms like Facebook Insights.
Key Takeaways: Master the art of data analysis to craft personalized content that aligns with your business goals, creates compelling narratives, and scales up as demand grows. Remember – authenticity is key. Leverage AI tools, employ data-driven strategies and hire skilled writers for consistent, quality output.
Evolution of Copywriting in the Digital Age
The future is now, and Ai is flipping everything into the “Upside down” changing the way we approach ideation and how we approach copywriting. The once solely creative process now heavily relies on data analysis, transforming how content creators interact with their target audience.
Transition from Traditional to Modern-Day Copywriting
Gone are the days when intuition and experience were enough for creating compelling narratives that resonate with audiences. While these elements still hold value, they’ve been supplemented by a more precise tool – data analysis.
In today’s world, effective content creation efforts involve utilizing insights derived from tools like Google Analytics, social media channels, or customer surveys. This allows marketers not just to understand but predict consumer behavior while creating tailored messages that hit home.
This shift towards using original data ensures higher engagement rates as it aligns perfectly with user preferences and needs. It fosters stronger connections between brands and consumers by making every interaction count in this era of personalized experiences.
Role of Technology in Reshaping Copywriting
We can’t talk about the evolution without mentioning the instrumental role played by technology within the digital marketing services landscape, especially analytics tools which help businesses perform proper data analysis informing existing strategies inspiring new ones.
Social media platforms provide real-time feedback loops where organizations can analyze consumer interactions, thereby improving future campaigns based on observed trends and patterns.
Technology doesn’t just shape the messaging itself but also how it’s delivered. Algorithms can optimize factors like social media post timing and hashtag usage to maximize visibility among target demographics. This enhances an organization’s ability to reach the right people and drive content marketing success.
Finally, AI-powered writing assistants have emerged as powerful allies, helping writers generate high-quality copies at unprecedented speeds without compromising creativity and originality. These intelligent systems offer suggestions regarding style, tone, grammar, punctuation, and word choice, thus empowering authors to take charge over the entire narrative structure, maintaining consistency and coherence throughout the piece.
In essence, the transformation seen in the field is largely driven by the relentless pursuit of delivering personalized experiences to users, making every interaction count.
As time progresses, we can expect to see further Ai innovations, things that blow our mind and honestly say to ourselves… That’s Crazy!
For a savvy marketer or writing, if they’re in the “know”, It’s already shaping their creativity and writing skills and of course how we communicate digitally to one another.
Who knows… Maybe it’s a bot? Maybe It’s not!?
Just don’t be fooled, Ai is pushing the boundaries of conventional storytelling and exploring uncharted territories in engaging interactive and dynamic ways.
Key Takeaways: Modern copywriting has evolved from solely relying on creativity to incorporating data analysis, thanks to digital technology. This shift ensures content aligns with user preferences, fostering stronger brand-consumer connections. Analytics tools and AI-powered writing assistants are key players in this transformation, enhancing visibility and quality of content while maintaining its originality.
FAQs in Relation to Data Analysis in Content Creation
How does data analytics influence content creation?
Data analytics provides insights into audience preferences, behaviors, and trends. These insights help in crafting personalized and relevant content that resonates with the target audience.
How to use data in content creation?
Use it to identify trending topics, for example, use Google Trends to see user behavior, to then help tailor a personalized message or improve your SEO strategies.
Why is data analysis essential for content strategy?
Data analysis helps you understand what works best for your audience. It enables strategic decision-making on creating engaging, effective, and targeted content that drives business growth.
What are the types of data analysis in research content analysis?
The main types include descriptive (understanding patterns), diagnostic (exploring causes), predictive (forecasting future trends), and prescriptive (advising on possible outcomes).
That’s all folks! To sum it all up…
We’ve taken a deep dive into the world of Data Analysis and Content Creation.
We learned how it’s revolutionizing businesses by tailoring messages and boosting user engagement.
The power that data analysis holds in content creation is truly remarkable, right?
We also explored some cutting-edge tools that streamline the ideation process for copywriters. These tools are game-changers – they maintain quality while ensuring swift turnarounds.
Personalized content? Yes, we touched on that too! It aligns perfectly with business objectives and shapes customer perception to drive growth.
And let’s not forget about the evolution of copywriting in this digital age. Technology has reshaped traditional practices with an increased emphasis on personalized content and faster turnaround times.
If you’re ready to leverage these insights for your own business success…
At Fifty50 Ai Marketing we can help you harness the full potential of Data Analysis in Content Creation.
Mastering the art of copywriting is a challenging journey.
In fact, when it’s time to innovate and stay ahead in the game, their #1 challenge is…
Leveraging AI tools for copywriting.
Many have NO clue how to harness its power. But this very knowledge separates an average content creator from a pioneering wordsmith. If you lack insight into how AI can transform your writing, then attaining excellence is beyond reach.
Navigating AI in copywriting isn’t easy folks.
A seasoned marketer once confessed that as soon as they implemented an AI tool for their campaign…it produced generic and impersonal content.
The fear of losing touch with human creativity has now made them hesitant about using any more AI tools for copywriting.
No surprise there!
But let’s face reality…
Without embracing these innovative solutions, they simplywon’t be able to keep up with modern marketing demands.The Power of AI in Copywriting
Artificial Intelligence (AI) has transformed numerous industries, and copywriting is no exception.
Fifty50 Ai, for instance, leverages advanced technology to generate compelling content that resonates with audiences and drives conversions.
Table of Contents:
Data Analysis for Personalized Content Creation
User Interaction as a Tool for Engaging Copy
Unleashing Creativity through AI Copywriting
Automating Grunt Work for Enhanced Productivity
Harnessing Artificial Intelligence for Creative Brainstorming
AI marketing is transforming how businesses communicate with their customers, offering unprecedented insights and personalized interactions. The technology, built on machine learning and data analysis, predicts consumer behavior, empowering companies to fine-tune their strategies for maximal effectiveness.
From automating mundane tasks to delivering highly targeted ad campaigns, AI marketing tools are transforming the landscape of digital marketing.
In this blog post, we’ll delve into how you can harness the power of AI marketing to take your brand’s strategy to new heights.
Marketing has evolved from guesswork to a data-driven process, thanks to AI’s transformative power.
AI’s Role in Digital Ad Placement
Let’s start with digital ad placement, a crucial component of any modern-day advertising strategy.
AI enables marketers to understand consumer behavior better than ever before.
This allows for more targeted ads that resonate with potential customers on a personal level.
AI’s Impact on Sales Forecasting
Moving on, let’s talk sales forecasts – another area where AI shines bright like a diamond.
AI provides insights into future trends based on historical data.
No longer do businesses have to rely solely upon gut feelings or past experiences; instead, they now have accurate predictions at their fingertips. Isn’t that amazing?
Using AI for Enhanced Customer Service
Last but not least, customer service – an aspect no business can afford to overlook.
AI-powered virtual assistants offer real-time assistance 24×7 without human intervention.
Besides reducing operational costs significantly, these virtual assistants also enhance user experience through personalized interactions.
All this may seem overwhelming initially, but trust us, it’s just the tip of the iceberg.
Marketing AI Applications: Brief Overview
To successfully leverage AI in marketing, it is essential to comprehend the various types of applications available. Making an informed decision on which tool best suits your needs requires knowledge of the different types of AI applications available for marketing.
Task Automation vs Machine Learning Apps
The first distinction we need to understand is between task automation apps and machine learning apps. Task automation apps, as their name suggests, are designed to automate repetitive tasks. Sending out mass emails or scheduling social media posts are typical examples where these come into play.
On the other hand, machine learning apps go a step further. They use algorithms that learn from data over time, improving their performance without being explicitly programmed. For instance, they can analyze customer behavior patterns to predict future trends or personalize marketing campaigns.
Standalone vs Integrated Applications
Another way to categorize AI marketing applications is by looking at how they fit within broader platforms – standalone versus integrated. A standalone application operates independently while an integrated one works together with existing systems enhancing overall functionality.
The benefit of using standalone solutions lies in flexibility – they can be used across multiple platforms without any dependencies. However, integrating AI within current systems offers seamless workflow resulting in higher efficiency levels.
Understanding these categories will allow marketers like us not only to choose the right kind of tool but also to plan our approach towards implementing them effectively.
Step-by-Step Integration of Advanced Apps
If you’re looking to scale your marketing efforts, advanced integrated machine-learning applications are the way forward.
The potential for creating high value is immense with these AI-powered tools.
Beginning With Rule-Based Systems
A journey of a thousand miles begins with one step, right?
In our case, that first step involves implementing simple rule-based systems in your marketing strategy.
Rule-based systems, also known as expert systems or production rules systems, use a predefined set of rules to solve problems.
This can be anything from sending automated emails based on customer actions to scheduling social media posts at optimal times.
As they say – “Keep it simple”.
Transitioning From Task Automation To Machine Learning
Once you’ve got the hang of task automation apps and have seen some success there, it’s time to level up.
Machine learning (ML) takes things several notches higher by allowing computers to learn from data without being explicitly programmed.
For instance, to predict future trends or segment customers into distinct groups based on their buying behavior.
The possibilities here are endless but remember Rome wasn’t built in a day. Gradual implementation will allow your team to get comfortable around this technology while minimizing risks associated with abrupt changes.
Overcoming Integration Challenges & Risks
The journey towards integrating sophisticated AI applications in marketing isn’t without its hurdles. Nevertheless, these obstacles can be navigated with the correct attitude and methodology.
Achieving Balancing human-machine workflows
To start off, balancing human and machine tasks is crucial for a seamless workflow.
A blend of both to maximize efficiency.
A well-coordinated effort between humans and machines ensures that each handles what they do best.
Addressing privacy Issues with Advanced AI’s
In addition to managing workflows, addressing privacy issues related to AI usage is paramount.
This presents some practical solutions.
Data anonymization: Ensuring customer data remains anonymous mitigates potential risks significantly.
User Consent: Always seek explicit user consent before collecting or using their personal information. This fosters trust among your customers making them more likely to engage positively with your brand.
This proactive stance not only safeguards against legal complications but also builds credibility which plays an instrumental role in enhancing overall brand reputation.
Remember, it’s all about striking the perfect balance – leveraging cutting-edge technology while maintaining transparency and respect for consumer rights.
Harnessing New Data Sources For Efficient Machine Learning
Machine learning thrives on data.
The more high-quality data that you provide to your models, the better their results will be.
This is where new and diverse data sources come in handy.
Using Internal Transactions For Better Predictions
Your company’s internal transactions are a goldmine of valuable insights.
You might be wondering how?
Data from past purchases can help predict future buying patterns.
Sales trends during specific seasons or events offer insight into when demand may peak next.
Returns and complaints highlight areas for product improvement, potentially reducing churn rates over time.
FAQs about to Ai Marketing
How is AI used for marketing?
AI in marketing enhances customer understanding, optimizes ad placement, improves sales forecasting and provides effective customer service. It also helps automate tasks and integrate applications within a broader platform.
What is the impact of AI on marketing?
AI transforms marketing by providing deep insights into consumer behavior, personalizing content delivery, improving conversion rates and efficiency while reducing costs through automation.
How are marketers using AI today?
Marketers use AI to automate repetitive tasks, predict customer behavior with machine learning models, personalize campaigns based on data analysis and enhance their overall decision-making process.
What are the AI marketing trends in 2023?
The trends include integrating advanced machine-learning apps for high value creation, leveraging new data sources for improved predictions and addressing privacy concerns associated with sophisticated AIs.
Conclusion
AI in marketing is more than just a buzzword; it’s the future.
From digital ad placement to sales forecasting, AI is revolutionizing how we understand and engage with customers.
The power of AI lies not only in task automation but also in machine learning applications that offer unprecedented insights into customer behavior.
Yet, integrating sophisticated AI applications isn’t without its challenges. Balancing human-machine workflows and addressing privacy concerns are key considerations on this journey.
A gradual process can help in the transition from rudimentary rule-based systems to complex integrated applications. And remember – data is king! New sources of data can significantly enhance your machine learning models over time.
If you’re ready to harness the power of AI marketing for your brand, consider partnering with Fifty50 Ai Marketing. Our unique model champions a 50/50 partnership between artificial intelligence and human expertise. It’s about leveraging technology while keeping humans at heart – because we believe that together, they create magic!
Join us, as we navigate through this exciting new era of marketing where machines meet minds!
Dive into the world of crispy, golden goodness as we honor the iconic fast food staple on National French Fry Day. With over 30 pounds of fries consumed per American annually, it’s no surprise that this beloved side dish has its own celebratory day. Let’s explore the history, fun facts, and various ways to enjoy fries on this special occasion.
Why are French Fries Trending!
July 13, 2023, is National French Fry Day and indulge in the delicious taste of fried potatoes.
The Origins of French Fries
The history of French fries can be traced back to Belgium in the 1700s, where locals likely began frying potato slices. The French later popularized deep frying foods, selling them from street carts in the mid-1700s. French fries made their American debut when Thomas Jefferson served “potatoes fried in the French manner” at a White House dinner in 1802. The term “French fries” gained traction after American soldiers who had been stationed in Belgium during WWI brought “pomme frites” back home.
MidJourney Ai Art By: Alexander Rodriguez | Prompt: The French later popularized deep frying foods, selling them from street carts in the mid-1700s. French fries made their American debut when Thomas Jefferson served “potatoes fried in the French manner” at a White House dinner in 1802.
Random French Fry Knowledge
Americans consume over 30 pounds of fries per person each year, making them a popular accompaniment to burgers and sandwiches.
In a recent survey, McDonald’s fries ranked #1, followed by Chick-fil-A and Five Guys.
Regular cut is the preferred style, with ketchup being the top condiment choice.
Belgians consume a staggering 165 pounds of fries per person annually.
McCain Foods produces one-third of the world’s frozen fries.
French Fry Varieties: From Shoestring to Wedges
MidJourney Ai Art By: Alexander Rodriguez | Prompt: Cozy diner, local patrons, spotlight on crispy fries, evoking senses, culinary culture.
Fries come in all shapes and cuts, including:
Shoestring: Thin, crispy sticks
Steak: Thick slices with tender insides
Waffle: Crisscrossed pattern
Crinkle: Rumpled and crunchy
Wedges: Wide chunks
Cooking Methods: French Fry Textures
There are several ways to cook French fries, each giving a unique taste and texture:
Deep-frying: The most traditional method, deep-frying creates a crispy exterior and tender interior. Typically, fries are cooked in vegetable oil or peanut oil at around 350°F (175°C) for 3 to 5 minutes.
Double-frying: This technique involves frying the potatoes twice – once at a lower temperature to cook them through, and again at a higher temperature to achieve a crispy, golden finish.
Oven-baking: A healthier alternative to deep-frying, baking fries in the oven still delivers a satisfying crunch. Coat the potato slices in oil and bake them at 425°F (220°C) for 30 to 40 minutes, flipping halfway through.
Air-frying: Utilizing hot air circulation, air fryers can produce crispy fries with less oil. Cook the fries at 400°F (200°C) for 15 to 20 minutes, shaking the basket occasionally for even cooking.
International French Fry Variations
Fries have been adapted and reinvented in various cultures, resulting in unique and mouthwatering interpretations:
Poutine (Canada): This Quebecois comfort food features fries smothered in cheese curds and topped with rich gravy.
Patatas Bravas (Spain): A popular tapas dish, patatas bravas are fried potatoes served with a spicy tomato sauce and sometimes aioli.
Chips (United Kingdom): Thicker than American-style fries, chips are a staple of British cuisine and often served with fish, sausages, or pies.
Currywurst (Germany): A beloved German street food, currywurst consists of sliced sausages served with fries and curry ketchup.
For those seeking a more nutritious option, consider these healthier alternatives to traditional deep-fried French fries:
Sweet potato fries: Rich in vitamin A and fiber, sweet potatoes offer a sweet, nutritious twist on classic fries.
Zucchini fries: Coated in breadcrumbs and baked, zucchini fries provide a low-carb alternative packed with vitamins and minerals.
Carrot fries: Roasted carrot sticks seasoned with herbs and spices make for a colorful, vitamin-rich substitute.
Baked avocado fries: For a creamy, indulgent treat, avocado slices coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crispy can satisfy your French fry cravings with healthy fats.
With so many ways to prepare and enjoy French fries, you can indulge in a tasty, familiar treat while exploring the vast world of fried potato dishes. So, go ahead and relish your favorite style of French fries as you celebrate National French Fry Day!
Fries & Dip: What’s your dip?
French fries are versatile and pair well with a almost all dipping sauces. Here are some popular choices:
Ketchup: The classic choice, ketchup provides a sweet and tangy complement to the savory taste of fries.
Mayonnaise: Popular in European countries like Belgium and the Netherlands, mayonnaise offers a creamy, rich contrast to crispy fries.
Aioli: A garlicky mayonnaise-based sauce, aioli is a flavorful option that pairs well with fries.
Mustard: For those who enjoy a slightly spicy kick, mustard is a great choice. Dijon mustard, in particular, adds a tangy twist.
Cheese sauce: A warm, gooey cheese sauce can transform your fries into a decadent treat.
Ranch dressing: Creamy and herbaceous, ranch dressing is a popular American dipping choice for fries.
Barbecue sauce: The smoky, sweet, and tangy flavors of barbecue sauce make it a delicious accompaniment to French fries.
Sweet chili sauce: For those who enjoy a sweet and spicy combination, sweet chili sauce adds a flavorful kick to your fries.
Sour cream and onion: A mixture of sour cream, chopped onions, and spices creates a cool, tangy dip that pairs well with hot, crispy fries.
Honey mustard: Combining the sweetness of honey with the sharpness of mustard, honey mustard sauce offers a well-balanced flavor profile.
Feel free to mix and match or try out regional specialties like Belgian “fritessaus” (similar to mayonnaise) or Canadian poutine gravy. The possibilities are endless, so enjoy experimenting with different dipping sauces to find your personal favorites!
National French Fry Day 2023
Fry Deals at Your Favorite Restaurants
In addition to more widely known fast food chains, local eateries are also joining in on the National French Fry Day festivities. Here are some exciting offers from popular restaurants to help you celebrate this delicious day:
McDonald’s
McDonald’s is giving away free fries of any size on July 13th. To claim your one-time, one per person offer, simply register on the McDonald’s app and head to a participating location. Enjoy your crispy, golden fries without spending a dime!
Wendy’s
From July 13th to 16th, Wendy’s is offering free fries or breakfast fries of any size with any in-app purchase. To redeem this one-time offer, register an account on the Wendy’s app or website and apply the offer to your mobile order or scan it in-restaurant at participating locations.
Smashburger
On National French Fry Day, Smashburger is treating customers to free fries with any purchase. Whether you prefer Smashfries, French Fries, or Sweet Potato fries, use the code “FRIES” in-store or online via their website or app to get your free side—the minimum purchase requirement does not apply.
Epic Burger
Visit any of the five Chicago-area Epic Burger locations on July 13th to receive free fries with a minimum $1 purchase for dine-in customers. Celebrate National French Fry Day with a delicious, epic side!
White Castle
White Castle is offering a buy-one-get-one-free deal on small fries with a coupon. This offer is available for participating locations only and cannot be combined with other coupons or discounts. The coupon is not valid for delivery orders and is limited to one per customer, per visit.
Hooters
Hooters is serving up free curly fries, waffle fries, or tater tots with any entrée order on July 13th. This dine-in only offer cannot be combined with other deals, allowing you to indulge in your favorite side with your meal.
The Budlong Hot Chicken
The Nashville-inspired hot chicken restaurant, The Budlong, is also celebrating National French Fry Day. Customers who visit on July 13th can enjoy a free side of fries with any purchase—an offer that’s hard to resist!
Don’t miss out on these National French Fry Day deals and freebies. Head to your favorite participating restaurants on July 13th to satisfy your cravings and celebrate this beloved, tasty holiday!
It’s Fry Day: Indulge Without Guilt
On National French Fry Day, set aside any guilt and savor the crispy, delectable taste of your favorite fries. Whether you’re a fan of shoestring or steak-cut, enjoy this special day dedicated to the beloved fried potato treat.
MidJourney Ai Art by: Alexander Rodriguez | Prompt: French fries are versatile and pair well with a almost all dipping sauces.
Disclaimer: This article is intended for informational purposes only and should not be considered as advice. The information provided is based on the following references and is accurate as of the publication date:
Please note that promotional offers may be subject to change, and availability may vary by location. We recommend confirming the details with your local participating restaurants.
This article was created by Alexander Rodriguez using AI tools such as ChatGPT 4, Claude+, and Midjourney.
Ai Marketing is here. Learn how we’re using it to help small business owners.
Hello! As a marketing leader, I am constantly on the lookout for innovative tools that can help businesses succeed. That’s why I’m excited to share with you our agency’s approach to AI marketing.
After much consideration of the various AI tools currently available, we have adopted a 50-50 approach to AI marketing. While we believe that robots can take over the world, we also recognize the importance of human involvement in marketing. We see AI marketing as similar to Tesla’s autonomous driving technology, where a human driver is still required to provide oversight. At our agency, we want our clients to know the tools we use to build and monetize their brands.
In this article, I am thrilled to explore the evolution of AI in digital marketing, the benefits of using 50Fifty Ai Marketing for businesses, and who can benefit from our brand-new packages.
So, let’s dive in!
What is AI Marketing?
You might be wondering, what exactly is AI marketing? By definition, marketing is the activity or business of promoting and selling products or services, including market research and advertising. AI marketing takes this definition one step further, by leveraging artificial intelligence technologies to optimize the efficiency of how marketing tasks are done.
Put simply, AI marketing allows digital marketers to do their jobs more easily and accurately. By automating certain tasks and processes that humans need to do manually, AI marketing helps teams work faster and provide better results for clients. This allows marketers to focus on tasks that require more human input, like developing creative strategies and customized experiences.
At Marketing for Greatness, we’re a digital marketing agency that specializes in demand generation using SEO and social media. With AI marketing tools, we’re able to expand our offerings and provide even more value to our clients.
Can AI Marketing Work For You?
If you’re considering using AI marketing for your business, it’s important to note that while current AI word processing models like ChatGPT and other AI content generators can generate content, they may not be accurate in terms of optimizing it for search engines. That’s why we continue to use our premium tools for market analysis and keyword research in our SEO tasks.
However, we have incorporated AI tools into other content marketing tasks, such as generating catchy headlines, producing long-form content outlines, and creating short product and service descriptions. Additionally, we have used AI to generate branding guides, social media calendars, social media posts, and even creative assets like logos, business cards, and promo items. Our team has put in hundreds of hours of work to craft AI-generated models, allowing us to offer AI marketing to our clients.
AI marketing can certainly work for your business, especially if you want to have a digital transformation almost overnight. However, there are situations where AI marketing may have limitations, such as when building a trademark or claiming copyrights.
For instance, the US Copyright Office only considers an AI-generated work copyrightable if a human can prove they themselves put a meaningful amount of creative effort into the final content. Digital art, poems, and books generated using tools like DALL-E, Stable Diffusion, Midjourney, ChatGPT, or even the newly released GPT-4 will not be protected by copyright if they were created by humans using only a text description or prompt, according to US Copyright Office Director Shira Perlmutter.
In other words, it’s important to be aware of how your marketing is being generated and how it is being picked up by search engines. AI marketing can be a powerful tool, but it may not be suitable for crafting your next bestseller novel or creating a patented product.
Introducing 50Fifty AI Branding & Website
We’re thrilled to announce the launch of our latest innovation: 50Fifty Ai Branding & Website. We’re using a set of AI tools with our unique library of marketing prompts to streamline the web development process and create stunning websites that deliver results.
Our AI algorithms work to analyze user behavior and optimize the design of both your brand and your website. With 50Fifty Ai Website, you’ll get a uniquely crafted website that not only looks great, but is also user-friendly and intuitive. We know that a website is often the first point of contact between a business and its customers, which is why we believe it’s crucial to have a website that delivers a great user experience.
50Fifty Ai Website also allows for faster development times and lower costs compared to traditional website development methods. This means that you can have a professional website up and running in no time, without breaking the bank.
But don’t worry – our team of web developers and designers are still involved in the process. We believe that human input is still crucial for creating a website that truly reflects your brand and engages with your customers. Our AI tools work alongside our team’s expertise to provide the best of both worlds – efficient, AI-driven development with a human touch. And with our focus on demand generation strategies and SEO, you can be sure that your website is designed with lead generation in mind.
Traditional Branding & Website vs AI
To give you a better idea of how are we using AI marketing, let’s compare a 100% human-based project vs a 50-50 AI Marketing.
We offer custom demand generation campaigns that are tailored to each client’s unique needs. Under our traditional model, the process of building a website looks like this:
Our brand strategist creates a visibility strategy
Our SEO specialists conduct keyword research
A content marketing plan is created and discussed with the client
SEO experts create “wireframes” or outlines for the content writers
Content writers produce the content
The project is sent to web developers, who take care of the visual elements of the website, such as the layout and design, and build the site using coding languages like HTML, CSS, and JavaScript
The final product is reviewed by our team and the client, and necessary changes are made before launching the site
We then perform a quality control revision, get approval from the client, and launch the site
Once the site is launched, SEO specialists configure it for technical and on-page SEO
Duration: 3-4 months
Team size: 6
Under our AI model, the process is more streamlined and efficient:
Our AI strategist builds a chat persona for the brand
Our brand strategist creates a visibility strategy
Our SEO specialists conduct keyword research
The chat persona is used to generate a holistic content marketing plan, which includes everything the brand needs
AI content writers produce the content and our writers review it
Once the content is approved by the client, the project is ready for the AI website
AI web developers take care of the visual elements of the website, such as the layout and design, and build the site using coding languages like HTML, CSS, and JavaScript
The final product is reviewed by our team and the client, and necessary changes are made before launching the site
We then perform a quality control revision, get approval from the client, and launch the site
Once the site is launched, SEO specialists configure it for technical and on-page SEO.
Duration: 1-2 months
Team size: 2-3
Our AI tools can assist with tasks like generating outlines and producing content, allowing our team to focus on the more creative aspects of website building, such as design and strategy. This approach not only saves time and resources but also delivers results that are just as effective as our traditional model.
With 50Fifty AI Branding & Website, we’ve taken our commitment to providing customized solutions to the next level. Our AI algorithms analyze user behavior and optimize website design to create a unique and user-friendly website that delivers results. And our team of web developers and designers work alongside our AI tools to provide the best of both worlds – efficient, AI-driven development with a human touch for SEO and Lead Generation Strategies.
AI Marketing Allows Us To Do More Events In Our Community
As the founder of Marketing for Greatness, I’ve been hosting business networking events in Austin for the past six years, and they’ve all been sold out! With our AI marketing services, our agency can be more efficient, and I get to work on my passion: connecting people!
Event marketing is a great fit for clients who want to see how customers interact with their products or services. Whether you’re a restaurant, or medical office, or you provide beauty services, home improvement services, or anything in between, we can create a tailored experience that engages with your target audience.
So if you’re looking to create a buzz around your brand and drive engagement with your target audience, let’s have a conversation. Let us help you take your marketing efforts to the next level and create a truly unique experience for your customers.
In this article, we’re talking about one of the biggest challenges in marketing: separating prospects from suspects.
Hey there! Jessica here from Marketing for Greatness, and today we’re talking about one of the biggest challenges in marketing: separating prospects from suspects. As a business owner or marketer, it’s essential to make sure that you’re targeting the right people with your marketing efforts. In this article, we’re going to give you six effective ways to separate prospects from suspects.
But First Things First: What is a Prospect vs a Lead?
Before we dive into the strategies to turn your suspects into prospects, we need to define some fundamental terms, starting with a lead.
What is a lead?
Simply put, a lead is a potential customer who has expressed interest in your product or service. However, not all leads are created equal. Some are more valuable than others, and it’s important to understand the different types of leads so you can target them effectively.
There are several different types of leads, including:
Marketing leads: These are leads that have shown interest in your brand or products through various marketing channels, such as social media, email, or online ads. They are usually at the top of the sales funnel and are not yet ready to make a purchase.
Sales leads: These are leads that have been qualified as potential customers and are actively considering making a purchase. They are closer to the bottom of the sales funnel and require more targeted messaging and sales tactics to convert them into customers.
Qualified leads: These are leads that have been evaluated and deemed as potential customers based on specific criteria, such as their demographics, behavior, or level of interest. They are more likely to convert into paying customers and are valuable assets to any business. Qualified leads are also known by prospects.
Now that we’ve defined what a lead is, let’s dive into the differences between marketing leads and sales leads.
What is a marketing lead?
Marketing leads are potential customers who have shown interest in your brand or products through various marketing channels. They may have engaged with your social media posts, subscribed to your email list, or clicked on an online ad. They are usually at the top of the sales funnel and are not yet ready to make a purchase. Marketing leads are important because they provide potential customers that can be nurtured and converted into sales leads.
Examples of marketing leads include:
Social media followers who engage with your content
Email subscribers who have opened or clicked on your emails
Website visitors who have downloaded a free resource or signed up for a newsletter
What is the difference between marketing leads and sales leads?
The main difference about marketing and sales leads has to do with where their mind is at. Sales leads are actively considering making a purchase. They are closer to the bottom of the sales funnel and require more targeted messaging and sales tactics to convert them into customers.
Examples of sales leads include:
Prospective customers who have requested a demo or a consultation
Website visitors who have added items to their cart or expressed interest in pricing
Leads who have attended a sales webinar or event
Marketing Leads vs Sales Leads: Who Handles What?
When it comes to handling marketing and sales leads, it’s important to have a clear understanding of which teams are responsible for each type of lead.
Marketing teams are typically responsible for generating marketing leads, which are the initial contacts made through marketing efforts. This includes lead capture forms on websites, social media engagement, and email marketing campaigns. The goal of marketing leads is to generate interest and create a pipeline of potential customers.
On the other hand, sales teams are responsible for handling sales leads, which are qualified leads that have shown a higher level of interest and are more likely to convert into paying customers. This includes leads that have expressed a direct interest in your product or service, engaged with your sales team, or have requested more information about your business.
In some cases, there may be overlap between the responsibilities of marketing and sales teams. For example, marketing teams may be responsible for lead nurturing campaigns that help move marketing leads down the sales funnel and qualify them as sales leads. Sales teams may also provide feedback to the marketing team about the quality of leads generated by marketing efforts.
Ultimately, the key is to have clear communication and collaboration between marketing and sales teams to ensure a seamless transition from marketing leads to sales leads. By working together, these teams can help increase lead conversion rates and drive revenue growth for the business.
It’s important to note that while your marketing team can be great at generating suspects and marketing leads, if the business doesn’t have a strategic sales process in place, sales won’t happen. It’s essential to have a clear understanding of the sales funnel and how leads move through it. This includes having a system for qualifying leads, nurturing relationships, and closing deals. Without a strategic sales process, even the most qualified leads may fall through the cracks, resulting in lost revenue for the business. By having a well-defined sales process in place, businesses can ensure that marketing leads are effectively converted into sales leads, ultimately leading to increased revenue and business growth.
We’ve covered everything about leads. Now let’s dive into prospects.
Lead vs Prospect: What’s the Difference?
A lead is a potential customer who has expressed interest in your product or service, whereas a prospect is a potential customer who has shown a higher level of interest and is more likely to become a paying customer. In other words, a prospect is a qualified lead that has been evaluated and deemed as having a higher potential to convert into a sale.
Let’s say you run an online clothing store. A lead may be someone who has subscribed to your email list in order to receive updates and promotions from your store. This person has expressed some level of interest in your products, but may not be actively considering a purchase at the moment.
In contrast, a prospect may be someone who has added items to their cart or clicked on a specific product page multiple times. This person has shown a higher level of interest in your products and may be closer to making a purchase.
By distinguishing between leads and prospects, you can more effectively target your marketing efforts and focus on those who are most likely to convert into paying customers. In this case, you may want to prioritize marketing efforts towards prospects by retargeting them with ads or offering them a discount to incentivize them to complete their purchase.
To recap: leads are typically at the top of the sales funnel, whereas prospects are further along in the sales funnel and may have engaged with your brand in a more meaningful way.
Prospect vs Suspect: What’s the Difference?
It’s important to note that depending on your sales system, you might use different terms to filter your suspects. But generally speaking, a sales funnel looks like this:
As mentioned previously, prospects are further down the sales funnel and have shown a higher level of interest in your product or service. On the other hand, suspects are potential customers who have not yet expressed a direct interest in your business. These individuals may have interacted with your business in some way, such as visiting your website, following you on social media, or subscribing to your email list, but have not yet taken a clear step towards becoming a paying customer.
Marketing teams typically focus on generating suspects through various marketing channels, such as email marketing, social media advertising, and content marketing. Once these suspects show a higher level of interest, they can be further qualified as sales leads and passed on to the sales team for further follow-up.
By generating suspects through marketing efforts, businesses can create a pipeline of potential customers and increase their chances of converting them into paying customers. However, it’s important to note that not all suspects will ultimately become sales leads, which is why it’s important to have a clear process for qualifying leads and moving them down the sales funnel.
Some characteristics of a prospect include:
They have a specific problem or need that your product or service can solve.
They have engaged with your brand through various marketing channels, such as social media, email, or online ads.
They have shown interest in your product or service by adding items to their cart, filling out a form, or requesting a consultation.
They fit the profile of your target audience, based on their demographics, behavior, or interests.
In contrast, some characteristics of a suspect include:
They may have stumbled across your brand but may not necessarily have a specific need for your product or service.
They have not engaged with your brand in a meaningful way or have shown a limited level of interest.
They may not fit the profile of your target audience, based on their demographics, behavior, or interests.
A Great Digital Marketing Strategy Should Focus on Increasing Your Suspects, Leads, and Prospects
A great digital marketing strategy should focus on bringing in and nurturing suspects, leads, and prospects in order to increase your chances of converting them into paying customers.
Where to start your lead generation strategy?
Start with your content.
1- Content Marketing SEO
Content Marketing SEO is a marketing strategy that combines the principles of content marketing and search engine optimization (SEO) to improve online visibility, generate traffic, and increase conversions.
At its core, Content Marketing SEO involves creating and sharing valuable and informative content that is optimized for search engines. By targeting specific keywords and search phrases that are relevant to your target audience, businesses can increase their visibility and attract more traffic to their website.
In addition to creating optimized content, Content Marketing SEO also involves building backlinks, improving website structure and technical optimization, and leveraging social media and other channels to promote content and increase engagement.
Ultimately, the goal of content marketing SEO is to improve online visibility, generate high-quality traffic, and increase conversions by providing valuable content that aligns with the needs and preferences of your target audience. This can help you build a larger pool of potential customers to work with and increase the overall success of your digital marketing efforts.
For example, let’s say you run a skincare brand. You may create a blog post that addresses common skincare concerns and offers helpful tips for solving them. By creating content that speaks to your audience’s needs, you can attract new potential customers who are searching for information about skincare and may not have heard of your brand before. Once you’ve attracted these potential customers, you can move them further down your sales funnel by capturing their email and turning them into marketing leads. One effective way to capture their email is by offering a free resource, such as an ebook or a webinar, to incentivize them to take the next step in the sales funnel.
It’s important to note that even if a lead has expressed interest in your brand and provided their email, there is still a chance that your emails may end up in their spam folder, which can lower the chances of conversion. One way to prevent this from happening is to include a confirmation email after a lead has provided their contact information. This email should confirm the subscription and encourage the lead to add your email address to their contact list to avoid future emails going to spam. By taking these steps, you can help ensure that your marketing efforts are more effective and that you are reaching your leads’ inbox.
You might be thinking “suspects are awesome, but they won’t pay my bills!”. And you are right. A great marketing strategy should bring you, not only suspects but also prospects and paying customers. Here’s how.
2- Personalized Emails: Providing Value and Building Relationships
Sending personalized emails to your suspects can be an effective way to build a relationship and demonstrate the value of your product or service. By providing helpful information and addressing their specific needs, you can build trust and encourage them to engage with your brand. This can help move them down the sales funnel and increase the likelihood of conversion.
For example, if you run a fitness coaching business, you may send personalized emails to your suspects that offer workout tips and nutritional advice based on their specific fitness goals. By addressing their needs in a personalized way, you can build trust and demonstrate the value of your coaching services.
3- Social Media: Engaging Your Audience and Encouraging Interaction
Social media can be a powerful tool for engaging your audience and encouraging interaction with your brand. By posting engaging content and responding to comments and messages, you can build a relationship with your suspects and demonstrate your expertise in your field. Then, from your DM’s, engage in private conversations where you can have the chance to get their contact information and get them into a nurturing campaign.
4- Webinars: Providing Value and Demonstrating Expertise
One of the most effective ways to build trust with your audience is to demonstrate your expertise in your field. By providing valuable content that addresses your audience’s needs and establishes your authority, you can position yourself as a leader in your industry and build brand credibility.
Here are some examples of how you can demonstrate expertise:
Thought Leadership Content: Providing Valuable Insights and Expertise
Thought leadership content can be an effective way to demonstrate your expertise and provide valuable insights to your audience. This can include blog posts, articles, white papers, and other types of content that offer valuable insights and expertise in your field. By providing content that addresses your audience’s needs and establishes your authority, you can build trust and encourage them to engage with your brand.
Case Studies: Demonstrating Your Successes and Achievements
Case studies can be an effective way to demonstrate your expertise and highlight your successes and achievements. By providing detailed case studies that showcase how your product or service has helped previous clients, you can demonstrate the value of your business and encourage potential customers to engage with your brand.
Industry Events: Speaking Engagements and Workshops
Participating in industry events such as speaking engagements and workshops can be a powerful way to demonstrate your expertise and build credibility in your field. By offering insights and expertise on relevant topics, you can establish yourself as a thought leader and build brand credibility. This can help attract new potential customers and encourage them to engage with your brand.
Live Webinars
Webinars can be a powerful way to provide value and demonstrate your expertise in your field. But they need to be done right. According to a report by GoToWebinar, webinars are one of the most effective marketing tactics for generating high-quality leads. The report found that 73% of B2B marketers and sales leaders believe that webinars are the best way to generate high-quality leads. Webinars also offer high engagement rates, with an average attendance rate of 40-50% and an average viewing time of 61 minutes per webinar.
By implementing some of the strategies we’ve discussed, you can generate a substantial number of marketing leads. However, it can be challenging to identify and filter out the true sales leads that are most likely to convert.
So let’s take care of this issue.
6 Ways to Separate Prospects from Suspects
Identifying the most qualified leads is critical to a successful sales and marketing strategy, as it allows businesses to focus their resources and efforts on those leads that are most likely to convert into paying customers. However, depending on the volume of leads and the complexity of the sales process, this can be a daunting task, especially if your business relies on manual lead qualification.
Fortunately, there are many customer relationship management (CRM) software options available that can help streamline the lead qualification process. These tools can automate lead scoring, behavior tracking, and other data analysis tasks, allowing sales and marketing teams to more effectively identify and prioritize leads for follow-up.
If you’re in search of a comprehensive CRM system, we highly recommend Kartra.
Kartra is an all-in-one marketing platform that offers a range of tools and features designed to streamline and optimize your marketing and sales efforts. With Kartra, you can easily create and launch marketing campaigns, manage your leads and customers, and track your sales and revenue performance.
As certified Kartra partners, we offer full integration services that enable you to focus on running your business while we take care of turning your lead generation engine ON! To get started with a free trial, click here.
Your CRM software can also help businesses gain insights into the behaviors and preferences of their leads, providing valuable data to inform their sales and marketing strategies. By using these insights to tailor their outreach efforts, businesses can build stronger relationships with their leads, increase engagement, and ultimately improve their chances of conversion.
Of course, the effectiveness of CRM software depends on the quality and accuracy of the data being input. It’s essential for businesses to ensure that their data is clean, up-to-date, and accurate, to ensure the most effective use of their CRM software. Additionally, it’s important to regularly review and update lead qualification criteria to ensure that they align with current business objectives and customer preferences.
Here are six effective ways to separate prospects from suspects:
Attribution. Attribution is a data analysis technique that can be used to track and measure the effectiveness of different marketing channels and touchpoints in the customer journey. By assigning credit to each touchpoint in the sales and marketing process, attribution can help businesses identify the most effective channels for generating and nurturing leads, as well as the touchpoints that are most likely to lead to conversions.
Behavior Tracking: Track the behavior of your leads, such as website visits, email opens, and social media engagement, to identify those who have shown a higher level of interest and engagement.
Lead Scoring: Use a lead scoring system to evaluate the level of interest and engagement of each lead. This can help identify the most qualified leads and prioritize follow-up efforts.
Irresistible Offers: To generate sales calls and increase conversions, businesses can offer an irresistible offer to incentivize leads to take action. An irresistible offer is a compelling offer that provides significant value to the lead and motivates them to take the next step in the sales process. Examples of irresistible offers might include a free consultation, a free trial or demo, a limited-time discount or special offer, or access to exclusive content or resources. The key to creating an irresistible offer is to provide a significant value that aligns with the needs and preferences of the lead, while also creating a sense of urgency or exclusivity that motivates them to take action.
Heat Mapping: Heat mapping tools can help businesses identify which areas of a website receive the most clicks, scrolls, and engagement, allowing them to optimize these areas for maximum effectiveness. By using this data to tailor website content, design, and user experience to the preferences and behaviors of their leads, businesses can increase engagement and ultimately improve their chances of conversion. Heat mapping can also be used to identify areas of a website that are not performing as well, allowing businesses to make improvements and optimizations to improve engagement and conversion rates. For example, if a heat map shows that a certain form field is consistently being skipped over, businesses can adjust the form to make it more user-friendly and increase completion rates.
Sales Team Feedback: Solicit feedback from your sales team to identify leads that have shown a higher level of interest and engagement. This can help identify the most qualified leads and prioritize follow-up efforts.
By using these strategies to separate prospects from suspects, you can focus your sales and marketing efforts on the most qualified leads and increase your chances of conversion. This can help improve your lead generation efforts and ultimately lead to increased revenue for your business.
In Closing
Separating prospects from suspects is a crucial aspect of a successful sales and marketing strategy. By identifying and engaging the most qualified leads, businesses can increase their chances of conversion and ultimately drive revenue growth.
To improve your lead generation and sales conversion efforts, it’s important to be strategic and intentional in your approach. This includes focusing on the most qualified leads, leveraging advanced tools and technologies, and building trust and loyalty with potential customers.
Shall we talk about your leads?
Wanna chat about your marketing and sales leads? We can provide valuable insights and recommendations to help you optimize your strategy and achieve your sales and marketing goals. Contact us today to learn more and take the first step toward growing your business.
Reasons Why You Should Be Using Storytelling To Sell More on Social Media
In this article, we’ll learn how incorporating storytelling into your social media strategy can help you build deeper connections with your audience and increase sales!
If you’re tired of putting a lot of effort to post on social media, but you’re not getting engagement, chances are, you’re considering giving up. So, before you quit social media marketing, we encourage you implement a storytelling strategy. This might be what you’ve been missing!
What is storytelling marketing?
Storytelling marketing is a way for your brand to create content that incorporates a narrative. Stories are the way we perceive and remember our lives. Storytelling gives your brand character, appeal and relatability that facts and stats simply can’t.
Storytelling has long been a staple of marketing and advertising, but in the age of social media, it has taken on a whole new level of importance.
Storytelling marketing can be your next best strategy. Here’s why
In a nutshell, instead of broadcasting messages, your social channels will have a well-oiled set of stories that will take your users into a journey.
Storytelling marketing isn’t a new concept. In fact, it’s been used by powerful brands like Disney, to build a deeper connection with their audience.
Let’s check out some of the benefits of storytelling marketing:
It helps you connect with your audience
One of the biggest advantages of social media is that it allows you to connect with your audience in a much more personal and intimate way. And what better way to do that than through storytelling? By sharing stories about your brand, your products, and your customers, you can create a sense of connection and emotional resonance with your audience that will make them more likely to engage with your content and ultimately make a purchase.
It adds depth and meaning to your marketing message
In today’s fast-paced and attention-deficit world, it’s all too easy for marketing messages to get lost in the noise. But with storytelling, you can add depth and meaning to your message that will help it stand out and stay in the minds of your audience. By sharing real-life stories that illustrate the benefits of your product or service, you can create a deeper connection with your audience and help them understand why your brand matters.
It makes your content more shareable
Social media is all about sharing, and if you can create content that is both interesting and emotionally resonant, it is much more likely to be shared by your audience. And when your content gets shared, it has the potential to reach a much wider audience, which can help you grow your brand and increase sales.
It helps you build a strong brand identity
Storytelling is a powerful way to build a strong brand identity and differentiate yourself from your competitors. By sharing stories about your brand’s history, values, and mission, you can create a distinct and memorable brand image that will help you stand out in a crowded marketplace.
It’s easy and cost-effective
Unlike traditional marketing methods, using storytelling on social media is easy and cost-effective. With a few clicks, you can create and share stories that will engage and inspire your audience, all without breaking the bank.
I Gained 20,000 TikTok Followers Quickly Using Storytelling
As a marketer, I always try to stay on top of the latest social media trends and techniques. But despite my best efforts, I felt like my account had reached a plateau. My Instagram followers weren’t growing, and my engagement was stagnant. I knew I needed to try something new to break through the noise.
That’s when I decided to give TikTok a try. I had heard a lot of buzz about the platform and how it was a great place for businesses to connect with their audience through storytelling. So, I decided to give it a shot.
I started by creating short, engaging videos that told a story about my brand. I focused on showcasing the personality behind my business and the unique challenges I had to overcome, as a mom of 4 and a businesswoman. I didn’t follow dancing trends or even trending sounds. I did “story time” videos.
To my surprise, my TikTok account started to take off. Within a month, I had gained over 10,000 followers, and my engagement was through the roof. People were commenting, sharing, and even reaching out to me to learn more about my brand.
Now, just a few months later, my TikTok account has over 20,000 followers, and it’s still growing. I can’t believe the impact that storytelling has had on my social media presence. It’s a powerful tool that has helped me connect with my audience in a whole new way and drive real results for my business. If you’re feeling stuck on social media, I highly recommend giving storytelling a try. It just might be the boost your brand needs to reach new heights.
Storytelling vs Educational Content
As a social media manager, I love doing audits for my clients. It’s a great way to get a fresh perspective on their accounts and identify areas for improvement. So when I was asked to do an audit for a coach, I was excited to dive in and see what I could find.
Upon first glance, the coach’s account seemed to be doing well. She had a good number of followers and a decent level of engagement. But as I dug deeper, I noticed that her account wasn’t reaching any new people. And when I analyzed her content, I saw that it was mostly educational in nature. While education is important, I knew that it wasn’t the only type of content that would resonate with her audience.
That’s when I suggested incorporating storytelling into her content strategy. I knew that stories had the power to connect with people on an emotional level and really drive home a message. So we started experimenting with different types of storytelling, from personal anecdotes to case studies.
The results were amazing. Within just a few weeks, we saw a significant increase in engagement and a return of lost followers. People were responding to the stories we were sharing and connecting with the coach on a deeper level. And as a result, her account began to reach new people again.
It was a great reminder of the power of storytelling in social media.
How To Find Storytelling Content Ideas?
Finding storytelling content ideas can seem intimidating, but it doesn’t have to be. Here are a few tips to help you get started:
Look to your customers for inspiration: Your customers are a goldmine of storytelling content ideas. Consider sharing stories about how your products or services have made a difference in their lives. This can be especially powerful if you can find a way to showcase the emotions behind the story.
Share behind-the-scenes stories: People love getting a glimpse into the inner workings of a business. Consider sharing stories about your team, your processes, or even your struggles and successes. This type of content can help humanize your brand and make it more relatable to your audience.
Share personal stories: If you’re comfortable doing so, sharing personal stories can be a great way to connect with your audience. Consider sharing stories about your own experiences or challenges that relate to your business or brand. This can help people see you as a real person and build a stronger connection with your brand.
Use customer reviews or testimonials: Customer reviews and testimonials can be a great source of storytelling content ideas. Consider sharing stories from customers that highlight the benefits of your products or services in a compelling way.
Look to your brand’s history: If your brand has a long history, consider sharing stories about its evolution or key milestones. This can help people understand the values and mission behind your brand and make it more memorable.
There’s a good chance that you’ve been looking for trends as ways to generate your content. I say, ditch that! You want to take a deeper look at your brand, and your message, and explore where is the gap in the market.
Don’t be a trend follower. Be a trendsetter.
How to create relatable storytelling content?
Creating relatable storytelling content is important for a number of reasons. Firstly, it helps you connect with your audience on a deeper level. By sharing stories that are relevant and relatable to your audience, you can create a sense of connection and emotional resonance that will make them more likely to engage with your content and ultimately make a purchase.
Secondly, it helps you stand out in a crowded marketplace. With so much content being shared on social media, it can be difficult to get noticed. But by creating relatable storytelling content, you can differentiate yourself from your competitors and create a distinct and memorable brand image.
Finally, it helps you build trust and credibility with your audience. By sharing real-life stories and experiences, you can help people see you as a real person and build a stronger connection with your brand. This can help you earn the trust and credibility you need to drive sales and grow your business.
Tips to create relatable storytelling content
Creating relatable storytelling content is all about finding ways to connect with your audience on a personal level. Here are a few tips to help you create content that resonates:
Use real-life examples: Rather than just talking about your products or services in abstract terms, use real-life examples to illustrate their benefits. This can help people see how your products or services can fit into their lives and make them feel more relatable.
Share personal stories: Sharing personal stories can be a great way to connect with your audience. Consider sharing stories about your own experiences or challenges that relate to your business or brand. This can help people see you as a real person and build a stronger connection with your brand.
Show vulnerability: Nobody’s perfect, and people appreciate honesty and authenticity. Consider sharing stories about your mistakes or challenges and how you overcame them. This can help people feel like they can relate to you and your brand.
Use relatable language: Use language that is relatable and easy to understand. Avoid using jargon or technical terms that people may not be familiar with.
Share stories from your customers: Customer stories can be a powerful way to connect with your audience. Consider sharing stories from customers that highlight the benefits of your products or services in a compelling way.
Mistakes To Avoid While Creating Storytelling Content
Creating relatable storytelling content is all about finding ways to connect with your audience on a personal level. But there are a few mistakes you’ll want to avoid if you want to create content that truly resonates:
Focusing too much on the product or service: While it’s important to highlight the benefits of your products or services, you don’t want to make that the sole focus of your storytelling content. Instead, focus on the emotions and experiences that your products or services create.
Being too salesy: While you want your storytelling content to drive sales, you don’t want to come across as too pushy or salesy. Focus on creating content that is helpful, informative, and engaging, rather than just trying to sell, sell, sell.
Being too preachy: Being too preachy on social media is a big mistake because it can turn people off and damage your brand reputation. Nobody likes being lectured, and if you come across as preachy or judgmental, it can be a turn-off for your audience. They may see you as being arrogant or out of touch and be less likely to engage with your content or make a purchase.
Not showing vulnerability: As mentioned above, people appreciate honesty and authenticity. Consider sharing stories about your mistakes or challenges and how you overcame them. This can help people feel like they can relate to you and your brand.
Being too self-centered: Your storytelling content should be about your audience, not just about you. Focus on creating content that resonates with your audience and addresses their needs and interests.
How to track results from social media?
Tracking your content on social media is crucial for understanding how much revenue it is driving for your business. Here are a few tips to help you track your content and see how it’s performing:
Use social media analytics: Most social media platforms offer built-in analytics tools that allow you to see how your content is performing. These tools can help you understand things like how many people are seeing your content, how many are engaging with it, and where your traffic is coming from.
Use Google Analytics: If you have a website or blog, Google Analytics is a powerful tool for tracking your content’s performance. It allows you to see things like how much traffic your content is driving to your site and where that traffic is coming from.
Use tracking links: If you want to get more granular data on how your content is performing, consider using tracking links. These are special links that allow you to see how many people are clicking on them and where they are coming from.
Use conversion tracking: If you have an e-commerce store or are selling products or services online, consider using conversion tracking to see how your content is driving sales. This will allow you to see how many people are making purchases after interacting with your content.
By using these tools and techniques, you’ll be able to track your content’s performance and get a better understanding of how it’s driving revenue for your business.
In Conclusion
Using storytelling on social media is a powerful and effective way to connect with your audience, drive engagement, and ultimately increase revenue for your business. But it’s important to do it right. By avoiding common mistakes and using the right tools and techniques, you can create relatable and engaging storytelling content that resonates with your audience and drives real results for your business.
If you’re struggling to create compelling storytelling content or want to boost your social media presence, we can help. As experienced social media experts, we have the skills and expertise to help you craft powerful stories that connect with your audience and drive real results for your business. Contact us today to learn more and see how we can help you take your social media presence to the next level.
5 Proven Ways to Boost Your Word-of-Mouth Marketing in 2023
In this article, we’ll recommend our top 5 easy yet effective techniques for creating an impressive oral advertisement strategy and taking your organization to new heights by 2023!
With digital content saturating the market, getting visibility in business is a huge challenge. While traditional marketing strategies are losing traction as consumers become more and more suspicious, one method that never fails to work is word-of-mouth marketing.
In this article, we’ll recommend our top 5 easy yet effective techniques for creating an impressive Word of Mouth Marketing Strategy and taking your brand to new heights by 2023!
What is W.O.M.M. and why is so effective
Before delving further into it, let’s get to the basics of word-of-mouth marketing. Essentially, it is when customers spread information about a business or product among their peers – be it through verbal conversations, social media posts or other means. Unlike traditional advertising which requires investment from companies themselves; this form of promotion comes free and has much higher reliability as its source of origin is often perceived as being trustworthy.
As the digital age continues to evolve, so does consumer skepticism of traditional advertising. With a plethora of marketing messages coming from every direction, consumers have learned how to distinguish what feels like “marketing.” Therefore, businesses should prioritize word-of-mouth marketing in 2023. This type of communication carries more weight as people are likely to believe and act on their friends’ or family members’ recommendations due its reliability and trustworthiness.
Word-of-mouth marketing is invaluable in forming an active community around a business. When customers feel involved and welcomed, they are more likely to stay loyal to the company and advocate for it among their peers. This snowball effect leads to further success as each new customer increases the amount of word-of-mouth referrals exponentially!
Types of Word of Mouth Marketing Strategies
Business owners can create a strong word-of-mouth marketing approach by taking advantage of these five straightforward techniques. Word of mouth promotion is an effective way to advertise products or services and to cultivate a devoted following for your brand. Here are the top five methods that successful business operators use:
1- Use Instagram stories to show your audience that you are human:
People bond with other people, not merely companies. If you share your business’s tales and experiences or even a bit of yourself, it can help form an honest and more understandable rapport with your customers. This strengthens the trust they have in your brand while also prompting them to spread positive words about your company to their social circle; ultimately helping increase sales!
2- Build a non-business related channel to expand your social
circle:
If you want to widen your online reach and create a strong connection with an even larger audience, it’s essential that you promote content on social media platforms that are not exclusively related to your business. Building a personal blog, creating an account for something outside of work or hosting podcasts is the perfect way to do this. Not only will this help grow your presence among potential customers but also expand your digital circle!
3- Sponsor local events:
Showing your support for the local community by sponsoring events such as charity runs, sporting tournaments, or cultural activities is an effective way to create brand recognition. Not only will it provide you with a chance to meet your prospective customers face-to-face and get their valuable input and feedback, but also give you leverage in building a positive reputation within the region!
4- Showcase your brand as an active member in your community:
Participating in local events, giving back to the community and supporting causes will not only demonstrate that your business is socially responsible, but it can also help build trust with customers. As a result of this loyalty they are likely to share information about your company with their family and friends – driving even more footfall through word-of-mouth.
5- Leverage short videos on Youtube:
Have you ever thought of leveraging YouTube to effectively promote your business and strengthen its online presence? Producing short, captivating videos can certainly do the trick! From showcasing products or services to sharing stories of how your company makes a difference in people’s lives, there are countless opportunities for you. You could also provide helpful advice and tips about using your offerings that would further build strong customer relationships with those who follow you.
In summary, building a strong community and focusing on word-of-mouth marketing can be a key driver of business growth in 2023. By leveraging these simple tactics, business owners can increase trust, attract new customers, and encourage loyalty.
Don’t take my word for granted, just watch this episode on Shark Tank!
In Season 14, Episode 10, you’ll observe the far-reaching effects of social media on your business success.
Despite having a great product or service, if you don’t have an online presence and a strong social media platform to showcase it on, then chances are that potential customers won’t be aware of it – leaving your business out in the cold!
Is your business in need of a marketing boost?
Let’s chat and explore how I can help you succeed! Reach out to me at mfgseo.co, and let’s get the ball rolling. I’m excited to discuss this opportunity with you soon!
From creating a personal brand to networking and gaining exposure, these are the top personal branding strategies you can start using today.
The Harsh Reality: If You Do Not Become A BRAND Then You Become A Commodity!
Personal branding entails creating a name and reputation for yourself in both the personal and professional spheres. This involves your goals, accomplishments, career growth, current projects, success stories–anything that would contribute to future objectives.
People naturally create a personal brand for themselves, but what separates those who are successful is the dedication they put into controlling their narrative. Oprah Winfrey is one prime example of how consistency and hard work can build an incredible personal brand that spans the globe.
20 Personal Branding Strategies for 2023
If you do not want your online brand to take on a life of its own and control the narrative, here are my top 20 brand-expert-approved strategies you should be implementing today.
Personal Branding Strategy #1: You Need A Website
If you want to be known, having a website is key. Whether it’s acting as your portfolio to showcase your talents, or simply outlining what you do and where people can find more information about you and your services, having an online home-base is essential and any brand consultant will tell you that.
If you’re considering building a website, start with the basics: make sure it has information about who you are and what you do, portfolio pieces that feature the projects that you’ve worked on, and contact information so contacts can reach out to have a conversation. Starting simple will help build a great foundation for later expanding by creating content that elevates your authority.
Personal Branding Strategy #2: You Need A Brand Voice
A strong personal branding strategy needs to include an established, consistent brand voice. Your audience will look for that when they engage with you so make sure it’s recognizable! Knowing and owning your unique tone helps you stand out in the crowd and sound like the real you.
Keyword here: the real you!
Personal Branding Strategy #3: Embrace Vulnerability With A Balance
Every social platform allows us to share a piece of ourselves with the world, but too much can come off as unprofessional and overly personal.
When crafting your personal brand, aim to be genuine and transparent, while still maintaining boundaries that are respectful to yourself and others.
Showing a vulnerable side allows you to connect more deeply with viewers, because they can feel seen and understood through your stories. To build rapport with your audience, open up about certain aspects of life, but make sure you don’t give away too much. You want to be personal, but not private.
Personal Branding Strategy #4: Develop Relationships
One of the best ways to establish yourself as a thought leader in your industry is to cultivate meaningful relationships. Make an effort to meet new people, engage with influencers and build strong networks.
Personal Branding Strategy #5: Leverage Email Marketing
Email marketing is an essential part of forming and maintaining your personal brand. Consistency is key to a successful personal branding strategy!
When done right, email marketing can help you build a strong base of loyal customers and followers who will recognize you as an expert in your field.
– I’d have a first conversation with someone. Most people do that.
– I took copious notes in our CRM. Some people do that.
– I loaded the person’s contact info into Salesloft with a sequence I’d built.
– The first step of that sequence was an email I sent the following day, which we personalized. It included the types of deals we wanted to see.
– A second step involved sending a mutually beneficial introduction to someone within the next 2 weeks.
– The third step was following up on that introduction within 3 weeks after.
– The fourth step was a handwritten note (time consuming, yes, but there are services that can help) that included the type of deal we wanted to see. This was usually 2-3 months after the first call.
– The fifth step was asking for another call to see how things are going.
Not rocket science. Just a little work all the time.
Personal Branding Strategy #6: Showcase Your Expertise
A great place to start is by writing long-form articles. Putting your knowledge and expertise down on paper (or digital) provides an effective way for your personal brand to break through the noise in any market. Long-form content offers substance, credibility, and personal insights that cannot always fit into simple posts or tweets. Allowing yourself to be vulnerable and open about sharing your true wisdom can really help you stand out from the crowd and enhance your reputation as an expert.
Personal Branding Strategy #7: Get Creative
Try out different platforms, test out different content types (e.g., podcasts, videos, images) and experiment with different formats, including edu-tainment (mix education and entertainment).
Personal Branding Strategy #8: Use Social Proof
Leverage the power of user-generated content to show others how passionate people are about your work. Get customer testimonials, reviews, and case studies in order to build trust and credibility.
Personal Branding Strategy #9: Build A Community
Encourage engagement and foster relationships within your network by creating an online community to engage with like-minded individuals. It can be a Facebook Group or a Telegram group.
Personal Branding Strategy #10: Give Back
Find ways to give back to your industry or local community through volunteering, mentoring, or donating. This will create goodwill and demonstrate your commitment to making a positive difference in the world.
Personal Branding Strategy #11: Know Your Audience
It’s important to know who your target audience is so that you can tailor your content and message accordingly. Find out what they care about, their pain points, and what type of content resonates with them. Especially their pain points. You want to create content that adds value so they come for more.
Personal Branding Strategy #12: Create A Clear Brand Image
Have an eye-catching logo, website design, and consistent color palette to help create a recognizable brand identity.
Personal Branding Strategy #13: Monitor Your Reputation
Keep an eye on what’s being said about you and your brand online so that you can address any issues or questions promptly. You can automate this process with social listening tools such as Hootsuite or Later.com for your social media, and create Google Alerts to get instant notifications.
Personal Branding Strategy #14: Promote Yourself
Advertising yourself and your personal brand is one of the most important things you can do to increase your exposure. Whether it’s sponsoring an event that aligns with your values or promoting yourself on social media, there are endless opportunities to get your brand out there.
Personal Branding Strategy #15: Influencer Marketing
Leverage relationships with industry influencers to give yourself a boost. Invite them to collaborate on projects, have them review your products or services, or just follow their content and comment on it.
Personal Branding Strategy #16: Measure Success
It’s important to track the key performance indicators (KPIs) of your personal branding strategy to see what’s working and what can be improved.
When it comes to optimizing a website to generate more conversions, co-founder and SEO expert at MFG, Alex Rodríguez it’s important it is to track KPI’s for the success of a website. One KPI he highly recommends paying attention to is how much time users are spending on your pages, as tracked through Google Analytics. This metric measures how long visitors are staying and how far they’ve scrolled down your page.
Knowing this KPI can give valuable insight into what content interests your users, meaning you can adjust your strategy accordingly and increase engagement, or make the necessary pivots until you see results.
Optimize your website, blog content, and social media posts to ensure they are easily found by potential customers or employers.
Personal Branding Strategy #18: Create A Personal Brand Statement
Take some time to think about who you are, what makes you unique, and your mission. Develop a personal branding statement that succinctly explains what you do and why people should care.
Personal Branding Strategy #19: Wear Your Brand
To make life a little easier and have fun in this process, why not take your personal branding to the next level by wearing it out?
Pick one word or phrase from your personal brand statement and have it printed on a t-shirt or even accessories like keychains, caps, and mugs! This can be your chance to show everyone what makes you, you! Get creative with this idea and personalize merchandise to ensure everyone remembers who you are while having fun doing it.
Personal Branding Strategy #20: Embrace Failure
Everyone makes mistakes – it’s part of life. Learn from them, take risks, and don’t be afraid to fail in order to succeed in the long run!
In Closing
By utilizing these top personal branding strategies for 2023, you will be able to build a powerful and successful brand that will capture the attention of your target audience. With hard work and dedication, you can create an impressive personal brand that will help catapult your career, open doors of opportunity, and set you apart from the competition.
Considering Hiring A Personal Branding Company?
We might be able to help. Our approach to branding is revenue-driven. We give brands visibility and conversions. For us, a website needs to be more than pretty. It needs to assist in growing your bottom line.
5 Ways to Automate Your Real Estate Business to Get More Leads
Are you looking for ways to automate your real estate business? Check out these five tips for automating your marketing and generating more leads.
If you’re like most realtors, you’re always looking for ways to streamline your business and make it more efficient. This usually involves buying a CRM or some real estate marketing software. But in order to get the most out of these tools, you need a strategy to activate marketing automation for your business.
By being strategic about your marketing automation, you can free up more time to focus on other aspects of your business.
If marketing automation for your real estate business sounds like music to your ears, keep reading!
What is marketing automation?
Marketing automation is the use of software to automate marketing processes such as customer segmentation, customer data integration, and campaign management.
A well-executed real estate automated marketing strategy allows you to target potential home buyers who have been searching for homes in a certain price range and will position your real estate brand in front of those potential home buyers, even while you’re sleeping or working on your open houses (to be more realistic!).
Marketing automation is where the money is at! Because, quite frankly, your day doesn’t have more hours. And if you want to hit those audacious goals, you’ll need to be able to do things differently than your competitors.
However, marketing automation is more than just software- it’s also about using strategies to improve the effectiveness of marketing campaigns. Or else you’ll find yourself with lots of tools and no direction on how to use them to actually generate leads.
Let’s cover our top 5 real estate marketing automation strategies that are design to save you at between 30-40 hours each month. You ready?
Marketing Automation Tools & Ideas
There are a lot of ways to do this, but we’ve compiled a list of the five best ways to automate your real estate business to get more real estate listings. By automating the tasks that take up the most time, you’ll be able to focus on what’s important: selling houses!
1) Real Estate Content Marketing Automation
There’s no question that content marketing is an essential part of any digital marketing strategy. After all, without content, there would be nothing to share on social media, no way to attract new leads, and no way to build trust and credibility with your audience. However, many realtors leave content marketing to their broker. This is a mistake for several reasons.
First of all, your broker is likely already marketing their own brand. As a result, they’re not likely to be too interested in promoting your content. Second, even if your broker is willing to promote your content, they probably don’t have the time or expertise to do it effectively. And third, by creating your own unique content, you’ll be able to reach new people online who might not otherwise be exposed to your brand.
Fortunately, there are plenty of automated tools and software programs out there that can help you with the content creation and promotion process. Below are some of the content automation tools you can use for your real estate content marketing:
Google Alerts. Follow your top targeted cities and neighborhoods and use Google Alerts to get news as soon as they happen.
Create your very own bank of ideas based on the questions that your clients have. No software required! Just use a Word Document or Google Document.
Generate a content calendar for the full year and plan the content that will support all the stages of your prospecting process. You can also plan content that can assist you to generate referrals from your existing clients. If you’re looking to automate your workflows and get reminders, we recommend using Monday.com. We’re been using it with our clients and works great.
By using a content publishing tool like HubSpot (for articles) or Later.com (for social media), you can plan, create, and publish your content ahead of time. This way, you can spend less time creating content and more time promoting it and following up with leads.
2) Real Estate Social Media Automation
If you’re manually posting to social media every day, it can start to feel like a full-time job! To make your life easier, try automating your social media process by breaking it down into smaller tasks. For example, you can batch create content ideas, graphics, and captions ahead of time. That way, when it comes time to post, all you have to do is hit publish. You can also use hashtags and location optimization (geotagging) to reach a wider audience.
That’s why social media automation tools are so valuable. Here are some of the tools we recommend for social media automation:
Facebook (now Meta) offers great features where you can schedule posts, stories, and videos ahead of time.
A pro tip: Schedule stories with clickable links using Meta, so you can ask your audience to book an appointment
Use the Canva pro features to set up your branding so your social media content looks uniform. You can even get Canva templates that can help you create your graphics quicker. Or simply outsource this process entirely so you can always have amazing graphics!
Just remember to keep an eye on your social media accounts so you can respond to any comments or messages in a timely manner.
How to schedule Instagram Reels ahead of time?
If you’re looking for a way to save time on your Instagram Reels, you can actually schedule them ahead of time. This can be a huge help if you’re trying to keep up with a consistent posting schedule. You use the native scheduling feature in Later. With Later, you can create your Reel and then select the date and time that you want it to go live.
You’ll be able to be consistent in pushing Reels out on a regular basis, even if you don’t have the time to post them every day.
3) Real Estate Newsletters Automation
Staying in touch with past clients and potential leads is essential for generating referrals and repeat business. However, manually sending out newsletters can be time-consuming.
Fortunately, there are plenty of great newsletter automation tools out there that can save you hours every month.
MailChimp and Constant Contact are two popular options that allow you to create beautiful newsletters with ease. Plus, they make it easy to manage your contacts and send out automated emails when someone subscribes to your newsletter.
Tips to facilitate your newsletter automation workflow:
Use a planner so you can build your newsletters around strategic dates.
Avoid sending newsletters during busy seasons. While there’s nothing wrong about sending a newsletter during Thanksgiving, you’ll be competing with the e-commerce brands who are already sending dozens of emails to your potential clients.
Write the content for your newsletters in batches. Here’s an example of your Q1 newsletters:
– January 11: Welcoming 2023 with market predictions for 2023 – January 25: Top 5 Communities for families in your city – February 7: Top 10 Ideas to Celebrate Valentines as a Family – February 23: Featuring a listing – March 1: Downloadable PDF with trusted providers for Spring Cleaning – March 14: Calendar of events for families (feature popular festivals during April, May, and June
Segment your audience so you can plan nurturing campaigns for your renters.
Once you plan the topics ahead, you then can automate your content management system and create reminders with the information you’ll need in order to prepare your newsletter following your content lifecycle plan. And just know that you can hire a real estate marketing agency and they will take over this entire process for you!
Between automating your real estate social media and newsletters, you’ll be saving at least 20 hours each month (if not more!).
Now let’s get you to save time with those repeatable tasks that are part of your real estate marketing.
4) Postcard Automation
Nothing says “professional” like getting a personalized postcard in the mail from your favorite realtor! However, writing out and mailing dozens of postcards can take up a lot of time—time that could be spent generating new leads.
Luckily, there are plenty of postcard automation services out there that make it easy to design and print professional-looking postcards without breaking the bank. Postalytics and Send Out Cards are two great options that offer affordable postcard printing and mailing services. They even offer automated campaigns so you can set it and forget it!
You’re probably doing all the above real estate marketing tactics. But if you want to stand out, a great real estate marketing idea for 2023 is to level up your Local SEO efforts so that people who are near you can actually find you.
So what is Local SEO and how can this be integrated with your real estate content marketing automation strategy?
5) Local SEO Automation for Realtors
One of the best ways to ensure that your site is visible to people in your vicinity is to optimize your online presence for local SEO. This involves making sure that your name appears prominently in search results for relevant keywords. This works great for realtors who have a physical location. Your broker might have Local SEO and you might be able to leverage their presence if you play your cards right.
While you’re not expected to be a pro and learn SEO, it’s important for you to know that your online presence can be optimized in a relatively fast way by using SEO automation tools. And by SEO Automation tools we mean automating the workflows. Unfortunately, while there are artificial intelligence tools for SEO tasks, the work that it takes in order to make edits on the site and actually distribute links and build directories is still done by humans.
Final Words
Real estate can be a very rewarding career, but it takes a lot of hard work to be successful. It’s important to have a clear vision for your business from the beginning. If you’re only looking to close a few deals per year and make some extra money, that’s perfectly fine. However, if you want to build a full-time business, you’ll need to be strategic to attract more clients.
Having a solid digital marketing presence is essential for driving leads and closing sales especially if you don’t have to be the one doing the work! Wouldn’t that be great?
Taking the time to invest in your marketing will pay off in the long run and help you achieve your business goals.
About MFG – Jessica Campos
Before becoming a digital marketer, I was a real estate attorney and closed close to a billion transactions. However, my success was all 100% offline. Facebook didn’t exist. The kind of digital marketing tools we have these days are in my opinion, untapped by real estate agents. This makes me excited to partner up with realtors!
Real estate is all about relationships and building trust. And what better way to build trust than by being present and accessible online?
I believe that the real estate industry is ripe for some serious disruption and that agents who embrace digital marketing will be the ones who come out on top. So if you’re a realtor looking for an edge, I hope you liked these real estate marketing ideas.
Real Estate Marketing Automation Services We Offer
When it comes to real estate marketing, having everything in one place is essential so you can move as quickly as possible. Luckily, we take pride in our fast turnaround for our marketing services.
We develop a real estate automated marketing system, customized to your needs and goals. This includes:
What’s A Healthy Bootstrapping Marketing Budget? Marketing Experts Answer
No matter how many times you’ve found yourself trying to figure out what your marketing budget should be, so you can sell your products or services, it’s never an easy answer. Read about the best ways to market your business in 2023.
No matter how many times you’ve found yourself trying to figure out what your marketing budget should be, so you can sell your products or services, it’s never an easy answer.
Most of the marketing conversations we’re having in our marketing agency are with business owners who aspire to build a brand, long-term, but need a plan to combine both: their short-term and long-term goals. If this is you, then, bootstrapping might be on your radar.
What do you mean by bootstrapping?
Bootstrapping your business is a lot like pulling yourself up by your bootstraps. It means you are using your own resources to get your business started. This can be done by using your own money, getting help from family and friends, or finding creative ways to barter for goods and services. Bootstrapping can be a slow process, but it can also be very rewarding.
Most U.S. businesses are self-funded and don’t raise outside capital. Statistics are sketchy, but experts generally agree that about 6 million new businesses start up in the U.S. in an average year. Of those, only about 70,000 startups get angel investment, and fewer than 5,000 get venture capital.
Some Bootstrap Marketing Ideas
Bootstrapping means that you have to be extra careful with how you spend your money. Marketing can be one of the first areas to get slashed when bootstrapping, but it doesn’t have to be. With a little bit of planning, you can set up a bootstrap marketing strategy that won’t break the bank.
The first thing you need to do when setting up your bootstrapped marketing budget is figuring out what you can realistically afford to spend. Make a list of all your current business expenses and then see what you can cut back on or eliminate entirely. This may include items like dining out, cable TV, and weekends away. Once you’ve determined what you can reasonably afford to spend on marketing, you can start thinking about where to allocate those funds.
One of the most important things to remember when bootstrapping is that you need to focus on ROI (return on investment). This means that every dollar you spend on marketing should bring in more than a dollar in revenue.
But How Do You Create A Boostrap Marketing Plan?
Since you want to make sure you’re not wasting resources, your bootstrap marketing strategy needs to be thoughtful. Your first factor to consider is which marketing channels you will be growing. Gone are the days where you could hire a PR firm to run a powerful marketing campaign and see amazing results.
You want to keep your advertising costs low, but effective at the same time, so you can see an influx of cash to keep your business running. You might also want to consider getting capital for your marketing projects. In this way, you’ll secure your investment and your business success. In case you need a trusted lender, we highly recommend One Park Financial.
How Much Do Digital Marketing Services For Small Businesses Cost?
Generally speaking, the size of your marketing budget generally depends on factors like the type of business you’re running, the size of your audience, and how competitive your industry is.
While digital channels are a top priority for business owners, there are other marketing costs that should be factored, in addition of your digital marketing budget. Examples of marketing costs outside of digital marketing are:
Advertising
Customer surveys
Gifts to customers
Printed materials and displays
Community Outreach
Sponsorships
Marketers can’t predict or guarantee results. No matter how good they are. So, be realistic about your expectations and be prepared to give your marketing efforts at least 6 months.
As a ballpark, anywhere from 5-10% of your desired revenue may be considered a reasonable amount for businesses that take a B2B approach. And if you are marketing to consumers, in a highly competitive industry, you’ll need between 15-20% of your desired revenue.
Now that you have an idea of the marketing budget for your small business, the next thing is: how will you invest it? Notice that we say “invest”, not spend. Your marketing is an investment. Not an expense. Especially when you’re in the startup phase.
The Top Three Marketing Strategies for Bootstrapping
The landscape of digital marketing has changed drastically. So, no matter what you heard about what works and what’s working for your competitors, you can’t ignore the fact that you’re starting under many different conditions than they had. In other words: what worked for them won’t work for you.
Any bootstrapping marketing expert will tell you this: you can’t grow what you can’t measure. So, before making any decisions about your social media platforms, Adwords, or considering using online advertising services, your marketing analytics need to be set up. We’re living in unprecedented times. And without access to your own data, taking a guess on how to market so you can drive sales is a risky practice.
When business owners come to us for bootstrapping marketing services, we start with analytics. We take a Forensic Marketing approach to marketing, which sets us apart from any other digital marketing agencies. We’re also practitioners with expert-level knowledge of digital marketing, which allows us to make decisions and execute quickly.
Where are small business owners seeing a great ROI from marketing?
Our top three marketing strategies are Content Marketing SEO, Social Media, and Paid Media. But to see a higher ROI from marketing, we recommend combining different marketing strategies based on what you need.
It can be 70% SEO, 20% Social, 10% Paid (Google Adwords or Facebook Ads) or 90% SEO, 5% Social, and 5% Paid or any combination, depending on what we gather from the data.
Another factor that’s helping small business owners is to keep advertising costs at the bare minimum. We see that organic marketing practices drive higher conversions than paid channels. That doesn’t mean you won’t use paid channels. You will.
We have saved our clients up to 90% of their advertising budget by integrating their ad campaigns with SEO best practices.
Now let’s take a deep dive into the top three marketing services for bootstrapping and the budget.
Content Marketing Budget: What Does This Include and How Much?
This includes things like blog posts, infographics, eBooks, and whitepapers. Content marketing is a great way to attract leads without spending a lot of money. Just make sure that your content is high-quality and relevant to your target audience. Because you want to gain the right visibility AND the right reputation so you can gain trust from true potential buyers.
You can hire a content marketing specialist on a project-based payment and this allows you to get high-quality work without committing to a monthly payment.
A healthy content marketing budget should consider:
New pages for your website or optimize the existing ones using top-notch SEO strategies so you can see conversions
Long-form content that positions your brand as a leader and helps you gain authority and build trust
Content to generate leads
Mistakes to avoid when hiring a content marketing specialist:
Be sure they have a track record of creating high-converting content. If they can show you tracked links, even better.
Here’s an example of a home page that our team optimized 10 months ago. Using Google Search Console we can filter a single page and see the impact of the optimizations that were performed. Each page or article can be tracked inside Google Search Console or Google Analytics using UTM codes.
If your content writer doesn’t have those digital marketing skills, you won’t have access to the full benefits of content marketing.
If you hire content marketing services, be sure they include SEO optimization and tracking. How else could you calculate the ROI of your marketing?
Don’t create educational content without a plan to turn them into paying customers.
Most content writers understand the tactics to drive website traffic. However, there’s a difference between driving traffic and driving conversions. And your content should be able to assist in your conversion flow.
Lastly, be sure they have your branding guidelines.
Your content marketing should represent your brand. Don’t assume that your content marketing specialist will pick your brand voice. Instead, provide them with your branding guidelines which should have guidance to persuade your future buyers.
“Your content should be informative, relevant, and persuasive at the same time.”
Social Media Marketing Budget: What Does This Include and How Much?
Promoting your content on social media is a great way to reach new people without spending any money. Just make sure you’re strategic about which platforms you use and how often you post.
You don’t need to hire a social media manager to take over. You can always start by outsourcing content creation and graphic creation. This will free up your calendar and will allow you to get more clients.
A healthy social marketing budget should consider:
Social media strategy, crafted on a monthly basis
Videos that assist your long-form content so you can generate traffic and conversions
Time to engage with your audience so you can expand your network by “socializing” with the right people
Bootstrapping Your SEO Marketing Strategies
Unlike many SEO agencies will want you to believe, you don’t actually need SEO all the time. You can get SEO in a project base and optimize a few website pages at a time. This will help you grow your online presence consistently, without breaking the bank. SEO takes about 6-9 months to kick in. But the good news is that once your pages are ranking, you’ll start to see the compound effect of SEO.
Advertising Budget: What Does This Include and How Much?
If you do have some money to spend on marketing, paid advertising can be an effective way to reach new people quickly. Just make sure you’re clear about your goals and target audience before investing any money in paid ads.
Save Time and Money by Hiring Expert Marketers
It’s no secret that marketing a business can be extremely time-consuming and expensive. If you’re bootstrapping your business, you might be tempted to try to do it all yourself or hire inexpensive freelancers on Fiverr to save money.
However, this is often a mistake. The truth is unless you have previous experience in marketing, you’re likely to end up spending more time and money than if you had just hired experts from the beginning. Here’s why:
It Takes Time to Learn Marketing
Even if you’re naturally good at marketing and have some experience with it, there’s still a lot to learn if you want to do it well. There are always new trends and techniques to keep up with, not to mention the fact that what works in one industry might not work in another. If you try to keep up with everything yourself, you’ll quickly become overwhelmed. This will lead to either subpar results or complete burnout. Neither of which is good for your business.
You Need an Experienced Team
Trying to do everything yourself also means that you won’t have a team of experienced professionals to collaborate with. A good marketing team will have a variety of skills and experience levels. This way, they can cover more ground and come up with better ideas than if you were working alone. Having a team also allows you to delegate tasks so that you can focus on running your business.
Marketing Teams Have Become Very Agile After The Pandemic
There’s no secret that marketing agencies suffered during the pandemic. As businesses shuttered their doors and consumers hunkered down at home, many marketers found themselves out of work or facing reduced hours and budgets. However, the pandemic also presented an opportunity for marketers to step up and show their value.
In our MFG Agency, we had to minimize our team and pivot with tools and efficient workflows so we could offer high-quality services to our clients while fitting into their budgets. This allowed us to become more agile. Because we had to!
In the end, we haven’t gone back to the old ways. We’ve found new ways to reach consumers and adapt to the ever-changing digital marketing landscape.
“It’s been fun seeing how a simple 15-second video reaches hundreds of thousands of people and boosts a brand! The power of short videos is still untouched by most business owners. This won’t last for too long.”
Jessica Campos, Founder of MFG
But How Much Does It Cost To Hire Expert Marketers?
The answer, unfortunately, is not a simple one. The cost of hiring a marketing expert depends on many factors, including the size of your business, the scope of the project, and the expert’s level of experience.
As for the price of individual services, here’s a ballpark amount of expert-level marketing services:
– Social media marketing: $500-$3,000+ per month
– Search engine optimization (SEO): $1,000-$5,000+ per month
– Pay-per-click (PPC) management: $500-$10,000+ per month
– Email marketing: $500-$2,000+ per month
– Content marketing: $500-$5,000+ per month
– Market research: $5,000-$20,000+
– Advertising campaign management: 10% of total ad spend
-Fractional CRO (Conversion Rate Optimization): $350- $600 per hour
How Do We Price Our Expert Marketing Packages At MFG Agency?
In our MFG Agency, we start by identifying quick wins. And sometimes those quick wins will need light adjustments to their branding, website, or social media.
A solid marketing plan takes between 20-40 hours per month to execute. Even though the hourly rate of a fractional CRO or CMO is $350, you won’t pay that. We’ve managed to create growth packages that start at $3,000 per month and that give you access to our team:
2 Digital Marketing Experts
Expert-level SEO & Content Marketing
Expert-level Social Media
A team of graphic designers
Copywriters
Website developer
Influencer marketing
In addition to our well-nurtured resources that can assist with branding, photography, video marketing, event marketing, funding, etc.
And we’ve managed to structure performance-based plans and help you find capital. We see ourselves as your success partners.
Final Thoughts
Everything has a price. Even the things you’re getting for free. And when it comes to receiving marketing services, what you’re truly getting is PEACE. How much would you pay for peace of mind? Some might say “it’s priceless.”
For some of you, your peace of mind comes from seeing a healthy banking account. You want to see short-term gains. And want to actually see it in the banking account.
We also speak to business owners that their peace of mind comes from having certainty about their long-term success. They don’t look for immediate sales. They want to build a brand and have long-term goals.
In which group are you? Knowing what success looks like for you is important when you’re considering hiring a marketing team.
Let’s Have A Conversation
We help businesses like yours to create and implement effective bootstrapping marketing strategies. It all starts by getting to know your business and your goals. Then, conduct market research and develop a personalized plan of action.
What’s the Best Way to Market a Small Business in 2023
Marketing your business correctly is essential to its success. Read about the best ways to market your business in 2023.
As we move into 2023, it’s time to start thinking about how to market your small business most effectively. While there are many different marketing channels you can use to reach your target audience, some are more effective than others.
Here are our top recommendations for digital marketing activities that will help you grow your business fast.
How Will Small Businesses Grow In 2023?
In 2023, the big thing for small businesses will be content marketing SEO to boost traffic on their websites. Paid advertising is getting challenging, as users are on multiple platforms and it’s hard to attribute the ROI from paid efforts. By focusing on creating engaging content that is optimized for search engines, small businesses can attract more organic traffic and get ahead of their competitors. Additionally, content marketing can help to build brand awareness and create loyalty among customers. With so many benefits, it’s no wonder that content marketing SEO is predicted to be one of the biggest trends for small businesses in 2023.
When it comes to online marketing, we’re recommending 3 essential best practices: 1) content marketing and SEO 2) email marketing and 3) social media. These are essential in order to effectively market your business online and connect with your target audience. Building brand authority means creating high-quality, informative articles that position you as an expert in your field. Email marketing helps you to stay in touch with your customers and build relationships with them. Social media is a great way to connect with potential and current customers and promote your brand.
Wondering why these three areas make the essential aspects of your business’s marketing plan? Here are the stats:
Vital Statistics That Small Business Owners Need To Know.
According to 92 percent of entrepreneurs, a website is one of the most successful digital marketing tactics.
Within 24 hours, 75 percent of local mobile searches result in visits to offline stores.
Long-term spending by customers who interact with a company on social media might increase by up to 40 percent.
Email is the most popular marketing technique for small firms, with a 54 percent usage rate.
The typical ROI for email marketing is 122 percent.
The stats show the significance of incorporating comprehensive and advanced digital marketing strategies to boost your newly established or existing venture.
Let’s delve into details to take a closer look at these digital marketing strategies.
Digital Marketing Strategies 2023 #1: Content
Marketing SEO
In this day and age, it’s not enough to have a website- you need to have a website that people can find. This is where SEO comes in. Search Engine Optimization is the practice of making sure your website comes up as the number one result for relevant searches. However, simply stuffing your website with keywords is not enough. You also need interesting and engaging content, or no one will bother to visit your site. This is where content marketing comes in. Content marketing is a strategy for creating and distributing content that is relevant to your target audience.
Content Marketing Tips to Grow a Business:
1.Segmentation
If you’re like most businesses, you probably want to reach as many people as possible with your marketing efforts. After all, more customers means more sales and more growth, right? Well, not necessarily. In fact, one of the most common mistakes businesses make is failing to segment their audience. Your audience isn’t everyone – it’s specific groups of people with specific needs and interests. Trying to appeal to everyone will just result in a generic, uninteresting message that doesn’t resonate with anyone.
Instead of trying to be everything to everyone, focus your content marketing efforts on specific segments of your audience. This will allow you to create targeted, relevant content that resonates with each group. As a result, you’ll be more likely to generate leads and convert them into customers.
2. Create Content Considering Micro Niches
As any marketer knows, casting a wide net is not always the most effective way to attract customers. Sometimes, it is more effective to focus on a smaller, more specific group of people. This is known as a micro niche. By definition, a micro niche is a subset of a larger market niche that has already been segmented.
For example, if you are selling bicycles, your micro niche might be children’s bicycles. The advantage of targeting a micro niche is that you can pre-qualify your potential customers and buyers in the initial phase of the marketing funnel. This saves you time and energy in the long run because you are not wasting your resources trying to reach people who are not interested in what you have to offer. To determine your micro niche, start by creating a buyer’s persona. This will help you to summarize the target audience’s demographics, needs, and wants. Once you have a clear picture of who your ideal customer is, you can start creating content that appeals to them directly. By considering micro niches, you can make your marketing more effective and save yourself time and money in the long run.
3. Mobile Design: A Website Is Not Enough Anymore
A responsive website provides a better user experience overall, especially for mobile and tablet visitors. Since designing for mobile is the most challenging, it is typically done for that platform first; after those issues are resolved, designing for the desktop is considerably easier.
A mobile-responsive strategy focuses on adaptive design to ensure that content looks beautiful regardless of the device used to view it.
4. Customer Experience
Over the past few years, customer expectations have steadily increased. With the rise of online shopping, customers have come to expect a certain level of convenience and accessibility. And rightly so – why should they have to settle for anything less? With so many options available at their fingertips, why would they put up with poor customer service or a lack of transparency?
COVID-19 has only served to heighten these expectations. With in-person shopping coming to a complete halt, customers were left with no choice but to turn to online options. And while in-person shopping has resumed, the pandemic has forced many businesses to reevaluate their approach to customer experience. In order to stay competitive, it’s more important than ever for businesses to take a customer-centered approach.
What does that mean, exactly? It means putting the needs of your customers first, constantly striving to exceed their expectations, and always being transparent. It’s about building trust and creating loyalty – something that will be invaluable as we continue to navigate these uncertain times.
If you want your marketing to really hit the mark, take a customer-centered approach. Instead of creating content to promote your business, do it the other way around. Start by identifying what your customers need and want, and then create content that meets those needs. Not only will this make your marketing more effective, but it will also foster a stronger sense of loyalty and trust between you and your customers. And at the end of the day, isn’t that what marketing is all about?
5- Ai Technology Is Here To Stay
In the future years, artificial intelligence will completely dominate digital marketing. You might be surprised to learn that AI can assess customer behavior in addition to search patterns by using information from multiple social media platforms.
Wait. Does this mean that a machine can actually write your articles and captions for your social media posts? Yes.
The following are the AI apps that our digital marketing agency is actively using:
AI Content Writing-A program that employs artificial intelligence to generate original, high-quality material from user-entertained keywords or phrases
AI Image Design- Due to AI’s increased speed and efficiency, designers can produce designs more quickly and affordably.
AI-Based Captions for Social Media- After understanding each image based on its various components, the AI-based Captioning tool produces captions or textual descriptions accessible by humans.
AI-Based Ecommerce- By gathering information about your consumers, automating follow-up queries about abandoned carts, and more, AI can help establish a more effective sales process.
Our digital marketing agency is already using AI-powered tools to be more efficient and cost-effective, and we’re seeing great results. So if you’re not already on board with AI, now is the time to get on board!
6- Establishing Clear KPIs for Your Content Marketing SEO Efforts
Before you start writing content for your website, it’s important to establish some clear KPIs (key performance indicators). These are the metrics that you’ll use to measure progress and performance toward your goals over time. We recommend setting up tracking plugins so you can attribute any changes in traffic or rankings to your content marketing efforts. Some common KPIs for content marketing include pageviews, unique visitors, bounce rate, time on site, and conversion rate. By monitoring these metrics, you’ll be able to see how your content is performing and make necessary adjustments to improve your results.
Marketing analytics can be a daunting task. There’s so much data out there, and it can be hard to know where to start. That’s where our Forensic Marketing Services come in. We’ll help you track down the data that matters, and then we’ll help you make sense of it all. We’ll show you what’s working, what’s not, and how you can improve your marketing strategy. With our help, you’ll be able to make smarter, more informed decisions about your marketing campaigns. So if you’re feeling lost in the world of marketing analytics, you’re at the right place today!
7- Measure Your Future Buyers Journey
Big data is great. It can tell you all sorts of things about your customers and their behavior. But if you want to create a truly effective marketing strategy, you need to go beyond the numbers. You need to understand the customer journey.
The customer journey is the path that your customers take from awareness to purchase. It includes all the touchpoints that they have with your brand, from first becoming aware of your product or service to making a final purchase.
Data can give you a lot of information about each individual touchpoint. But it can be difficult to see the big picture. That’s where expert analysis comes in. By understanding the customer journey, analysts can help you identify areas where you can improve your marketing strategy and drive more conversions.
If you want to create a successful marketing strategy, you need to start by measuring the customer journey. Only then can you get the insights you need to make informed decisions about your marketing efforts.
Use Google Analytics for Marketing. Here’s how:
Google Analytics is a powerful tool that can provide insights into how users are interacting with your website. However, it can be tricky to know which data is most important to look at. Here’s a breakdown of the most important data you can use to discover how users are navigating your site:
Bounce rate: This measures the percentage of users who leave your site after viewing only one page. A high bounce rate can indicate that users are not finding what they’re looking for on your site.
Time on site: This measures how long users are spending on your site. A low time on site can indicate that users are not engaged with your content.
Pages per session: This measures how many pages users are viewing during each session. A low pages per session can indicate that users are not finding enough content of interest on your site.
By understanding these key metrics, you can get a better idea of how users are interacting with your website and make changes accordingly.
8- Optimize Your Website For Conversions
When you’re running a business, it’s important to make sure that your website is optimized for conversions. This means making sure that your site is attractive to potential customers and easy to navigate. It also means ensuring that your site is keyword-rich and full of valuable content. By taking the time to optimize your website for conversions, you’ll be able to attract more organic traffic and generate more leads. And, in the end, that means more sales and more profits. So if you’re serious about growing your business, make sure that you take the time to optimize your website for conversions. It’s one of the best investments you can make.
You can collect the contact information of your prospects interested in goods and services using a lead capture form. However, you should focus on making lead capture forms that can add to your marketing plan. For instance, you can:
Create quizzes to gather information to segment your consumer base for personalization.
Make your lead-collecting forms interactive.
Gamify your holiday advertising strategies.
Digital Marketing Strategies 2023 #2:Social Media Marketing
In 2023, social media marketing will continue to be an important part of any digital marketing strategy. Customers are increasingly spending time on social media platforms, and they are more likely to trust a brand that has a strong social media presence. A recent study found that 62% of customers are more likely to trust a brand if it is active on social media. Additionally, social media provides an opportunity to connect with customers on a personal level and build relationships.
There’s just one issue: social media marketing can be time consuming. Creating one post can take up to 45 minutes and that’s not considering filming videos or editing.
In order to maximize the benefits of social media marketing, it is important to integrate it into your content promotion strategy holistically.
Social Media Marketing Tips To Grow Your Business:
1- Branding
As a small business owner, you know that branding is important to help your business stand out from the competition. But did you know that your social media channels are also a great place to reinforce your brand? Make sure your profile photos and cover images reflect your company’s logo and colors, and that your content is consistent with your brand messaging. By takes these simple steps, you can ensure that your social media presence reinforces, rather than detracts from, your brand.
2- Humanize Your Brand
In today’s competitive marketplace, customers are looking for brands that they can connect with on a personal level. So make sure your social media content humanizes your brand by featuring photos and stories of your employees, customers, and company culture. This will help potential customers see that there’s a real team behind your business, and that you’re committed to delivering a great experience.
3- Use Targeted Content
Not all of your social media followers will be interested in every aspect of your business. That’s why it’s important to use targeted content to reach different segments of your audience. For example, if you sell both B2C and B2B products, you might create separate social media channels or target different types of content to each group. By using targeted content, you can ensure that you’re sharing the most relevant information with each segment of your audience, increasing the chances that they’ll engage with your brand.
4- Boost Your Engagement With Videos
Videos are a particularly effective format for social media marketing, since they’re easy to consume and share. But how do you get started with video marketing? Here are a few tips:
Keep it short and sweet. People’s attention spans are shorter than ever, so it’s important to make your videos as concise as possible. Aim for under two minutes if possible.
Make it visually appealing. Use high-quality visuals and engaging editing to keep viewers’ attention focused on your video.
Use calls to action. Include calls to action throughout your video, so viewers know what they can do next (such as follow your brand on social media or visit your website).
Promote across all channels. Once you’ve created your video, be sure to promote it on all of your social media channels for maximum reach.
By following these tips, you can create social media marketing videos that will help grow your business.
5- Monitor Your Progress
Once you’ve implemented these tips, it’s important to monitor your progress and adjust your strategy as needed. Look at metrics like follower growth rate, engagement rate, and click-through rate to get an idea of how well your content is performing. If you see a dip in any of these metrics, take a closer look at what might have caused it and make changes accordingly. By monitoring your progress and being willing to adapt as needed, you can ensure that your social media marketing strategy is always working to grow your business.
Pay attention to your users! They know what they want!
Digital Marketing Strategies in 2023 #3: Email Marketing
Email marketing has been around for a while, but it’s still an effective tool for reaching customers. In 2023, email marketing will continue to be a key part of digital marketing strategies. Here are three reasons why:
Email is personal. You can address your subscribers by name and build a relationship with them through your messages. This helps you stand out in the inbox and creates loyalty among your subscribers.
Email is targeted. You can segment your list and send highly targeted messages to different groups of people. This allows you to tailor your message to each group and increases the likelihood that they’ll engage with your email.
Email is profitable. Email marketing is one of the most cost-effective ways to reach your audience. It has a high ROI and can help you achieve your business goals while staying within your budget.
Email marketing is a powerful tool that should be part of every marketer’s toolkit.
Email Marketing Tips That Will Boost Your Business in 2023
Email marketing can be a great way to connect with your audience and promote your product or service – but only if it’s done right. Here are a few tips to help you get the most out of your email marketing campaign:
1- Segment Your Audience
Not everyone is interested in the same thing, so it’s important to segment your list so you can send more targeted, relevant emails. This will also help you avoid having your emails marked as spam.
2- Keep It Short, Sweet, and Relevant
No one wants to read a novel in their inbox, so make sure your emails are concise and to the point. And always make sure the content is relevant to your audience – otherwise, they’ll tune out pretty quickly.
3- Be Creative With Your Topics
If you’re constantly sending emails about the same thing, people are going to get bored pretty fast. Mix it up and keep things fresh by coming up with new and interesting topics for your emails.
4- Set Expectations From The Start
Let your subscribers know how often you’re going to be sending emails – once a week, once a month, etc. That way they won’t be caught off guard when they start getting more frequent messages from you.
5- Incorporate Email And Social Media
Take advantage of both platforms by promoting your email campaign on social media and including social media buttons in your emails. This will help encourage people to use both channels and gets more eyes on your marketing efforts.
Now that you’ve gotten the best tips to boost your business in 2023, it’s time to talk about execution. How do we get there?
Outsourcing your marketing vs in-house marketing? What’s the best option?
There are pros and cons to both outsourcing and in-house marketing.
In-house marketing may be a better option if you have the budget to hire multiple people to handle different aspects of marketing such as content, web design, social media, and email. This way, you can be sure that everyone is on the same page and working towards the same goals.
However, outsourcing may be a better option if you don’t have the budget to hire multiple people or if you’re not sure how to get started with marketing. Outsourcing allows you to tap into a wealth of experience and expertise that you may not have in-house. It can also be more cost-effective than hiring multiple people, since you’ll only be paying for the services you need.
Ultimately, the best option for your business will depends on your specific needs and resources.
So, Where Should You Start Your Marketing Plan For 2023?
Marketing is a lot like baking a cake; you need to have all the right ingredients in order to create a delicious and successful final product. And just like with baking, the quality of your marketing efforts will only be as good as the quality of your strategy. That’s why it’s so important to have a well-oiled marketing strategy in place before you start implementing any tactics. By taking the time to plan and map out your goals, target audience, and key channels, you’ll set yourself up for success in the coming year. So, what are you waiting for? Get started on your marketing strategy for 2023 today!
Steal our social media marketing process so you can start attracting clients for your life coaching business.
It’s hard to know where to start when it comes to social media marketing.
You could spend hours reading blog posts and watching tutorials, or you could simply get a social media marketing plan for life coaches that considers the needs of your practice.
And that’s what this article is all about. You’re about to get a well-oiled social media marketing process that will end with the struggle of how to grow your coaching business using social media.
Let’s roll!
How do I market my coaching business on social media?
There’s one thing that separates a life coaching business from other businesses: your clients won’t hire you unless they can trust you.
They don’t buy from you because you are the cheapest. Hence the reason why promotions are not really effective for life coaching businesses.
You want people to hire you because you are the best and you can help them solve a problem.
For this reason, when we outline content for a life coach, we need to consider their future buyers and their journey first.
What should a life coach post on social media?
Since your clients need to like you, trust you, and believe in you, before they even consider working with you, your social media content needs to have a balance between those goals.
Your account should have a variation of:
Content that resonates with your audience at a personal level.
Content that builds your trust.
Content that builds your authority.
Our process to create a social media calendar for life coaches:
Step 1: Channel audit. We start by analyzing which channel is performing best by checking the website analytics. Why this step matters? Because our goal with social media marketing isn’t about getting likes. We measure success based on conversions. We identify which topics are driving users to the site, so we can capture leads and initiate the sales process.
We’re finding that Facebook and Instagram are still at the top of the platforms for life coaches. We recommend to use both channels.
Is it good to post to Facebook and Instagram at the same time?
The short answer: no. It’s important to understand that your users are in both platforms, but they use them for different reasons. We recommend to combine Instagram and Facebook strategically.
Instead of repeating the same post on Instagram and Facebook, for example, you can share a clickable article on Facebook, then, since Instagram posts cannot be clicked, you will share that article in Stories. Simultaneously, you can post a Reels with a recap of the article and share the it in stories, with a link to a freebie. Notice how just one topic is giving you a chance to create multiple posts in multiple formats.
Pro tip: always pick the shortest journey. For example: sharing a video, then asking them to click so you can grab their email will be better than sharing a video, inviting them to a Facebook Group, and expecting the group to help you generate leads and sales. Pick the shortest route!
Step 2: Campaigns. Once we define the topics, we then create our editorial calendar considering campaigns. Seasonality plays a big role here. Let’s say that you want to help women who are going through life transitions. If the holidays are approaching, create content that considers their struggles during that season.
Step 3: Create long-form content. We love using social media to identify conversations. Then we create long-form articles using SEO tools that give us content ideas that are relevant to the topics. Having a well-oiled content writing system is key.
In our social media marketing agency, our life coaching clients get 4 articles per month, plus 15 posts for their social media. This allows us to build a fresh calendar each month, so they never run out of content.
A typical monthly social media calendar for a life coach has:
4 long-form articles (turned into posts and Reels)
2-3 days to observe based on the campaigns
2-3 testimonials
2-3 promotions
Step 4: Editorial calendar. If you haven’t built a social media calendar, having a done-for-you social media planner will help you tremendously. Here’s our social media planner. If you have a chance, watch this video series where I show you how to use the planner. It’s available in Amazon, by the way!
You should be able to build your editorial calendar in about 2 hours. If you want to learn practical tips to save time, I cover it all in Social Greatness- a FREE series where you’ll get a year of content, written for you. This social media tool will save you dozens of hours!
Step 5: Social media graphics order. Your main role in your marketing is to build your network. You’re not a graphic designer. Therefore, delegating this process is crucial to take your business to the next level. I could make graphics; but I won’t. Since you will be ordering graphics after having your editorial calendar ready, your process will flow effortlessly.
Your social media graphic order should look like this:
Inspiration: add a link to a style you likes
Text to include: clearly write what the text will say
Sizes: ask for the graphic in multiple sizes so you can use it for your feed and stories
Step 6: Create captions for your social media posts. Once your graphics are ready, it’s time to write captions. If you love creative writing, great! But if you want to save some time and test Ai, we recommend using Jarvis (a software that writes professional content for you). It has saved us hundreds of hours! Click here to check them out.
In our social media marketing agency, one account is managed by 3 marketers. This allows us to deliver high-quality social media content.
Step 7: Scheduling. Once the graphics and captions are ready, the next step is scheduling. Use a scheduling platform instead of posting manually. Facebook has enhanced their scheduling platform and it’s free! Use it!
Be sure to schedule content in multiple formats: posts, videos, and stories.
You can add polls and stickers to your stories to generate more engagements.
Use hashtags that are relevant to the content you are talking about.
Do scheduled posts get less views?
You might be wondering if scheduling posts get less views than manual posts. This is a myth. Scheduled posts have the same chance to gain reach and engagement than manual posts.
Should I hire a social media marketing agency?
The short answer is NO.
As a life coach, you need more than a social media marketing agency. You need to grow your online presence, build authority, create content to monetize it, and attract clients. And all of this, while serving your clients. That’s a lot!
Your best hire will be a digital marketing team of experts that can be efficient and give your business what it needs so you can take it to the next level ASAP.
And if that team has a one-stop-shop where you can also create and produce content, even better! For those of you in Austin, Texas, MFG Agency is that one-stop-shop. We offer packages for life coaches, content creators, brands, and e-commerce businesses. Click here to chat about your business.
How do I advertise myself as a life coach?
Since we’re talking about how to market your life coaching business in social media, we need to consider advertising.
Advertising and marketing are often misunderstood. Advertising is all about direct response. Content marketing, on the other hand, is about engaging with the future buyer and use a seductive method to drive them closer to your brand. You won’t pitch your services before you’re further engaged with the user and know that they are interested in what you have to offer.
But let’s be totally candid: self promotion is totally accepted.
I know that sometimes it’s not easy to “brag” about yourself.
But… if you don’t share how amazing you are, who will?
Get on the spotlight as much as possible! Don’t be shy.
Get featured in publications
Get interviewed
Win an award
Join a conference
Play team with other industry leaders
Join networking associations so you can expand your sphere of influence
Pro tip: Use your offline marketing to create content for your online marketing.
Your users are watching you. They want to see that “you are the real deal”. And this is the kind of influence that will inspire them to work with you.
How do coaches grow on Instagram?
Coaches grow by growing their reputation. Your reputation, meaning reviews, is currency these days.
Take some time to ask your amazing clients to leave you a review on Google, Facebook, and LinkedIn. Then, use those reviews to create content and share it on Instagram. Not only you will gain followers but you will be able to turn them into clients.
Again, just because you don’t have a fancy social media presence today doesn’t mean you can’t change it. And the best part, you can do it today.
Bottom Line
Follow the tips mentioned above to get your life coaching business going. Focus on being genuine and organic on avoiding roadblocks in your coaching journey. Becoming successful in this field is not an overnight thing. It requires patience, passion, and perseverance. Keep on trying, and after some time, you will have more customers than you could possibly handle.
Who is Jessica Campos
My short bio: Jessica Campos, JD, BBA Forensic Digital Marketing Mentor & MFG Agency Founder with over 15 years of experience. I found my way to escape from my law firm to start my beach life, over a decade ago. I’m a living testimonial that you can truly live from your mastery and talents and work from anywhere in the world while having a life. I have 4 children, a loving husband, and 2 amazing dogs. The word busy is not included in my vocabulary 😁I replaced it with “I am intentionally living a purpose-driven life and business.
If you’re on the fence about whether or not to start a TikTok channel for your business, let me tell you why you should just go for it.
A little over a month ago, I decided to start a TikTok channel so I could test a new strategy for my business. Within a month, I had amassed over 10,000 followers and over 1M views. If you’re on the fence about whether or not to start a TikTok channel for your business, let me tell you why you should just go for it.
The Before:
Although I had a TikTok account for over a year, the account wasn’t really growing. Even when I was consistently sharing content, using trending sounds, finding the best times to post, etc.
Ironically enough, I shared my frustration with my kids and they told me that my account wasn’t growing because my content was not relatable. They told me “Mom, people don’t like to see a teacher.” So I asked them to put together a list of videos from creators that looked like my age that they considered relatable. That’s when I understood the assignment.
I thought that funny videos were relatable. But it turns out that funny videos are not what my audience wanted from me. So if you’re taking notes, please write down this one: your audience might need substance more than a good laugh.
What does relatable content mean?
Relatable content means content that creates an emotional connection with the user. In simple words: it’s content that triggers a reaction, beyond a like.
Tips to create relatable content:
Use words that your audience would use.
Practice vulnerability. People are inclined to adopt the emotional perspective of powerless (versus powerful).
Make your audience feel something.
Create thought-provoking statements, instead of common facts.
Use commonalities. These are things that people commonly like.
The results:
My team was totally right. I did a “story time” sharing a very personal story when I was dealing with my rebellious-teenage-daughter, while growing a business. Oh my!
I freaked out
My story time was taken the WRONG way. Many women criticized me for prioritizing my business over my daughter’s needs. But the algorithm did its thing and found me the other group of women who actually came to the story and left me supporting comments. My friend, I felt like I was on Judge Judy’s show.
That’s when I learned how TikTok’s algorithm works, firsthand! I was amazed to see that story going “viral for me” and attracting women who were going through what I went through. Keep in mind, “viral for me” means that generated more reactions than any other video.
When the one viral video turns into a whole niche
That very first “viral for me” video gave me a sense of community. I was able to connect with powerful women, right away!
People kept asking me for more parts of the “story time” video. And that into a whole series of videos where I was sharing my experience, my lessons, and every bit of resource I had on my toolbox that could help other women who are going through the same situation.
That natural progression gave my TikTok channel over 1M video views!
And, of course, the forensic marketing strategist in me forced me to come up with a clear goal for this channel, which is, for now, my very own case study. I want to be able to show step-by-step, how to grow from zero, build a community, and monetize it.
If you know the MFG-SEO story, then you know that I built Austin Networking Group from zero by leveraging event marketing and a Facebook Group. The group has been fundamental to the success of our marketing agency. The best part? It has been 100% organic, using attraction marketing. We don’t need to “sell” anything. We lead with value. So I’m taking the same approach with this new TikTok channel. I know that if I create high-valuable content, the audience will come for more. In fact, I just launched a Podcast a few weeks ago, so I can answer questions and create longer talks, based on the TikTok topics. And following a TikTok marketing strategy, the little podcast is growing organically!
Can TikTok help with sales?
You might not think that an app full of 15-second videos is the place to sell your product or service, you’d be surprised. TikTok can actually be a great place to market your business—if you do it right.
First, let’s dispel a common misconception: TikTok is not a direct sales platform. You’re not going to make a sale by posting a video of yourself holding up your product and saying, “Buy this now!” And that’s okay. Not every social media platform is conducive to making an immediate sale. That’s not what TikTok is for.
Instead, TikTok should be used as a way to build relationships with potential customers and create an emotional connection with your brand. If you can get people to like and trust your brand on TikTok, they’re more likely to buy from you. And this is where a marketing funnel comes in handy.
A social media marketing funnel is a path that your customers move through at each point of the user journey. You should have a social media marketing funnel as part of your TikTok strategy. If you need help with coming up with your strategic marketing funnel, this is an area where our MFG-SEO team can help tremendously.
Tiktok Tips for Business–My Secrets to Take TikTok Account from 0 – 10K in a month
TikTok Growth Secret Number One: Conduct Research
Create a personal account and use the search bar to explore topics. TikTok uses SEO tools to facilitate users. You can use long-tail keywords, which are great for specific questions. You will get suggestions as you type, and the “people also asked” section. Notice that I am recommending starting with a personal account first. The main reason is that you want to create a solid content strategy before starting your channel.
TikTok Growth Secret Number Two: Search for Specific Problems Within Your Niche
You can niche your content according to problems faced by the target audience. For instance, if you are a money coach, search for a relevant keyword such as “money problems in relationships.” Then, you can find questions you think potential customers want an answer to and make content accordingly.
TikTok Growth Secret Number Three: Choose a Video Style
After choosing your “winning” topics, you can select a video style. In my opinion, this is the most crucial step to drastically increase your growth. Many business owners mistake relying on sounds and trends and mimicking their niche. Avoid this mistake. Study accounts that talk about the problems you solve. But now, don’t just pay attention to the topics. Identify which videos generated the most comments and the video style they used. Here are a few questions you could use when trying to choose your video style:
Is the creator showing their face?
What kind of background do they have?
What kind of setting do they use? Are they inside their car?
Notice if they mix serious content with humor and how they do it
Do they answer questions from the audience?
Do they seem like they produce their videos, or are they casual?
Do they use editing effects or transitions? Which ones?
These lengthy steps might sound daunting to you, but believe me, I managed to boost my followers from 0 to 10K by following these steps in only a month. Plus, remember that you don’t have to do any of this. You can totally delegate it to an amazing team (hello MFG-SEO!).
TikTok Growth Secret Number Four: Editing
I’ve noticed that the quality of the video impacts the performance. Especially lightning. Also, add both, open captions and closed captions.
Do trending sounds make a TikTok video viral?
While audio might play a role in your video views, I’ve not seen consistency. In my channel, the videos that have generated the most views have been the ones with higher watch time.
TikTok Growth Secret Number Five: Thumbnail
Having a powerful thumbnail is essential. It’s quite interesting seeing how TikTokers love “clickbait” practices, especially when you push emotional boundaries.
TikTok Growth Secret Number Six: Caption and Hashtags
TikTok’s search engine is very powerful. Not only takes the content of your video by what your audio is about, but also using the text in your caption. I try to write down short lists.
Hashtags are also helpful. Pick your hashtags according to the customers’ problems you want to discuss. For instance, an author should use #booktok, #authorsoftiktok, etc. Keep in mind that viral hashtags such as #fyp won’t work.
TikTok Growth Secret Number Seven: Posting 4x Per Day
Growing your TikTok account requires consistent posting and engaging with the target audience. You must post 3-4 times a day for positive results. Here is the cadence I use on my channel:
8 am
1 pm
6 pm
8 pm
Remember that once you have questions from your audience, those will become your content. There are days when I have 20 questions that are worth an answer.
TikTok Growth Secret Number Eight: Avoid Follow for Follow
This strategy might work on Instagram, but TikTok is different. You should avoid “follow for follow” as you are not using Instagram. Search topics, engage with creators, and pay attention to your FYP. These actions will help you to make new and relatable content.
TikTok Growth Secret Number Nine: Respond to your Audience
Never ignore questions from users in the comment. When you respond to your users, they will feel valued and engaged with your content.
TikTok Growth Secret Number Ten: Advertise
TikTok’s algorithm suggests posts for boosting. I highly recommend following those suggestions as the algorithm understands which content has the potential to reach more. The healthy budget to start with post-boost is around $5 to $10 per day.
Why do you need 10,000 TikTok Followers?
The short answer: monetization.
TikTok has created a virtual gift economy for influencers that allows them to monetize their videos. Creators can earn money by streaming, tipping viewers with imaginary cash or coins (which are converted into real-world currency when gifted), and offering subscriptions where fans send payment in exchange for badges that you can customize with your brand.
TikTok requires that creators have a certain number of followers and views to access these features:
To join TikTok’s creator fund: a creator must be 18 years or older, have at least 10,000 followers, and have achieved at least 100,000 video views in a 30-day period.
To receive virtual “gifts” during a livestream: a creator must be 18 years or older and have at least 1,000 followers.
To receive “gifts” on other videos: a creator must be at least 18 years old and have at least 100,000 followers.
To receive “tips”: a creator must be at least 18 years old and have at least 100,000 followers.
No wonder you see so many creators doing livestreams with neon backgrounds!
In Conclusion
Starting a TikTok channel for your business is a great way to reach out to new audiences, promote your products or services, humanize your brand, and have some creative fun. And you don’t need any fancy equipment or editing skills—all you need is a smartphone and a willingness to have a good time. And of course, if you want to secure your TikTok marketing success, consider hiring MFG as your social media team.
The Ultimate Guide to TikTok Marketing Your Business
The case of why businesses need to be on TikTok and how to do it the right way.
With a significant hold on popular culture, TikTok is no longer an adolescent dance app. The popularity of the video-sharing site, which celebrities, Millennials, Gen Xers, and major corporations endorse, is astounding.
In just five years, TikTok has amassed an estimated 1 billion active users, rivaling some of the biggest names in social media. The post includes useful information about using TikTok and its capabilities, so you can determine why the app is so well-liked.
What Is TikTok & How Did it Get Started?
TikTok is a social media site where users can make, share, and find brief videos. The software gives content creators a platform to express themselves through lip-syncing, dancing, comedy, and singing. It also lets users make movies and share them with their social networks.
You might think that TikTok is just for people who want to dance, but that’s not the case at all!
The Algorithm
Which content will show up on your For You page is determined by the TikTok algorithm, which is a recommendation system that doesn’t need you to follow or befriend anyone. In my opinion, this is what makes TikTok unique.
Instead of having a newsfeed, TikTok has the FYP. On their For You page, no two users will watch identical videos, and the videos you see may change according to viewers’ choices and emotional conditions.
Besides the FYP, TikTok has the Discover page. This will appear by tapping the magnifying glass at the bottom of the screen. Users can navigate the Discover page and check the app’s hot videos. You’ll find some of the most recent trends on TikTok right here. “Example” videos are the initial group of videos to appear under a hashtag.
The Engagement
TikTok offers various tools for engagement, such as like, share, comment and follow options. Moreover, users can favorite the videos they like, share them, and even create content side-by-side (using the Duet feature) or grab a piece of the video (using the Stitch) feature.
Since users don’t need to be your friend or even follow you to find your content in their FYP, you’ll notice that engagement on TikTok is much higher than on other social media platforms.
How to Get More Views on TikTok
On TikTok, views are the name of the game. The time has come for you to increase your app’s visibility if you are new to this app. But it will require more than just capitalizing on the newest fads or hoping one of your videos miraculously becomes popular. You can take these steps to increase TikTok views:
Use the hashtag to reach the right people
Keep content short and engaging
Add trending sounds
Reach out to the specific audience
Try a how-to video
Collaborate with influencers
Identify the right time to post a content
Why Your Business Should Leverage TikTok Marketing
The beauty of the TikTok algorithm as a platform for people to create and express themselves, especially entertainingly, is that engagement promotes high-quality content that connects with viewers and doesn’t care how many followers you have.
Benefits of TikTok & Businesses
TikTok, in contrast to other significant social networking sites like Facebook, Instagram, and LinkedIn, allows users to produce 15, 60, and most recently, up to 3-minute videos, allowing users and businesses to create content catered to a range of demographics.
TikTok is special because it focuses on sharing relatable, interesting, and authentic bite-sized videos where users can add commentary and distinctive overlays to current popular music. Additionally, it can instantly interact with other social networking platforms, facilitating the sharing of material.
This alone creates an entire level of connection with the audience your company is trying to reach.
‘I don’t need another social networking platform,’ you might be thinking. Depending on your industry, target market, and specialty, this might sound true, but remember that it might be a long-term investment worth making for your brand.
Many businesses have found success on TikTok simply by providing access to an audience that other platforms don’t have because of the increased creativity and exposure it affords.
TikTok Marketing Benefit #2: Build Community
With an engaging and active community on TikTok, you can build a positive reputation, increase brand awareness, and achieve business growth. A community of audiences with the same interest gives a better understanding of their customers’ persona. Marketing teams can identify customers’ behavior and make crucial decisions. Moreover, you can address customer complaints, nurture advocates, and gather product feedback.
TikTok Marketing Benefit #3: Sell Products and Services
The main purpose of the social networking app TikTok is to make quick videos. It can be utilized as a marketing tactic because it makes it simple for customers to interact with brands. It is simple to post information, gain followers, and make money by leveraging your link in BIO.
The use of hashtagging, commenting, liking, and sharing features aids in brand promotion, much like any other social media platform. And there is absolutely no expense involved!
How to Use TikTok Analytics for Business
You can track viewers, followers, and other significant data to check insights about your account’s performance with the TikTok Analytics tool. You can better understand your content by seeing the precise amount of followers you have on TikTok and detailed information about the demographics of your audience. By doing so, you can make sure that your content speaks to the intended audience and encourage the growth of your following.
To use this function, you must upgrade your account to a TikTok Pro account. By doing this, you can create a profile for yourself as a creative or a business for free. Once your profile is set up for it, checking your TikTok analytics is simple.
Understanding the Value of Your TikTok Marketing
In a way, TikTok and TikTok for Business resemble the Wild West of social media. Since it is such a new medium, nobody knows how to use it effectively.
However, it also means that your company has many fantastic opportunities to set the bar high. If you make a breakthrough, you can end up creating brand-new paradigms for content and advertising.
Overall, there is no substitute for getting your hands dirty and experimenting with TikTok marketing. If you haven’t already, download the app, watch a few videos, and determine whether it works for your company’s marketing plan.
If you are considering using TikTok marketing for business, consider consulting experts. At MFG, we help businesses to promote their brand with TikTok marketing. Want to learn more? Let’s schedule a call.
Wondering what works better: social media or SEO? Let’s see the numbers.
The ongoing debate of social media vs SEO is one that has raged on for years. And, as someone who works in digital marketing, I can tell you that it’s one that I deal with on a daily basis, as we are constantly comparing the performance of our social media campaigns with our SEO efforts, to see which marketing channel is bringing the most ROI for our clients.
So, which one should you focus on?
Of course, as with most things in life, the best way to achieve both goals is to use a combination of both SEO and Social Media. But it’s still important to understand the strengths and weaknesses of each so that you can create a strategy that makes the most sense for your business.
So what’s the big difference between SEO and Social Media?
The biggest difference between internet users and social media users is how they use those mediums. So it’s not like one marketing channel is better than the other. They serve different purposes.
For example: let’s say you want to plan a trip to Alaska. You probably will start on Google, searching things like “Best places to visit in Alaska”, “Traveling tips Alaska”, etc. You might discover a particular hotel and get curious and check them out on social media.
The above example is called a “future buyers journey”. Successful brands leverage their online presence by amplifying each channel. They want to be at the top of their future buyers’ minds, to the point that you’ll see them everywhere. And if you pay close attention, you might have noticed a promotional email about a product that you were mentioning in a private conversation with a friend. How does that happen? That’s called remarketing.
The more you know about their journey, the better you will be able to use both, your internet real estate (your website) and social media real estate (Instagram, Facebook, TikTok, Youtube, etc.) to get them to buy from you.
If you’re not sure how your buyers are finding you, a good place to start is by configuring your Google Analytics and Google Search Console. These free tools from Google will give you insights into how people are finding your website and what they’re doing once they get there. Armed with this information, you can work with an online marketing strategist to create a more targeted marketing strategy that will help you reach your target audience more effectively.
How do SEO and social media work together?
SEO and social media are two of the most important aspects of online marketing. When used together, they can be incredibly effective in driving traffic and conversions.
Google Analytics is a great way to see how SEO and social media are working together. By looking at the top visited pages, you can get a good idea of which keywords and phrases are driving traffic. You can then use this information to create targeted campaigns that attract buyers in the consideration phase.
When done correctly, SEO and social media can be a powerful combination that helps you drive traffic and conversions.
The graphic below is a snapshot of Google Analytics from one of our e-commerce clients. They hired us with the specific goal of increasing their conversions. We knew that focusing on one area of online marketing wasn’t enough.
We took the top visited pages and conducted a behavior analysis, to come up with a refined conversion path. This gave us the chance to outline campaigns to promote their winning products across social media and Google, both organic and paid.
The results of combining SEO and Social Media?
Powerful.
How did we help our client increase purchase conversions by 323% in just 5 months?
I wish I could tell you it was just ONE thing that helped our client increase purchase conversions by 323% in just 5 months. But it wasn’t. Instead, it was data-driven decision-making, a team effort, brand integration, and enhanced ROAS reporting that did the trick.
By focusing only on activities with a higher ROI and setting up a multi-disciplinary team to handle creative, design, copywriting, and SEO, we were able to produce results that far surpassed the client’s expectations. And by working closely with the client’s dedicated team, we were able to ensure that all of our content was on brand.
Finally, by enhancing our ROAS reporting using Google Data Studio, enhanced with Super Metrics API, we were able to provide the client with even greater insights into our performance.
All of these factors came together to produce truly impressive results. While we noticed that social media drove sales, conversions from Google searches (both organic and paid) generated the vast majority of the conversions.
See the graphic below where it shows a Multi-Channel Conversion Visualizer.
In this particular case, we advised our client to shift their marketing budget to allocate less for their social media marketing and push further their SEO projects.
And this takes us to discuss the scarcest resource: TIME!
How much time you’ll need for your social media vs SEO?
Social media can help you reach a target audience who will feel a connection with your brand and will become your advocators. But in order to do that successfully, you’ll need to be “sociable”, which means:
Generate highly valuable content, tailored for the platform
Post frequently
Engage with your followers
Get vulnerable
Collaborate with other creators
Build a funnel so you can turn your followers into customers
A plan to grow a social channel such as TikTok takes about 2 hours per day (60 hrs per month), and this includes:
Watch trends to come up with content ideas
Create the videos
Edit the videos
Come up with catchy titles
Monitor analytics to find the best times to post
Post your videos
Monitor comments
Reply comments
This process is for each post
Expect to post 3-4 times per day
Social media channels bring a great opportunity for business owners, especially when we consider the increase in online and digital activities caused by The Pandemic. Therefore, even if you don’t have the 60 hours per month to keep up with your social media, outsourcing those activities can be a game changer for your business.
When it comes to time invested by business owners in their SEO efforts, is very minimal in comparison to social media. SEO tasks can be done by your SEO team, with very little effort from your end as a business owner. And this is a BIG PLUS for SEO services versus social media services.
For instance, in the example where we increased purchase conversions by 323% in just 5 months, we haven’t needed our client in order to do our SEO work. And this is possible when you hire the right talent for your marketing and sales needs.
Local SEO vs Social Media for local business owners
For local businesses, generating foot traffic from people nearby is key. So how do local business owners get more traffic?
The following is an example of a local business that was using only social media to promote its food. The business owner had a website with 3 pages: The home page, menu page, and contact us page, but no additional content. However, their social channels were active and they hit close to 5,000 followers. Because of that word of mouth, all their website traffic was from people who knew their business name. Although this is good, it’s not enough.
We combined SEO and Content Marketing SEO to drive website traffic from people who were looking for their food. We wrote blog articles around topics like “10 Best Places to Eat in [city]” and then optimized those pages for the city they’re in. So when someone Googled that query, our client’s website would show up. Because our client’s restaurant was one of the best in the city, people would click through and come to their website. From there, some would decide to visit the restaurant or order takeout/delivery.
This is just one example of how you can use SEO and Social Media together to grow your business. By creating great content and promoting it on social media and through other channels (like email marketing), you can attract new customers and grow your business. And if you track your progress with Google Search Console, you can see exactly how well your efforts are performing over time!
Does posting on social media help SEO?
If you’re wondering whether posting on social media will help your SEO, the answer is a little complicated. Technically speaking, social channels are separate from Google, so your activity on the site won’t directly impact your ranking in search results. However, that doesn’t mean that there’s no connection between the two, as we’ve discussed earlier.
In Conclusion
Social media and SEO are two of the most important tools in a marketer’s toolkit. When used together, they can provide an incredible boost to your visibility and reach. However, it’s important to remember that they are just tools – you’ll still need a comprehensive strategy to get the best results.
If you’re not sure where to start, the best thing you can do is to hire a team of experts who can help you develop a comprehensive marketing strategy.
I might be biased, but I personally think that here at MFG Agency, we have one of the most amazing resources! You’ll be able to make the most of social media and SEO, and you’ll see a real difference in your bottom line.
Are You A Construction Company Or A Construction Brand?
Wondering if you are a construction brand or a business? Advice from a Brand Marketing Agency.
James has done some small construction jobs and his customers have been sharing the results on social media. His business is booming. Quote requests are coming in almost daily. He’s so busy that is already sending business to other construction companies. But there’s one problem. James has no time to do anything else but work. Jenny is not feeling well, despite her success. She has a toddler and mom guilt keeps her up all night.
Can you relate with James? Is your construction business booming and now you’re starting to feel like this is too much?
Keep reading, ‘cause we are giving you our ultimate recipe to building a profitable construction business.
What’s a construction brand anyway?
A construction brand is a company that is known for its quality workmanship, customer service, and use of technology. A construction brand differentiates itself from the competition by having a clear identity that is communicated through all aspects of the business.
The best construction brands understand that it’s not just about the work they do, but also how they do it. They are constantly innovating and improving their processes. They treat their employees well and invest in their development. They focus on the customer experience and always deliver what they promise.
What are the 5 benefits of branding?
There are countless benefits to branding your construction company. Here are just a few:
Increased visibility: A strong brand will make your construction company more visible in the marketplace and help you attract new customers.
Improved customer loyalty: Brand loyal customers are more likely to return to your company for future projects and recommend you to their friends and family.
Greater employee satisfaction: Employees who feel proud to work for a well-respected company are more likely to be productive and happy in their jobs.
Access to new markets: A strong brand can help you enter into new markets and expand your business.
Increased profits: Companies with strong brands typically outperform their competitors and enjoy higher profits.
In our example, if James wants to grow more revenue, he needs fewer clients with larger contracts. And that’s going to happen if he attracts those sales leads using construction brand marketing.
If you’re ready to take your construction company to the next level, it’s time to start thinking about branding. Branding will give you a competitive edge and help you build a successful business that lasts.
What’s Involved in the Branding Process?
The first step in branding your construction company is to define your brand. What makes your company unique? What do you want to be known for?
Once you have a clear understanding of your brand, you need to start communicating it to the world. This involves everything from choosing the right name and logo to developing a website and social media strategy. You also need to make sure that all of your marketing materials, from business cards to proposal templates, reflect your brand in a cohesive way.
Should you build a local brand?
Building a local brand has a lot of benefits.
For starters, it’s a great way to build trust with your community. When people see your company name and logo around town, they’ll start to associate it with quality workmanship and customer service. This can help you attract new customers and win repeat business.
Another benefit of building a local brand is that it can help you stand out from the competition. There are a lot of construction companies out there, so it’s important to find a way to differentiate yourself.
How do you develop a local brand? Start answering these questions:
What made you start your construction company
What’s your business story
Who is your ideal customer
What are your company values
What’s your company culture like
What sets you apart from the competition
Pro tip: Successful branding begins with a well-defined story that is RELATABLE to your market.
Your company name, logo, and tagline should help you share your brand story. And if you already have a name, but you recognize that it doesn’t help you share a story, you can always add a strong tagline.
For example, if your company name is Sunshine Construction Inc. and you want to localize your business name, you can do it by adding a tagline. Sunshine Construction – Builder in Central Texas.
Keep in mind that people will be talking about you and they will Google you! For this reason, your brand story should be shared prominently on your website, business cards, and other marketing materials.
You also need to get involved in your community. Sponsor a little league team or donate to a local charity. Attend networking events and host open houses. The more people see your company name and logo, the more likely they are to remember it when they need construction services.
A construction brand example
A great example of a construction brand is M / I Homes. They identify themselves asone of the Nation’s Leading Home Builders. Their brand name has built online equity, based on how many people search “mi homes” online. Google has over 500,000 results for its brand name.
M I Homes has positioned itself to stand out from the crowd for its values. And this is a key element of building a successful brand. When you visit their website, you will be able to learn about their story, what makes them unique, and what are some of the processes and methods that they use that are different from other construction companies.
SEO (Search Engine Optimization) is key
As we mentioned earlier, your future buyers will Google you. This is where a great SEO marketing strategy comes handy.
SEO will help your website rank higher in Google search results when potential customers are looking for construction companies in your area.
The benefits of SEO go beyond just ranking higher in Google. A strong SEO strategy will help you:
Generate more leads
Build trust and credibility
Attract high-quality prospects
Increase brand awareness
SEO is a complex and ever-changing field, so it’s important to partner with a company that specializes in construction SEO. They will be able to help you identify the keywords that potential customers are using to find companies like yours and ensure that your website is optimized for those keywords.
Below is an example of M / I Homes online presence. They use effective SEO content strategies that have helped them gain brand recognition. And we say this, not because we work with them. We can find out how is a brand positioned online by using SEO tools.
What are the top construction brands?
Based on our research, the following are the top 5 construction brands in the U.S.:
Pulte Homes
Centex
Perry Homes
Ryan Homes
Taylor Morrison
Use this list and see which of these brands are your “hero brand”. Notice how they communicate their brand story, their values, their culture, and how they connect with their audience on social media.
Keep in mind, that this list is simply based on search visibility. Not in revenue.
Wondering if you should build a brand or build a business or both? How does that look like? Advice from a Brand Marketing Agency.
When it comes to your product launch strategy, it will require the right blend of approaches. I compare a brand success with a plane. Ever wonder how does a plane fly? It flies because of four forces. The four forces are lift, thrust, drag, and weight.
Let’s take these four forces and relate it to your product launch. First, you have to have a great product. This is what I consider the “lift” force. Your product has to be able to take off and fly on its own. You can have the greatest marketing strategy in the world, but if your product stinks, it will never get off the ground.
Second, you need the “thrust” force. This is your go-to market strategy. It’s how you’re going to generate demand for your product.
Third, you need to consider the “drag” force. This is all of the things that can slow down or hinder your product from taking off.
Fourth and finally, you need to consider the “weight” force. This is your overall business strategy. How much money are you willing to invest in this product? Is it a cash cow or a loss leader?
These are all important factors to consider when launching your product.
With a great marketing campaign can help create a successful product launch. But then what? How do you make a sustainable business outside of that one great launch? This is where a conversation about how to become a successful and sustainable brand comes handy.
Let’s dive in.
If you’re about to launch a product, you might want to consider launching your brand first. And we’re not talking about waiting years until having an amazing brand. Building a successful brand can be done in less than six months. In some cases, depending on the level of influence of the people behind it, it can be even quicker.
So what is a brand, anyway?
Since brand and branding are two of the most misused concepts, let’s clarify what do we mean by brand, so we can be on the same page.
When we say that you need a brand, we’re not talking about your logo, colors, and website. That’s branding. A graphic designer will take care of that part. However, that alone won’t share the story of your business.
As Jeff Bezos famously said, “Your brand is what people say about you when you’re not in the room.” And this isn’t different, whether you are building a personal brand or a business brand.
You didn’t start a business without a reason, right? So what it is? What’s the story? What’s the problem you want to solve? Is the impact in people’s lives worth sharing?
Pro tip: Successful branding begins with a well-defined story that is RELATABLE to your market.
Some of the benefits of building a brand before launching a product include:
1) You gain customer loyalty
By building a strong brand, you create loyalty among your customers. They’re more likely to continue using your products and recommend them to others.
2) You build a connection that keeps users coming for more
A strong brand connection means customers are more likely to come back for more. They’ll also be more likely to try new products from your company, as they know they can trust your brand.
3) It gives your team a sense of direction and motivation
Launching a product can be a daunting task. By having a clear brand identity, you can give your team a sense of direction and purpose. This will make them more motivated to work on the product and see it through to launch.
4) You can grow a bigger digital footprint
A strong brand presence online can help you reach more potential customers. It can also help with search engine optimization, as potential customers are more likely to find your product if they know your brand.
5) It can help with reputation management
In today’s digital age, it’s important to have a good reputation online. By launching your brand first, you can start to build a positive reputation before your product even launches. This can help ensure that customers have a positive experience with your product and are more likely to recommend it to others.
How do you share a brand story?
Now that you’re inspired to consider taking some time and resources to build your company brand, let’s go over some brand stories, starting with Tesla.
So how does Tesla do it?
How has Tesla become one of the most valuable car companies in the world without spending a dime on advertising? It all comes down to storytelling. Tesla tells its story through its product. Every Tesla is designed to be the safest, quickest, and most pleasurable car to drive. They are constantly innovating and pushing the limits of what’s possible with electric vehicles. As a result, Tesla has built a strong emotional connection with its customers. And when you have a strong emotional connection with your customers, they will do your marketing for you.
Pro tip: When you build a strong emotional connection with your customers, they will do your marketing for you.
As you might have noticed, Facebook rebranded recently and changed its name from Facebook to Meta.
Why did Facebook change its name to Meta?
Zuckerberg said it was time to turn the page on a new chapter. Meta’s name is directly related to metaverse, a new world built in virtual reality.
In reality, Facebook’s move was smart. The social platform had been under fire for spreading misinformation and other issues, so rebranding gave them a chance to give the media a new story.
You would figure that this time, Meta needed to come up strong, from the get-go. And they did. One of my favorite examples of how they’re sharing Meta’s brand story is their magical gate at Austin-Bergstrom International Airport (AUS), transforming one of the terminal’s gate areas and adding 120 fantastical new air service destinations to the airport.
When you’re at Meta’s imaginary gate, you’ll see their imaginary destinations. Smart move! A great way to generate stories – at the emotional level!
Do you see a pattern here?
A great brand story tells the narrative of your brand, including where you’ve come from and where you are going. A great brand story must be true, authentic, and honest. It cannot be made up or derived; consumers sniff out inauthenticity in a heartbeat and will punish you for it.
Launching a product without first building a brand can be risky. Customers may not know who you are or what you stand for, and they may not be as likely to take a chance on your product. By launching your brand first, you can create awareness and build trust with potential customers before you even launch your product.
Great brands have great brand marketing
Brand marketing is promoting a brand’s products or services in a way that elevates the brand as a whole. It involves creating and maintaining brand-consumer relationships and marketing brand attributes—the traits that people think of when they picture a particular brand.
In Conclusion
Building a brand is essential to the success of any business, whether you’re just starting out or have been in the game for years. It’s what sets you apart from your competition and allows you to create a connection with your consumers.
How Much Does It Cost To Hire An Instagram Manager?
This article is a comprehensive look at the services of an Instagram manager, what they entail and how much you might expect to pay.
You’re a small business owner and you want to hire someone to help you with your Instagram account. But how much does it cost to hire an Instagram manager?
The short answer is that it depends on the services you need and the experience of the person you’re hiring.
Instagram Management Services in Austin: Job Description
A social media manager is responsible for creating and executing a social media strategy in order to grow the online presence of a business or brand.
Duties Of A Social Media Manager May Include:
Creating and posting content on behalf of the business or brand
Monitoring and responding to comments and messages
Analyzing analytics to gauge the reach and effectiveness of posts
Generating new ideas for content and strategies
Collaborating with other team members, such as designers and marketers.
The Skills Needed To Be A Social Media Manager Include:
Excellent written and verbal communication skills
Strong organizational skills
The ability to multitask
Creativity
A deep understanding of social media platforms and their algorithms
Basic graphic design skills
Basic SEO knowledge.
Is It Worth Hiring A Social Media Manager Just For Instagram?
Should you hire them for all the social media channels? Which one is the best?
This question comes very frequently, especially when you’re preparing a new marketing plan and want to make sure you’re staying on top of your game. And if you haven’t refreshed your marketing plan and want to know the top marketing strategies, consider reading this.
If you’re a small business owner with a limited budget, you may want to consider hiring a social media manager just for Instagram. This will allow you to focus your resources on one platform, and you’ll be able to work with someone who is an expert on Instagram.
If you’re a larger business with a bigger budget, you may want to consider hiring a social media manager for all of your social media channels. This will give you a cohesive social media strategy across all platforms and allow you to take advantage of the different strengths of each platform.
The best way to decide is to sit down and assess your goals. Do you want to grow your audience or do you want to simply keep your presence active? Do you want to generate website traffic from Instagram? What about leads and sales? The more specific you are about your goals, the better.
What Does Instagram Management Include?
A typical Instagram management contract includes:
Content strategy
Content creation
Content writing
Account monitoring
Technical support to troubleshoot your account
And depending on the expertise of the Instagram Manager, they might be able to offer you other advanced Instagram Marketing Services such as:
Instagram Ads
Instagram search engine optimization (SEO)
Keyword optimization
Analytics
Tracking
Advanced Reporting
Trends
But it’s important to remember that a lot of what goes into running a successful Instagram account is not included in a typical management contract.
What’s Not Included In Typical Instagram Management Services?
Some of the things that are not typically included in an Instagram management contract are:
Professional photography
Multi-format posting
Website management
Advertising
Outreach
Community building
Community management.
These services can be extremely valuable for growing your business, but they come at an additional cost.
What About Social Media Branding?
Your Instagram Manager isn’t expected to develop your brand. You can’t hire a plumber and ask them to paint your counters!
While some Instagram Management packages offer some branding and style, the scope of what they offer is limited. However, they might offer social media branding services.
Social media branding is the process of creating a unique and consistent identity for your business or brand across all social media platforms. This includes everything from your profile picture and cover photo to the tone and voice you use in your posts and it’s normally done during the first month of starting your Instagram Marketing Services.
Creating a strong social media brand is important because it helps you stand out from the crowd and makes you more recognizable to your target audience. It also makes it easier for people to connect with you and builds trust.
Keep in mind that a social media manager is not a branding expert or a graphic designer. They will be able to do basic design, but you should not expect them to be an expert designer. If you need both branding and social media management services, hiring a digital marketing agency will be your best option, since you will have all the services done by one team.
The Rise Of Content Creation Services
For businesses that have an in-house social media marketing team, outsourcing the content creation makes sense.
A content creator is a professional who creates content for social media, websites, and other online platforms. This can include everything from blog posts and articles to videos and graphics.
Content creators are important because they help you create valuable content that will attract and engage your target audience. Without high-quality content, your social media presence will suffer.
There are a lot of different types of content creators, and the type you need will depend on your business goals and the platforms you’re using. For example, if you’re focused on Instagram, you’ll need someone who is good at creating visuals. And now that the platform is preferring short videos, you might want to consider content creation services.
Why Get Content Creation Services Instead of Full Instagram Management Services?
Any successful social media presence these days requires engaging content. This is especially true on a visual platform like Instagram. Static images just don’t cut it anymore- users want to see innovation and creativity. That’s where content creation services come in. When you work with a content creation team, you’ll get high-quality, engaging content that is planned and strategized specifically for your brand. This will help you to attract new followers and keep your existing ones engaged. Additionally, it can be much easier to scale your content production when you have a team working on it, rather than trying to do everything yourself. So if you’re looking to take your Instagram presence to the next level, content creation services are the way to go.
Our content creation services package includes:
Content planning
Graphic design
Reels planning
Account analysis
Reporting
You’ll get your Instagram Content Plan with captions and images ready to post.
How Much Is Social Media Management Per Month?
According to the freelancer platform Upwork, the following are rates that other freelancers are charging clients for social media content management: Entry Level (social media posting, virtual assistant duties): $15-$50/hr. Intermediate (social media posting, content creation, and community management): $50-$100/hr. Expert (content marketing, blogging, and SEO skills): $125- $225/hr.
Another factor to consider is that the average total compensation for a Social Media Manager in the US is about $75,000 per year. This represents roughly $7,000 per month (with employment tax). Just for one employee.
Hiring A Marketing Agency Makes Total Sense
You’ll save money in payroll
The agency will take care of giving you the right account manager
You will be able to receive a plethora of digital marketing services beyond social media
No headaches of managing staff
No more missing opportunities, due to not having time!
Hiring someone to help you with your Instagram account is an important decision, but it doesn’t have to be a difficult one. By taking the time to find the right person for the job and being clear about your needs, you can ensure that your Instagram account is in good hands.
Instagram Marketing Services in Austin
If you’re ready to take your Instagram account to the next level, let’s chat.
We are a full-service Instagram agency in Austin that can help you with all of your Instagram needs, from content creation to community management, branding, website, SEO & Adwords.
We’ll work with you to create a custom plan that fits your budget and your business goals.
7 Applications That Will Help You Create Content For Social Media
Learn how to create a content strategy and 7 applications that will make your content creation process faster.
When it comes to social media, one of the most important things is to be seen. In order to be seen and build trust with an audience, you need speed. And that can be the hardest part.
What does content mean in social media?
Content on social media can be anything from a blog post, to an Instagram caption, to a Facebook status update. In order to be successful on social media, you need to be creating content regularly.
If you want to grow on social media, you’ll need a content marketing strategy for your social media, to achieve results without wasting time.
Steps to create a content marketing strategy:
1. Know your audience: you can’t create content that appeals to everyone, so you need to know who you’re trying to reach with your content.
2. Set goals: what do you want to achieve with your content? Is it to generate leads, or to build brand awareness?
3. Research. Competitor research is the process of investigating your competitor’s online presence, in order to understand what they’re doing well and where there are opportunities for you to do better.
This is important because it allows you to learn from your competitor’s successes and avoid their mistakes. It also helps you keep up with the latest trends in your industry so that you can stay ahead of the curve.
There are a few different ways to do competitor research for social media. One way is to simply look at their social media accounts and see what kind of content they’re posting, how often they’re posting it, and what kind of engagement they’re getting.
4. Create a calendar. A social media editorial calendar is a document that outlines the content you’ll be posting on each social media platform for a specific period of time. It doesn’t have to be fancy.
This is important because it helps you stay organized and prevents you from forgetting to post or running out of ideas.
Pro tip: avoid confusing tactics with strategy. A tactic is a specific action or activity that you undertake in order to achieve your desired outcome. A strategy is a high-level plan that outlines the overall approach you’ll take to achieve your desired outcome. What you post should be related to your overarching goal
How often to post on social media?
The answer to this question varies depending on the platform you’re using and the goals you’re trying to achieve.
If you’re trying to build brand awareness, for example, you’ll want to post more frequently than if you’re trying to generate leads. And if you’re just getting started on social media, you may want to post more often at first in order to gain traction and grow your audience.
As a general rule, it’s a good idea to post at least once a day on each platform you’re using. But if you can’t commit to that, don’t worry. Just do the best you can and try to be consistent.
The more people who see your content, the more likely you are to achieve your goals.
Understanding the Engagement Algorithm:
The Instagram algorithm is always changing, but the one constant is that engagement is key. The more people who engage with your content (likes, comments, shares), the more likely it is to be seen by others.
There are a few things you can do to encourage engagement on your posts:
Use hashtags. Hashtags are a great way to reach new people who are interested in the same thing as you. When you use relevant hashtags, your content is more likely to be seen by people who are searching for that hashtag.
Use calls to action. Asking your followers to do something (like comment or tag a friend) is a great way to encourage engagement.
Be interactive or engaging: this means that your content should encourage comments, likes, or shares.
Be timely. Posting about trends or current events is a great way to get people talking.
Be personal. Showing your personality and sharing your story is a great way to connect with your audience. Connect people or maintain connections: this means that your content should be interesting and valuable to your audience, and help them connect with each other.
Provide value to all parties included in this social exchange: this means that your content should not only be valuable to you, but also to your audience.
Now that we’ve gone over what content is and how to create a content strategy, let’s talk about the applications.
7 Applications That Will Make Your Content Creation Process Faster.
1. Etsy – This popular platform is full of designers who offer ready-to-plug templates. For example, if you are marketing your lashes business, finding Instagram templates for lashes studios will help you speed up the process.
2. Canva – This online design platform offers a wide variety of easy-to-use tools for creating visuals. Canva pro features are affordable and will allow you to create your brand assets, save templates, create folders, and much more! Your ultimate goal is to create high-quality content without spending too much time.
3. Jasper – This AI-powered tool can help pump out captions for your content. AI content is here to stay!
4. Fiverr.com – This is a platform where you can find freelancers. You can get a full month’s worth of content with captions and graphics from this freelancing platform. Expect to pay between $200 and $250 for 20 posts.
5. Google Search Console – This free tool from Google can help you research and optimize your content for better visibility. Knowing what content has attracted traffic to your website will help you refine your content.
6. Loom – This screen recording tool can be helpful for creating quick how-to videos or other types of content. The best part? It will generate a translation so you can turn audio into text easily.
7. Monday – This project management tool has templates where you can create your social media calendar with a few clicks. Again, the goal is to save time!
If you’re looking to grow foot traffic to your retail store or service-based business, implementing location-based marketing will help.
Intro
Building a community around your brand can be really important for a number of reasons.
First of all, it can help you to build loyalty and encourage repeat customers. When people feel like they belong to a community, they’re more likely to stick with your brand instead of trying out competitors.
Secondly, a community can act as a powerful marketing tool. People are more likely to buy from brands that they feel connected to, and they’re also more likely to recommend products to their friends and family.
Finally, building a community can help you to gather feedback and learn from your customers. You can use this feedback to improve your products and services, making your brand even stronger.
So there’s no doubt that building a community is important for brands.
The question is, how do you go about doing it?
We are going to discuss all about these things in this detailed article. So let us begin!
Importance of Community Building for Brands
Community building is a key player in understanding and running business-related tasks efficiently. The community of a brand is a direct measure of its popularity and needs in a particular region in most cases. For example, established brands like Nike, Addidas, and Puma all have extensive communities.
Community building helps transfer the power of their brand into the hands of the people rather than focusing on traditional advertising only.
It focuses on changing the focus from transactions to storytelling to create a more personal bond.
The trend helps with authenticating information from brands which is highly popular in today’s Gen Z.
Community Building and Brand Visibility
There are several reasons why building a strong community is a must for better brand visibility. Some of these reasons include that people do not rely on traditional adverts nowadays. Instead, online reviews, first-hand experiences, and customer-generated content all play a vital role in creating and maintaining a brand’s image. Let us discuss some examples of these online communities for better understanding.
Following are some benefits that these community-building tactics and increased foot traffic can help you reap:
Gain access to customers
Get to know customers better
Create better experiences
Influence brand conversations
Impact user-generated content
Affordable and less costly market research
Improve awareness and sentiments about your brand, and display it as more than a brand.
Get rich insights using simple and effective matters.
Co-create with customers and improve services, processes, and products.
Reduce support and marketing costs.
Improve customer participation in your brand
Examples of Community Building and Brand Visibility
Following are some examples where brands improved their visibility, recognition, and existence using community building methods.
LEGO Ideas
LEGO ideas are an optimal example of a well-branded company. It has over 1.8 million users who stay connected online for their love towards LEGO products. They have increased their members to an additional half a million since March of last year. However, the community first began with adult customers found in the industry.
However, the group now welcomes everyone regardless of their age. However, you need parental permission and love for LEGO products to become a part of the brand community.
LEGO Ideas has taken the idea of a community much further and is now using a different approach. They encourage members to discuss new additions or changes in existing products to help the brand grow.
There are three main sections on the site that the users can choose from. These include the following:
Activities: are fun exercises for members to enhance their creative skills.
Contests: compete with other LEGO for rare items and prizes
Product Ideas: Users become LEGO Fan Designers by submitting their ideas and plans to the brand.
Beauty Insider Community (Sephora)
Sephora is a dedicated space for makeup enthusiasts and people who wish to make a difference in the industry. People can come together, post their concerns, questions and take photos of things they like for learning and growth.
Even though it might seem very small, the Sephora group has hugely impacted the industry. It has also helped brands and makeup companies adopt the feedback from the customers for better products and necessary changes. People are also using the platform to test out new looks and experiment with what is available.
The best part is that you do not have to be a makeup expert to join it. Instead, it is more of a learning opportunity for everyone.
How can you start a brand community for your business?
Creating a brand community can be a great way to build loyalty and create advocates for your business. But how do you get started?
The first step is to identify where your potential customers are congregating online. This could be a specific social media platform, an online forum, or even a blog or website.
Once you’ve found your audience, start engaging with them. Comment on their posts, answer their questions, and share their content.
You should also create your own content that is relevant to your brand and share it with the community.
As you build relationships with members of the community, you’ll start to establish yourself as a trusted authority on your brand.
And as the community grows, you’ll have a built-in group of loyal customers and promoters.
Community and Foot Traffic Trends to Follow
We understand that community building and improving foot traffic is a long process and requires time. However, there are some trends that we recommend exploring in 2022!
Talk to Your Audience Like They Are Your Friend
Try to answer your audience’s problems like they are your own, and the community will start prioritizing you.
Don’t Sell Products but Value
Try to share valuable suggestions and advice instead of selling your products and boosting your business.
Encourage Your Team Members To Be Social
Hold social events and interactive opportunities for community members.
Add Entertainment And Humor
Ensure you entertain your audience with good humor and entertainment suggestions.
Use Short Videos
We suggest adding brand-related short videos for more interaction with users.
Leverage Real-Time Social Media
You can use real-time Instagram and Facebook options to market your products and create better communities for users.
Join Virtual Groups: Facebook And Linkedin
Creating and joining virtual groups on Facebook and Linkedin can help get a better view of the audience’s wants.
Be Sure That Your Website Reflects Your Values
Try to make your site content as relatable and valuable as possible. Always design your about us page most interestingly.
Be Consistent
Do not rush things and give the community to adapt to new changes you make for growth.
Collaborate
Do not shy away from other brands or users that wish to work with you. It will be an additional marketing section for your business too.
Bottom Line
Foot traffic and community building go hand in hand to a great extent. Improving your community can help you reap better benefits for your other projects in the future. It may take some time, but following an honest/transparent attitude, providing engagement with values and sentiment, staying active through the community pages, are all simple yet effective tools for better foot traffic and community building.
TikTok is a social media platform that presents 15-60 second short videos. Learn all about its marketing trends in this detailed article.
Tik Tok: The Revolution in Social Media Marketing
TikTok has recently grown into one of the most successful social media platforms for users worldwide. But, many people do not understand why this is the case? Let us talk about TikTok marketing and why it matters for companies looking for social media marketing trends.
TikTok has had over 1 billion users ever since its launch back in 2016. What’s more interesting is that TikTok claims that it has over another billion active users on the platform. This is an extraordinary number, and the kind of exposure creators can get is quite promising. Many people think getting into the platform is difficult, but that is not the case.
Many people wish to become a part of TikTok because they understand what it means to have huge exposure to their marketing tactics. TikTok is large enough to have an audience right away. This makes it the perfect time for TikTok marketing trends ad adoption. We suggest you stop waiting because the time is now. You can use the platform to understand why it is here to stay.
Why is TikTok different than any other social media?
People are also talking about how TikTok is different from other mainstream social media platforms that you will come across. Following are some of the pointers that make it unique compared to other social media sources you can find:
Increased creative opportunities
Exposure to audience
Content creation ease and options
Different from the rest
Does not have an age boundary
Tik Tok and Creator Investment
TikTok is also focusing on improving things for content creators on the platform. This includes everything from setting a budget to adding easier follower gaining options on the platform. We will add some examples and explain how TikTok is focusing on empowering its content creators.
A great example of this act is The Reeses Guy, where TikTok invested a lot of money to help him create more content. The profile owner had a unique style, entertained audiences, and loved trying new things to keep things interactive.
Similarly, TikTok has other plentiful options too. For instance, a brand can tap into highly creative user-generated content! A good example is Oreo’s official TikTok Account. He currently has 55.3K Followers and stands as one of the fastest-growing profiles on TikTok.
Understanding the Tik Tok Audience
Users need to understand the TikTok audience to be successful on the platform. Here’s a full breakdown of the user and their stats on TikTok:
25% of TikTok’s active user accounts in the U.S. are people aged 10-19.
22.4% of TikTok’s active user accounts in the U.S. are 20-29.
21.7% of TikTok’s active user accounts in the U.S. are 30-39.
20.3% of TikTok’s active user accounts in the U.S. are 40-49.
11% of TikTok’s active user accounts in the U.S. are 50+.
53% of TikTok users in the USA are between ages 30 and over.
However, this application is no longer for children either, as you will find leading brands competing for exposure on TikTok.
Marketing Trends on Tik Tok
While Tik Tok offers plenty of content marketing strategies and options, it also becomes difficult for most businesses to stay ahead of the competition. While no one can say what kind of content usually becomes viral, some indicators can be helpful.
These indicators represent what makes good content on Tik Tok. You can also think of it as a formula to create content that most audience groups will like. Incorporating these elements into your Tik Tok content will help you have better online reach and visibility. Some of these include:
Trendy Audio
The biggest reason for Tik Tok videos to get viral is over their track. While these tracks have no particular genre; they can help you viral your content and increase your profile marketing. Some popular tracks on Tik Tok include Stay- by Justin Bieber. Similarly, Ameno (commonly known as the Dorime track) is another popular option for humorous Tik Tok videos.
There are other songs and track collections for dancing videos and similar entertainment content. Therefore, picking the right track for your Tik Tok videos can help you maximize your response and followers on your account. Notice that these tracks won’t get viral immediately, but they may happen to you if you are lucky enough.
Seamless Transitions
Transition videos are another popular Tik Tok content option that most creators like. These transitions include everything from Turn on the T.V., Turn off the T.V., Slip, Scroll, Horizon, Vertical, Rotate, Circle, etc. These seamless transitions are relatively difficult to make but look visually appealing.
Additionally, it is important to note that these transitions should have some interesting changes, rather than just scenery changes. Coupling these kinds of videos will a beat-drop track also works well.
Vulnerable Stories
While social media accounts focus on making creators’ lives look perfect and awe-filled, showing vulnerable stories is another popular mode of videos on the platform. People love to see short videos of people who have gone through trauma or pain in the past. This can include anyone from celebrities to non-specialists.
Most people show great support for these videos because they have an empathetic theme. The most common examples are abuse stories, theft, heartbreaks, etc. People are also doing glow-up videos after a tragic event to show that life goes on and things get better over time.
Behind the Scenes
Audiences love taking a dip into the content-making process. For this, they love seeing bloopers and additional behind the scene footage. These kinds of videos are very simple to make, as it just consists of the video-making processes. A good place to start for videos like these is the @SmilesquadComedyChannel, known for its short skits.
A Day in Your Life
A big portion of the Tiktok videos also consists of the “A day in your life” theme, which revolves around experiencing a famous content creator’s life from their POV. This usually includes their schedule, diet, daily activities, likes, dislikes, etc.
Celeb fans love this kind of content as it lets them have a closer look at their favorite creator’s personal life. You may also see these kinds of content creators doing something good to send a social message and give back to the community at the same time.
However, we suggest that you create this kind of content only when you have many followers or have something special to share.
Bottom Line
The content marketing trends on Tik Tok also keep changing like other social media platforms. However, basic steps like choosing the right track, targeting your audience correctly, adding behind-the-scenes footage, and adding vulnerable content will help you improve your Tik Tok followers.
It is alright if you do not get the response you desire right away because it takes time for these things to happen. If you need more tips, suggestions, and advice for your Tik Tok account marketing, feel free to contact us.
When paying it forward goes right! – Spectrum Reach Exclusive
Spectrum Reach, Charter Communications’ advertising sales unit, has launched a national campaign committing $50 million in media, resources, and creative services to help businesses reach and engage multicultural audiences. Marketing For Greatness was selected as the official partner of the “Pay it Forward” program and we are proud to announce the lucky winners!
If you’re looking for a great place to start a business, you can’t go wrong with Austin. The city has a thriving startup scene, and it just got a little bit more supportive. Spectrum Reach, Charter Communications’ advertising sales unit, has launched a national campaign committing $50 million in media, resources, and creative services to help businesses reach and engage multicultural audiences. Marketing For Greatness was selected as the official partner of the “Pay it Forward” program and we are proud to announce the lucky winners!
To learn more about the Pay it Forward Campaign click here.
Austin Professionals & Entrepreneurs Applied To Win $15,000 in Marketing Grants
As the leader of the Austin Professionals & Entrepreneurs Network – Austin’s fastest growing happy hour for business owners- I was thrilled to share this opportunity and make a bigger impact in our community. I know that givers gain and nothing fuels me more than seeing hard-working business owners getting a bit of help to promote their business. Plus, who doesn’t love a generous marketing grant?
Our members are amazing and I feel grateful to be able to connect them with resources that will help them grow their businesses.
How To Win Spectrum’s Pay It Forward Marketing Grant
When it comes to making a difference in the community, small businesses are the unsung heroes. They are the backbone of the local economy, providing much-needed goods and services while also supporting the community through their involvement. However, they often don’t have the same platform as larger businesses and organizations, making it difficult for their voices to be heard.
This initiative was created with small business owners in mind.
It provides them with an opportunity to amplify their voices and share their stories. The grant application had questions about their impact, such as how their business would benefit from this program and any examples of community involvement. Winners were selected based on their story and mission; not on their size.
Who Won Spectrum’s Pay It Forward Award This Year?
As the saying goes, everything is bigger in Texas. And that was certainly the case when Spectrum held its latest round of grant giveaways. We had expected to award a single $15,000 grant to one business in the state. But when the dust settled, we were surprised to find that there were multiple award winners! The winners were:
Austin Breast Imaging– recipient of a $15K advertising grant!
Austin Breast Imaging is a breast-health facility in Austin. They give patients peace of mind with dedicated breast radiologists, state-of-the-art technology, and a peaceful spa-like environment to create a less stressful experience. Their sole focus is the breast health of their community!
Crescent House – recipient of a $15K advertising grant!
Crescent House is a locally owned and operated furniture store that offers quality pieces for every home. From the moment you walk into their location, you will see and feel the difference. They believe in upcycling, reusing, and repurposing as much as possible. as well as supporting USA-based furniture artisans. Crescent House is an active member of our community and giving back is important to them as a company. As a company, they support several local charities and organizations.
Bright SpOT Pediatric Therapy – recipient of a $15K advertising grant!
Bright SpOT Pediatric Therapy is a mobile outpatient pediatric therapy practice. It’s mission is to provide occupational and speech therapy services to children from 0-21 years of age. They love making connections with people and proudly serve children within their community!
Vincent’s On The Lake– recipient of a $15K advertising grant!
Vincent’s On The Lake is a waterfront restaurant, bar, and live music venue, located at the beautiful Emerald Point Marina. They love to bring joy to their local community by hosting events and providing entertainment!
EP Concrete & Construction – recipient of a $15K advertising grant!
EP Concrete & Construction is a locally owned and operated company that offers a one stop shop for all your commercial and residential concrete needs. Their driving force is customer satisfaction and they are dedicated to giving back to their local community.
Taylored Eye Photography– recipient of a $10K advertising grant!
Taylored Eye Photography is a locally owned and individually run photography studio, specializing in weddings, engagements, and family portraits. They believe in giving back to their community by offering photoshoots for local organizations such as the Austin Lions Club. They love to help families in the community create memories while showing off their true selves!
Texas Garage Gym Builders– recipient of a $10K advertising grant!
Texas Garage Gym Builders is a locally-owned fitness outfitter, specializing in residential, commercial, and outdoor gyms in Texas. They sell equipment and design, install, and transform spaces into the health and fitness havens at their clients’ homes or offices. They are passionate about the community and strive to help improve their client’s quality of life!
Ethereal Gift Collective – recipient of a $10K advertising grant!
Ethereal Gift Collective is a female-led collective made up of 16 local makers, located near the Arboretum. They hold workshops, new mother support in the form of Doula partnerships, art and jewelry classes, candle-making classes, and more. They hold clothing swaps to assist with upcycling and saving money within the community. They LOVE to make a difference in the community in any way they can!
VETTED Kitchens– recipient of a $10K advertising grant!
VETTED Kitchens is a catering company specializing in custom menus for any occasion. They help with local faith-based communities, veteran service organizations, and they provide food and quality hospitality to corporate events. VETTED Kitchens believes in building local communities by bringing resources and families together through collaboration, as well as, working to inspire and create fellowship within their community.
Fall in line Construction– recipient of a $10K advertising grant!
Fall in line Construction is a veteran-owned business, specializing in roofing. They believe in supporting veteran-owned companies, conducting highway cleanups, offering veteran discounts, and offering resources to those in need. They love to serve their clients personally and pride themselves in quality over quantity.
We can’t wait to see what they do with their new commercials! Thanks to Spectrum, the saying “Everything’s bigger in Texas” has never been more true!
Celebrating The Winners
The Pay it Forward campaign ended with a big celebration where business owners came together for a happy hour and were able to celebrate the winners.
Each business will get a free commercial, three months of air time, access to marketing experts, and exclusive resources from Spectrum Reach.
About Marketing For Greatness | MFG-SEO Agency
We believe that the landscape of online marketing has changed tremendously after the pandemic. Businesses need to find out-of-the-box ways to reach potential buyers. Winning customers is not too much about winning their money; but winning their loyalty. Consumers want to support -not just a product- but a purpose-driven cause. Businesses should humanize their brands and lead with stories that can make them relatable. We encourage all business owners to level up, both, digital and local footprint.
Let’s Get You Connected
Find our Austin Networking Group on Facebook.Click here.
The LinkedIn Marketing Trends You Need To Know Today
Brands are prioritizing LinkedIn more than ever. As Facebook (now Meta) rolled up their announcements for their main social media channels: Facebook, Instagram, Whatsapp, users felt overwhelmed by the rapid changes.
…
LinkedIn is a platform that focuses more on the professional industry. While most social media sites focus on personal communication and causal interactions, LinkedIn highlights various businesses’ professional opportunities and learning aspects.
The target audience of LinkedIn is completely different. You will find two primary groups of audiences on the site. One is the hustlers, who started operating in the professional world and are looking for growth opportunities. The second group consists of successful content creators looking for new talents and individuals to become a part of their business.
The site is currently very popular, with over 800 million users globally. It started operating as early as 2002 and quickly became one of the most in-demand sites for professionals. Most people looking for professional openings, connections, and interactions look towards LinkedIn to provide the exposure they need to grow.
Linkedin’s Environment
The one thing that sets LinkedIn apart from all other social media accounts is its objective and environment. While most of the social media apps focus more on showing the personal aspect of users and helping them communicate, LinkedIn works differently.
You will not find a plethora of selfies, long captions, or personal rants of people about their lives. Instead, the platforms allow users to interact professionally, showcase their skills and achievements, and provide feedback about their experience with businesses.
People are now using the platform to maintain their brand recognition, apply for job openings, hire more individuals, expand business value, etc. The “Connect” feature on the site also lets professionals from similar or different industries interact and connect.
You may even find businesses reaching out to professionals with robust opportunities and growth. Brand building is a great tool that most professional advertising, marketing, and insurance agencies use on-site.
Linkedin Is Priority
Brands are prioritizing LinkedIn more than ever. As Facebook (now Meta) rolled up their announcements for their main social media channels: Facebook, Instagram, Whatsapp, users felt overwhelmed by the rapid changes.
LinkedIn leaders have shared some important insights that truly matter when crafting a LinkedIn strategy for 2022.
“There was a time when B2B marketers could tap into B2C lookalike approaches to drive campaign success, but those days are over. Marketers must re-imagine everything, from the products they use, to how they reach their audiences, to what campaign success means.
This is uncharted territory. The brands that win — that redefine the future of B2B digital advertising — will be the ones that are nimble and quick to test and iterate.
Tomorrow’s successful marketers will never look back and plow forward, knowing that, although the future will never look the same, it will look much more successful than ever.
The future is built on privacy, understanding buying groups, and mining the insights to effectively evaluate the buying signals to drive effective B2B marketing campaigns.”
We are excited to see LinkedIn putting so much stress on their groups. They probably understand that large-scale audience interaction is the best way to market on LinkedIn and can result in more profits, a better fan base, and improved overall results.
Organic Growth
LinkedIn offers an additional element to the content you create and post on the platform. This allows the crawler to easily locate your content and rank it much higher in results than other LinkedIn profiles and information listed on the platform.
Brands can still do the same using a blog, but that is quite expensive for most businesses. Therefore, they need to stick to basics to keep things streamlined. Users can also utilize LinkedIn articles, as they are good for building brand reputation, awareness, and creating brand recognition.
Linkedin Videos
Linkedin Videos are becoming increasingly popular because of the increased demand and marketing benefits that LinkedIn recognizes. These videos offer better audience engagement, marketing results, and overall improved business ventures. It is why other social media platforms like TikTok and Instagram also started creating video content through reels in 2020. TikTok, on the other hand, is a full video marketing platform with millions of users.
For instance, statistics reveal that using video and audio content on LinkedIn pages is important to 85% of the users on the platform.
Similarly, people have watched over 16 hours worth of long videos on the platform in recent times. Experts indicate that this number could soon increase drastically.
Even YouTube claims that users watch nearly one billion videos daily, which will increase over time.
Wyzowl’s 2020 report has also declared Linked In as one of the most powerful platforms for video content marketing.
Stats:
Several statistics also indicate the similar importance of this video content online.
For example, 90% of the users believe that a video featuring a product helps meet the requirements of nearly all major businesses.
Similarly, nearly 84% of the consumers are okay with investing in a product or service after watching its video.
Even professional marketers recognize the impact of video content and claim that it has helped boost their site traffic up to an 83%.
However, a wide majority of the users are also picky with the kind of video marketing they see. For instance, nearly 73% of the users prefer “entertaining” videos over traditional marketing videos.
LinkedIn Stories: Why they failed
As mentioned before, LinkedIn is a different platform compared to other conventional social media sites. LinkedIn tried to add stories into its accounts to make it more like the other apps and add features.
While this feature worked for most social media apps, LinkedIn did not experience the same. The main reason was that the audiences did not use the feature enough, taking up unnecessary space. People prefer adding professional, and quality content on their LinkedIn accounts only instead of posting medium-quality content.
The idea of adding Video stories on top of the platform made it feel alienated and did not get the response it expected. Therefore, the story trend did not fit with the LinkedIn account.
However, LinkedIn is working on alternative features that allow a more interactive environment for the users and keep their businesses running.
What Are They Working On?
LinkedIn is now experimenting with new potential features to add more value to its site. While the site has good response rates, they need something new to keep the organic traffic engaged. Many brands and companies are talking about a Club House feature, including Instagram, Facebook, Slack, Spotify, etc.
Similarly, according to recent statements, LinkedIn is working on its audio networking feature. LinkedIn will stick to Beta Testing for now, but we expect this feature to appear for other users soon. Like another platform, LinkedIn’s version of the feature will probably include the stage of the speaker’s front, a center, and a list of people in the audience lower down the screen.
It is now introducing other features like New Creator Mode, a Club House-like feature, which is a natural fit.
Additionally, there are several powerful tools on the platform that most professionals miss out on. These features include the following:
Restricting your connection visibility
Private mode profile view
Showcase pages to segment your audience
Save searches
Sending messages without connecting
Meeting and interview scheduling, etc.
Bottom Line
LinkedIn is a powerful professional tool which can unlock a plethora of opportunities for aspiring professionals in their relevant industries. Several developments and new trends in the application can help you improve your organic traffic and get professional growth easily. We suggest you reach out to us for more information on LinkedIn Marketing trends for your profile today.
The Instagram Marketing Trends You Need To Know Today
Instagram has made some serious changes in its operations in everything from the newsfeed, to the SEO enhancements on-site. These changes could maximize Instagram’s popularity, help the site get more views, followers, and overall users.
Instagram is a popular social media platform that has billions of users from around the world. It is currently the sixth most used social media site in the world. It is also the 10th most visited site in the US, with over 0.9 Billion visits in January 2021 alone. The social media platform was also the 5th most downloaded app in the App Store back in 2020, which all means that Instagram is here to stay.
Like other social media accounts, Instagram is making some serious changes to its algorithm. The good news! Instagram has shed some light on how their algorithm works and which changes are coming up.
These instructions and guides can help you better grasp what changes you can expect from future Instagram trends. As these trends evolve, we’ll be updating this content so you can always get the most relevant changes!
So let us begin.
Videos: The Future of Instagram in 2022
In a word, it’s VIDEOS! Adam Mosseri, head of Instagram, recently shared his vision related to Instagram. He claims that Instagram will consolidate all its content around videos and reels. They removed the IGTV brand to replace them with longer videos. However, users need to tap on these videos to watch them properly.
The platform also plans to introduce more monetization tools into the system to support and motivate content creators to produce more changes. Furthermore, the head believes they will focus more on their messaging app and provide more options to users.
Let us have a look at these changes on Instagram ahead.
Changes for Creators
Instagram plans to introduce several monetization tools including a Partnerships messaging folder. This is a dedicated folder to help creators keep a closer look at their sponsored opportunities, and communicate with brand marketers.
We may also see the application introduce a subscription option on the platform to boost the monetization process for content creators online. Some of these monetization tools also include the following:
Storefront Option: This will apply to creators that are a part of an affiliate program, which would allow them to create their products.
Photo App Update: The photo app is testing new branded content added to boost monetize the platform.
Sponsored Mark: Branded content tag ads will have a sponsored mark on them, rather than a paid partnership tag.
Subscriptions: The subscriptions options allow content creators several benefits including subscriber lives, stories, and badges. However, these additional options are only available for selected profiles and accounts.
Messenger
Messenger is getting revamped this year!
There are plenty of useful tools and additions on the messenger app. It includes special features like swipe to reply to messages, reacting with any emoji, chatting with friends who use Facebook, etc. The best part is that users can do all of this without leaving the Instagram app at all.
How to know if you have the latest messenger features on Instagram?
Users who want to check if they have the latest messenger features on Instagram should check out this page.
Reels Feed
As the platform shifts from image-only to mostly videos, we are seeing how Instagram is focusing on enhancing its Reels features.
They have announced that all their videos will have Reels features. For instance, regular videos have features like “Remix,” so that others can open their camera and share a video reaction.
Video reactions are generating plenty of engagement, which is another recent update.
Since the algorithm favors those accounts that use their new features, we highly recommend staying on top of Reels trends, to get the most out of your Instagram Marketing.
Redesigned Home feed
Instagram has confirmed three new feed options will soon be available in the app. These include:
Home, Favorites, Chronological Following feed.
TikTok has been using this model since it went mainstream in 2018, and it works. It helps make surfing the app much easier and allows users to jump between pages with a single tap. However, one of the best features we believe is the following feed. Now, users can view their following feeds in chronological order so that they don’t miss out on the latest buzz in their profiles.
Veredict
When apps are shifting, it will bring a never-ending list of updates that you’ll need to keep up. Stay focused on your big picture! Remember that social channels are simply your distribution channels. If you don’t have a close community, this is your sign to create it! I predict that Facebook Groups will gain more popularity for businesses and creators this year!
Instagram’s Most Impactful Changes So Far (Trends)
Instagram has achieved several milestones regarding these focuses that we mentioned earlier. Interestingly, these changes helped create new trends for Instagram in 2022, and we believe that they are here to stay for the upcoming future.
Following are the most interesting changes and trends that Instagram experienced in recent times.
Story Swipe Up
Instagram removed the swipe-up link in the Instagram stories in August of 2021. The popular addition helped high-profile creators to direct their Story’s viewers to a website; for more info on a product, or to read an article. It also allowed users to sign up for a service or promote other things that the creators wanted.
However, accounts with 10,000 followers or more could enjoy this feature. However, this restriction doesn’t exist anymore and now all accounts have a link sticker. They can use it to add links to their profile stories.
“Tap the link” is the new call to action for these accounts, and honestly, people love it. The link sticker is customizable too. This allows users to change the old swipe-up call to action button as they want. For example, you can alter it for a specific and branded call to action. All you need to do is edit the URL
How do you Swipe Up?
The short answer is you do not because the feature has changed on Instagram.
Reels Get More Organic Reach
Reels have become a key frontier for organic reach on the app. The increased reach of Reels seems to have a knock-on effect of boosting your overall engagement, too.
Keep in mind that not all Reels are created equal. The performance of one Reel is by no means a predictor of the next.
The best thing you can do is to keep the consistency.
How can you get more views on Reels?
There seems to be a few different factors at play here:
Timing and hashtags are likely still important for dictating the performance of Reels, but not as important as the quality and relevancy of the content.
New Reels users of those who haven’t posted in a while may experience some ‘newbie’ gains ie.
The Reels algorithm seems to work in a similar way to TikTok, where how your video performs in the first hour seems to affect how many people your video will ultimately reach.
Entertainment content works best!
SEO Enhancement
Instagram started optimizing its search bar for SEO requirements. It is because Instagram result ranking also matters in the long run. The platform introduced several new additions to make the site SEO friendly.
For example, keywords are now displayed in the search bar, which allows users to choose relevant content, filter out unwanted creators and content and maximize the effectiveness of creation. This has also helped new creators introduce more content frequently for maximum reach and output.
The explore page is not only displaying hashtag-based content, as it focuses on the broader content available on-site, rather than just what is trending. Moreover, the algorithm is using ALT features and artificial intelligence to recognize the content, beyond hashtags.
Virtual Reality Filters
Platforms like Snapchat gained popularity from their virtual reality filters that allow users to create content using these filters in the environment. Instagram has already announced that they will keep enhancing their VR filters.
B2B marketing
Instagram is a fantastic platform for B2B marketers. It provides a space for making new connections in almost any industry, at almost any stage in their development. For B2B marketing, Instagram works great to showcase your brand values, company culture, recognize your team, and humanize the brand. We expect the B2B marketing to improve quickly on Instagram.
Bottom Line
Instagram has made some serious changes in its operations in everything from the newsfeed, to the SEO enhancements on-site. These changes could maximize Instagram’s popularity, help the site get more views, followers, and overall users.
Instagram users should keep these algorithm changes and trends in mind while creating content in 2022 and ahead. For more tips and information about Instagram marketing, you can always reach out to us. We also suggest you check out our trend tips for other platforms like Facebook, LinkedIn, Tiktok, etc.
The Facebook Marketing Trends You Need To Know Today
Facebook is one of the longest-running social media platforms for personal and business users. There are several trends incoming from Facebook that could revolutionize how the platform operates.
We expect Facebook groups to come back, and new advancements like the Metaverse could maximize the potential.
The pandemic has accelerated the shift towards a more digital world and there is no turning back. But what does it mean for business owners and marketers?
The short answer: opportunity.
Americans spent on average 82 minutes per day on social media in 2020, a seven-minute jump from 2019 and a large upward revision from eMarketer’s original forecast. Social media has become more embedded in our lives than ever, and the increased reliance we’ve developed in the last year is likely here to stay.
Want our take on the state of social media marketing in 2022?
Let’s roll!
Experts believe that the number of social media followers may reach 4.4 billion by 2025. It is because these social media platforms have not only helped people stay connected, but have also helped them maximize business requirements too.
We are now stepping into the ultimate digital age, where things like multi-platform online payments are no problem and people are expanding their businesses in the online world.
For small business owners and solopreneurs, social media marketing means “a lot of work”. It is because the online market is robust, and requires consistent work. Especially the content creation part.
Let’s cut to the chase. Social media marketing can be a rabbithole if it’s not managed strategically. You log in just to catch up with some people, and the next thing you know you’ve spent 3 hours.
Which social media platform is best in 2022?
Facebook, Instagram and Meta
Mark Zuckerberg has been clear about their vision and their focus. And the new name for Facebook gives us a clue! Metaverse! Zuckerberg has been dropping hints about it as early as 2015. In his words:
“You can plant a lot of seeds, not be committed to any particular one of them, but just see what grows. And this isn’t how we’ve approached this. We go mission-first, then focus on the pieces we need and go deep on them, and be committed to them.”
Over the last few years, Zuckerberg has been making big moves to acquire companies like Instagram and Whatsapp. All of those acquisitions had a purpose. And we can see it now.
Facebook’s mission has always been to “Connect People” it is what has helped Facebook grow into one of the most successful companies globally. It is not only because it helps individuals, but business too.
Facebook Marketing Trends 2022
Facebook, now Meta, is still the biggest social channel. As a business owner, you can’t just ignore this channel. However, you can’t treat Facebook the same way you treat Instagram or LinkedIn.
Facebook Groups
Facebook Groups are trending in 2022. As users want to be able to build meaningful connections, Facebook Groups simply make sense.
If you don’t manage a group yet, we highly encourage you to start by joining an active community so you can experience how is like to be part of a Facebook group.
These groups can also help several other industries and areas because of the following perks they offer:
Support Their Local Community
Facebook groups primarily operate for the local community and allow more exposure to smaller, nearby businesses. This support can go a long way in terms of moral and financial support. There are over 3 billion businesses that advertise their business on Facebook.
Support Their Customers
It provides support to the customers in case of a dealing issue, FAQ, or any other kind of support customers need. Customers can look for reviews, honest opinions, product updates, service center information, and much more through these social media groups.
Engage In Deeper Conversations
People can use the Facebook groups to engage in deeper conversations, considering it saves posts, comments, and remarks for further members to contribute later on. These deeper conversations have even helped set social media movements with various hashtags.
A common example is the recent trend of #ReleaseTheSnyderVerse, where DC fans demanded a re-release of the Justice League movie, and DC delivered.
Do Market Research within Their Circle
It will also allow business owners to research within their circle and deliver the market needs more accurately. This accurate research can help personalize and redesign products more to meet the needs of the customers and fulfill their needs.
Affordable Advertising Budget
Facebook will also help provide an affordable advertising budget by building brand loyalty and activating word of mouth for maximum results. This
Facebook Messenger
Facebook messenger is another feature that business owners can leverage. Facebook Messenger statistics show that the app is the second most popular in its category as of October 2019.
So, the odds are in favor of you using Facebook’s messaging app.
Marketing through Messenger leads to 10 to 80 times better engagement than organic posts on Facebook News Feed (Source: Mobile Monkey) This is a great opportunity, especially if you consider that Facebook’s News Feed organic posts get 0-2% visibility and no more than a 2% clickthrough rate.
We recommend testing Messenger ads (or click-to-Messenger ads) and incorporating AI to have meaningful conversations with your users.
Facebook Shop
Facebook Shops make it easy for businesses to set up a single online store for customers to access on both Facebook and Instagram. Shops keep getting upgraded to add more integrations and make the shopping experience seamless to the users.
If you’ve been considering having your e-commerce on social media, now it’s the perfect time to start that project.
Bottom Line.
Facebook is one of the longest-running social media platforms for personal and business users. There are several trends incoming from Facebook that could revolutionize how the platform operates.
We expect Facebook groups to come back, and new advancements like the Metaverse could maximize the potential. We will keep you updated with trends for other social media platforms as well, so ensure keeping an eye out for more articles from us.
Have you noticed that your photos are getting less likes than usual, despite the fact that they’re really great photos?
If so, you might be experiencing an Instagram Shadowban. Don’t worry if you don’t know what shadow banning means, I will be covering this first.
What does shadow banned mean?
Shadow Banning is a technique Instagram uses to hide your content from their search engine. This means your content will mostly reach people who follow you.
What happens to your Instagram account if you are shadow banned?
People won’t be able to see your content on hashtags you use, unless they follow you.
Your profile won’t appear on search, even if you add keywords.
Your content won’t go to the explore tab, Instagram’s search engine.
Your Reels won’t have too many video views.
Your account won’t qualify to get monetized with Badges.
You might get notified by Instagram about violation of community guidelines.
In certain circumstances, your account won’t be able to perform some activities such as leave comments or follow new people.
In the most extreme case, your account will be disabled.
Am I Shadowbanned? The Instagram Shadowban Test
There are multiple ways to know when your account has been shadowbanned. Unfortunately, Instagram won’t send you a notification saying exactly that you’re shadowbanned. However, recently, Instagram shared a lengthy article about their algorithm, and they explained:
“Shadowbanning”
People often accuse us of “shadowbanning” or silencing them. It’s a broad term that people use to describe many different experiences they have on Instagram. We recognize that we haven’t always done enough to explain why we take down content when we do, what is recommendable and what isn’t, and how Instagram works more broadly. As a result, we understand people are inevitably going to come to their own conclusions about why something happened, and that those conclusions may leave people feeling confused or victimized. That’s never our intention, and we’re working hard on improvements here. We also manage millions of reports a day, which means making a mistake on even a small percentage of those reports affects thousands of people.
In simple terms: Instagram can take your content out and is doing their best to let users know about it.
Causes Of Shadowban
1- Violation of Community Guidelines
The most common cause is a violation of Instagram’s Community Guidelines. Either your content got reported by someone or the algorithm picked a violation.
2- Reposting
There are apps that allow you to repost content from another account. However, the original creator might report your activity as “spam” and this might result in a violation.
3- Unprecedented followers
Some people have way too many followers, in a short period of time. An example would be if someone has 10k followers and then they suddenly gain 200k in a week.
While this can happen, since the activity is unusual, it might be considered spam.
4- Using bots
Instagram can tell if you purchased your followers or likes. This will be considered as “spam” and may result in a Shadowban. (I don’t recommend this method, most of the time it doesn’t work, however, I won’t judge anyone who does this).
When you use a third party to schedule your posts, some users have reported a loss in reach. It makes sense because Instagram wants people to spend time on it.
5- Follow and unfollow
In the old days, “follow-unfollow” was a common practice. Nowadays, the algorithm will flag this activity as unauthentic, and you will be shadowbanned.
It’s ok to unfollow, just don’t do it in batches.
6- Banned hashtags
Using banned hashtags repeatedly will be considered spam.
The Shadowban Test
Shadowbanning could harm your brand tremendously, and if you’re being shadowbanned, it’s important you take the necessary measures to get your content seen and ultimately, to avoid getting your account disabled.
Check Instagram Insights
Looking at Instagram Insights, if you notice a sudden and sustained drop in engagement, then it’s possible you’ve been shadowbanned. One of the best metrics to look at is percent of accounts reached that weren’t following you.
We recently noticed a significant drop in our organic reach. As you can see, the difference is alarming.
Before shadowban
After shadowban
Note: If your insights show a big drop, just know that posting more won’t fix your problem.
Check Violations
How can you see your violations on Instagram?
Tap in the top right, then tap Settings.
Tap Help.
Tap Support Requests, then tap Violations.
You can appeal a violation. However, if your content is about public safety (such as the pandemic or vaccines) or in regards to elections, most likely, it violates their Community Guidelines.
Check Badges
If your account qualifies to get monetized with badges, go to the badges menu and see if you have an alert.
How to Fix Shadow Ban
Users report that Instagram shadowban can last anywhere from 14 to 30 days. The quicker you can get your profile back to be in compliance, the better.
If you found violations, start by removing the content that was reported.
Report a problem and be honest. If you violated the Community Guidelines, explain that it was an oversight and promise to use the platform correctly in the future.
Advertise. This will give you access to the customer service for business and they might be able to assist you quicker.
Be extremely careful about what you post. Especially with the hashtags you use. You don’t want to get more violations.
Log out and change your password.
Be sure you have the latest version of the App.
Some users report that taking a break from the App for about 2 days have helped. It doesn’t hurt to try 🤷♀️.
The Easiest Way To Avoid the Instagram Shadowban
One of the best ways to avoid being shadowbanned is to maintain a natural follower base. Don’t buy followers, but rather connect with people in your industry and build a network gradually.
Get Helped From The Social Media Experts
Our Instagram management services include the following:
We are revolutionizing the way social media management is done with our content creation services!
We know that short video is what works in 2021-2022.
We help our clients grow a niche account.
We produce creative short videos that go viral.
We have a team of social media experts to manage your account. Need social media in Spanish? We can do it too.
Ready To Get Started? If you’re serious about your brand and business and want the best service possible, email us at: jessica@marketingforgreatness.com
If you’re looking to take your social media game up a notch, Youtube shorts might be the way to go. If you haven’t tried them yet, it’s not too late.
In this blog post I’m going to show you how easy it is and what kind of benefits they can bring. It doesn’t matter if you have zero experience or are an expert in video production because with these tips, anyone can make a good short that will bring traffic back again and again.
So let’s get started!
What’s Youtube Shorts?
Youtube shorts is a new feature rolled out by youtube earlier in the year. What it essentially does is let you create short-form videos that are up to 60 seconds long with our multi-segment camera.
Okay, now you might be thinking: what’s the big deal? Creating Youtube videos is easy right? You have to hold your horses there! As you may know by now, creating a Youtube channel can be a very complex affair and you might be surprised at the level of difficulty involved.
However, Youtube has taken a simplistic approach to making short videos, and as such does away with things like:
– No editing necessary on your part.
– No background score.
– No special lighting or backdrops.
That’s why the Youtube shorts feature is so powerful because it automates most of the steps for you!
You can talk to your camera like a normal Youtube video but with shorter time limit and it will automatically compress, optimize and play on all devices.
Common Youtube Shorts Videos
Youtube Shorts are great to get your audience socializing with your brand. Here are some common videos you can create using this feature.
Musical Lyric Youtube Short – This is the most popular type of Youtube short video. It’s a video full of lyrics that you can sing along with the artist.
Product Review Youtube Short – Great to create product reviews for brands you love. As a creator, finding out-of-the-box ways to add value to your audience is one of the most valuable skills you can monetize.
Interview/Behind-the-scenes Youtube Short – Best for teasers to drive users to watch the full episode.
How-to Youtube Short – How to videos are great, especially for creators in the food industry. You can create a step by step recipe and compress it in seconds. Your audience will love it.
Humorous Youtube Short – This Youtube short is all about entertainment! Comedy Youtube shorts are very popular on Youtube.
Inspirational Youtube Short – Writers, motivational speakers, mentors can benefit from this kind of short videos. Great to attract new users to your channel.
Can Businesses Use Youtube Shorts?
Absolutely. Youtube Shorts, as it is a new feature, presents a great opportunity for businesses to increase visibility and exposure quickly. Your social media strategy should include Youtube Shorts, starting today!
How do I record a Youtube Short?
To create a short video on YouTube:
Sign in to YouTube on mobile.
Tap create tap Create a Short beta.
To make your Short longer than 15 seconds, tap 15 above the record button to record up to 60 seconds (60).
Note: Recording with music from our library or the original audio from other videos is limited to 15 seconds.
(Optional) Tap Speed to speed up or slow down recording.
(Optional) Tap Timer to set the countdown to record hands-free and choose when to automatically stop recording.
To record a clip, hold the capture button or tap it to start recording and then again to stop.
Tap undo to remove the previous video clip you recorded or tap redo to add it back.
Tap done to preview and enhance your video tap NEXT to add details to your video.
Add a title (max 100 characters) to your short video.
Tap UPLOAD to finish.
What audio can you use in your Shorts?
Accompany your Shorts with a song or audio clip from across Youtube. The audio found in our library is free to use, but only for personal, non-commercial use, unless you have the appropriate licenses. Here’s how to get started:
To find our Audio Library when you’re ready to record, tap Add Sound. Make a selection and then record up to 15 seconds.
To add a song or other audio after you record, tap Sound at the bottom of the edit screen. Sound picked from our library is limited to 15-second clips.
You can also use other sound to create a Short.
Youtube Shorts Is Part Of Demand Generation Marketing
Simply put, demand generation marketing (sometimes called “demand gen”) refers to any direct marketing campaigns that generate demand for your product or service.
It’s important to understand that demand generation is not a single campaign, but rather an entire strategy that encompasses marketing outreach and customer acquisition activities. It also appears within the larger marketing mix of product/service development, pricing, distribution channels, promotion and sales force management. How these components interact is just as critical to the success of your demand generation marketing strategy as the tactics you choose.
An effective demand generation marketing strategy combines all aspects of online marketing, but tailored to the business goals. The most common online demand generation campaign tactics include email marketing, social media marketing, SEO and content marketing.
All these strategies fall under the umbrella of “demand gen” because they encourage people to take action based on a need or want they have for your product or service.
Since video is the NUMBER ONE way to generate demand, we encourage business owners to take their content marketing to the next level and start creating videos!
Ready To Take Your Content Marketing To The Next Level?
If you’re looking for a way to add video marketing to your social media content, we suggest trying out Youtube shorts. It’s the perfect place to start because it can be as simple or complicated as you want it to be!
The best part? Youtube is free and easy to use. You don’t have any excuse not try your hand at video marketing (or just watch other people’s videos). Want more information on how our demand generation team will help make sure that your target audience sees these videos? Schedule a call with our marketing experts today – we’re ready and waiting!
About Marketing For Greatness:
Marketing For Greatness is a digital marketing agency that specializes in demand generation. We are always looking for new opportunities to learn and share our knowledge, so you are welcome to leave your comments below!
We offer a free consultation to help you achieve your business goals. During this consultation we can discuss how to improve your digital marketing efforts as well as determine the best strategies for success that align with your current business objectives. You can schedule a free one-hour digital marketing consultation by clicking here.
The world of social media is constantly changing, and Instagram is no exception. With new trends emerging every day on the app, it can be hard to keep up with what you’re supposed to know. Luckily for you, we’ve put together a list of some of the most noteworthy Instagram trends for today!
The platform is moving from images to videos in 2021
Photos are being liked less on instagram compared to videos. This is because people want content that’s more engaging than a static photo, such as video or live streaming. People find it easier to get information about instagram trends through short, snappy videos rather than long paragraphs of text on your page.
A post with only an image may not get enough engagement for the user who created it to be satisfied; whereas someone can share their thoughts and engage in conversation through video which means they’ll likely feel like they’ve had a richer experience and find meaning out of what you’re saying in your message.
Instagram Reel upgrades
Instagram Reels now can be longer than one minute. This is an interesting instagram trend to watch because it will have a lot of implications for what people post next year on the platform, and how they are able to connect with their audience through that content.
Best times to post on Reels
Choosing the single best time to post on Instagram Reels can be tough, Influencer Marketing Hub analized more than 100,000 short-form video content posts to find the best engagement rates (all times in EST, ignoring sectors):
Monday: 6 AM, 10 AM, 10 PM
Tuesday: 2 AM, 4 AM, *9 AM
Wednesday: 7 AM, 8 AM, 11 PM
Thursday: 9 AM, *12 AM, 7 PM
Friday: *5 AM, 1 PM, 3 PM
Saturday: 11 AM, 7 PM, 8 PM
Sunday: 7 AM, 8 AM, 4 PM
Times marked with * had particularly high levels of engagement.
Owning your Instagram feed
In 2021 Instagram introduced the ability to customize what people see when they scroll through their feed by hiding posts from certain accounts. This instagram trend is important because it allows for a greater sense of ownership over one’s own content, and an opportunity to control how much time on instagram is spent seeing content from specific people.
Ads and sponsored content in direct messages
In 2021 Instagram’s parent company Facebook introduced ads into direct messages. This allows influencers or brands, who want to reach new audiences more easily, the opportunity to do so by paying Instagram per message of advertising content.
Instagram Live for marketing
Instagram live is a relatively new instagram trend that’s been around in the last few years. We encourage businesses to be more active on Instagram, but always keeping the audience in mind. Going live is great to bond with your audience and present yourself as an authentic business owner (or brand).
Use stories to promote when you’ll go Live, to have more viewers.
Use the “join me” option to have guests on your Live episodes
Turn your Live episodes into a series on IGTV
Instagram Live and Reel insights
Instagram is rolling out insight updates for reels and IG live, aimed at businesses and creators. The new features will include insights on audience locations, how people interacted with the video, and more.
Instagram Explore Page’s UI has been updated
The new instagram UI update might have been what you were all waiting for. In 2021, instagram had finally changed the design to make it more user friendly and easier on the eyes. The old instagram explore page was replaced with a photo grid that gives your feed a clean look. Users can now scroll horizontally through their instagram feed, making it easier to see what is going on with friends and family.
Shorter videos are in
There was a shift towards short form ads because they’re less intrusive than long ones. This trend illustrates how businesses see instagram not just as another place where they need to put out advertisements but instead look at instagram as an opportunity to engage customers directly about what they offer while giving them value.
In conclusion
We’ve compiled a list of Instagram trends you should be using in your marketing strategy today. Some are old favorites, and some are new to the scene. The best part is that all these strategies can be used for any type of business! No matter what industry you’re in or where your company falls on the social media spectrum, there’s something here for everyone.
Want more? Check out our upcoming Instagram Bootcamp series with up-to-date trends, how to’s, and growth strategies that any business can implement today!
What trending topic would you like us to cover next time?
Let us know by tagging @coachjessicacampos and @marketingforgreatness so we can get even closer to connecting with you!
When people are thinking about best keywords for their website, they often get confused with all of the conflicting advice out there. There’s a lot more to SEO than just picking the best keywords. In this blog post, we will go over how to find best keywords for your website as well as best practices on how to rank higher in Google search results!
What are keywords and why are they important for SEO?
Keywords are the words that best describe what your website is about. They will be used to help people find your site when they search for a topic related to yours on Google or other search engines (like Bing, Yahoo!, and Ask).
For example, when you are searching for “best social media marketing agency in Austin”, the keyword is only one: “best social media marketing agency in Austin”. If you, on the other hand, search “social media Austin”, that will be the keyword.
Why are keywords important for your website?
Keywords are the best way for people to find your site. They’re important because when they search Google, it will show them the best result that is most relevant to their query.
How to find keywords for SEO? What should you do first?
For best results picking keywords:
– Do some research on what potential customers might be searching for: For example, you might want to take a look at what keywords people are using on Google and other search engines for your business.
– Use Google Search Console to look at your best selling or most popular products to see if there are any keywords that they share. If your website is new and you don’t have enough data on your Google Search Console, you can still pick keywords based on a competitor analysis (no worries, keep reading, we’ll explain what this means!).
– Use Google’s Keyword Tool and other tools like it to find best keywords related to the information on your website. These will be words that best describe what your site is about and most importantly, the questions that your future buyers are asking.
– Look at the keywords that are already ranking highly on Google for content similar to yours: This will give you a good idea of how competitive it is, but also show you which words might be best associated with your website.
What should I do next? Best practices for optimizing keyword usage.
Once you know about 10-20 fundamental keywords that will take your future buyers to find your site, you’ll use those keywords and variations to create your content.
– Use best keywords in titles, headlines, and content: Titles are the first thing searchers see on Google’s search results page. Putting your best keyword at the beginning of the title will help you rank higher. It also helps to use it in a headline and throughout your long form content as well when relevant!
– Try using your main keywords in your URL:
Example: If you are creating a page for your fitness coaching services, your URL will have www.websitename/fitness-coaching-city.
– Use keywords throughout the content of your website, not just at the beginning or end and make sure they are naturally part of what you’re saying: It’s important to use them where it makes sense to, not just where it’s best for SEO.
– Use keywords in your meta description: This is the short piece of text that pops up when you do a Google search about your topic and it will also show up on other sites like Facebook or Twitter. The best way to optimize them is by picking one or two best keywords from your best content and using them in your meta description.
– Use keywords when posting on social media:
Content you post to Facebook, Twitter, or other sites like these will often show up on Google’s page as well for people searching the same topics that they’re interested in. If possible use best keywords followed by a short sentence about what you’re posting about, for best results.
– Add keywords to your backlinks: One way that people sometimes try to hack the system and rank higher in Google is by getting their link on another site where they show up highly ranked already (like a best website directory). These are called “backlinks”. It’s important not only to add best keywords, but to do so naturally and not make it look like you’re trying too hard.
– Make sure best keywords are in the title tags: If your website uses HTML code that’s visible on a web page then best keyword should be at the beginning of each relevant line, before any other text is displayed. This will help your best keywords show up on the top of your page.
The number of keywords will depend on the content that you are trying to ranking for. The more competitive the topic, the more keywords and keyword variations you’ll need.
You can have a high converting page with a handful of keywords. The number of keywords doesn’t matter. What matters is that the website page fulfills the user intent.
For this reason, we recommend taking a page by page approach.
SEO Competitor Analysis
SEO competitor analysis is an important step to SEO. It will help you choose what keywords to focus on and which ones to ignore.
What’s in a competitor analysis?
– The best keyword rankings for your competitors: This will give you a good idea of how competitive the topic is, and which words are best associated with it so far.
– Best pages to compete against using best keywords: Once you know what’s ranking well on Google in terms of content similar to yours, you can decide which best keywords to use and target.
– Best pages that rank well with best keyword variations: This is really important if you’re targeting a competitive term like “best marketing agency”. The best way to do this would be by using best SEO tools or best social media marketing agencies in Austin as your best keywords.
– Best keyword searches: If you’re targeting a specific best word it might be helpful to know what people are searching for when they enter the term in Google. This list will show that information as well and help give you an idea of how many keywords or variations there are on your topic.
It’s important to take these SEO recommendations into account on a page-by-page basis.
Take Your Online Presence To The Next Level
If you’re looking to take your site to the next level, it may be time for a full SEO audit. You can definitely do some self-auditing with tools like Google Analytics and SEMrush, but they are far from foolproof. The best way we know of is by tapping into an expert who knows how search engines work. We have been in the online marketing business since 2008 and pride ourselves on being the go-to experts when it comes to website optimization. Schedule a visit today so that one of our team members can review your site during a free consultation session – no strings attached!
If you need another reason why Austin is the best city for startups and small business owners, keep reading!
Spectrum Reach, Charter Communications advertising sales unit, launched a national campaign committing $50 million in media, resources and creative services to help businesses reach and engage multicultural audiences.
The “Pay it Forward” program was promoted through a selective group of influencers in Austin, who could bring together multicultural small and medium-sized business owners.
As a Puerto Rican living in Austin, anything that allows me to help multicultural business owners lives close to my heart. As soon as Spectrum Reach asked me if I could be one of their brand ambassadors for their Pay It Forward program, I said yes.
Austin Professionals & Entrepreneurs Applied To Win $15,000 In Marketing Grants
I might be biased, but I think that one of the native communities where startups and entrepreneurs can get connected with local resources to grow their business is a Facebook Group called Austin Networking – Professionals & Entrepreneurs (“ATXPEN”). It’s a group I started back in 2017 and now has over 7,000 members.
The Pay it Forward campaign was very well received. We promoted it several times, to make sure everyone had the chance to win. Since it was a multicultural effort, I wanted to make sure that everyone was represented.
Announcing The Winners Was The Best Part
The wait had everyone anxious! Since it was a national campaign, we needed to wait until other markets closed their campaign. But it was totally worth the wait.
They say that everything is big in Texas, and this honored that proverbial phrase. Spectrum came back with even better news! Three lucky business owners received a $15,000 marketing grant, and close to 35 small and mid- sized business owners received $8,000 and $6,000 each.
Celebrating The Winners
The Pay it Forward campaign ended with a big celebration where business owners came for a happy hour and were able to celebrate the winners.
Congratulations to Hill Country Floors, Cakes Rock, and Arise Family & Injury Chiropractic!
Each business will get a free commercial, two months of air time, access to marketing experts, and exclusive resources from Spectrum Reach.
Marketing for Greatness also extended a marketing consulting package so they can maximize this opportunity and amplify their brand.
Cakes Rock - As Seen On Netflix's Sugar Rush- was one of the winners.
Hill Country Flooring also won a $15,000 grant in the Pay It Forward Program.
Arise Family & Injury Chiropractic receiving their $15,000 grant from Spectrum Reach. They will get a dedicated marketing team from Spectrum Reach.
Austin Networking Happy Hour event at the Hotel Granduca.
Marketing For Greatness Boosts Business Owners Using Creative Influencer Marketing Campaigns
As a digital marketing agency, we believe that the landscape of online marketing has changed tremendously after the pandemic.
Businesses need to find out-of-the-box ways to reach potential buyers.
Winning customers is not too much about winning their money; but winning their loyalty.
Consumers want to support -not just a product- but a purpose-driven cause. Businesses should humanize their brands and lead with stories that can make them relatable.
We encourage all business owners to level up, both, digital and local footprint.
Marketing For Greatness team with Spectrum Reach.
Let’s Get You Connected
Find our Austin Networking Group on Facebook. Click here.
Did you know your follower count has an impact on your visitors’ first impression of you?
They say you should not judge a book by its cover; but it’s inevitable. The number of followers displayed on your profile can either make people want to follow you or turn them off completely.
Most people think that posting more content will result in more followers. Not quite! Followers don’t fall from the sky. Social media has nothing to do with Google search or any search.
If you want people to find and follow your profile, you need to focus on ways to grow your channel, combining tactics from the platform with some “guerilla marketing” so you can grow faster.
Best Tips To Grow Your Social Media Channels Today
1. Optimize your profile.
Your profile needs to be optimized to get the most traction. You should start with your first impression, keeping in mind that strangers will look you up and your goal is to inspire trust.
Branded headshots make you look like you mean business and are trustworthy. Invest in great new headshots and do an announcement! If you want to attract new followers, this is crucial.
3. Publish an “ask for recommendations” Facebook post.
Want instant engagement? Dedicate a post to asking your followers for recommendations on who else you should be following.
4. Share a “before and after” story.
Everyone loves to see these kinds of authentic journeys. Ask your current followers to share it and watch your reach grow.
5. Ask your current followers for help making new connections.
All you have to say is, “I’m looking to connect with ____. Who do you know who ____?”
6. Use your email list.
Start with your warm list and send a warm email to ask your connections for followers.
7. Make your email signature stand out.
This is a good way to draw attention to you/your brand. Link to your social media in the signature, too. Look at the example below for inspiration – it includes a picture, social media links, and even brand logos.
8. Post in different groups where you can reach people from your Avatars.
If you haven’t joined any social media groups yet, what are you waiting for? This is the perfect opportunity to reach people in your audience.
Facebook and LinkedIn Groups are very popular. Instagram does not have groups; but you can still build a community using Hashtags to find conversations and Instagram Stories to engage with your followers and create the community experience.
9. Use your personal accounts to feature the other accounts you want to grow.
Promote your business accounts to your personal network – reach everyone you can!
10. Do a giveaway/contest.
Social media giveaways and contests are engagement magnets. Find a worthy prize and remember to require that all entrants follow you and tag a friend in the post comments.
What’s the Number One Social Media Manager-Approved Tip To Get More Followers on Instagram?
Remember, these are just tactics. You still need a social media marketing strategy in order to grow your followers, grow engagements, and grow your revenue mixing multiple accounts. In my opinion, this is where forensic marketing plays a role, as it helps us deciding where to focus.
Jenny opened her lashes extensions salon and did an amazing job in marketing her services on Instagram. Her business is booming. She gets amazing reviews. Everybody wants to collaborate with her. She’s almost like an influencer. But there’s one problem. Jenny has no time to do anything else but work. Jenny is not feeling well, despite her success. She has a toddler and mom guilt keeps her up all night.
Can you relate with Jenny? Is your beauty business booming and now you’re starting to feel like this is too much?
Keep reading, ‘cause we are giving you our ultimate recipe to make money doing what you love, without losing your life.
Grow A Beauty Brand- Not Just A Beauty Salon
While brand and business overlap and work together, they have different purposes and goals.
For instance, if Jenny keeps growing her lash extensions salon without making changes to account for the growth, she will be out of business sooner than later. The best way to avoid this pitfall is by having a business model where Jenny considers, at some point, scaling her business with more people, more income streams, and more ways to leverage her audience.
This is where building a brand makes sense and can become another source of income itself down the line.
Business vs. Brand
In the digital-everything era, a beauty salon should not be limited to the revenue they can generate from hair treatments. Bossbabe.inc is a great example to picture a big-picture of how far your brand can go.
What would you do if you have a community with 3.2 million followers?
Just imagine… Your great work being amplified, to a point that doing lashes is a small piece of what you do. You would have several other streams of income that are on autopilot. With the right systems in place, you can earn passive income.
While building a brand is very exciting, you might not have all the resources you need in order to take your new beauty business to that level. However, that doesn’t mean that you don’t have this phase of turning your business into a brand-based model. You can consider this as part of your business model, and make a plan to scale. The only way to reach a brand goal is to go through the steps to grow proportionally and arrive at your goal with the supportive tools required.
Business Path
You will probably pick the business path for your starting point as it is the more common and well-known path.
If you decide you want to stick with the business side, for now, it’s important to have a clear business model. In other words, how do you intend to continue making income? Is your industry going to stay profitable for years to come? Are your products competitive now, and will you need to catch up to new trends in a few years? Do you want to stay in the beauty industry or branch out?
Keep in mind that building a business also includes building a great reputation. You certainly want to build a strategy to give your business a solid presence in both, online and offline.
If you want to keep selling for a profit, you must learn how to leverage your position and pivot when needed. Your business might need multiple brand faces to keep selling as not all products work equally well in all market sectors. You might sell mainly beauty products, but specialty wet wipes might get more sales in the child care market. That does not mean there is anything wrong with your products or marketing, simply that some items will always perform better in some places. Take an objective look at your business and consider how you can leverage what you have built to make something longer-lasting. Your unique business situation and goals will act as guides so you can find the best path forward.
Making your income strictly from a business means you will need help at some point. Hiring your first employees is tricky because you want people who are equally passionate about the business, but you also need skilled workers who will legitimately help you. Be very clear with your job listings and include details that you want in a dream team. There is nothing wrong with not hiring people as well. This is your business, so only bring on employees who add to your goals rather than hold you back.
Brand Path
Making your income off of branding is a bit of a less straightforward path, but it is possible. Income from branding is typically closer to passive income with royalties than active profits like selling products. If you are not actively selling something, you must figure out passive income with your skills. There are a few different ways to pull income out of your business, but there is rarely a single path that will replace your typical income.
In the brand path, content creation becomes the main focus. You’ll become a voice for a community. And the quicker you polish your ability to create amazing content, the quicker you will experience growth.
You are an interesting person! So you might as well make money from sharing your thoughts on a website you built. Put your personality to work and show people how great you are while getting paid.
Nowadays we have plenty of options to raise funds to create content. Patreon and other subscription models let creators make what they want to make, and fans pay to support the content directly, with some fans paying more to access certain content. Many blogs, online stores, and all varieties of websites have transitioned to a subscription model and found great success.
The Subscription Model
The brand path also includes the subscription model. Here, the main ingredient is not just the content, but the traffic that you generate as a brand, from your raving fans.
An excellent way to check if your website could pull off the paid model is by checking your website traffic. To get enough money from subscriptions to act as income, you need enough visitors in the first place. Look at your website metrics to determine if a community-based payment model could work for your goals.
Growing your social media audience will be key, if you are planning to build a subscription model at some point. Create dedicated campaigns to grow your followers using Instagram- it’s the platform we recommend our beauty clients.
Looking at your possible futures is always scary, but research and planning can make it less intimidating. You have a beauty business now, but what do you want to build later, and what do you want your actions now to lead to later? You can choose any path, but at some point, you should choose between business and brand for your future goals as growing both at the same time is too much for a single person.
How to pick which business model is best for your beauty business?
By now we have given you plenty of options. If you’re confused, no worries. We are here to help!
We are a boutique firm specializing in helping small businesses get the attention and success they deserve and then create a plan that will help you reach your goals. With forensic marketing tools, we can take an objective look at your current status and work with you to create a plan that will address your unique pain points to get your business where you want it to go, even if that means leaving the business aspects behind.
The beauty industry took a hit like every industry during the pandemic, but the lockdowns and year of stress have made many people miss their beauty professionals more than ever. Customers cannot accomplish the perfect balayage they see on Instagram at home, and there are plenty of videos showing the results when everyday people try to replace beauty professionals.
People are more eager than ever to get back to normal, including nail, hair, makeup appointments, or any other beauty service. Your customers need you. As you read this, there are thousands of people near you searching for a “hair salon near me”. Are you excited?
We can see you answering this like “Yaaaas!”
Beauty business owners also want to get back to their clients and enjoy a bump in profits, but with so many businesses in the space, it can be hard to stand out and attract new customers.
It’s time to boost your beauty business and that’s how you landed here.
The world we were used to a year ago has changed, and so has the way businesses attract customers. Thankfully, the beauty community has thrived on social media platforms like Instagram, YouTube, and TikTok, and businesses can use those same platforms to give brands a boost.
You’re up to get a treat, as we are giving you nothing but practical tips with actionable steps.
Just keep reading!
How Can I Promote My Beauty Salon On Social Media?
I can already see you thinking, can I really use social media for my business? There is more to social media than pretty pictures and young people? Is it truly good for my business if I do TikTok videos?
Yes, you can and should use social media for your professional business, particularly in the beauty industry!
Promoting your beauty business on social media is not about posting before and after pictures with captions that push your offers directly. That will be considered as advertising content. Your audience doesn’t want you to sell them. They want to get sold.
A golden rule is always to put yourself in your user’s shoes. Flip that coin and assume you’re the follower instead of the business.
What have you wished a beauty business would say? What ads do you want to see? With your own business, you get to decide and use your personality to endear customers to your brand.
With these tips and tricks for social media, you can get back to doing nail art, playing with makeup, and dyeing fantasy hair for more customers than ever. No matter your specific beauty business, you can use social media best practices to take your business to the next level.
Everyone wants their business to succeed, so embrace the online world and use every method available to create your personal beauty empire. Unleash your inner influencer and use social media to help your business flourish in the increasingly online world. I can see you enjoying the benefits now; it just takes some work and adjustments to better your business.
Instagram First Steps And Tactics
So it is time to start marketing your beauty business on social media; where do you start? The most straightforward answer is Instagram. Instagram is one of the largest hubs for the beauty community, and there is no shortage of customers.
Instagram is a favorite home of the beauty community as most beauty is visual, so the picture-based format shows off beauty trends perfectly. There are massive accounts dedicated to the most beautiful hair, nails, makeup, photography, fashion, and more all fall under the beauty umbrella. There is a high chance that your customers will bring in reference pictures of things they saw on Instagram or Pinterest, so it only makes sense for your business to use those platforms too.
Instagram for business might sound silly to some people, but the brands that adapt the fastest to the new social media norm get significant results using every social media platform on the market. Sponsored posts, #ad posts, and paid ad slots are all attractive business opportunities, and Instagram hosts some of the most desirable demographics.
The first step to getting your business on Instagram is to create a business or creator account. You can convert a standard account into a business account or make a fresh one, but be sure you use a business account as it comes with additional features standard accounts do not have. If you convert an old account, ensure the account’s history is professionally acceptable as you do not want your brand dragged down by vacation pictures from years ago. The key to setting your beauty business up for success from day one is to treat your passion-based business like a business. Analytics and backend numbers are critical data to track performance on the app, but those features only come with a business account.
Once you have an account, it is time to establish your brand presence and personality. You want your brand’s personality to stay consistent across all platforms, and your bio must include essential information or a link to your website, at the very least. You want to make it as easy as possible for customers to like a picture, video your profile, and then transition to your website to see more. Please do not lose your personality on social media, as businesses with humor, wit, and awareness are among the most popular brands because they connect with people. You should keep your posts professional and personable, and inviting, so customers see there is more to your business than just another retailer.
The ideal flow to create your Instagram strategy would be, “I love that color, I haven’t seen something like that before. Who made it?” then a customer would click your profile and see the link to your website where they can buy the product they just saw. You can also put direct links to your products by tagging the image with backend features. The easier it is for customers to navigate your funnel, the more sales your business will enjoy, and your reputation will grow over time as word spreads.
Do not be afraid to engage with your audience either. Start a fan photo competition or ask for the funniest caption on a post. You always want customers to engage with your brand and form a relationship that encourages long-term business loyalty. Get silly, be funny, ask questions, but the main goal is to show your human side to potential customers and give your audience a good taste of your brand’s flavor.
Tips And Tricks To Boost Your Social Media In 2021 (Recap)
Share great content instead of promotions.
Always put yourself in your users shoes.
Unleash your inner influencer.
Optimize your bio to establish a solid brand presence.
Show your personality.
Draw a journey of your future customers by thinking about their steps they will take when they love something you’ve shared.
Find out-of-the-box ways to ignite engagement within your users.
Don’t be afraid to show your human side.
Use shopping features to add direct links to your products.
Promote your content using Instagram Ads consistently.
Instagram Influencers
Instagram marketing tips and tricks are not complete if we don’t talk about influencers. But what does being an Instagram influencer mean?
Influencers are Instagram users who have established credibility and an audience; who can persuade others by virtue of their trustworthiness and authenticity. Your brand’s ideal influencers are users that share your brand hashtag and or products who have the largest number of followers, so you can reach as many new eyes as possible.
Influencers are a relatively new idea in the grand scheme of marketing, but they are highly effective at targeting niche markets and specific audiences. Wouldn’t you be more likely to buy a product if your favorite beauty vlogger suggested it? The power of influence should not be underestimated, and you should partner with influencers to promote your business and or products. Small business owners should reach out to influencers in the same niche or send products for a review to expand your reach.
It may be tempting to reach out to top Instagram influencers, but small businesses do not get the best return on investment with big names. Top-tier influencers are picky about the brands they partner with and typically have a high price per collaboration, making them a bit of a waste for small businesses. You also do not want to be overwhelmed by too many customers or questions coming from a partner ad if your system cannot handle it. Imagine one person trying to manage all the questions and orders that come in after a top makeup tutorial channel promotes a product; it just is not possible nor desirable. Local and niche influencers are far more helpful to small businesses because the scale and price match for both parties.
Everyone aims for and wants to reach the top, but the steps along the way are essential. Jumping right to the big influencers will not give you the overnight and long-term success you might dream of, so it is better to take it slow and go through the steps. It is better to go slow and steady than jump in with both feet and no life vest. Start by using similar niche influencers on one platform and get comfortable with that process before adding more to the equation.
Building your brand is critical for your business, but be careful you don’t put one goal over the other. Your brand is the personality and characteristics of your business, but the business is what makes money. Influencers can contribute to both your brand and business, but it is something to keep an eye on overtime.
Marketing Is Hard, We Make It Easier
You can read all the guides online, and there will still be aspects of marketing your new business that don’t make sense or take too much time for one person to finish. That is where we come in.
We are a boutique firm that specializes in helping small businesses get the attention and success they deserve. With forensic marketing tools, we can take an objective look at your current status and work with you to create a plan that will address your unique pain points to get your business where you want it to go.
The beauty world is one of the largest industries that is still growing with no sign of slowing down anytime soon. You have likely seen beauty ads online and walked down the aisle stuffed with beauty products in box big box stores. The rapid rise of the Internet has only pushed the beauty community further as more people learn what the beauty world encompasses, thanks to a slew of tutorials and innovative beauty businesses.
Momentum is coming for the beauty industry. The lockdowns might have forced people to do treatments at home; and this only made them missing their beauty expert even more!
Yeah… The balayage hair they loved from Pinterest … That won’t be the same if they try to do it at home.
If you’re a beauty entrepreneur, you might want to take advantage of the momentum that the beauty industry is gaining.
There are so few limits on beauty businesses in our modern world so that anyone can turn their passion for beauty into a profitable business. However, just because there are opportunities and many different avenues you can take does not mean starting a new beauty business is easy or stress-free.
Whether you decide to start a traveling makeup business that caters to events, open a formal salon with all-in-one services including micro-blading and manicures, or use your beauty knowledge to work as an image consultant, there are many steps to consider before your beauty business is truly off the ground.
I’m here to give you some clarity so you can give your beauty business a great start.
Let’s roll!
How To Start
Since you’re reading this, I’m assuming that you’re passionate about the beauty industry. You have a great taste for style. Maybe you see yourself as a beauty influencer! Or maybe that’s too much… But you get my point! You are passionate and that gives you a great advantage.
Life is short. If you find a way to mix your passion with your way to make money, that’s your golden ticket.
I can already see you drinking your raspberry iced tea with a smile 😃 after reading this. Yes!
It would be great if starting a business was a simple and straightforward process, but many things add up to your first day officially open.
The key to set your beauty business for success since day one is to treat your passion-based business like a business.
Most of our beauty entrepreneurs that we help, come with a beautiful brand. They are on point with colors, fonts, and style. However, when it comes to business, they don’t take the time to prepare a roadmap to get clients for their beauty business. No wonder the question “how to create a marketing plan for my beauty business” is so popular.
So where to start your marketing plan? The short answer: Google!
Google is a fantastic starting place as you can learn the essential things you need to know to get started.
You’ll need a website, so customers have a central place to find your information, book appointments, and potentially pay for services online.
Thankfully, a range of different website builders are sure to leave you with a professional and functional website. Some of the most popular website builders include SquareSpace, WordPress, Kartra, and Wix, but there are many more options if the popular services do not appeal to you.
Most people can honestly say that a business’s website affects their judgment of the company. Don’t you automatically have doubts when a website loads, and it looks like it was thrown together in an afternoon in 2001? You want your business to instill confidence and reflect your brand’s personality. Your company’s personality is part of what sets you apart, so show it off and highlight what makes your brand special. Wouldn’t you instead go to a hair salon that has funny puns on their website or show off insane old beauty commercials over another website that contains the essential information and nothing else?
Google doesn’t really care that much where you build your website. However, your website must have essential and critical information such as your business name, location, contact information, and hours of operation. If your business is mobile or you will travel for events, be sure to include a clear service area, so customers do not have to guess if you will come to their address. Sounds obvious, but we see beautiful websites without technical settings, which means that Google doesn’t know that they exist.
Once customers can find your business, you can truly start to grow. A great Local SEO strategy will help your business tremendously!
Systems To Take Appointments For Your Beauty Business
If your business involves appointment times or reserved slots, you will need a system to manage customer requests. No customer will come back if the appointment system doesn’t work or requires too many hoops to jump through.
Programs like Vcita keep the management mess in one place so you can keep an eye on all your systems at once. You do not want to miss a beat, but you need tools to help manage appointments coming in from Google, Facebook, your website, and inquiries from Twitter.
I love recommending Vcita as the best automatic scheduler because it manages your calendar, your payments, and customer service tasks as well. It’s all in one.
Simplicity is key. You want to make it very easy for your future customers. If they can book their treatments online, easily, they will keep coming back! And that’s the same rule for payments. Make it easy for them!
Many website builders also include payment methods with options to add more payment methods down the line. You will likely start by accepting most credit and debit payment methods along with popular online methods like PayPal. However, there are many more payment methods out there that customers would like to use. You do not need to take every currency or payment under the sun, but you can expand your range, so you do not lose sales because of limited payment options.
Appointments and payments are relatively easy. Now let’s talk about the non glamorous part: accounting! 😤
You don’t want to skip this part! Invest in a bookkeeping system to ensure every payment is appropriately recorded. Quickbooks is one of the most popular bookkeeping programs for small businesses and comes with all the features you need to keep your records in line.
Social Media For Your Beauty Business
You can spread your reach by creating a Facebook Business Page and setting up social media accounts on the major platforms. How many times have you found a new business just by looking around online? I personally found my go-to makeup brand on social media, and so do millions of other customers that could be your customers.
Not sure which social media platform is best for your beauty business?
Start with the platform you know! The one you feel comfortable with. And plan to leverage someone else’s expertise, time, and audience.
Instagram marketing is very effective for the beauty industry. But that doesn’t mean it’s the only one. For this reason, all of your accounts on other sites should include a link back to your main website or contain the same basic information so your brand information is consistent.
Scale Your Beauty Business
Once you have the foundation of your business setup, it is time to grow and scale up. Thankfully, there are plenty of ways to give your business a boost to bring in more sales and expand your reach. Whether you want to widen your audience or raise your visibility, there are plenty of options and paths businesses, particularly beauty businesses, can take.
One of the most prolific ways to grow a beauty business is social media and influencer marketing. The beauty community is massive online, with millions of fans ready to buy products their favorite vlogger recommends. Think about your favorite influencers and the products they promote or partner with. The endorsement from a personality you know makes the recommendation more powerful and likely to resonate with customers. Start looking for influencers in your local area or market niche before you target the globally known influencers. While more prominent influencers might reach a bigger audience, they also charge more per deal, and you might be overwhelmed by the attention your new business receives.
If you are a niche traveling lash and brow service, you should try partnering with local wedding organizers or makeup artists. As you grow your business, you can reach out to more people for a partnership. If you are an online beauty store, beauty influencers on YouTube could be a godsend. It is worth reaching out to send products to an influencer if only for honest feedback from someone deep in the market and a marketing boost at best.
Social media is the best place to scout out influencers or potential partner brands regardless of your industry, as so much happens on social media these days. You will find a large percentage of the beauty community is on social media, with massive accounts dedicated to makeup looks, hair dyes, nail art tutorials, and so much more. If you want your beauty business to take off, you must play the game to find success. All of the steps and factors described above are part of the game, but you also must use SEO and other marketing methods for long-term results.
Have Marketing Questions? We Already Read Your Mind
We are a boutique firm that focuses on helping small businesses grow with specific tracked metrics that address your individual “pain points” so we can build a solution that improves your business both now and for the long term. We use your unique business numbers in conjunction with Forensic Marketing methods to create a strategy that servers your unique goals.
Instagram’s New Feature Can Give Your Business A Boost
Instagram Guides is a new feature that looks very promising for business accounts, especially if your main source to attract leads and sales is through educational content.
Instagram might just be your must-have social channel in 2021. And even if you haven’t ever done an Instagram Story for business, it’s not late to give the Gram some love.
Especially now that you’ll have a brand-new feed where you can turn your content into digital assets that will turn your Instagram followers into clients … or even better, if your followers can become your best students!
Think about this, for just a second… Don’t we want great students for our courses?
I can already see you, reading this, saying “Yes, please! I don’t just want clients who buy my courses and never use them”.
Think about having the option to create Pinterest boards, on Instagram. This new Instagram format will give you the chance to market tutorials, share tips, and enhance your content with powerful creative tools that will turn your Instagram feed into a virtual magazine.
As a content creator myself, I got very excited when I made my first Instagram Guide.
Personally, I’m thrilled with the Instagram 2021 updates we’ve seen so far. It’s a more robust platform, from the UX perspective. These updates are the first major redesign for 10 years.
UX experts are calling it a UI design overhaul. I’m personally pleased with what I’m seeing and can’t wait to see what’s coming up. But let’s not go there.
I know that time is essential and you’re up to getting tips to boost your amazing educational content, so let’s cut to the chase.
How To Get Started With Instagram Guides
The first step to use this new Instagram feature is to make sure your Instagram app is allowing you to use it. Sometimes this can be tricky, as Instagram doesn’t always rolls updates to everybody.
How do you know if your Instagram profile has the Guides feature?
Open your Instagram app, go to the bottom right, and tap on your pretty picture. This will take you to the the new Instagram home page.
If you’re wondering “where is my Instagram home page?”… The best way to remember is “the hamburger menu”… If you see three lines at the top right, you’re on your Instagram’s new home page. Side note here… I’m a leftie… so I always need to stop and make a mental map of where the right side is! So… if you’re leftie, you understand the struggle!
Once you find the most desired Instagram’s hamburger menu, tap there and you’ll see a drop down menu. Go to Create- Guide – You’ll see 3 options: Places, Products, and Posts! Convenient, right? The 3 P’s of Instagram Guides (you can learn it easier!).
How you can use Instagram Guides to get more engagement?
Places – Select that location (or place) and upload up to five posts from the content related to that location.
Products – The Products option lets you pull in Instagram posts related to a single product.
Posts – If you want to share other people’s content to your Instagram guide.
Before you jump into all the features, Instagram Guides will only allow you to select content from feed posts — not Instagram Stories.
If any Instagram Reels or IGTV posts have been shared to the feed, those can be included in guides. If you want to repurpose content from your IGTV, for example, you can only “pin” them (I say “pin” them because it’s just like creating a Pinterest Board) if that IGTV is on your posts feed. You won’t be able to create a Guide going from IGTV to Guides.
No worries, I’m covering all of it here, step by step.
Just keep reading.
Once you create your first Guide, your profile will have the Guides icon, right after the IGTV icon.
When your users tap into your Guides, they will be able to see places that you’ve created using Guides.
How To Create a Places Guide on Instagram
Places Guide will be a tremendous opportunity for location-based businesses.
If you’re a location-based business owner, using Places Guides will help you reach people who are searching for your services.
If you’re a content creator, this update is allowing you to “pin” a post that you’ve tagged by using the location feature using the Places Guide Placement.
The more content you share via Places Guide, the more chances you’ll get to reach more people; especially if you pick a highly-populated location.
This next part is important!
Instagram is marketing for you!
Instagram is going to pull up all public content tagged with that location, not simply your content at that location. If you run a local business with a physical location (like a restaurant or retail store), this could be a great way to highlight user-generated content (UGC) on Instagram that showcases your business location.
While this update is being done, you won’t see your Guides on Explore page.
But we know that Instagram SEO is getting more features and are expecting to see more improvements this year.
How To Create a Products Guide on Instagram
The Products option lets you pull in Instagram posts related to a single product. After you select Products as the guide type, you then have to choose from an Instagram Shop.
The shops of accounts you follow will populate first and you can scroll through those or search for a specific account’s shop.
You’ll be able to create a Guide from products you can search or wish lists you’ve saved.
If you want to work, hand by hand with an Instagram expert, I’m doing a new Instagram Training. 100% virtual. This might be great if you want, not just to learn, but incorporate this into your Instagram Marketing 2021 plan.
You can boost your shop using Product Guides. Take advantage as much as you can! And if you don’t have a shop installed, this Instagram Guide to installing your Shop will be helpful.
I highly recommend having a Instagram Shop.
Users are able to purchase from you, by simply taking a screenshot of your product.
Yeah… phones are very smart!
This is just like taking a picture of a QR code! But instead of a QR code, your products will have a recognizable link.
Note that this feature is available from some shopping carts like LiketoKnow.it.
How To Create a Posts Guide on Instagram
As soon as I saw this feature, I thought about using it to feature freebies, highlight your accolades, pin your best performing content, run a giveaway, highlight educational content, step-by-step tutorials … and many other ideas!
A Guide will allow you to add multiple posts, as long as they have been shared to your main feed.
You can mix carousel posts with single photos, and even sprinkle some Reels to create a Guide!
You’ll be able to upload a customized cover image for your Guide, create headlines, and a brief description. Most Instagram posts are formatted to a 1:1 square format but the guide cover is a 3:4 portrait size that crops your image accordingly.
If you’re an SEO lover like we are, this is heaven! Headlines and meta descriptions!
If you want to share other people’s content to your Instagram guide, you’ll have to save their content first (using the bookmark icon to add them to your Instagram saved content).
You can choose up to 30 posts to share to a single guide.
Guide cover is a 3:4 portrait size that crops your image accordingly
If you want to rearrange or delete posts in your Instagram guide, tap on the three-dot icon in the upper-right corner of the individual guide post.
Choose Remove from Guide to remove that individual post. Or tap Reorder Posts to proceed to the next screen where you can drag and rearrange any of the posts into the order of your choice.
You may want to promote your new guide by sharing it to your Instagram Stories to let people know what’s in the guide and encourage them to check it out for tips, resources, information, details, and so on.
Instagram Upgrades Helps Businesses
Instagram’s new features will boost educational content.
This will attract users who want to discover, learn, get inspiration… Again… think of this as combining Instagram with Pinterest.
Ever wished there was a practical way to generate content for your social media without spending a lot of time or hiring a content writer?
Or even better … ever wondered how to get social commerce done successfully?
In this article you’ll learn a simple template to prepare your content strategy, along with a done-for-you tool that will help you getting a year of content done by simply copy and paste!
Let’s roll.
Social Media Marketing During The COVID-19 Pandemic
The COVID-19 pandemic is unleashing a new era of change for businesses.
With more people working remotely, users are spending more time on social media. A report from emarketer.com shows that US adult social network users will spend 7 more minutes per day on social networks than in 2019. Time spent on mobile messaging among US adults will grow by 4 minutes in 2020, to 24 minutes per day.
Not only we’ve seen an increase in social media usage; but also an increase in e-commerce transactions from social media.
If you think about this, it makes sense. Retail stores have been forced to offer curbside and take their orders online. For small business owners, jumping into e-commerce can be as simple as adding a shop on Instagram or Facebook, instead of developing a full e-commerce website, which can be a big investment.
87% of e-commerce shoppers believe social media helps them make a shopping decision.
1 in 4 business owners are selling through Facebook.
40% of merchants use social media to generate sales.
30% of consumers say they would make purchases directly through social media platforms.
These numbers will continue to go up in 2021.
In March, Instagram launched a new e-commerce checkout feature to tackle the on-going challenge of delivering an end-to-end in-app e-commerce experience for users. Instagram Checkout allows Instagram users to complete product purchases without ever having to leave the app, and in the process save purchasing information for future payments.
If you sell products online, configuring your Instagram | Facebook shopping carts could bring you more revenue.
Once you install your e-commerce features, a great content marketing strategy will take care of the rest.
The 3 E’s Of A Social Media Content Strategy Template
Posting social media content should not be random. You should have a goal and a content marketing calendar to implement your strategy.
Dream teams have a content marketing strategist on board. A content strategist is responsible for identifying those business interests that can be satisfied through content. They design a plan for developing and distributing such content. Their ultimate goal is to generate conversions from their content marketing efforts.
If you’re in charge of doing your marketing, this strategy template will be a great asset to your business.
Where to start your content marketing plan?
A winning content marketing plan should be able to build a connection that feels “human” to your users. For this reason, the best way to “humanize” your marketing is by thinking of your users as ONE HUMAN at a time.
Start with one “persona” in mind.
If possible, define that persona with as many details as possible.
Feel free to give it a name! Then, use this strategy framework to plan your social media posts.
Emotion
The first E is emotion.
What do you want your “persona” to feel, the very first 3 seconds of finding your profile?
Which emotions do you think will move them to get curious about you?
What about their purchasing process? How do you think they will feel when they find that you have an offer for them?
A pro tip: use the psychology of colors to plan and create visuals for your social media.
Education
The second E is education.
What do you want your “persona” to know about you and your brand, the very first 3 seconds of finding your profile?
Which questions do you think you could answer for them?
What challenges do they face and how do they solve it? Why is your solution better?
A pro tip: education is not about revealing strategies. It’s about igniting their curiosity to explore how you can help them.
Empowerment
The third E is empowerment.
Can your PERSONA contact you or your brand easily?
Testimonials are the best sales force. What kind of testimonials will empower your “persona” to work with you?
What challenges do they face and how do they solve it? Why is your solution better?
A pro tip: think about possible objections that your “persona” might have and create videos answering each objection. Mixing photos and videos will add variety to your social media channels, increasing retention and conversions.
Now that you have my template to create your content strategy framework, your next step is to create the content.
My 3-Step System To Create Social Media Content
After sharing daily content on social media, via multiple platforms, and managing a team of social media managers, I’ve narrowed this process to 3 simple steps.
Step 1: Generating content ideas using your bank of content
Having a bank of content will significantly speed your process! I have a full year of content for you, written in a strategic way, so you can connect with new users, educate them about your offers, and create promotions that drive sales.
My handbook 156 Captions That Convert will be your bank of content (download it free here).
It has 52 weeks with 3 strategic posts, written for you, with the strategy explained so you can customize it by just adding your voice. See week 51, for example.
Step 2: Writing content and planning the format using a 4×3 grid
A 4×3 matrix or grid is a concept that will help you come up with a sequence that your users can follow.
Think of your social media channels as if you were a Netflix show. Each episode has a recap of what happened before, then the episode, and ends with a teaser. This is how you keep coming back for more.
Be like Netflix! Program your content in a way that your users can follow your message.
There are plenty of apps and websites to create graphics and schedule your content. We recommend using Facebook Creator Studio for scheduling and Canva.com (pro) for graphics.
Spoiler Alert: The Social Greatness bundle has a video where I’m explaining how to use Facebook Creator Studio to schedule your Facebook & Instagram content.
Block time to work on this step without distractions, so you can get this done quickly.
To avoid overwhelm, don’t do all the steps at once. Here’s an example of a schedule:
Last Friday of each month: Step 1.
First Monday of each month: Step 2.
First Friday of each month: Step 3.
FREE BUNDLE! 12 Months Of Social Media Content Planned & Written For You: Book + Video Series
Social Greatness is a bundle of my handbook 156 Captions That Convert, which will be your bank of ideas.
Download it for free, along with amazing tools from my Social Media Factory, and a video series of 6 parts covering the content creation process, step by step.
Turn your social media marketing into a money-making channel without burning 100’s of hours by learning my content marketing system with Social Greatness.
Not sure if this will be worth your time? Take a look at the overview video.
I Can’t Wait To Meet You Inside Social Greatness!
Becoming an entrepreneur of a multi-six figure business has transformed my life.
8 years ago I escaped a stressful career of owning a law firm. In fact, I was chasing a toddler and changing my newborn’s diaper when I just knew I wanted a different path. We minimized expenses, and I invested in a coach feeling it was my last chance before I HAD to get a job. And, that shift changed everything.
Now, I’m on a mission to help passionate visionaries like you grow your passion into a thriving business with a magnetic online presence so you can exit the hustle and enjoy the freedom of consistent leads each month.
Strategizing and planning are some of my super powers. And I just love how the things that are natural to me, after doing this for so many years, can bring so much impact in your next big digital move!
I can’t wait for you to experience Social Greatness.
Whether you’ve just purchased your very first Planning My Greatness guide, or you are an entrepreneur looking to see if Planning My Greatness is right for you, you are likely focused on the goal of scaling your business and building a strong client base. As a new or veteran business leader, your dreams and aspirations are only as strong as the clients who you draw in to experience what you have to offer!
If you are ready to supercharge your clientele and discover new ways to engage your marketplace, the Planning My Greatness planner is the daily action planner you need in your toolbox.
In this post, we will break down how the Planning My Greatness planner works, and how you can use this unique paper planner to say goodbye to social media marketing and content marketing overwhelm and hello multiple $100,000’s in revenue.
Planning My Greatness – Online Marketing Strategy Done For You
The Planning My Greatness planner is more than your average business tool. Each page of this paper business planner is built with intentional, step-by-step guides that will inspire you to dream, plan, and launch the business that you want to lead.
Implementation begins with inspiration. That is why Planning My Greatness begins with an inventory that allows you to put into words the passion and purpose behind your business venture. Through a series of guided prompts, you will have the opportunity to put pen (or pencil!) to paper and remind yourself why you set out to bring your dreams to life!
Every Planning My Greatness planner comes with a full, blank calendar that is undated – perfect for picking up and starting at any time of the year! With multiple cover styles available, you’ll find a version that fits your unique style.
The next step is to customize the calendar with your business’s specific goals, metrics, client information – whatever details you need to help you beat your deadlines and achieve your goals!
Your 30-60-90 Day Plan To Get More Clients
Planning My Greatness is the perfect tool to supercharge your client base in as little as 90 days. Based on the proven method of developing “sprints” in your goal-setting strategies, each step of the planner is built to create a 30-60-90 day plan for discovering and landing the best clients for your business.
In five steps, the strategic section of Planning My Greatness will take you from dreaming to goal-setting to client success faster than you could imagine!
Be sure to complete this session before even customizing your calendar. In this way your daily tasks will be intentionally integrated with your 30-60-90 plan.
Step 1: Take An Inventory of Your Success & Failures
The first step in the process is to take an inventory of your client building successes and failures. Yup – even the failures!
While it can be exciting and inspiring to focus on the ways that you have been successful in building high-quality client relationships, many of the greatest insights and lessons you can learn in your entrepreneurial journey come from your biggest mistakes and missteps.
Planning My Greatness begins with an inventory page that walks you through the process of answering important questions that will help you understand what kind of client you are looking for, and what type of customer may not be worth your limited time and resources.
The goal is to begin to become aware of your goals, and remind yourself of what – and who – you originally set out to build your business for! When you understand your perfect client, you can begin to laser-focus on the best ones! You will be able to create a social media content calendar that truly focuses on driving leads and conversions.
But how exactly can you strategize to attract your perfect client?
Step 2: Create Your Customer Avatar or Customer Persona
Once you’ve completed your inventory, you will have a better idea as to the kind of client that best fits your business. To help you develop the perfect client, you will create your “Customer Avatar”.
Imagine the client that you absolutely love working with. The kind of client that fills you with passion and reminds you of why you started your business. That is your Customer Avatar (or Customer Persona) – a well-defined picture of the best possible client you could find.
Planning My Greatness walks you through the creation of your Customer Avatar, helping you discover and define the traits and characteristics that make a great client for your product and service. With insightful avatar questions and worksheets, Planning My Greatness allows you to hone in on the persona that you are looking for in a high-quality client. With your Customer Avatar defined and in-hand, you are ready to start building your prospecting list!
Step 3: Develop Your Client Prospecting List
Once you know your perfect client, it’s time to go find them!
Now, obviously there are likely very few perfect clients, but there are far more low-hanging fruit out there in the marketplace than you may expect! Planning My Greatness will guide you through a prospect list creation process that will help you create a list of high-priority potential clients you can start contacting right now. You will find tips included such as:
What is a low-hanging fruit client in the business world? Low hanging fruit meaning in business.
Why you shouldn’t pitch your business to your friends and family.
How to leverage your sphere of influence to get introductions to your avatars.
Tips on building a high-quality prospecting list.
Step 4: Cold Marketing Techniques
With your client list in hand, the real work begins. It’s time to take a step of courage and begin marketing your brand to the world!
A cold marketing activity is referred to any communication sent without prior permission from or contact with the recipient.
If you hate spam and knocking doors, fortunately, you aren’t alone in this endeavor.
To help you start reaching the most qualified and valuable clients as determined by your Client Avatar, Planning My Greatness will help you find the most effective ways to start cold marketing (and market successfully). From drawing in potential client traffic through events, freebies, and paid ads to building and promoting informative content such as blogs and webinars, there is no limit to how creative you can get with your cold marketing.
By combining these proven marketing techniques with the Planning My Greatness 30-60-90 framework and trackers, you will develop a marketing strategy for reaching high-quality clients across the spectrum of marketing outlets.
Simply pick three to five marketing activities, and use the built-in trackers in the planner to start creating, implementing, and launching your brand into the world. Keep your Client Avatar in the center of your focus, and in no time your targeted methods will begin to draw more clients than you could ever expect.
Step 5: Connect With Your Inner Child
While online marketing may be overwhelming, Planning My Greatness is a surefire way to build your brand while having a blast. When it comes to creating ideas for your content marketing and promotion, don’t be afraid to tap into your inner child to come up with the industry’s next big idea!
Ask yourself: if my brand had the chance to advertise on millions of television screens during the Super Bowl, what kind of amazing, fun, and creative ideas would I dream up? Choose your wildest idea, and give it a shot!
The Planning My Greatness planner is one of the best ways to bring out your creative side – allowing you to get over the hump of fear and step into what the world of entrepreneurship has to offer. Don’t be afraid to get your feet wet, and if you slip and fall – cannonball into the business waters with style!
The purpose of Planning My Greatness is to reduce social media overwhelm, add clarity, and inspiration to create content that grows your business so it doesn’t feel like work- ever!
Are you someone who is uniquely creative, has an powerful entrepreneurial spirit, and wants to start a career in one of the fastest-growing industries?
Are you dreaming about landing that perfect job, or perhaps just getting started in a new marketing agency in the exciting world of social media?
There was a time in my life when I thought spending my days as a lawyer was the only job that I could do to ensure I paid the bills and made an impact on the world. However, once I discovered that I could make a living by using creativity, filming fun videos, and connecting with people, I ditched that stressful law practice for a life full of fun, amazing people, and unbelievable opportunities! Hands down, it was the best decision I have ever made.
Entry Level Social Media Jobs 101
When it comes to getting started working in the amazing world of social media, it is important to understand that account management is just one of many exciting opportunities out there. As companies and brands discover the power of social media to help them tell their story and reach new customers, they are increasingly looking for creative and high-spirited leaders who are ready to step into a new industry.
Since it’s beginning, social media has grown into a billion-dollar industry that now drives many aspects of the world. From content creators to analytic specialists and campaign strategists, you will find just as many (if not more) professionals working in the social media marketing department as you would in any print or video-based firm.
Want to learn more about what entry-level social media roles exist in the market today? Let’s break down a few of the leading positions, as well as the potential salaries you could earn in markets such as Texas and New York.
Social Media Management
The first role in that a social media aficionado may themselves in is as a social media manager. In this position, an individual may find themselves overseeing the various social media accounts for a brand or business.
From building strategies for when specific social media posts are launched to various channels to responding to comments and inquiries to engage followers, this role is a vital part of a social media team that really clicks. Not only does a social media manager hold the “keys to the kingdom” for a company’s social accounts, they will often direct the voice and brand behavior online!
Social Media Management Salaries in Austin, TX Area
Wondering how much a social media manager can potentially earn in the Austin, TX area? On average, a skilled social media manager can make upwards of $49-$50,000 a year!
Social Media Management Salaries in New York City, NY Area
In the New York, NY area, social media managers help oversee some of the most influential brand accounts, and can earn up to around $56,000 a year.
Content Creation
One of the most important jobs in the social media world is content creation. In social media, the goal of every brand and account is to “stop the scroll” by creating exciting and engaging content that stops someone in their digital tracks and causes them to watch, read, or click-through to learn more!
If you have a knack for creating high-quality content that wows viewers, then you could make quite an impact online as a content creator!
Content Creation Salaries in Austin, TX Area
In Austin, Texas, the average company or social media marketing agency will hire a content creator for around $49,150 a year on average.
Content Creation Salaries in New York City, NY Area
If you can land a job as a social media content creator in New York, you could start out earning around $55,800 a year!
Community Management
Why do you make posts and create content on social media accounts? To build your brand following! The strength and success of your social media accounts will only ever be as strong as your online community.
As a social media community manager, you will work hard to ensure that content is curated specifically for the community that follows your brand online. This can mean interacting with comments in online groups, building community loyalty through fun content, or even running online competitions and giveaways!
Community Management Salaries in Austin, TX Area
A skilled Community Management specialist in Austin can earn around $49,150 a year starting out.
Community Management Salaries in New York City, NY Area
In New York, a social media Community Manager can begin earning around $55,500 to around $75,000 a year depending on the company or brand.
Campaigns and Promotion
If you are skilled in creating great content, then you can take a step further in your digital marketing journey and start building high-quality social media campaigns. Whether you are promoting a product, a service, a company launch – almost every possible kind of brand release needs an exciting and engaging social media campaign to reach the right customers with the right information.
Campaigns and Promotion Salaries in Austin, TX Area
If you can build high-quality and effective social media campaigns, you could earn a salary of around $48,200 a year starting out!
Campaigns and Promotion in New York City, NY Area
In the New York, NY area, you could potentially begin at a starting salary of $59,900 per year in social media campaigns and promotion.
Social Media Advertising and Paid Promotion
The true bread-and-butter of social media is advertising. By building popular content and maximizing your use of advertising and promotion on different channels, you can reach high-value customers and followers in no time!
As companies begin to take notice of the power of social media advertising and digital marketing, this role has become one of the most in-demand positions on many marketing teams. If you can master social media advertising, the sky’s the limit for your career!
Social Media Advertising and Paid Promotion Salaries in Austin, TX Area
In Austin, Texas, you can earn a salary of, on average, $49,150 a year.
Social Media Advertising and Paid PromotionSalaries in New York City, NY Area
A social media advertising specialist in New York can earn around $55,800 a year.
Social Media Director
A successful social media presence requires more than simply an eye for catchy content or knowing which great filter to put on a post. Each social media platform utilizes their own unique computerized algorithms that decide what posts reach the most users.
If you’re into analyzing numbers, finding patterns, creating hypothesis and case studies, you can dig deeper into how different social media accounts operate, and build strategies to help unique types of content reach the most valuable followers! From analyzing statistics such as clicks, interactions, and share rates, you can help a brand or account better use their social media to push the right kinds of content to the right customers!
This is, in a nutshell, the role of a social media director. The key distinction is their responsibility to impact the company’s bottom line. If the job requires developing strategies to drive revenue, then it’s beyond social media management.
Social Media Director Salaries in Austin, TX Area
A social media whiz-kid who knows their way around analytics can earn up to $70,000 a year on average in the Austin, Texas region.
Social Media Director Salaries in New York City, NY Area
In New York, you can land a lucrative job that can earn up to $100,000 a year and of course this depends on the company or the brand.
Plan Your Social Media Success: Know the Role You Want, and Master It!
As you can see, there are many more unique opportunities to be found in the world of social media marketing and management than you may have imagined. In fact, as the world of social media moves from the realm of fun to profitable, more and more unique roles and ways to build a career are emerging.
So where do you begin in your quest to start your new business venture in the social media world? First, find a niche area that really jumps out at you. Do you enjoy long-term vision and planning? Content creation? Analytics?
Companies and brands are searching for individuals who specialize in specific areas of digital marketing and social media. Once you choose an area to build your expertise in,it’s time to find the loopholes to learn and grow quickly – helping you stand out among the competition as an in-demand client!
In social media marketing, mastering your skill can happen the long way, or the smart way. The key is to consider the fundamentals of the role you choose:
Research the role
Develop a strategy:
Play the strategy out in your head and ask: Does this make sense?
Do you understand branding and how it plays a role in consistency and messaging.
Editorial calendars help you plan your success
Think of your agenda in school – building content calendars is similar!
Learn how to schedule posts.
For one or all the networks you think you might be managing.
“Always Learning!”
If social media isn’t your passion or fun, you will struggle in making it a career path.
Plan your growth.
How long will it take you to be successful?
Becoming A Social Media Manager (The Long Way)
If you are excited about starting your own journey as a social media manager, the key to success can be found in learning the fundamentals of content creation, writing, and marketing. There are many ways that you can start the process of learning and putting expertise into action, such as:
Consider a degree in communications or marketing
Research industry tools, tech and the lingo
Look for social media opportunities (help a friend or local business owner to build your portfolio)
Be comfortable working and learning on your own & Never stop learning!
Find brands you admire, and follow them (what are they doing right and/or wrong) – Take notes
Demonstrate time management & organization skills (make a badass spreadsheet)
Plan for greatness – using social media management planners.
But in a world that is always moving, it can be hard to find the time to stop and earn a degree and work our way up the corporate ladder to earn a little bit of experience. What you truly need is to work smarter not longer – with the help of some unique courses, coaching, and resources.
Using Social Media Management Courses (The Smart Way)
As the social media marketing world continues to grow and evolve, it is vital that you begin to learn the industry basics and language in order to start building your online empire.
But where do you being? There are a variety of online courses, books, and other resources available for you to start leaning into the digital marketing world and discovering what it takes to break into the industry.
One of the most valuable tools you can take advantage of is a social media marketing coach. A coach has the expertise and experience to help you learn, grow, and overcome the many roadblocks that can arise as you begin your new business. Whether using a coach or a course, you will learn how to jumpstart your career by learning:
The importance of brand awareness across all social networks
The concept of lead generation and the value it brings to the business
How to identify conversion-focused opportunities
How to build social media groups from 0 to thousands
How to identify your competitor’s weak points
Locating the right tools quicker with a coach or planned social media outline.
Identify recommendations that will help you look like a rockstar quicker! (Like how social media can help supercharge other marketing channels. )
Sounds like a lot? Don’t fear – learning and mastering all of these areas and more is possible with the right resource! To help you get started, I created the Planning My Greatness planner.
Created to be picked up and started at any point in the year – because inspiration for starting a life changing business can strike at any time – the Planning My Greatness planner will help you achieve success while working less. With 375 pages filled with done-for-you project management, marketing, and sales strategies, with checklists and memory joggers, this planner will help make the journey to your new digital marketing career a breeze!
Not quite ready to partner with a coach? No worries! To dip your toes into the world of becoming an online creator, check out Planning My Greatness! Not only will it give you a headstart, but it will keep you accountable through targeted, step-by-step guides to planning your new online venture!
Resources For Social Media Managers
So are you interested in starting a new career as an entry level social media professional? The opportunities for those who are willing to pick a specific direction and master their craft are endless as the medium continues to grow!
In the social media world, the more you know the quicker you can grow. Growth doesn’t come all at once – but rather over time as you learn and master new skills and techniques. Whether you teach yourself, earn a digital marketing degree, or partner with a social media marketing coach, the key to success is commitment at the highest level!
There are many great resources available for you to begin to teach yourself how to master the online social media realm, but those who want to learn the skills and techniques necessary to make an impact fast will work with an experienced mentor and coach.
Few individuals in the digital marketing world expected that the new decade would hold quite the surprises that it has offered so far. While online marketers are used to the pivot and shift of emerging tech adaptations, nobody imagined that a global pandemic would send the entire world online in a matter of days.
This sudden shift toward digital sales and engagement for nearly every single business has created a tidal wave of opportunities for marketers to help companies survive and thrive in the new economy – and the Connections2020 Marketing Conference was ready to meet the need with high-impact teaching sessions and invaluable networking opportunities.
Connections2020 – held virtually October 8-9, 2020 – brought together many of Austin, Texas’s brightest and daring entrepreneurs for a two-day virtual conference. The goal? Help new and veteran leaders hone their marketing skills and uncover insights on building their business to meet the exponential need for online marketing. As a group that was already familiar with hosting online conferences, bringing together the digital marketing community to spend time together was a no-brainer!
A Hallmark In Hosting Virtual Events
Connections2020 showcased how businesses and organizations can host successful conferences in the digital space. Not only was Connections2020 dreamed up as a way to bring together online business owners who were missing community and engagement due to COVID-19 shutdowns, but the entire conference was also put together in just under 5 weeks!
Jessica Campos presented featured topics that are part of Marketing For Greatness’ mentoring program, such as:
A group of speakers came up with the idea of partnering to host a series of talks and facilitate a dynamic learning experience. Forward-thinking companies such as Spectrum, Vcita, and Express Writers helped provide the resources necessary to equip and encourage marketing professionals in their trade in the midst of a difficult time. When many thought a digital conference with top-tier speakers couldn’t happen, we proved that it can.
We decided to set the bar for how a professional marketing conference can still happen, even in the middle of a global pandemic!
A New Way Of Lunch And Learn
For business owners who build their business by word of mouth advertising, the team behind Connections2020 sought to create a learning environment that helped these leaders raise the bar and reach clients in new, modernized ways.
Since lunch and learns, the traditional way, are limited, we decided to bring it all online, featuring leading marketing minds from across the industry.
Connections2020’s theme is word of mouth marketing.
This conference has 30+ talks on sales and marketing trends for small business owners, along with practical how-to’s, such as:
How can content marketing build your audience by Julia McCoy.
And more…
Across a variety of topics and themes, business owners learned and put into practice the vital steps of taking their store from their physical location to Digital Main Street – where the future of commerce will happen.
Bringing together some of the most impressive marketing leaders, Connections2020 showcased some of the best ways to help business owners supercharge their reach and extend their influence in their markets.
Dynamic Learning
Can you really bring the fun of an in-person marketing conference to the online realm? Of course! At Connections2020, speakers and attendees were able to engage in new and creative ways. By taking a seat in the online room, viewers had a front-row seat with some of the most impressive marketing world names – allowing personal interaction in a digital coaching format.
Outside the session, Connections2020 helped entrepreneurs across the spectrum meet and connect, building new connections, and breaking down the barriers that COVID-19 has built across the industry. Surprisingly, Connections2020 helped bring the digital marketing team closer than ever before!
The Benefit of Digital? You Can Still Attend Connections2020!
Wondering what makes an online conference the premier way to engage attendees? With every session recorded, individuals can attend Connections2020 whenever they want, in real-time!
Connections2020 will live on as a living-summit until December 31, 2020. This means that attendees can rewatch and experience the two incredible days of teaching whenever they want through the Connections2020 online portal.
Watch sessions, pause and take notes, and learn even more than you could through an in-person experience. Not only that, but viewers can interact with speakers through social media, take advantage of the number of freebies given away during the live event, and watch replays as much as they wish.
Make sure to follow us online to see more updates and information on upcoming events, and join our digital community – where you can take advantage of insights, tips, and tricks for being the most effective digital marketer you can be!
Speaking Opportunities
We are taking applications for speakers for our Connections2021. If you’re interested, send your suggested talk to jessica@marketingforgreatness.com.
I wish someone had explained to me, in layman’s terms, what does SEO mean? How is SEO done? And how do you hire for SEO?
So that’s what I am doing today. Demystifying the most important considerations that a small business owner needs to have before hiring for SEO or Search Engine Marketing Services. And also, I’m covering a list of must-haves for those savvy entrepreneurs who are confident about developing websites and managing keywords, but don’t have a computer science degree and have no desire to go back to school to learn how to develop Java Codes, data warehousing, data mining, and other advanced digital marketing skills.
… Why? Because … what you don’t know is costing you money. Not everything is DIY! Especially in the SEO world.
Search Engine Marketing SEO vs Social Media Marketing – Which One Has More Impact?
A small business marketing budget tends to be limited — but that’s a good thing! When you don’t have endless cash flow, you need to be more assertive. You’re forced to learn to spend your money where it’s really going to count.
If you’re considering hiring marketing services, or starting to market for your own business, perhaps you are debating between social media marketing or search engine optimization (SEO) services.
A Real-Life Example of How Do We Use Both, Social Media and SEO
Imagine you’re planning a trip to California. You’re not sure about which city to travel to just yet. How would you go about making that decision?
You might search on Google and get some ideas. But you might also check out some pictures, hashtags, locations in particular, etc. And … you might just post in social media the typical post “I’m planning a trip to California and not sure which city is best, San Francisco or San Diego?”
What you just did- searching in different places and seeking advice in different ways- is called “the future buyer’s journey”.
The reality is that you need both SMM and SEO, but the good news is that social media marketing is easier than SEO and you could learn how to do it and save some marketing budget. As long as you have a social media strategy and the time to implement, the skills needed are not as technical as the SEO skills.
So… if you will do social media marketing, why would you still need to hire someone for SEO? Can your SEO wait until you get more budget? The short answer: yes you need to hire someone for SEO and that should not wait.
Prioritizing SMM vs SEO (Which One Goes First?)
Google and social media are both needed, but they will serve a very specific purpose that varies by where they are in their journey, which is why you want to have a big-picture strategy- the overarching approach to reach your goals.
When we develop a visibility strategy for the companies we consult for, social media becomes their main source of referrals and word of mouth marketing.
In general, social media marketing will mostly generate you sales if, and only if, you’re using direct sales tactics. This means:
You post very frequently
You stay in front of your audience
You inspire them
You educate them
You message them
You follow up with them
That’s great, but … it depends on YOU. If you have time to do all the process of social media marketing: planning the content, writing the content, preparing the visuals, scheduling the posts, on top of doing the social selling work, that’s good. But this doesn’t mean that it’s a scalable model.
You might want to leverage someone else’s time. Someone who actually enjoys doing that work so you can do the tasks that a CEO does. If you have time, you might want to learn social media strategies and digital marketing skills that can help you do that work in less time.
Search engine marketing, on the other hand, it’s not all about you directly sending messages to users. While many SEO gurus will say that you need to blog frequently and stay on top of your people, in reality, if your digital assets are in order, your business should be getting traffic and qualified leads as you’re reading this article.
If you’re overwhelmed, tired of running all bases of your business, and you’re looking for help with acquiring customers, SEO is your very next move. This can be even better than hiring a sales rep.
The One Thing That Matters When Hiring For Marketing
At some point, your brand will be in the minds of many people and you’ll get business coming to you. But … until you reach that point, strategic marketing is needed so you can execute a plan that takes you from where you are today to where you want to be, in the shortest time.
If you’re like most of my clients, you prefer visuals! One of my favorite tools to strategize is overarching models. It’s when you take the big-picture approach and see where everything is and visualize where you want it to be.
Overarching Strategies provide a general framework for the plan’s goal-specific strategies and define the scope of what the department must undertake and implement to achieve the plan’s goals. As the term overarching suggests, these strategies impact everything the department undertakes and expects to achieve.
If you don’t have a strategic marketing plan to grow your business, you’ll be at risk of losing money in the long term. This is why… what truly matters is that your marketing resources are strategically connected to your business vision. If not, you might find yourself growing a business on a treadmill. Next year will come and you’ll still be in the same place.
How To Hire For Search Engine Marketing (SEO)
Just like you won’t give yourself a fancy haircut, you’ll take your SEO needs to an SEO expert.
Generally speaking, you should expect a personalized service.
There’s no such thing as a one-size-fits-all SEO plan. And if there is, from the agency you’re about to hire, please step back.
Number One: Do They Know Your Needs?
Your SEO strategy starts by understanding your current online visibility. If you’re not even on the radar, you’ll need the heavy lifting work so you can get on the map as quickly as possible.
Here’s the tricky part. How can you pick the right talent if you have no idea about what SEO is? Perhaps you’ll search in Upwork or Fiverr for “best SEO” and there’s a good chance you won’t understand what they say they do.
The mandatory question here is: what is your goal? What do you need?
Your brain will play you! You will say “I want sales” which is normal. But the problem is… you can’t go to an SEO guru and tell them “I want sales”. They can’t give you sales and neither can social media marketers. Marketing and sales are two separate departments. This is why even the best e-commerce sites convert at 3%. It’s truly a numbers game.
Your SEO needs will vary, based on your business status and goals.
Your SEO strategy starts by understanding your current online visibility. If you’re not even on the radar, you’ll need the heavy lifting work so you can get on the map as quickly as possible.
Make sure to discuss your needs with your SEO specialist beforehand so you can be on the same page and have the right expectations.
Number Two: Ask For Conversions
Remember that search engine optimization (SEO) can be described as strategies and tactics used to ensure that future clients can find you when they are searching online for solutions that you offer. I call SEO “hacking Google love”.
In theory, the higher a website naturally ranks in organic results of a search, the greater the chance that that site will be visited by a user. In practice, ranks alone won’t pay your bills.
Your website can have 100,000 monthly users that have no intention to buy from you.
Believe it or not, there are many SEO specialists that only focus in ranks. I hear very often stories where business owners have paid several thousand dollars and can’t see results from the SEO marketing.
Not too many SEO specialists are equipped to be specialized in conversions.
Number Three: Hire A Senior-Level SEO
Hiring a senior-level SEO consultant will bring you higher ROI.
Personally, I prefer to hire experienced professionals who have 1) at least 10 years of experience and 2) industry knowledge. It takes them less time to find the answers I need and I get to execute faster.
Clarify with your SEO specialist what’s their experience and make sure they are experienced in technical SEO. A good question to filter their expertise is: how will you optimize my pages for qualified traffic? And for conversions? Can you show me?
Number Four: Request A Strategy Session
When it comes to SEO, just like social media, you have the marketing – execution and the strategy. Not every SEO specialist is a strategist. They can learn … but you might not want them to learn with your business!
Number Five: Clarify If You’re Getting Local or National SEO
If you’re a local business owner, your SEO needs will be different than if you’re, for example, a national company looking to sell on e-commerce. You’ll need Local Search Engine Marketing.
If you’re a franchise owner, e-commerce business owner, service-based professional, your needs will be different.
You see how this is turning more complex and why, if you don’t know what you truly need, you’ll hire the wrong people? If you can relate, my suggestion is to take 3 steps back and consult with a strategist.
Number Six: Take A Holistic Approach To SEO
Optimizing your brand so that it gets picked when people are searching for the services or products that you offer takes more than just typing keywords.
Factors that impact your SEO success:
Creating and publishing excellent content.
Using keywords and keyword analysis.
Link building to improve the website authority.
Using social media links on sites such as Facebook and Twitter.
Improving your site’s navigation to provide an excellent user experience.
Using marketing and sales copy that converts.
Your brand’s baseline and brand reputation.
Number Seven: Start With Technical SEO
Ask your SEO specialist which tools will they use. Tools like SEMRush, Screaming Frog, and Google Search Console can help analyze technical SEO, but they won’t fix the technical problems.
I always love sharing my story of how I discovered the truth of SEO a few years ago. I genuinely thought that just writing content and sharing on social media, consistently, was going to help my SEO. While our agency website got from 0 to 15,000 users per month, traffic would go back and forth. After a while, following the plan of “type or die” got me anxious. I took my website for a checkup with a technical SEO expert and this was my reaction:
There’s a good chance you have some of them and you just don’t know. And most tasks will require intermediate or advanced webmaster skills.
Fixing your technical SEO problems can be a rabbit hole. This is why I recommend discussing your brand with a senior-level expert to get certainty of what you truly need.
How Much Does It Cost To Hire SEO Strategy?
Consulting fees for a senior level SEO will go from $150- $350 per hour. But not all your needs will require a senior-level expert which is the beauty of this!
You can get a great robust SEO project done with about $2,500- $5,000.
Why do some SEO agencies offer SEO packages for $300 per month?
There are SEo agencies that offer plans where they monitor your brand for $300 a month and might work in some backlinking. But that’s not what you need the most!
What you need today is a healthy website, full of strategic content, positioned in platforms where people can find you.
Just when you thought you were ready to catch up with Instagram Stories, a new feature has arrived.
The rumors are true! Instagram Reels is very similar to TikTok.
Let’s get you a crash course on Instagram Reels, with a GIANT disclaimer! I’m still testing all the features and even though I’m a TikToker lover, the platforms are not identical.
I’m inclined to say that Reels is better 🥳
Let’s roll.
What Is Instagram Reels?
Facebook announced Reels as “a new way to create and discover short, entertaining videos on Instagram.”
The way I’m explaining Instagram Reels to my clients is “it’s an add-on to Instagram Stories”. So, you’ll have 15 minutes to craft a powerful story. You better get creative, since Reels users have TikTok experience, with several tricks that will shock you (in a good way)!
What are the advantages of using IG Stories? Now that Instagram Stories has the Reels option, are both needed at the same time?
Instagram Reels vs Instagram Stories
Instagram Stories is a very popular feature that enables Instagram users to post various short videos and photos that disappear after 24 hours.
Let’s not forget that Instagram Stories were also a copy – but from Snapchat!
Instagram Stories Disappear in 24 Hours – It’s Called Ephemeral Content
Ephemeral content is rich media that is only accessible temporarily (usually 24 hours) before it disappears forever. It can take many forms, including photos, live-stream videos, product demos, narrative stories, and more. Ephemeral content can currently be published on three primary platforms: Snapchat, Facebook, and Instagram.
When you post an Instagram Story, your profile image will feature a vibrant ring around it to inform other Instagram users letting them know that there’s new content that will disappear in 24 hours.
Once your stories expire, if you have saved them, you can create stories highlights.
Changes in Stories Features
Instagram launched Reels, which is an add on to Stories. If you’re missing some features from your IG Stories, no worries, they are not gone. They are in a different place now!
Instagram Stories Features That Changed
Creator feature
Boomerang feature
Layout feature
Superzoom
Hands-Free
Instagram Stories new menu, after launching Reels update.
The image above shows how to access these features. From the Instagram app, go home, top left, to initiate a story and you will see this new menu. The new drop-down menu is on the top left.
Instagram Reels Don’t Disappear in 24 Hours
The videos you create on Instagram Reels will have a permanent location, just like your IGTV videos. This is a huge benefit since your content will have some longevity.
When you share your Instagram Reels as stories, that story will disappear in 24 hours, but not your Reels content.
Instagram Reels Has A New Feed
When you use the Explorer Bar or Search Bar functionality, you will notice that Reels content is at the top.
On your profile, once you do your first Reels, you will see the video icon on your profile.
Where are your Instagram Reels saved? They have their own feed, just like IGTV.
Instagram Reels For Private Accounts
Anyone on Instagram can record a reel using your original audio. For private accounts: Only your approved followers can see and share your reels. When someone shares your reel, only your followers will be able to see it. No one will be able to record a reel using your original audio.
Instagram Reels Can Reach Virality Using #explorerpage
It seems like your brand could reach virality using a very similar strategy that TikTok has.
TikTok influencers use a popular hashtag #fyp meaning “for your page” where you can see viral content.
I noticed that the featured Reels were using the hashtag #explorerpage. You might want to try to hit a viral video!
Your explorer page will show public Reels at the top.
How Can Brands Use Reels?
There are three main ways that brands can market on Reels.
They can create their own channel and upload relevant videos through their channel.
They can work with influencers, to spread content to a broader audience.
They can pay to advertise on Reels.
Many brands that use TikTok marketing do a combination of running their own channels and working with influencers to spread content to a broader audience.
You might try some of the ideas listed below on your own channels, or you may suggest that your influencers create and share these kinds of content.
Watch Next: Instagram Reels Video: What is Instagram Reels and Why Businesses Should Use it?
Creating Reels
Select Reels at the bottom of the Instagram camera. You’ll see a variety of creative editing tools on the left side of your screen to help create your reel, including:
Audio: Search for a song from the Instagram music library. You can also use your own original audio by simply recording a reel with it. When you share a reel with original audio, your audio will be attributed to you, and if you have a public account, people can create reels with your audio by selecting “Use Audio” from your reel.
AR Effects: Select one of the many effects in our effect gallery, created both by Instagram and creators all over the world, to record multiple clips with different effects.
Timer and Countdown: Set the timer to record any of your clips hands-free. Once you press record, you’ll see a 3-2-1 countdown, before recording begins for the amount of time you selected.
Align: Line up objects from your previous clip before recording your next to help create seamless transitions for moments like outfit changes or adding new friends into your reel.
Speed: Choose to speed up or slow down part of the video or audio you selected. This can help you stay on a beat or make slow motion videos.
How to create Reels?
Reels can be recorded in a series of clips (one at a time), all at once, or using video uploads from your gallery.
Record the first clip by pressing and holding the capture button. You’ll see a progress indicator at the top of the screen as you record. Stop recording to end each clip.
Editing Reels Features
I think the best way to learn is by practicing, so don’t be afraid to use this feature! You can always delete the content if you didn’t like it.
As a mom of 4 children and TikToker, I couldn’t resist but try to explore this new feature. I had a lot of fun and … believe it or not, it counted as research!
Here’s a quick recap of the questions I had as I started using Reels.
How to find music on Reels?
The music icon is the first item on the menu. You can find the music using the search option.
Can you copy background music in Reels like in TikTok?
Yes.
To use audio from a Reels you like, hover to the name of the audio, which appears under the video. Tap to see the audio and you will see the feature “use audio”.
Can you copy filters and effects in Reels?
Yes.
Reels gives you the option to copy, not only background audio but all the effects. I think this is a cool feature. So now you could copy your favorite makeup filters without having to spend hours testing! The app will show you every effect that was used to create the video.
If the video has effects, you will see it, right next to the audio. Tap over to see the effects and you’ll see the option to use them.
How To Trim Instagram Reels Clips To Make Cool Tricks?
This feature is, in my opinion, one of the best inventions that TikTok made!
You can film multiple clips without publishing them. Then, upload them and edit to add just the part of the clip you want.
If you don’t like your clip, you can always delete it by pressing the arrow in the bottom-left.
Note: if you delete by hitting back and you have other clips, you will delete the entire video.
Reels Will Boost Your Engagement
My Reels videos had over 1,000 views, without hashtags. I was just testing it and loved the reaction of my audience.
Since my first Reels I have tested different styles that I typically cover on my TikTok and experienced real conversations.
Real conversations mean real followers!
How To Gain More Followers? Use Reels
This new feature will give your feed a new spirit! If you incorporate this into your Instagram marketing strategy, you should get new followers. It’s a matter of engaging with them like humans!
There are more advanced editing features that I will be covering. But this is a good start!
Now it’s your turn to discover Reels and come back with your comments and questions!
Don’t forget to grab your tickets for the event! Or if you’re interested in a private consultation where we can discuss your branding needs and strategize, schedule a coffee call so we can chat.
A little bit of Jessica Campos
My name is Jessica Campos, JD, the attorney-turned-into-forensic-marketer. I’ve been launching brands in social media since 2012. Almost $20,000,000 in tracked revenue has been generated through my proven online marketing strategies, growing my own personal brand to over 50,000 nurtured connections, and teaching 1000s of students in my online courses and programs.
I teach how to market for greatness.
How to monetize.
I’m an author.
I’m a strategist.
I’m here at MarketingForGreatness.com with a team of amazing people.
Where is my accent from? Puerto Rico! I moved to the US at age 30. It has taken me all this time to get comfortable writing and making videos in my second language. Thank goodness for my team of editors!
I’m up to fulfilling my life purpose and calling of helping people claim their voice.
Where do I live? I currently live in the beautiful city of Austin, Texas!
Check out my book, Your Social Visibility Blueprint. Available in Amazon.
If you’ve been considering starting a business that you can work from anywhere, getting into social media marketing makes total sense.
In this article, I will give you an overview of why I think starting a social media marketing today is a great idea and how you can make money in 30 days or less.
Let’s roll.
Social Media Management Market Size
While social media marketing is not a new business idea, the market forecast presents a bright future for anyone with online marketing skills who loves social media and is open to doing the work it takes to provide excellent service.
The global social media management market size will grow to USD 17.7 billion by 2023. Source. Market size matters when it comes to starting a new business. However, market size isn’t the only factor. You also need to consider the market needs.
Challenges Small Business Owners Face On Social Media
If you Google the top challenges that small business owners face when it comes to their social media marketing, you’ll find this list of social media challenges:
Challenge 1: So many platforms to choose from and not knowing where to focus.
Challenge 2: Lack of resources to meet the users’ expectations.
Challenge 3: It’s difficult to measure conversions.
Challenge 4: There aren’t enough hours in a workweek.
Challenge 5: Not knowing how to set up the right goals.
According to Forbes, it takes 32 hours a month to manage a single social media platform correctly, that’s roughly 6-8 hours per week. Only 25% of small business owners spend 6-10 hours per week on social media. This isn’t because they underestimate the value; they just don’t have the time.
What Pains A Social Media Marketer Solve?
Social media management helps users with a wide variety of tasks to develop their social channels and effectively gain visibility amongst social media users.
A key factor to generate clients as soon as possible is your unique value proposition. All you need is to describe the pain that you’re trying to solve with your services, for a specific market.
A very simple way to craft your UVP is taking the 5 challenges listed above and turn one or two into your UVP.
Example of how to present your unique social media marketing value proposition:
I do social media marketing for business owners who want to turn social media accounts into income-generating channels and have no time to lose.
In this example, you’re solving 2 pains for small business owners, so they will see 2 benefits:
Save time
Make more money
Now that you have your UVP, your next step is your business identity.
To make things very simple, start with your name. Buy a couple of domain names (including yours if it’s available) in GoDaddy.com.
Make sure your online first impression is polished. What do I mean with this?
You have a professional Facebook profile and a business page
Crafting Your Elevator Speech As A New Social Media Management Agency
When you’re about to start and want to bring clients as quick as possible, it’s perfectly ok to pitch small business owners with the following message:
Hello, I’m ______. I’m about to launch my social media marketing agency. I would love to partner with small business owners who see the value in having a personalized and reliable social media specialist who can do the heavy lifting while generating conversions. Since I am starting and want to build a portfolio, the first 10 clients will have a special rate.
Share this message with everyone you know.
Try to come up with a list of at least 100 names so you can get to those 10 new clients as soon as possible.
Facebook Groups are a great resource to find business owners who want to collaborate with emerging marketers. In case you’re interested, I lead 2 Facebook Groups and can connect you with some opportunities. Click here to join my Marketing for Greatness Network.
Now that you have the tools you need to prospect, let’s discuss pricing.
How Much To Charge For Social Media Marketing?
Watch out for platforms like Fiverr.com, Upwork.com, and Freelancer.com. They have freelancers who are willing to offer social media management services at very low rates. I want to give you the heads up on how to handle those business owners who think that social media management is going to cost them $5 per hour.
Stay away from business owners who want premium services paying $5 per hour rate.
Set up your minimum hourly rate (even if you don’t disclose this with your future client). If you’re not confident about charging these prices, getting certified in social media marketing will help.
Social Media Marketing Pricing Plans
Social media beginner level: $15- $20 per hour. Expect to work about 10 hours a week between your work and research. Total of hours per month: 45. Average monthly fees: $750.
You could consider discounting your learning time, so your rate could be $600 per month.
Social media intermediate level: $30- $50 per hour. Factor your time spent on strategy and a fee from a social media manager, beginner level, so you can get more clients. 25 hours per month at $50 is $1,250. Expect to pay your manager by tasks, about $200 per account, so you have a net of $1,000.
You could get paid $2,000-$5,000 a month if you add other projects into the mix and create social media marketing packages, with add-ons such as:
Copywriting for website
Lead pages
Email marketing management
Additional platforms such as Youtube, Pinterest, Houzz, Etsy, etc.
How To Find Social Media Marketing Clients
I hope you’re excited about the possibility of owning a social media marketing agency. Hey! Imagine if you get 5 clients at $600 that’s $3,000 per month while working from home in your PJs!
Finding clients is all about leads!
Memorize this: leads are the heart of your business.
Just one thing, please! A lead is not a lead until it shows an interest in your offer. When you create your list of 100’s of names, those are NOT leads. Those are suspects. Once you pitch them and they want more information, they are prospects. And once they actually accept a meeting with you, they are leads.
So, how can you find leads then?
My Top 3 Lead Generation Activities
You will be surprised here! I’ve built 4 businesses: a law firm, 2 e-commerce businesses, and a marketing firm, without ANY advertising.
My top 3 lead generation activities have been:
Word of mouth
Organic marketing online
Networking events
Why should Marketers care about WOMM?
If you could master what has been identified as the most valuable form of marketing—the one that consumers trust above all others and the one that is most likely to drive sales for your company — would you instead choose to ignore it or leave it to chance?
Seriously! Start with WOMM. Work with that list and pitch your suspects without any hesitation. If you think you need help with prospecting skills, take a few hours a week to learn how to prospect. And remember, practice makes perfect.
Learn about Success Club- $10 a month will give you access to members-only content, marketing tools, and more!
Partnership marketing will be your next step.
8 Effective Partnership Marketing Examples
A great way to get clients faster is through partnerships. I’m not talking about partners who share equity. I’m referring to marketing partners who can generate win-win opportunities.
Some of the most effective marketing partnerships to consider:
Affiliation: Known as affiliate marketing. It’s a collaborative effort where the primary brand offers a product or service and the secondary brand benefits from commissions earned per lead or sale.
Content: Content partnerships can happen when brands collaborate to either a) produce content or b) share links. Link sharing means linking to the partner’s content from their own site. This provides exposure, aligns both brands together, and advances SEO.
Distribution: Where one partner agrees to cross-market or bundle another partner’s product or services into their own distribution channels to target the agreed customer base. This can happen by cross-marketing and/or creating bundles.
Charitable: A primary brand sponsors or markets itself with a charitable organization or cause. You can promote their cause and they promote your event. This helps with brand awareness and cultural influence.
Joint products or services: For example, you offer social media management and our firm offers SEO. The key here is that the service is an amalgamation of both products aiming at mutual target audiences. Example: white label products.
Licensing: Licensing is a business arrangement in which one company gives another company permission to manufacture its product using its brand image for an agreed payment or partnership.
Loyalty: Loyalty program or ambassador program. A retention marketing technique that offers consumers a reward in return for increased usage. Have you heard about Instagram ambassadors? That’s what this is about!
Sponsorship: The marketing tactic of placing a brand alongside a particular event, displaying itself as a partner or supporter, with the objective to increase brand recognition and reputation.
Consider Niche Marketing: Facebook Marketing Agency Or Instagram Marketing Agency
There’s a good chance that you meet an established marketing agency who is serving accounts with bigger budgets and need a platform-specific service.
You could market particular social media services such as:
Facebook community management and Facebook Groups admin
Instagram marketing, Instagram outreach
Facebook chat management
Customer service chat
Appointments management
Instagram stories
Instant posts
Facebook live coordinator
CRM integration
Shopping cart management
… Just to name a few.
Social Media Marketing Tools
I’ve constructed this guide to help entrepreneurs and small business owners without unlimited marketing budgets understand the erratic world of social media.
This ultimate guide gives you my favorite social media marketing tools that you can use to boost your social media without breaking your bank account.
I’m here to simplify your game by telling you exactly which tools I use as a small business owner and strategist with over 10 years in digital marketing.
My Go-To Social Media Scheduling Tools
I will recommend you tools that will help you plan and schedule posts a month ahead.
Scheduling Tool #1: Social Media Marketing Planner
You’ve probably seen fancy calendars and planners. I’m actually not a big fan of those scrapbooking style tools.
I rather get things done. I guess it comes with having a strict agenda and plenty of things to do.
So, for simplicity, your calendar can be just a Word Doc or Google Doc.
Here’s the format I use to plan my social media marketing every month:
Just think about this, on a Google document, super simple.
Part 1: Theme of the month: Growth. We want to share content that inspires, educates, and invites people to consider us for their business growth needs.
Part 2: Target audience: small business owners in their first 3 years of their business.
Part 3: Events of the month: Webinar week 2 and Networking event, week 4.
Part 4: Blogs to publish during the month: Ultimate guide of social media and Instagram tutorial
Part 5: Marketing Campaigns: #MembersMonday #SummerSocial
Scheduling Tool #2: Facebook Creator Studio
Your Facebook Business Page comes with the option to schedule posts in the future. Now with Creator Studio, if you have multiple pages, you can post and schedule multiple pages, all from the same dashboard.
Creator Studio integrates Instagram as well. You are able to see Instagram’s content library from Facebook. We still can’t post to Instagram from Creator Studio, but I won’t be surprised if that will come soon.
Scheduling Tool #3: Facebook Group Scheduler
Facebook Groups are a great way to grow your audience on social media. It’s by far one of my favorite social media tools.
In full transparency, I use Hootsuite for my agency. I like how authenticates and I can just add team members and assign accounts. So, for agencies, I believe they are staying competitive.
For solopreneurs, Hootsuite’s new pricing model might not make sense.
You only need a scheduler like Hootsuite for your Twitter and LinkedIn, since Facebook has its own scheduler. Buffer is a good alternative.
For those of you looking for more robust social media management tools that can offer curation and content suggestions, MeetEdgar is a great option.
Scheduling Tool #5: Later | Planoly
For those of you who are 100% Instagram marketing, you then need a social media management tool that specializes in the platform.
My research narrowed to 2 options and I chose Later.com. I liked their ability to add teams so I can get my team working on our clients while still having access to the accounts. Some of my clients use Planoly.com and are very happy too.
Later and Planoly also work on Pinterest.
Scheduling Tool #6: Sprout Social
Sprout Social does what Buffer and Hootsuite do but in a more complex way, but this platform is best for small-large agencies as their analytics feature beats Hootsuite and Buffer hands down. They provide full reporting details for their premium members, breaking down each account in bits. You can even compare your competitor’s figure and see where they are and how best to tackle them. It’s that deep.
The downside with Sprout Social is the fact that it is far more expensive than Buffer and Hootsuite put together and they have no free plan, just a 30-day trial. Sprout Social works with Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, and Instagram.
We love to partner with social media managers who are looking to get more clients and want to learn best practices, strategies, and advice from marketing & sales experts.
We provide resources, templates, scripts, training, and certification, and powerful connections to help you thrive.
Let’s make it happen!
Schedule a virtual coffee where we can discuss how to collaborate.
The coronavirus pandemic is emerging as an existential threat to the nation’s small business owners. This is NOT normal. Even when people try to sugarcoat it. We joke and say “the new normal”, but … the banking account is feeling quite the opposite.
Businesses need 2 C’s:
1) Clients 2) Cash
The way you get clients is through getting exposed in front of potential buyers, period.
Success is mathematical, not psychological.
If you don’t go to events, don’t attend conventions, don’t have professional interactions, sooner than later, your pipeline will simply get dry.
This is a real problem.
The solution to get more leads? Virtual prospecting.
The sooner you can learn how to master the process of prospecting online, the better it will be. But wait… prospecting online?
How to prospect for new clients online or how to prospect virtually?
In person events are out of your lead generation equation. This means that you now have to hustle online. Well… welcome to my world.
I realized that my decade of experience in internet marketing, developing new markets using social media marketing and personal brand marketing could add value to many professionals and entrepreneurs.
What are the best prospecting techniques?
Social media marketing, especially Facebook, is at the top of the digital marketing strategies to find new clients online.
I host networking events for our community of Austin Networking for Professional & Entrepreneurs. We are now over 5,000+ local business owners and counting. As a social media educator, I decided to host online events to provide connections and discuss resources for those who wanted to accelerate their online networking skills. Those events were the inspiration for my book.
How do you reach prospects online?
Finding, reaching, and discovering sales opportunities online can be intimidating. Add to that the urgency and anxiety from a pandemic and you have the perfect storm!
The key to reach out to prospects online is in your personal brand. Without it, you are at risk to be considered a spammer. … You can’t risk your first impression … especially online!
Personal Brand Marketing
Personal branding refers to the practice of marketing and packaging yourself, your career, and your experience as a brand.
What’s your personal brand about? It’s about YOU! People buy YOU before they get interested in your products or services.
My Book on Personal Brand Marketing
My book reached #1 best-seller in 2 categories: Web Marketing and Internet Marketing and I’m just amazed!
What’s in the book?
Part 1: The Essentials of Social Media- Solopreneurs spend many hours of the day, working on marketing tasks, that come randomly, and most of the time, as a distraction. Learning the fundamentals of building a social media marketing strategy is the key to growing a business, along with strategies followed by amazing brands like Amazon, Starbucks, Apple, and Kendra Scott. You will be inspired to build a community of loyal customers, to stop competing based solely on price, and to grow your business.
Part 2: A Guide to Personal Branding- Here’s where you’ll get the- A 1-page blueprint to building a personal brand that builds a long-lasting first impression and ignites revenue. This is what thriving brands are doing in the digital economy. What if you are a brick and mortar business? Do you need to follow personal branding strategies? Absolutely! Humanizing your brand is the ultimate secret to survive the retail apocalypse.
Part 3: How to Write So They Listen- You will learn the psychology behind crafting content that moves your audience to action and learn why writing is not just about sharing pretty words.
Part 4: A Full Year of Copy For Social Media Marketing- You’ll have everything you need to simply plug n’ play your profitable content marketing plan. These are not just ideas to post. You will get detailed campaigns with strategies and templates.
Part 5: Social Visibility- You’ll get the Social Visibility Blueprint to turn your social media marketing into your salesforce. My promise with Your Visibility Blueprint is to eliminate the overwhelm from social media marketing. I want to provide you with a blueprint to ignite visibility, so you can build the business you love, and have the life you deserve. Most likely, you’re a purpose-driven business owner like me; I take my mission to activate your greatness very seriously!
BONUS: Along with this book, you will unlock access to amazing resources, such as:
* A complimentary Forensic Marketing Audit (Value $500+)
* Editable Visibility Workbook to plan your content like a pro (Value $47)
* Special price in our Marketing For Greatness Courses (save up to 80%)
* The Marketing For Greatness Network. Connect with other solopreneurs and participate in life-changing conversations.
If there were a clear, actionable way to boost your personal brand using social media WITHOUT turning yourself into the embarrassing “I am the influencer” style… Or even better … BENCHMARKING your growth so you see where your revenue is at. … Would you feel motivated to market your amazing products or services? You see: you’re willing to put in the work. If you read my book you’ll find a lot of practical advice to implement personal brand marketing the right way!
More owners are permanently shutting their doors after new lockdown orders, realizing that there may be no end in sight to the crisis.
Nearly 66,000 businesses have folded since March 1, according to data from Yelp, which provides a platform for local businesses to advertise their services and has been tracking announcements of closings posted on its site.
If your business has been impacted by the COVID-19 and you’re considering pivoting by launching generating business online, keep reading.
We’ve compiled highlights from digital marketing strategies that we have prepared over the last 90 days.
Online Marketing Strategies for Small Business in 2020
With the current lack of physical options and more reliance on the digital landscape, digital marketing continues to provide value to small businesses looking to expand their reach and revenue.
At the start of 2020, it was reported that businesses would spend $1.3 trillion on digital marketing this year. The impact of the coronavirus makes this likely to change, however, because businesses are cutting costs.
During this downtime, small businesses have the opportunity to figure out what works with their marketing strategies and channels.
7 Best Digital Marketing Tips for Small Businesses in 2020
Narrow your audience and identify a niche
Find opportunities to humanize your brand
Don’t treat your social media channels like a one size fits all
Take your website to a health check
Start planning your holiday campaigns
Implement an effective content marketing strategy
Start a brand ambassador program
1- Narrow Your Audience And Identify A Niche
Niche marketing is a form of marketing that is geared toward a very specific population, or niche.
Niche marketing is possible when a business specializes in a particular service, or serves a particular demographic within its target audience. If the business forms its marketing endeavors around this subgroup, this business would be in the practice of niche marketing.
Why is niche marketing successful?
A small customer base has its benefits. When you are engaging with fewer people, you can focus on the quality of those engagements and on nurturing your relationships.
Identify niche markets who are already passionate about a product or service you offer. Keisha Davis, owner of Shining Star Hair Salon in New York launched a subscription with her best haircare products she was selling at her 2 locations. Using niche marketing, Keisha narrowed her product selection and ignited a brand new stream of income for her business.
Niche marketing is a profitable strategy
Niche marketing reduces marketing costs.
When you know who you’re targeting, you don’t have to spread as wide of a net.
Niche marketing makes social media advertising (Facebook ads and Instagram ads) more effective, as you can let the platform know exactly who you want to target. This allows your message to only reach those who will be interested so you’re only going to be spending money on good potential leads.
2- Find Opportunities To Humanize Your Brand
People respond to people – it’s that simple. Steer away from the robotic marketing tactics and instead focus on being relatable, interesting, and most importantly, HUMAN.
Have you ever received an email from “info” or “admin” or “customer service”? How did it feel? In my opinion, it feels mysterious and unless I know the company, most likely I will delete it right away.
If you consider yourself a private person, as a business owner, share with your audience the “why” behind what your brand is doing. Your audience wants to see who is behind your product or services.
The more real and authentic you can be, the better.
3- Make Custom Content For Your Social Media Channels
Now that you want to stand out from the crowd, keep in mind that your goals are to personalize experiences and deliver more personalized content.
Personalized Content Examples
Personalized content means that you’re considering your users preferences. Instead of just sharing the same content to all the social channels at the same time, take some time to consider the following:
What content do they appreciate?
What is your goal from your content? Get engagement? Get sales?
Optimize your content for conversions
Facebook Groups are a great place to get brand visibility.
Website performance is incredibly important because customers generally think load times are slower than they actually are. This means you need to be doing all you can to make your website load as fast as possible.
What are the qualities of a good website?
A good website is not all about style. Some of the important qualities of a good website are:
It needs to work
It should function by device: desktop, mobile, and tablet
It should have relevant content
Speed is critical
Secure
If you want to take your business online, your website is your main asset.
Our website health check tool is amazing! You should see it on the right panel (from desktop) or at the end of this blog (from mobile).
5- Start Planning Your Holiday Campaigns
Business seasonality can bring great opportunities. How big is your Holiday season?
American Express has a Shop Small event every year. New data released today found U.S. shoppers who shopped at independent retailers and restaurants on Small Business Saturday reported spending a record high total of an estimated $19.6 billion, according to the 2019 Small Business Saturday Consumer Insights Survey from American Express (NYSE:AXP) and the National Federation of Independent Business (NFIB).
Partner with strong brands to ignite visibility faster.
Carolina Villareal, the founder of Mint Event Design, has pivoted her events styling business by creating unique party decoration kits. She has also partnered with other local vendors to offer unique experiences.
6- Implement An Effective Content Marketing Strategy
Data can come from anywhere. Insights come from intelligence.
Ok … That makes sense … But what is content or content marketing anyway?
The main difference between content and content marketing is the destination you will use to attract and build an audience.
Just remember this part: Effective content marketing equals money!
Content marketing is simply the creation, publishing, and distribution of great content to attract and build an audience. Sounds simple! But … What kind of audience? I’m sure you don’t want to get emails asking for your banking account to deposit your inheritance of $20,000,000! Of course not. Therefore it’s important to define the audience that you want to attract and a map to reach your goal.
In other words … content marketing + defined audience + map = revenue
The image below is from our content planner. Before getting into content writing and content production, we encourage you to take the following steps first:
Define clear avatars
Perform a deeper analysis of what content users want to consume, which format, and which platform
Use SEO tools to gain more visibility
Develop content for the 3 main purchasing decision stages: awareness, consideration, purchase
If content marketing is the journey toward brand success, content strategy is the blueprint that directs it. It takes just one content strategy session with an experienced content marketing specialist to plan your next amazing project!
When we help business owners, we strategize, plan, and write content based on SEO best practices to help generate organic traffic to your site.
Brand ambassadors act as cheerleaders for your business and represent the culture of your company to the public.
How do ambassador programs work?
A brand ambassador program is very similar to a customer loyalty program. It rewards loyal customers that frequently engage with a brand.
Brand ambassadors are very popular, thanks to the boom of Instagram influencers. Ambassadors are people who agree to distribute your content. If they are loyal customers, having an ambassador badge makes them feel very special.
Do you have raven fans? Cheerleaders? If so, they are your ambassadors! Recognize them and
Do brand ambassadors get paid?
Brand ambassadors have different categories, depending on factors such as:
Status
Trusted partners
Domain authority
Proven record
Most new ambassadors are open to collaborate in exchange for free produce. However, keep in mind, you can also incentivize your loyal clients and it’s even better. Now that you’re open to innovative ways to spread the word, consider adding ambassadors to your brand, but also becoming one!
How to start a brand ambassador program?
Starting your ambassador program is as easy as reaching out existing clients and existing brands you love.
April Hill, founder of Yoga Studio 90 in Baton Rouge, Louisiana, has done an amazing job at featuring brand partners like K-deer in her social media posts. By doing that, not only she’s turning herself in as an ambassador for a brand she trusts, but is collaborating with a trusted brand, which gives her the opportunity to expand awareness around her latest YS90-On-Demand membership.
Starting a brand ambassador program doesn’t have to be complex.
Except for search engine optimization (SEO) services, the marketing tips discussed above can be implemented easily.
How does SEO help?
Search Engine Optimization services can be very complex. Sadly, most SEO agencies can’t perform at the speed and budget that a small business owner needs.
What is good SEO and bad SEO?
In the SEO world, there are practices that have been banned by Google, which are considered “bad SEO”.
Is listing my business in Yelp SEO?
Listing your business in Yelp or in any other local listing will increase visibility. While Yelp is a very robust listing service, we encourage business owners to focus on Google My Business Listing first.
How to start Google My Business Listing?
Click here to read all the steps to open your GMBL.
We Want to Feature Business Stories!
Share your resilience story with us at jessica@marketingforgreatness.com.
Want to use multiple images in a single Instagram post?
Have you tried Instagram’s Carousel theme?
With just a bit of design, you can turn the Instagram multi-image feature and boost your reach, engagement, and increase your conversions.
In this article, you’ll discover how to set up your Instagram carousel and how to incorporate them into your Instagram strategy.
Why Create an Instagram Carousel Post
As you may know, 80% of marketers use visual assets in their social media marketing. When it comes to Instagram, this number goes to 100%.
The visual-centric platform that began as a photo-posting app has grown into a source of income for creators and a new sales channel for businesses.
If you want to stand out, turning your best content into carousel posts will do the work. See it by the numbers!
Research shows that carousel format posts got more engagement than the regular image and video, regardless of the size of the audience.
Carousel posts get users to actually stop and read- which is what you want!
If you’re up to see more engagement, doing a horizontal infographic that your users can swipe left and right and save can be the solution!
Here are some content ideas for your carousel posts.
#1: A Mini Slideshow
A mini slideshow is great for educational content. Imagine compressing a powerpoint presentation or a brochure into Instagram-size images showing the number of pages.
To create this mini slideshow, think about your “how to’s” content and turn that into a multi-image post.
To make your slideshow, make sure to use the standard square image on Instagram at 600×600 pixels. Make your design visually appealing and don’t forget the page numbers.
Examples of content that can be used as a mini slideshow format:
Offer a checklist
Promote book downloads
Explain a whitepaper
Educate your audience about your products or services
Explain a solution
Invite people to join a cause
When we started using slideshows in our Instagram, we noticed that checklists had more “saved” reactions than the “pretty” / highly designed pictures. 😏
Do you think users are over the “all-pretty” feed? In my opinion, Instagram will always be a visual-first platform. However, generating conversions require more than pretty images that get likes.
What this slideshow is doing to your Instagram feed is, in fact, direct response marketing.
Direct response marketing is a type of sales technique designed to evoke an on-the-spot response and encourage a prospective customer to take action by opting in to the advertiser’s offer. Unlike other marketing types, the direct response requires little or no time waiting to see measurable results.
Direct response marketing is the equivalent of having a conversation with your potential customers. The purpose of direct response marketing is to send customers targeted messages that drive specific actions—buy a product, read your blog post, join a newsletter, refer-a-friend, any business goal.
When you throw direct response marketing into the mix of your Instagram Marketing content, you will wake up with messages of users ready to buy from you!
#2: A TikTok Montage
As a visual species, humans find videos more engaging, more memorable, and more popular than any other type of content out there. Video as a means of storytelling and advertising is no longer a nice option – it’s a necessity.
When it comes to Instagram, as the user base continues to expand and becomes more set on the kinds of content it wants, and how they want it, it’s essential to keep a finger on the pulse of certain video marketing trends.
If there’s something you can’t avoid, especially after our historical pandemic times it’s TikTok!
What’s so special about TikTok? Artificial intelligence. For the record, I’m not under 21. In fact, I’m double that number and I love TikTok!
Thanks to TikTok’s powerful AI, you can create a slideshow, add music that actually syncs with the transitions!
In case you’re hesitant about opening an account, just know that you can create the content and share it to yourself.
You can create this TikTok montage by using the slideshow feature on TikTok.
Here’s how you do it from your TikTok app:
Hit the + button in the middle -> upload -> image.
Select the images you want on the slideshow, then the format.
After you select the format, you will get to select your music. The app will suggest music based on your preferences, but you can always search to find the one you would like.
To use this content for Instagram, you can either save the video or share it from TikTok.
Don’t be afraid to try! Expect to see an increase in views and reach of up to 4x your regular posts!
Examples of content that can be used as a TikTok montage format:
Reviews
Tour to your location
Before – After images
Demo
Event invite
Quotes
App downloads
Promote your e-course
#3: 2400 x 600 Infographic
You can use your multi image feature on Instagram to turn a 2400 x 600 pixels image into a seamless carousel.
Why infographics?
Infographics are a visually compelling communication medium that, done well, can communicate complex data in a visual format that is potentially viral.
Do you need to educate your audience to help them understand why your product or service is unique? …Then infographics could be part of the answer.
Examples of content that can be used as the infographic format:
Industry facts
Steps
Guides
Recap of a long article
Teaser for an upcoming seminar
Reasons why …
Turning your content into carousel posts will help you increase your engagement. If your account is new and you are looking to grow your audience, these content formats can help.
On the other hand, if you have an existing audience, let’s say, 1,000 people, you might want to implement niche marketing.
Instagram Works Best With Niche Marketing
After testing several infographics into our Instagram Marketing mix, we realized that users engaged more when the content was tailored to their niche.
Marketing to your niche increases the likelihood that you’ll reach your target audience. It also provides natural guidance for specializing your products and services and narrows your competition. But not only that, niche marketing will provide a higher return on investment since you’re already “preaching to the choir.”
When your users can feel related to you, they like you. Sooner than later, they will trust you and buy from you. It will be a matter of when, not if.
How To Find Your Niche In 2 Steps
If you’re struggling with finding your niche, this exercise can help you tremendously!
Step 1: 3 Things About You
Pretend that we are having a face-to-face conversation and I am a potential best partner for you. What 3 things would you want me to know about who you are?
Example using my very own answers:
I want you to know that I am a business nerd and I’m fascinated about teaching marketing & sales to solopreneurs and freelancers.
I want you to know that I’m a lawyer-turned-marketer.
I want you to know I was born in one of the happiest places in the world and that gave me magnetic genes!
My 3 things are: “teaching marketing & sales strategy”, “lawyer-turned-marketer and educator”, and “energetic personality from Puerto Rico”.
How about YOU? What do you want me to know about YOU? What are your 3 things?
You might want to ask for some feedback!
Step 2: Your niche
Now that you embrace YOU in 3 words, think about which users will really appreciate connecting with you.
Try to complete this!
From the ____________________ (big industry), those interested in (interests, hobbies, passions) __________________________________________, _________________________, and _______________________, will be the most passionate about connecting with someone like me: _____________________, ___________________, and ___________________ (insert your 3 things here).
Most likely, they call themselves:
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
Using my example,
From the small business owners industry, those who want to grow a business without sacrificing their family, want to learn marketing secrets, and are into intentional living, will be the most passionate about connecting with someone like me: “teaching marketing & sales strategy”, “lawyer-turned-marketer and educator”, and “energetic personality from Puerto Rico”.
Most likely, they consider themselves:
Content writers
Bloggers
Leaders
You truly want to have conversations with those who are naturally passionate about the topic you’re sharing. They will feel like “you get them”.
Your carousel posts will certainly help you get noticed.
Now let’s discuss how you can turn your loyal followers into customers.
Leverage Stories To Increase Your Conversion Rate
After sharing your best carousel post, share it to Instagram stories.
In case you’re new to stories, stories are made up of individual frames, like photos, videos, or graphics. They disappear in 24 hours and that adds the FOMO (fear of missing out) to your marketing strategy.
Stories Viewers
A great undiscovered stories feature is that you are able to see the list of stories viewers. But note that it’s for only 24 hours!
To access your story viewers list, go to your stories and tap at the bottom where you see the numbers. Your viewers will be there!
Refine your marketing strategy and integrate Instagram stories into your lead generation and sales process.
Do you know who is a qualified prospect for your business? If yes, then you will add this prospect in your list to follow up with a message.
Not sure who is a prospect? A prospect is someone who could potentially need your services or products, but they haven’t expressed a definitive interest.
A prospect turns into a lead when they express an interest in doing business with you.
Your stories viewers will very soon be your “binge watchers”. Your goal is to give them always a reason to keep coming for more. Just like Netflix does! Think about an episode of your favorite show… They start with “previously on …” Then the episode … Then “coming up next”.
Your stories can potentially become their next thing to binge watch!
Once they are binge watchers, they will trust you and could buy from you or become your brand advocators. It will be a matter of when, not if.
Promote Your Call To Action Via Stories
If you are offering a freebie, or a promotion on your carousel post, you can get your audience to pay attention to your call to action by adding stickers to your stories.
Use The Countdown Sticker To Turn On Reminder
When you are hosting a campaign that has a due date, you can add a countdown sticker that counts down to a date and time that you set.
Your followers can then subscribe to your countdown event, which will send them a reminder when the time is up and your countdown is complete!
This is a great strategy for engaging with your Instagram followers and getting your audience to opt-in to exciting special events or promotions.
When your followers turn on the countdown, you will receive a notification! You could ignite conversations with them!
Ignite Conversations By Using Polls
Instagram polls can help move your Instagram marketing strategy forward and keep your followers entertained and animated.
When users reply to a poll, you will be able to see them and send them a message.
WARNING! Instagram Story Bots
If you notice that you get random replies from users, just know that they might be bots (yeah … sadly).
Story-viewing bot, is just the latest in a line of automation tools that have changed how we use social media. Personally, I don’t think that users will be fans of accounts that pretend to use bots.
You should never lie to your audience.
How many stories should you share per day?
Data shows that the more frames published in a day, the lower the retention rate for that Story. There are no surprises there, as you can only lose viewers with each additional frame.
When you create your amazing carousel post, then this will be just enough for you to keep your users engaged.
To Recap!
Instagram carousel posts can potentially give you business! But don’t stop there! Leverage stories to create binge watchers and get them to like you, trust you, and believe in you!
If you have been getting social media marketing tips for real estate agents, but you’re not clear on how exactly those tips will get you real estate leads, you’re so right!
Working on content marketing and social media marketing without a real estate marketing strategy is like putting the cart before the horse.
Real Estate Marketing Trends in 2020
When it comes to marketing trends in 2020, in my very humble opinion, we still don’t know many aspects, as we continue to cover new ground and confront unprecedented challenges triggered by the coronavirus pandemic.
However, we can take a look at 2019 numbers and get the facts that we already know.
Homebuyers take virtual steps as part of their home buying process.
Gone are the days of cold calling and knocking doors.
Millennials now make up 66 percent of the market for first-time homebuyers, and 99 percent of those looking for homes use the internet to research properties.
The hashtag #justlisted has 2.1 million posts on Instagram
House hunters now include g property-related hashtags and social media feeds in their searches, and that’s only the tip of the iceberg.
Winning The Race To Find Motivated Seller Leads In Social Media
You might think that the race to find motivated seller leads is very competitive. The good news! There are lot of opportunities!
You might think that the big players dominate the real estate digital market. While that is the case, real estate agents can benefit from developing their personal brand to stand out from the crowd.
Word of Mouth marketing impression results 5x more sales than a paid media impression, and people are 90% more likely to trust and buy from a brand recommended by a friend.
Motivated sellers will ask their friends. Because of this, you actually don’t know when those friends of friends are scrolling your page, considering contacting you.
The question becomes, not if, but when. That’s why you need to be ready to get leads and sales!
Let’s craft your wondrous social media marketing strategy.
1- Planning
To plan your visibility is like playing a game of chess; it requires focus, a strategy, and the right move at the right time.
A very simplistic way to cover this first part of your strategy is by asking yourself: where are you and what are your next benchmarks. The answers will help you set attainable goals.
Do you need to build a personal brand? Yes? Then, you are in development mode. Your initial benchmark is getting this done.
Do you have a personal brand but want to grow your audience? You are in growth mode. Your first benchmark is to increase your sphere of influence. Depending on where you start, your milestone should be 5x or 10x your number of personal contacts.
Did you grow your social media channels, but there are no conversions? You are in optimization mode. Your benchmarks are associated with your lead generation and conversions.
Having a clear vision of where you are and where you want to be allows you to make strategic moves.
2- Presence
Let’s face it; evading social media presence is not an option – You want to target audience, you have to get them where they are, and it’s ‘online.’
Regardless of which of the 3 phases discussed above: development, growth, and optimization, your social media strategy needs to consider your online presence.
If you are in development mode, then you need to build your presence. Putting yourself on social media is more complicated than it seems. Don’t overthink it. Work within your strengths. Instead of thinking you need to be everywhere to be successful, work to master one platform at a time.
If you are in growth mode, your social media marketing strategy needs to consider how to generate more followers, engagement, reach, and reviews. This is all part of your online presence.
If you are in optimization mode, your social media marketing strategy should consider ways to incorporate search engine marketing, search engine optimization, and paid traffic. There’s a good chance that you’re interested in running Facebook Ads and Instagram Ads. Just be aware that real estate ads have a different compliance process, as they are a special ad category.
Statistics show that it’s a make or break in a split of a second when it comes to online visitors establishing an opinion of your brand. Therefore, you have to be smart about how to make your online presence look appealing, reliable, and legit for the targeted audience.
3- People
Third in line but probably the most important P of them all – People. In other words, your targeted audience. Always remember consumers put brands on the map, not companies. I cannot emphasize enough how vital it is for you to base and build a reputation and persona of your product around your clientele.
To build a useful and appealing persona, you must consider some areas of focus.
Are you marketing a specific age group?
Are you marketing a specific real estate product?
Are you marketing to buyers, sellers, or investors?
Are you marketing to residential leads or commercial real estate leads?
Balancing Your Real Estate Content With Your Personal Content
It is advisable to use the 80/20 rule, also known as the ‘Pareto Principle.’ In social media marketing terms, you must use 80% of your interaction with the customer, i.e., conversations, content, and activities, to be useful and relatable to them.
You can utilize the remaining 20% for your real estate ads. Sharing trustworthy content with your audience, backed up with well-thought marketing claims, will establish your authority with trust amongst the masses.
Our Social Media Planner helps you plan your content and track your performance.
4- Product
Ever wondered what your audience thinks of what you do? As a real estate agent, you’re a service provider. But, have you thought about what is genuinely your service?
Think about ways to market your trust to gain authority in the marketplace. What are some of the professional qualifications that make you unique?
Do you have certifications?
Designations?
Number of deals closed?
Awards?
How To Establish Trust As A New Real Estate Agent?
If you’re a new real estate agent, leverage your skills and background to make people remember you.
A powerful way to market yourself in a new field is by using your story. People buy your why.
Your real estate branding and your social media strategy should consider YOU as the product. Think of ways to get people to relate and connect with you first.
5- Placement
I would strongly suggest for you to address some factors while formulating your ideal social media placement strategy. You must know where your audience hangs out the most. There are several ways to find this out, such as asking yourself which social media you would visit if you were to find a new doctor or a new attorney? Or a more direct approach is to email your connections for their opinion.
You must also consider other factors like the time and resources that you have.
Can you get leads on Instagram? Yes, you can.
Tips To Get Real Estate Leads From Instagram
Learn Instagram for Business so you can understand the best practices to get engagement from potential clients.
Instagram transactions are mostly B2C, so don’t expect a big crowd of people to be excited about your real estate tips. This is normal for B2B content.
Qualify your leads by having direct conversations with people.
Use stories to communicate with users.
Create a landing page for your Instagram so that people can learn more about you and your properties on their own time. This is the famous link in your bio.
A real estate lead generation system works as long as you are willing to put the time and effort to network with people. Just like in real life.
6- Performance
When it comes to strategizing around performance, there are two leading roles: setting up your basic trackers and designing a series of events to go back and analyze your performance.
Remember the 3 phases we discussed above: development, growth, and optimization.
If you are just starting to develop your brand, set up a tracking system so you can pay attention to the following:
Impressions – how many times the platform distributed your content
Reach- how many people saw your content
Engagement- how many people showed a reaction
If you’re in growth, then you’ll add another tier of elements to track. For example, if you are running Facebook Ads and Instagram Ads, you will pay attention to:
Clicks to your website or landing page
Cost per ads results
Ads performance
For those in the optimization phase, your social media strategy needs a more robust content marketing strategy. Pay attention to:
Your call to actions on your landing page
Your content marketing campaigns
Your email marketing performance
As long as you consider performance as part of your social media marketing strategy, even when you’re just using Facebook Insights and Instagram Insights, you are good to go.
If you’re looking for a system to track your performance from social media marketing, I recommend SEMRush.com. It allows you to integrate all your digital marketing channels in one place, so that you can see not only how your brand is growing, but your visibility as well. It also takes into consideration your competitors.
7- Processes
Your wondrous social media strategy is almost done! Since you have created all of these projects to market your real estate business in social media, now it’s time to discuss your processes.
So what is a process, anyway? A process is a series of actions or steps taken to achieve a particular end.
Critical processes to consider:
Content writing process.
Reputation marketing process.
Social media management process.
Lead generation and lead management.
Sales process.
Each process has steps. And each step can be worked either on a daily or weekly basis. That’s why you need to be strategic! Or else it will make you feel overwhelmed, and you will throw the towel in just a few weeks.
Here’s a checklist we shared on Instagram that covers what to do in social media daily and weekly! Remember to check out the Visibility Planner, your comprehensive planner to get your marketing done!
Your Social Media Marketing Plan
Now that you have a strategy, you are ready to put your social media marketing plan in place.
Instagram seems to be THE platform to pay attention now. So, jump in! If you have questions don’t hesitate to reach out.
Remember one thing: if you’re not having fun, you’re doing something wrong!
Conclusion
Now that you and I both know the 7 Ps of Social Media Marketing, it’s time to make strategic moves! Make sure that you have a solid game plan in place before you start. Planning is critical. All successful social media campaigns have a clear plan of execution. Having tracking methods in place allows you to effectively review each campaign and determine the achievement (or failure) of the campaign. With this information, you are ready to optimize your next plan. Remember that failures are a part of the process as you are learning your audience. There are important nuggets of knowledge to be gained.
Are you wondering how exactly you can find the gold of Instagram Hashtags that everyone talks about? Are you confused about how many hashtags on Instagram?
Some marketers say it’s 30, but others say don’t do it because it’s spammy. This is very confusing, especially because they don’t tell you a logical reason.
Spoiler alert! My Instagram Hashtags Cheat Sheet is coming your way. But… numbers truly don’t matter, unless you are using each # with a specific strategy in mind.
I promise! You will get the golden ticket via Instagram marketing, just keep reading!
Key Elements Of A Successful Instagram Strategy
Before we dive into the nitty-gritty of where the gold is, let’s cover the key elements of a successful Instagram strategy and why you need it now more than ever.
Make sure you don’t confuse Instagram marketing with Instagram strategy. As a forensic digital marketing and educator, I can assure you, they are not the same.
Social network marketing is a way for businesses to interact with their target markets over the Internet via various social media platforms such as Facebook, Pinterest, Twitter, and Instagram (to name just a few).
A social media strategy then must consider how social media can be used and if it is needed:
For social communications internally and externally
To harness value from collaborative relationships
As a tool to manage and monitor brand reputation (internally and externally)
Setting up your expectations and goals from each channel is the first key element of a successful social media marketing strategy.
4 Most Important Elements Of Your Instagram Hashtag Strategy To Get Followers In 2020
Who do you want to attract?
WITFM (what’s in there for me). What will be the one thing that your users will stop at your account, follow you, and make them come for more?
Metrics and benchmarks so you have a GPS to track your route to success
Amazing content, not just based on what you think but based on your metrics
How Do You Use Hashtags on Instagram?
Don’t feel bad if you don’t know exactly what this # is. This is one of the most asked questions during my social media workshops and webinars.
In information systems, a tag is a keyword or term assigned to a piece of information (such as an Internet bookmark, digital image, database record, or computer file). This kind of metadata helps describe an item and allows it to be found again by browsing or searching.
A hashtag is a type of metadata tag. Ok…. This didn’t seem too basic…
From a user standpoint, hashtags are used to categorize content, making the discovery of new or related articles and insights easy to do.
Every time a post has a hashtag at the caption or on the first comment, it will be added to a tag category that makes people find your post.
Important note: your posts will only be visible in public walls if your profile is public.
Instagram Hashtag Search
What many Instagrams marketers seem to miss is that search engine marketing is applicable on Instagram.
Search engine marketing (SEM) is a digital marketing strategy used to increase the visibility of a website or a social media channel, in this case.
I know what you’re thinking: Can I really employ the same SEO techniques I use to optimize web pages for a social media app?
Fortunately, you can.
The trick isn’t shoe-horning Instagram into your existing SEO strategy, but rather to use what you already know about SEO to drive organic growth to your Instagram account.
Think of Instagram as its own search engine. The platform has built-in search functions that act like its own mini-Google.
You can search and see Instagram search trends. If you are familiar with SEO and Local SEO, you can also use locations to see the top posts and quickly identify a strategy to climb up there!
For now, even if you’re not a digital marketing expert in SEO, just know that you can use the search bar to see the popularity of a hashtag.
Instagram Hashtags For Likes
Who doesn’t want to feel like the Kardashians? I mean, hello! We all want to reach that level of visibility … but… What is the point behind showing likes? Read this again.
You certainly can explore what are the top hashtags using a tool like All Hashtag and get ideas to get more likes… but you need to be careful in the application of those #’s.
Adding a # on a post means that your picture will be visible on that # wall. You better watch what else is there before using those #’s with millions of images.
Therefore, when hashtags are used incorrectly, people looking for new content have to dig through irrelevant, miscategorized content to get to what they’re actually looking for.
You don’t want this bad user experience associated with your brand!
So, as a forensic digital marketing expert, I say, stay away from this practice. You want to see your very own # planner and explore how they perform. I will discuss this so keep reading!
Top Instagram Hashtags To Attract Real Instagram Followers
Hashtags are supposed to help users to search particular topics and join conversations. When done right, a good hashtag strategy should help you get visible in front of your ideal users.
Be strategic. Take some time to think about your imaginary buyer.
Instagram is not Amazon. Users are not there with their credit cards ready to buy.
If you are not getting users who are ready to buy, maybe you’re reaching users who are not ready for you.
Instagram has users ready to buy! But remember, it’s not like Amazon. They don’t have a credit card in hand and are actively searching for a product or a service.
But…
Great news! More than one in ten users are using the platform specifically to shop or find new products.
Your future best client is active on Instagram and yes, could buy from you!
Maybe they are searching for ideas and find your picture. If they stop and click on it, they will come to your profile. That is a conversion! Of course, you don’t see this activity unless they hit like, comment, or follow you, which might not happen for about 50% of people.
Once they see you, the ball is in your court!
The Seductive Instagram Marketing Funnel
The game is on.
When users are on your page, your goal is to captivate their attention and show them your value in less than 5 seconds.
Do you think your Instagram page can do that? Be honest.
The seductive Instagram Marketing Funnel starts with your strategic thinking!
Never take a digital marketing plan from anyone. As a business owner, you know your audience best.
Seductive Instagram Marketing
Here is the template we used to seduce users to buy our Social Media Planner.
Who are our raving users?
Entrepreneurs who want to create consistent content. They see themselves as content creators or brands.
For them to be ready to buy, they would be looking for “planner templates”, “planning tips”, “productivity tips”, “business tips”.
Users who are into personal growth, self-help, positivity, and creativity
Location: USA
They could be moms and hang out with other moms. Also, they associate themselves with entrepreneurs, agency owners, freelancers, content writers.
They are considering other planners in the market, such as Erin Condren. Also, they follow content creators and content marketing experts.
What makes them buy a planner from me?
Following the Visibility Planner example, the imaginary user is considering creating more content. Is actively searching for a social media calendar, social media templates, marketing calendar.
My imaginary user will like the idea of the planner, but won’t buy from me unless I create an amazing call to action.
How To Turn Users Into Customers
Remember, Instagram users are mostly searching. They are on top of your funnel. Your goal is to lead them as close to you as you can.
Direct messages are a great option, especially when you are starting. Therefore, get used to having real conversations with your users and invite them for a call.
Collaborate With Other Brands For More Visibility
In our case, we also collaborated with Vcita.com to help them spread awareness about the COVID experience, so that worked very well with our Visibility Planner campaign.
How Many Hashtags On Instagram
You definitely want to attract as many users as possible to your Seductive Instagram Marketing Funnel.
You will be using 30 hashtags. Why? Because … why not.
The caveat here is how will you turn this magical number into deposits on your banking account.
We recommend dividing them into 6 categories.
Your expertise: what kind of expert would your imaginary user listen to?
Your segment or niche: think about how those users who are actively considering
Your brand voice: what would get users to join a conversation?
Your content: description of your picture.
Your location: your city or place where you want to do business.
What’s today: leave room for spontaneity!
Pick 5 of each category so you can get the 30 hashtags.
Don’t forget that Instagram search will also serve as a tool to get hashtags ideas.
Where Do Hashtags Go? In Comments or Caption?
The question “Instagram hashtags in comments or caption” is very popular.
My answer: Mix them!
Post some hashtags in your Instagram captions and the rest in the first comment.
While adding hashtags to your posts is one of the best ways to boost your engagement and get your posts in front of your target audience, too many hashtags in your captions can look untidy (or worse, spammy!).
Instead, posting your hashtags in the first comment is a great way to make your caption the star of the show, without compromising any of the engagement you can get with hashtags.
If you have a social media management platform such as Later.com you will be able to automate your post with the first comment with hashtags!
Be Careful About The Instagram Themes
Since the boom of influencers on Instagram, it seems like everyone uses the influencer style to boost their channels.
I’m the first to admit that I fell for that!
I wanted the color-coordinated feed. The beautiful pictures. Well… I was boosting my vanity… but not my banking account.
In this example, which picture do you think got the most conversions?
Picture A has 60 ways to get Instagram Followers. Picture B has just me with an inspirational story.
Picture A got viral in just about minutes and I booked 3 appointments within 3 hours of sharing this post.
Picture B, not so much. It helped with awareness, but it’s not an authority post.
The more I understand who my audience is, especially their ages and digital preferences, the more I can share content that is relevant for them. Even if it’s not color-coordinated and doesn’t make me look like an influencer.
Be Careful About The Shadowban
As good as Instagram is, the platform still has plenty of spammers. From time to time, #’s can get blocked and if you use one of them, your post won’t get visibility. This happens typically when you use hashtags for followers. They will activate those spammers and your content will get blocked.
The good news! You can test if you have been banned.
From generating new sales leads to finding the perfect recommendation for a service, your sphere of influence can be the driving force behind your success as an entrepreneur.
Your sphere of influence is the fundamental marketing force behind your business success, and just like any other business keeps its fundamentals warm, you need to keep it warm for it to keep producing benefits.
If you’re wondering how to grow your SOI with your Instagram account, you’re so at the right place. Keep reading!
Your Sphere of Influence (SOI) Is Not Just About Your Close Friends
They say you’re the result of your closest 5 friends. While this is accurate, when you are in growth mode, meaning, you want to bring new clients to buy your products or hire you, your circle cannot be just those 5 closest friends. This is where the SOI comes handy.
To start your SOI, build a database of people you know (250). This includes everyone. Start with your phone, then check your social media channels. You will be surprised! Then, next to each name grade them A, B or C based upon the last time you spoke to them. Someone you grade an “A” would be someone you feel absolutely sure will refer you, a “C” is your long lost elementary school buddy that you haven’t talked to in over 20yrs.
Don’t worry is you can’t get too many A’s on that list. That’s about to change once you finish reading this article. So let’s keep going!
WARNING! Your database might get you excited and you might want to craft a pitch and send it to every breathing human being on that list. I beg you to please DO NOT do it. That is called spam and you will be burning connections instead. I don’t know about you, but, whenever I get a pitch from someone who I haven’t talked to in a while, I get very irritated. It makes me feel like they are all about a transaction and not the relationship.
The Confession Letter: How To Get Back In Touch With Old Friends
If you haven’t kept in touch with many of the people you know, don’t worry about it. Life happens, you move, new schools, jobs and you simply lose contact. How do you then call them out of the blue as if nothing had happened? This is where the confession letter comes in.
You craft a letter that admits to your friends or clients that you are taking a new approach to business that puts relationships first. You confess that you haven’t been as proactive in your personal communications as you would like, and that you’ll be keeping in touch much more regularly from now on.
For your various groups, the letter would be written appropriately for each. Try to customize it as much as you can. And one thing … by letter it actually means a real letter, printed, and mailed. Email and chat can work, but if you truly want to go above and beyond to make it up to that connection, it’s better to send them a letter.
Let’s get you committed to getting as many A’s on your database as possible, and here’s how.
Instagram Can Help You Expand Your Circles Easily
Since Instagram allows people to have public profiles, if you follow them, you will instantly get access to all their content. Note that this does not happen with Facebook or LinkedIn. So, there is no protective wall between you and your future best connection. Interesting …
So how can Instagram help you grow your SOI with individuals?
You will want to start with your database. Start with those A’s and B’s. Connect with them on Instagram. Then, navigate to the suggested connections.
One of the very common questions asked by Instagrammers is how actually Instagram determines suggested profiles? The people you see on your suggested list are sometimes familiar but most of the time they can be random people you do not know. There surely is an algorithm behind how Instagram determines suggested profiles to you.
Say, for example, you want to connect with people with high net worth. Start by being intentional about the connections you add. Don’t connect with random people, or profiles that don’t show high activity.
Monitor your follower count and quality. Once you have a good amount of the kind of audience you want to build, say, about 250 great connections, engage with them consistently. A great way to keep up with your connections is by adding them as close friends. In this way you will see notifications of your updates and it will be easier for you to stay in touch with your Instagram followers.
Follow this strategy, consistently, for about 2-4 weeks and Instagram will send you potential connections who have the same qualities of your current SOI.
But … Why Do People Unfollow You On Instagram?
In the early days of Instagram Marketing, everyone wanted ways to get more Instagram followers.
One of the ways to get those most wanted numbers was simply to follow people and then unfollow them so you could look like a celebrity.
Make no mistake, most micro celebrities earned that status following this method.
Have you ever received a message from a random person offering you followers for sale? I must admit, I tried that method and realized that it made no sense. Why would you want to add robots? Even when they tell you that you could get people to “follow” you for real, they will unfollow you.
The follow and unfollow game is part of the Instagram Marketing strategy. But for different reasons that, sadly, most business owners still can’t comprehend, due to the excessive misinformation out there.
It’s Ok To Unfollow Connections
If you put some effort in engaging with them and they never reciprocate.
If they are inactive.
If they don’t have real pictures, especially their profile picture.
If they share content that’s gross, repetitive, boring, and you sincerely dislike them.
Those who are fishing for compliments.
Tips To Avoid The Unwanted Unfollow
Share Instagram-worthy content. This is serious. Instagram is like a magazine. Your audience is not expecting to see your pictures of your scrapbook.
Claim your authority and expertise, starting with your BIO.
Be strategic with your content.
Use hashtags to expand your reach.
Engage in comments with like-minded individuals
A Pro Tip To Grow Your Sphere Of Influence And Nurture Those Connections (And Generate Leads On Instagram)
As a social media marketer with over 10 years of experience, I consider myself a master! When I hear tips and secrets, very often, they are not Instagram-only secrets. They apply to social media marketing in general.
One of the rules to generate leads is to engage in conversations just like in real life. Have a system to track the connections to follow up and get conversions.
Facebook allows you to edit your friends list so you can customize your notifications and feed. So does Instagram.
How do I turn notifications on or off for someone I follow on Instagram?
When you turn on notifications for someone you follow, you’ll get a notification every time that they share a photo or video. To turn notifications on or off:
Go to their profile.
Tap Following > Notifications.
Tap next to one of the following to turn notifications on or off:
Posts
Stories
IGTV
Live Videos
If you’d like to turn notifications on or off for multiple people, you’ll have to visit each profile and turn them on or off individually. Keep in mind that you may get a push notification when someone you follow shares something for the first time in a while, whether or not you have notifications turned on for that person.
People aren’t notified when you turn notifications on or off for them.
I wrote the Six Golden Rules of Social Media and shared the system I engineered and followed to generate multiple 7 figures in sales using social media marketing.
You might want to watch the recap of my 6 golden rules video!
https://youtu.be/4fBK0xsHeW0
Building your SOI using Instagram marketing will catapult your success. Especially because you can do it without leaving your home.
Don’t forget that consistency is key to seeing real engagement. You certainly want to have a long term vision for your Instagram marketing strategy, just like any other digital marketing activity.
Strategy Yes, Tactics No!
Gone are the days where marketers promise get-rich-quick tactics. And if you have been following those, I suggest you take the time to craft your Instagram Marketing Strategy.
Looking for secrets and out-of-the-box ways to give your brand more visibility? Pinterest marketing can be the answer.
This article will cover how to start marketing your business on Pinterest, the easy and lazy way!
Pinterest Marketing Stats In 2020
With more than 200 billion Pins to browse through, there are opportunities for every type of brand on Pinterest.
If you’re new to the Pinterest language, “pins” means posts! Essentially, it’s the way users share their content.
At the end of 2019, Pinterest reported having 322 million monthly active users worldwide. While nearly one-third of those users are from the US, the number of users outside the US is growing rapidly. Pinterest gained around 51 million international monthly users in 2019 compared to the five million in the US.
Pinterest marketing is not just about the number of users and pins. The demographics of those users are also relevant.
Keep in mind, when you read “ages 25-54” this means two separated generations. This is important to remember later when you’re considering how to post on Pinterest.
Regardless of age, women are decision-makers, which is another reason to prioritize your Pinterest marketing game plan. Women hold crucial purchasing power. Women drive 70-80 percent of all consumer purchasing, through a combination of their buying power and influence.
How To Use Pinterest For Business
Just like every social channel, Pinterest allows businesses the opportunity to get publicity online, for free. So, not having a business account on this platform is like opening a restaurant and not telling anyone.
New To Pinterest? How To Start?
If you have Facebook, chances are you have a Pinterest account. Users can log in easily with Facebook. However, to claim your business account, you will need to take additional steps.
This feature allows you to claim your website, Instagram, Etsy, and Youtube.
4.Get the Pinterest browser button
The Pinterest browse button will allow you to share images to Pinterest with just one click.
5.Select a Pinterest theme
As the saying goes, “A picture is worth a thousand words.” Human beings are highly visual creatures who can process visual information almost instantly; 90 percent of all information that we perceive and that gets transmitted to our brains is visual.
Images can be a powerful way to capture users’ attention and differentiate your product. A single image can convey more to the observer than an elaborate block of text. Furthermore, images can cross language barriers in a way text simply can’t.
Follow a consistent theme so users can easily identify your brand and remember you.
6.Set up your Pinterest scheduler
If you have been leading your social media marketing with Instagram, then we recommend Later.com. Their reports are very clean and give you granular insights. Their business plan is about $29 monthly and you can link Instagram, Facebook, Twitter, and Pinterest which is a great value.
Pro tip: You can also schedule Instagram stories on Later.com and save a lot of time.
Your Pinterest Strategy
Pinterest marketing and Pinterest strategy are not the same. For this reason, we highly encourage business owners to have a strategy in place, before opening social media channels and start sharing just anything that they feel like sharing.
The Best Social Media Marketing Strategy
Social media marketing can be powerful, as long as it’s supported by a powerful digital marketing strategy. Some marketers niche social media marketing as inbound marketing since it allows you to attract users to your brand, without having to use direct marketing tactics such as promotions, codes, or exclusive sales content.
Users are more educated these days. They prefer to control when they explore brands than being interrupted in their decision-making process. When was the last time that you got happy to get a cold call from an insurance agent offering competitive rates? They are lucky if you answer the call!
Important Factors Of A Winning Social Media Marketing Strategy:
It’s not about you. It’s about the users. What do they want?
Your social media channels should be in sync. Users like to hop from channel to channel to engage with brands their way. This is called the omnichannel approach or omnichannel marketing.
Only share your best content. “Good enough” is not enough. There is no such thing as “a bit of content” to reserve the best for your paid users. Give them the best and they will see your real value.
Consider the user experience. What do users expect from the platform? Short content? Long content? Tutorials on video or in How-To-Guides?
Keep in mind, these factors are universally applicable for every social media channel. Now let’s craft a Pinterest marketing strategy that can help you reach your visibility goals.
Create Your Pinterest Marketing Strategy In 5 Easy Steps
Marketing is what drives customers to company and brand digital assets such as websites and social media channels, not what should exist on them.
What should exist is content designed to help customers accomplish two goals: research and purchase products or services. That’s where a Pinterest marketing strategy comes handy.
Step 1: Define Your Future Buyers
List the top three customer segments. Look for the segments that provide the most revenue.
What is the job you get done for your customers?
What is your value proposition and what makes your value proposition different from your competitors?
What are the specific outcomes/results that your future clients can get after using your solutions? Can you share third-party content that validates your claims?
Step 2: Define The How-To’s
List your services and organize how-tos by segment.
What tutorials can you prepare for each segment?
What format will users prefer?
If you will do tutorials, are they easy-to-follow?
At the very least, create a board with the content that it’s on your website menu: about you, services, testimonials, contact information
Step 3: Optimize Your Content
Search on Pinterest to see who else is sharing related content
Explore popular pins
Join Pinterest groups and collect feedback from other users
The idea is to create content knowing ahead that your users will love
Use “SEO” principles, meaning, words that people commonly use when they search or long-form questions.
Consider optimizing your pin descriptions frequently, based on the results from your audit
Step 4: Pins Distribution Checklist
Build a community that loves your content and appreciates getting more!
Segment your email list to notify your users via broadcast.
Expand your viewers by sharing your pins in other platforms such as Instagram, Instagram stories.
This distribution list should always be a work in progress.
Pro tip: You can link your Instagram profile to a particular board to distribute content automatically. Later.com will allow you to schedule this content ahead of time.
Step 5: Audit Your Performance
To start, make sure you set up your analytics to track your Pinterest performance.
The platform provides you with analytics, but don’t stop there.
If you blog, adding UTM codes to identify the source of your blog traffic will be ideal so you can see exactly how your boards are performing, in comparison with other social media platforms.
In Closing
Pinterest can get you website traffic and qualified sales opportunities, if you design a strategic plan to develop your boards to attract your ideal users.
Combine this social media channel with Instagram so you can see both channels growing.
Tap the image and check our Instagram- Link in BIO for all the updates courses, coaching programs, and live events.
Looking For Marketing Courses + Coaching?
If you want to experience real learning and get a customized marketing strategy to grow your business, our Marketing University might be a fit. Currently enrolling students on:
The Covid-19 coronavirus pandemic has been the bane of the labor market, as the health care crisis causes industries to struggle and businesses to shutter. Early data shows that new job postings are down and unemployment claims are soaring.
If you’re in the traditional labor market or your business has been impacted, the gig economy has solutions for you.
The Gig Economy Definition
The gig economy is a free market system where organizations and independent workers engage in short-term work arrangements. According to the BLS, in 2017 the US gig economy had 55 million participants. It’s estimated that 36% of US workers take part in the gig economy and 33% of companies extensively use gig workers.
The word “gig” refers to the transient nature of the job itself.
Gig Economy Examples
The gig economy definition encompasses all sorts of contingent work arrangements, for example:
Freelancers
Consultants
Independent contractors and professionals
Temps (temporary contract workers)
The gig economy is often mistaken for limited side hustling—part-time work that can only yield part-time (i.e., low) income.
If you’re tech-savvy, now is the time to change your perspective. Professionals with the right skills have lucrative freelance options, according to a FitSmallBusiness.com study.
The “Coronavirus Economy”
The pandemic has been a relentless destroyer of brick-and-mortar businesses as public health officials warn against in-person interactions. But the coronavirus is boosting almost anything that can be done online or with minimal human contact — grocery deliveries, online learning, takeout food, streaming video, even real estate closings done with online notaries.
The result, economists say, is likely to be dramatic losses in local retail and dining options, with millions of jobs disappearing as the biggest and wealthiest companies — especially those that do much of their business online — extend their gains.
Telework, online education and streaming video have grown sharply.
While some economists caution that these shifts may be temporary, others see long-term changes taking hold.
Joining The Gig Economy
You might be considering starting a new business, selling products or services. The main question is “how to replace your full time income?”
Back in the days of our Big Recession, I debated between pursuing my law career or taking the devastation as an alert to shift. I chose the second.
Shifting from a traditional career to the gig economy was not an easy process, mainly because 10 years ago nobody was talking about it.
To give you some context, Upwork, the biggest platform for freelancers, started in 2005 as O-desk. The company wasn’t acquired until 2015. Today, Upwork has twelve million registered freelancers and five million registered clients.
Today, more than ever, I consider myself a pioneer and visionary. I saw the perks of working for home and fall in love. I told my friends “I want to have a permanent beach life.” A vision that was once viewed as crazy by my friends, has turned into a real company. I help professionals turn their ideas into real income-generating opportunities so they can build their own beach life.
You can pivot! It sounds too good to be true, but if you have an entrepreneurial spirit and can hustle, then you will succeed.
How To Start Freelancing?
The first step is making an inventory of your transferable skills. In my case, for example, as an attorney, I transferred:
Research skills
Story-telling skills
Writing skills
Ability to manage complex processes
Ability to meet due dates
Organization skills
Leadership skills
Persuasion skills
And other soft skills that helped me build a successful law firm at age 27
You can check my Marketing University later, but before that, let’s discuss possible gig works for you.
Sustainable Gigs for you
The rapid spread of digital technologies is transforming many economic and social activities. If you’re tech-savvy, or have experience in traditional marketing, there’s a spot for you in the gig economy.
Let’s take a look at some examples of freelancing jobs you can take, by polishing up some skills.
Facebook Ads Expert $150 Per Hour
Experience:
5-7 years
Industry-specific expertise
Skills:
Extensive digital marketing experience in the industry.
Writing skills.
Advertising experience with performance reports.
Platform-specific
Marketing research
Marketing strategy
Business development
Project Manager $125 Per Hour
Experience:
Management/project management experience
15+ years of experience
Skills:
Trello, Jira, Monday, Teamwork, Basecamp, Asana, Wrike, Slack, etc.
Mastery of organization tools like Google Docs and Spreadsheets along with Drive, Dropbox, and the like is key.
Outstanding communication using multiple tools like Skype and screen share is very useful in keeping processes efficient and effective.
Ability to handle fast-paced environment
A big plus: experience in global team management.
WordPress Digital Strategist $125 Per Hour
Experience:
Marketing consulting experience 10+ years
Full marketing & sales cycle: online and offline
Skills:
Brand design
Website development
Content marketing
Business blog design
Search Engine Optimization
Digital channel development.
Mastery of organization tools like Google Docs and Spreadsheets along with Drive, Dropbox, and the like is key.
CRM Developer $125 Per Hour
Experience:
Software solutions architecture
5+ years of experience
Skills:
Data analysis
Outbound/inbound marketing automation
Lead generation architecture
Software-specific mastery
Strategic planning
Full marketing & sales cycle: online and offline
Content Marketing Strategist $100 Per Hour
Experience:
Story-telling & communications
10+ years of experience
Skills:
Copywriting for social media posts, enterprise experience
Article writing, industry-specific
Blog writing
Social Media Audits and Strategy
Brand Management, Project and Team Management
Highly Effective Communicator
WordPress, Microsoft Office, SEO certification
Social Media Analytics Reporting
Self-driven
Virtual Customer Service Management $75 Per Hour
Experience:
Customer service manager or director
5+ years of experience
Skills:
Strong written and oral communication skills
Web research
Prepare and present reports, studies, and other various projects.
Highly organized.
Systems to meet deadlines. and achieving positive results.
Ability to work under pressure with little or without supervision.
Can provide blog writing for specific industries
Data miner – social media – lead finder
Instagram Marketing $45 Per Hour
Experience:
Social media management
5+ years of experience
Skills:
My strong written and oral communication skills
Instagram marketing
Instagram ads
Reports
Lead mining and lead management
Industry specific experience is preferred
Customer service skills
From Freelancer to Business Owner
Freelancers are also called solopreneurs. However, they don’t necessarily see themselves as business owners.
Regardless of the identity or model that you use to operate, your goal is to bring as much income as you can, while keeping your life in check.
Here’s an overview of the path to go from freelancer to business owner.
1) Build a brand- establish your unique valuable proposition and claim a voice.
2) Testimonials- reputation is currency in the digital economy.
3) Marketing strategy- define your marketing channels and marketing plan to get visible.
4) Advertise – combine online and offline channels to expand your reach.
5) Partnerships – get bigger players to promote your work.
The most important asset: your entrepreneurial spirit. If you have it, you will shine!
In Closing
The gig economy is real. When you’re ready to strategize, I’m here!
Not sure if your social media marketing strategy follows the “hunters to farmers” sales approach? Want to learn a sophisticated approach to sales using social media?
This article will demystify the hunting and farming approach to social media for you and will give you some tangible steps you can take, starting today, to get the best of your social media channels. Plus, there is a quiz at the end to test your social sales strategy!
Social Marketing vs Advertising On Social Media
If you don’t know the difference between social media marketing and social media advertising, it’s okay to admit it. The distinction can be a bit confusing, especially because there are plenty of voices out there.
Check out two examples of posts:
Post A: Nick Leyden, a fitness coach, is asking a Facebook Group “what is one thing you are doing to stay healthy and active during this time?”
Post B: Capital Factory is sharing an invite to a webinar.
Post A will ignite conversations. Nick doesn’t need to solicit anyone. In fact, he will be able to give some tips and advice, and from there, those users who feel value from him will choose if they want to follow him.
Nick’s post is a brilliant strategy for a Facebook Group where people are open to having a community experience.
Post B is not asking users for any conversation. In fact, it is asking users to stop everything they are doing, read the long-form content, click a link, go to an external page, then read another invite, and fill out a form, and attend a webinar.
Post B is social advertising. Notice that it has the same format that you see on Facebook Ads. While Post B is appropriate for the group, there it won’t have the same engagement as Nick’s post.
If you’re not sure if your content is a social marketing content or social advertising content, here’s a rule:
If it sounds like a radio commercial, you’re advertising.
However, that doesn’t mean that it’s wrong to share content that has a strong call to action. The key is to have a content marketing strategy, so that users welcome your invitation or call to action.
Farmers vs Hunters, In Which Group Are You?
Salesperson reputations stink! In poll after poll, survey respondents typically rank salespeople above only members of Congress on trust, honesty, and competency.
For a long time, in the sales world, people identify themselves as hunters or farmers. What exactly does that mean and in which context?
The Hunters
Hunters are also known as the doers. They get their sales energy through “hunting” new opportunities. Hunters can be described as independent (with a lot of initiative) and solution-driven. They tend to focus on big deals and love going from one to the next as soon as they close their current prospect.
The Farmers
In contrast to the hunters, farmers are more focused on developing long-term relationships. They are the nurturers—building relationships with leads and clients for a lasting impact. They are team players that bring everyone else up and develop strong customer loyalty.
Some entrepreneurs and small business owners have a hard time combining both of the approaches. While it is great to add value and nurture relationships, they still need to close the sale.
How to balance nurturing activities with closing activities? It’s social selling.
The Rise Of Social Selling
Social selling is the art of using social media to find, connect with, understand, and nurture sales prospects. It’s the modern way to develop meaningful relationships with potential customers so you’re the first person or brand a prospect thinks of when they’re ready to buy.
Since social selling has become part of the modern sales processes, both salespeople and entrepreneurs can benefit from the modern social selling method. A big incentive for social selling is that there’s no need for cold calls anymore.
Perhaps equally important to explaining what social selling means is to explain what social selling is not.
It’s certainly not about bombarding strangers with unsolicited posts, tags, and private messages in your social media platforms. There’s a name for that: spam. And you shouldn’t do it.
Social Selling Strategy
If you haven’t implemented a social selling strategy for your social media management, here are some stats that will get you inspired to work on this ASAP!
78% of salespeople engaged in social selling are outselling their peers who aren’t. (Forbes)
77% of B2B buyers said they do not talk to a salesperson until they’ve performed independent research themselves (Source: CEB)
76% of buyers are ready to have a social media conversation with potential providers. (LinkedIn)
92% of B2B buyers are willing to engage with a sales professional who is a known industry thought leader.
53% of customer loyalty is driven by a salesperson’s ability to deliver unique insight, easily done through social media.
A full 71% of all sales professionals and 90% of top salespeople are already using social selling tools.
That percentage gets even higher with the younger generation. 78% of Millennials say they use social selling tools.
93% of sales executives have not received any formal training on social selling (source)
Social Selling vs. Social Media Marketing
Is social selling the same thing as social media marketing or advertising?
No. As we explained before, social marketing and social advertising are different things.
Social selling takes the social marketing approach but combines the methodology with ist sales process. They use social media marketing to nurture relationships, turn them into leads and potential sales opportunities.
Social Selling Is All About Value
When interacting with prospects and customers through social networks, it’s important to consider what’s in there for them.
Imagine this scenario: a coworker invited you for a family party. You know a few of other coworkers, but everyone else is a stranger. How do you approach people at the party? Do you stop them, get on their face, and tell them to buy from you? Of course not. You would get to know them first, ask questions, engage in conversations to find things in common.
Adding value is not subject to your opinion. Your users will find value depending on their very own stage. This is what makes marketing a very complex process.
Building A Sales Funnel
During the past few decades, the marketing funnel served as the primary model for how people learn about a product, decide to buy, and (hopefully) become loyal customers, helping spread the word to others.
In today’s age when every product has hoards of competitors, the loyalty loop is a more accurate picture of how the customer reevaluates their decision to buy again and again.
The best way to connect with your audience on Facebook is by mapping their experience, all while considering each stage of their decision-making process. To keep this simple, we’ll narrow the decision-making process into three stages:
Awareness: People have either become aware of your product or service, or aware that they have a need that must be fulfilled.
Evaluation: People are aware that your product or service could fulfill their needs, and they’re trying to determine whether you’re the best fit. Users turn into leads.
Purchase: Leads are ready to make a purchase.
What experience do you want to create for users who are in the awareness stage?
I want them to feel like they can trust my service or product.
I want them to identify our unique value proposition quickly.
I want them to know that they can ask any questions via chat or email.
Strategize Your Social Media Content
Gone are the days when professionals keep their professional and personal accounts separated. People buy you! Entrepreneurs who are able to build a personal brand thrive in social media. Remember, 76% of buyers are ready to have a social media conversation with potential providers.
Your social media channels are the amplifier. But you need a brand and a voice that speaks to your target audience. That’s where your content marketing strategy comes handy.
Social Media Marketing Quiz! See How Ready Are You For Social Selling!
My profile picture is professional (5 points)
My cover image inspires strangers to trust in me (5 points)
I am comfortable with letting strangers finding me (5 points)
I initiate conversations with people who I believe can be good connections (5 points)
I have prepared articles to share with my social media connections (5 points)
I have shared links where my connections can find more information about my services (5 points)
I have gotten referrals from my social media connections (5 points)
I have a content calendar and a content plan for my social media (5 points)
My social media accounts grow each month (5 points)
I take time each day to follow up with my connections follow up offline (calls, meetings) – (5 points)
Your score
5-20 It seems like you are on social media, but not engaging as much as you should.
25-35 You see the value of social media. Maybe with some guidance, you can start seeing leads and clients.
40-50 You are in the process to master the social selling game. Keep going!
In Closing
If you’re feeling overwhelmed from social media and want to have access to an expert who can remove the guess and make a plan to grow your business, let’s chat!
Gyms small and large are closing across the country in order to slow the spread of the new coronavirus.
Health officials, politicians and business leaders throughout the world are encouraging “social distancing” in order to slow the spread of COVID-19, the disease caused by the virus.
If you’re in the fitness industry and your business can’t open but you’re afraid to lose your members, keep reading!
Gyms Closing To Slow Coronavirus Spread
Just like every responsible business owner, you’ve been monitoring closely the development of the COVID-19 since it reached a pandemic level. Since being active keeps us healthy and helps us fight off infection, opening your facilities to your clients is a noble service.
However, due to the recent evolution of the pandemic, social distance is pretty much mandatory. Your clients have no choice, but to stay at home and wait and your location is no longer open to the public.
Forced To Adapt
During these unforeseen circumstances, you are forced to adapt. The sooner you can make the move and pivot, the better it is for your members.
Your members see you as a leader. They call you coach, for a reason. You might want to take 3 steps back and think about the relationship you have with your “members”.
Do you have a bond with them? Do you feel connected?
Members have a sense of belonging. Do you think that your members truly feel like they belong?
If the physical location can’t be open, how can your members feel like they are part of your business beyond your location?
These are some of the questions that will ignite a new realm of possibilities. You will soon realize that your members want YOU. Sure, they want your location or your studio, but they want access to YOU. It’s time to think about how they can have more of YOU. If you’re a team, the YOU is your support from the team all together and each of the members.
Is Your Subscription Model Virus-Proof?
Your members are, indeed, paying for a subscription, which is a great business model for the purpose of bringing predictable cash flows. Now that your facilities are not open, you might need to adjust their subscription.
Life Time active, club-accessing memberships will receive a prorated dues credit for the number of days the club is closed. But what if you can’t afford giving credit to your members?
What about your employees? Will they get paid if your business is closed?
The good news! You can pivot! Having open communication with each of your members it’s crucial at this point. The key is to replace the value that they see from your subscription. Remember, they buy YOU.
A New Approach To Marketing
Coronavirus could not have picked a more inconvenient season. For the health and wellness industry, Q1 of the year is the strongest one. You probably had planned your spring promotions, discount codes, along with the social media strategies to get new members to sign up. Now that your facilities can’t open and we still don’t have a clear picture of the situation, your marketing needs a new approach.
We have interviewed some amazing fitness leaders and have created 5 powerful marketing strategies that can help you get through this Coronacalypse.
Number One: Market The Value Of Your Community
Just because your members can’t step into your location doesn’t mean that they can’t be connected and pay to have access.
April Hill, owner of Yoglates 2 South in Baton Rouge, LA. pivoted by launching a 30-day virtual subscription.
Well… I began planning last week to utilize our Facebook Private group page in the event this blew up and we were forced to close / quarantine.
To best care for our members we are bringing a routine everyday. This gives those members that automatically renew their memberships what they are paying for. My hope is our members seeing us in the studio or from home will give them a sense of normalcy and bring them peace. It’s so much more than a workout. We are a community. We are a family.
This platform also allows us to offer our unique workout to others as well. People may now buy a virtual 30 day subscription by the link we are sharing. Once they make their purchase they ask to be part of the Yoglates 2 South Members Page and we accept them into the group.
Following the Live video, I post to the page and it remains available for all members in the FB group to view till the next day. This has been well received thus far.
Cycle Bar Cedar Park is embracing social distancing with its members, by doing workouts outdoors. This is a great initiative!
If you were posting on social media 2-4 times a week and mostly promotions, you will have a challenge these days. Consider adopting a new content marketing plan where you add at least 50% of inspirational content. Be sensitive to what people are going through. Use polls and see how your members are doing. Engage more with them.
Avoid:
Sharing news from non-official pages
Sharing content that can enhance anxiety
Political at ALL TIMES
This is a great time to try new channels, such as Facebook Live and IGTV to find ways to connect with your audience. Even TikTok!
While social media might be where everyone is, don’t take that for granted. Your goal is to connect with your members to nurture your relationship. Go beyond the copy/paste messages. Sending personalized emails and text messages will help you maintain your members.
Jennifer Sweet, owner of Pure Barre Lakeway says: We have been in constant communication with our members, beyond social media. We have shared emails and text messages with updates, always adding a personal touch. We could use templates but we rather take the extra time to make each member feel supported and appreciated.
Number Four: Leverage Stories
If you had never used stories before, you might feel confused about what kind of messages should be shared via stories. Generally speaking, stories are essentially messages that are meant to be shared in episodes.
Here’s a good format for your stories:
Episode 1: hello members, I’m here at ___ and want to share with you 3 things.
Episode 2: Thing 1.
Episode 3: Thing 2.
Episode 4: Thing 3.
If you use a video, it will be broken down in segments of 15 seconds and cut after 4 episodes. Since you can combine text, images, videos, stickers, and GIFs, you can share a message without having to use long-form videos or long-form posts.
If there’s something that small businesses have is VISION. On that note, I love this quote from Steve Jobs:
“You can’t connect the dots looking forward; you can only connect them looking backwards. So you have to trust that the dots will somehow connect in your future. You have to trust in something — your gut, destiny, life, karma, whatever. This approach has never let me down, and it has made all the difference in my life.”
-Steve Jobs, co-founder of Apple
If you’re in Austin and want to connect with our community of professionals & entrepreneurs, join our Facebook Community.
Number Five: Embrace Positivity
Rebecca Remus, founder of Grand Mesa Crossfit is focusing on adding more positivity to her members. Besides from sharing workouts online and via email to her members, they are going beyond the norm to recognize their members. It’s a great way to let the members know “we are thinking about you”.
Digital marketing skills are critical not only to those actually working in the field but also to entrepreneurs. In thought leadership, there is always something new to learn and implement.
Are you wondering what digital marketing skills you could be learning in 2020? Keep reading!
Before we dig into all the digital marketing tactics you could potentially learn in 2020, and your mind goes into TikTok effects, let’s take 3 steps back and define what digital marketing actually is. In order to do that, we must first start with the broad concept of marketing.
What Is Marketing (Let’s Cover The Basics So You Can See The Big Picture)
Marketing, as a discipline, involves all the actions a company undertakes to draw in customers and maintain relationships. Marketing encompasses a large array of topics and ideas.
When I deliver marketing education during speaking engagements and strategy sessions, I like to begin with the general ideas of marketing. I clarify the definition of marketing by differentiating great marketing versus noise.
What is “marketing noise?” Let’s dive deeper.
The steps taken to make a brand or a product visible, creating brand awareness, without a thoughtful process to target future buyers, is considered the “noise.” Basically, it is creating excitement around your brand by putting it out there for everyone to see. The truth is: not everyone is your potential client.
On the other hand, using the momentum of the noise and taking it just a step further in order to make your brand or a product visible and deliverable to your target audience and actual potential buyers, that’s considered great marketing. Do you see the difference?
The marketing strategies you will be reading in this article are the ones that will move your audience from a state of simple awareness and noise, to actual visibility by the clients you are trying to attract.
What is Digital Marketing?
At a high level, digital marketing refers to advertising delivered through digital channels such as search engines, websites, social media, email, and mobile apps. Another word for digital marketing is online marketing.
Although it feels like the internet has existed forever, it hasn’t. Launched by Tim Berners-Lee and his team in 1991, the World Wide Web project didn’t really take off until the first successful mass-market browser, Netscape, was released in 1994. In the following two years, the number of people using the web soared from 16 million to 70 million.
While the internet has changed everything, literally everything, it is worth remembering that the old forms of marketing still exist and carry weight. Despite the growth in digital advertising, TV still takes a third of ad spend in the US and continues to grow, albeit at a slower rate.
Embracing digital trends does not mean discarding traditional marketing methods.
Still in 2020, Word of Mouth marketing impression results 5x more sales than a paid media impression and people are 90% more likely to trust and buy from a brand recommended by a friend.
With this in mind, let’s cover the digital marketing strategies entrepreneurs and business owners need to learn in 2020.
Facebook Marketing
Facebook’s organic reach might have declined, but there’s a bright side.
Over the last 3 years, Facebook has worked hard to clean up their mess after the Cambridge Analytica scandal. This forced the company to pivot and they have done a fantastic job!
Take a look at the top popular social networks based on users (represented in millions).
If you don’t think your skills are up to date with Facebook marketing, I recommend a recap of what’s new in Facebook Marketing in 2020.
I did a series for My Social Media University on the 2019-2020 Facebook Updates with 4 videos that will take you about 53 minutes to complete, and as a BONUS, Facebook Ads 2020! Sign up so you can learn all about Facebook Marketing, for free.
Facebook Messenger
Messenger marketing is becoming a very effective strategy to raise awareness and generate leads.
87.1% of U.S. marketers will use Facebook marketing in 2020. That’s according to estimates from eMarketer. It’s because of its opening rate in comparison to email marketing.
In an experiment by HubSpot, content delivered through Facebook Messenger had an open rate of 80 percent and a click rate of 13 percent. The same content delivered through email had an open rate of 33 percent and a click rate of 2.1 percent. In other words, email was completely outclassed by Messenger. Interesting, right?
This is a particular area where Facebook has been updating its platform to add automation, in particular, integrating features to book appointments, as well as to purchase products and services.
Digital consumers are more educated, impatient, and demanding. As a result, customized marketing is a trend we will continue to see more.
Think about Alexa and Google. What if you can create that level of interaction with your users? The great news, you can!
If you want to take your automation to the next level, and even have your own Alexa, you can have it with Manychat. Click here to learn the fundamentals of a chatbot. It’s a free course, hosted by Manychat.
Instagram Marketing
Some marketers will argue that Instagram should be the #1 social media platform, regarding engagement. If we consider that Instagram’s organic engagement, in comparison to the rest of the social media platforms, Instagram wins.
Instagram is no longer the app where you find teenagers showcasing their pretty filters. There’s more to it than that.
As an entrepreneur, you will want to learn how to reap the benefits of Instagram for Business to give your brand more visibility in front of potential clients.
Check out Later.com for free training and detailed guides. And of course, I’m here to help you with implementation and high-level strategy.
Search Engine Marketing (Content Marketing)
SEO is, by far, one of the most complex digital marketing skills to learn, but it’s not because it’s difficult. The reason is that Search Engine Optimization is process-based.
There Are 3 Main Types Of Seo That An Seo Strategist Can Focus On:
On-page SEO: This SEO focuses on the content that’s “on the page,” and how to optimize that content to help boost the website’s ranking for specific keywords.
Off-page SEO: This SEO focuses on the links that are being directed to the website from elsewhere on the internet. The number of “backlinks,” and the publishers carrying those links, that link to your website helps you build trust in the eyes of a search engine. This causes your website to rank higher as a result.
Technical SEO: This SEO focuses on a website’s architecture, examining the back-end of a particular website to see how each webpage is “technically” set up. Google cares as much about the code of a website as it does its content, making this specialty quite important to a website’s search engine ranking.
At the very least, you should learn how to generate content that can ignite your visibility using SEO.
SEO isn’t a skill that you can just learn from a video. Since you will need to analyze data to understand the results and get insights, we recommend learning that in a practical way.
If you’re interested in learning SEO, our Business Accelerator Program is doing live workshops and webinars.
As content marketing becomes more common, so does its presence in business budgets. Research indicates that 53 percent of businesses have established content marketing plans and budgets.
As an entrepreneur, it’s important to stay current with these trends. If you haven’t invested in learning content marketing, there’s a good chance you don’t have a robust content marketing plan. Your digital assets: social media accounts, website, landing pages, and emails are just tools where you share promotions, but that’s not enough!
Brands need to be humanized. Users want to interact with people; the best way to achieve this is to adopt a unique digital-based personality.
Content marketing is the best digital marketing strategy you can ever learn. Julia McCoy offers an amazing certification in content marketing. Click here to check it out.
Reputation Marketing
What is reputation marketing? Although the term is often used interchangeably with online reputation management (ORM), it doesn’t mean the same thing.
As an entrepreneur or business owner you need to know the difference, so here’s a more accurate definition:
Reputation marketing highlights and amplifies positive brand content like customer reviews through traditional and digital marketing channels to boost sales. In short, it’s a strategy to promote your brand’s existing good reputation rather than repair a damaged one.
That’s an important distinction to keep in mind. While reputation marketing does have a positive impact on brand image, it generally won’t improve your search results. Since your marketing initiatives will prompt consumers to research your brand on Google, you’d better have positive content immediately for them to discover.
Reputation management uses SEO, content creation, social media, public relations and so much more to establish positive search reputations for individuals and companies. Those strategies strengthen a brand’s online presence in a natural way to bury negative search results. As a result, search engines show people your brand’s most favorable content.
Once a business has earned favorable media mentions and positive online reviews, reputation marketing services can then spin that content into campaigns and case studies.
Developing an impeccable online presence goes beyond your online first impression these days. Users like to search and “dig” to see if they can trust the brand. You can’t control what they search. But you certainly can control what they are able to find. This is why it’s important to take control of your online reputation.
Want Digital Marketing Courses + Mentoring?
That’s what I do! I’m a digital marketing educator. I teach individuals and organizations in all things digital marketing; from social media basics and lead generation to UX and SEO.
If you want to discuss details about my marketing courses, you can book a quick call here or check out my Business Accelerator Program where you get all the courses, plus live strategy calls.
Hey, don’t forget to get my free Facebook Updates Class- free + I’m giving a BONUS class on Facebook Ads 2020.
Wouldn’t it be great if there was a way to use social media, knowing that it could get you leads and unique sales opportunities? If you answered yes, then keep reading.
Because social media is being used by more than 3 billion users worldwide, entrepreneurs definitely cannot ignore social media as one of the top marketing channels.
With this comes a huge challenge in designing the right social media strategy, and if not done correctly, can limit the profitable opportunities that exist within social media platforms.
Whether you are just trying to get more exposure online, to connect with your fans or customers, or to improve your online reputation, social networking profiles are the way to go in order to reach your business goals.
Unless you have a major site associated with your name, and plenty of people specifically typing your name or your brand on search engines, your social media profile is usually the first result Google shows when someone searches for you.
Start thinking of each social media profile you create as a landing page for your personal brand.
Your landing page is possibly the first encounter that someone is going to have with your brand, and you will want that first impression to make the visitor interested to know more about you.
Be strategic. When someone is interacting with your social channels, make sure they will be able to see a profile that makes them like you, trust in you, and believe in you.
Some tips to build a successful social media profile:
Use a profile picture that makes you look approachable
Customize your cover image and add an attractive description
Add a BIO
Balance your personal and business content
Adjust your privacy settings to make sure people can find you and never turn on automatic tagging
This might sound logical, but let me clarify the importance of having a strong profile. It makes no sense to spend resources for marketing purposes in order to get people to know about a brand if there is a poor online presence.
Producing Quality Content
One of the biggest challenges that entrepreneurs have when it comes to social media marketing is content. Coming up with fresh, relevant, interesting, and effective content ideas to share with their audience isn’t something that comes easily. A great way to solve this challenge is to incorporate psychology to the process of content creation.
Using the psychology of personalities, you are able to anticipate the emotions you want to trigger from your readers and thus creating a marketing strategy around it.
The language people use to express themselves can provide clues about the kind of people they are, online and off. Current efforts to understand personality from writing samples rely on theories and survey data from the 1980s.
New research uses social media data to successfully identify differences and similarities between users without prior assumptions. The way people refer to themselves and others has previously been correlated with personality. The new analysis also associates these personality markers with topics of conversation.
If topics of conversation are correlated with personalities, this means that marketers can trigger those conversations, provided that they have a strategy in place!
The Gemstones Personality Test
The 4 Personality Gems come from the motivational speaker Dani Johnson. Johnson says, “You have all four Gem characteristics in you. Some people have a lot of two Gems and very little of the others. Others have quite a bit of each one in them, but they lead and communicate in one primary Gem most of the time.”
I’ve used this strategy to craft my social media content for a long time now and it’s fascinating!
Are The Personality Gems Effective? Yes. But how does it work?
First of all, you will want to identify your 2 strongest gems and see if your social media currently reflects them. You will be surprised by how accurate this is!
Emeralds
Emeralds love the numbers. They are very analytical. They love planners and everything needs to be scheduled.
If you’re an emerald, most likely, you don’t share just anything on social media. You’re very meticulous about your privacy. When you share content, it’s because you know it’s going to be according to your standards.
Since you’re into numbers, you don’t really see the point of leaving comments on people’s pictures. You read them, you acknowledge them, but you are not up to leaving hearts, GIFs, or videos.
Did I describe you well? If you’re an emerald and want to trigger more engagement from different users, make sure you don’t post like emeralds all the time. Add some variation!
Pearls
Pearls love people. They are very emotional. They love supporting causes. When they see a story that moves their heart, they share.
If you’re a pearl, most likely, you share content from other sources, especially inspirational content. You also participate in causes and truly enjoy helping others. Like emeralds, you’re very meticulous about your privacy.
You might consider yourself an introvert, but social media is something you enjoy, because it allows you to connect with people and help them, from the convenience of your home.
Did I describe you well? If you’re a pearl and want to trigger more engagement from different users, make sure you don’t post like pearls all the time. Be sure your content brings facts, adds variation, and inspire people to take action, besides helping others.
Rubies
You’re here to win. You love the challenges. You’re not shy. Your social media displays your accolades and you have no shame. You see yourself as an influencer.
You might consider yourself an extrovert and social media is a great place for you to connect with more people. You’re certainly not shy on camera.
Did I describe you well? Watch out for not being unapproachable. You can be an influencer without pushing people away. Feature different people on your social media. Add content that’s not just about you or your interests. This will allow you to ignite different conversations with different people.
Sapphires
Sapphires are natural social media users. They share updates constantly and are not camera shy. You see them in lots of places, activities, with lots of people. Sapphires are promoters and this makes them a great addition to your brand.
If you’re a Sapphire and want to attract different people to your social media, add authority content, facts, and share your work more. Your audience will celebrate your accomplishments. Don’t be shy to share your great work!
Social Relevancy
Social media algorithms are made up of affinity, which refers to the relationship of one topic to another. The goal of Facebook’s algorithm is to “show stories that matter to users,” according to Adam Mosseri, VP of Facebook’s News Feed Management.
What this really means is that social media is optimized for shares above all else. For this reason, part of the winning formula to create a profitable content marketing strategy is to create content that will encourage your users to share. How can we do that?
We just discussed how Personality Gems can help you trigger responses from specific personality types. That takes care of the WHO. To trigger engagement, we also need to consider the WHAT and the WHEN.
Think about the last time you shared a post from someone. Why did you share it? Chances are, you had in mind a specific topic and you found a post that fit perfectly with what you had in mind, and you decided it was appropriate for you to share.
Tips to get more engagement in social media:
Generate original content so that users find something new to share
Surprise your users with something that is totally different from what they are used to seeing.
Be active. The more comments and shares you give, the more you receive.
When your content is relevant and generates engagement, it triggers the algorithm, pretty much in all of the main social media platforms.
If you want to generate leads, you want your content to signal meaning that is meaningful and relevant to your target audience. The caveat here is that you won’t have access to the targeting features unless you pay for ads. If you want to grow your business without paying for ads, then you need to implement direct marketing strategies to generate conversions from your organic audience.
How To Generate Conversions From Your Social Media Content (Organic)
An effective social media marketing strategy should attract the right leads without using traditional e-commerce practices. Social media is about being social.
Unlike many entrepreneurs believe, you can generate leads and clients from social media without paying for ads. Of course, it will be slower than if you pay for ads, but it’s possible.
If you’re not having conversions from social media, the first thing to watch is the amount of exposure (reach) you’re having, which is a reflection of the number of interactions, such as:
Comments
Replies
Likes
Shares
The more comments, replies, likes, and shares you have, the more accounts you reach.
Turning your reach into leads will be a matter of having the ability to generate meaningful conversations with your audience, via chat (messenger). Just remember not to spam your audience.
Another great way to generate leads is to combine blog posts with social media. For example, by sharing educational blog posts on your Facebook page, users will be able to begin to perceive value from you. The more they trust you, the better reputation you will have.
In general, the more value you add and the more trust you build with your users, the more likely you are to gain permission to pitch to them. Just one thing, your pitch, via social media channels, isn’t about a coupon or a sale; it is a “call to action” (CTA).
You don’t need just any CTA, you want a strong one that convinces people to act.
There are two main purposes of a call to action; to tell someone what they should do, and to give them the motivation to do so.
It’s a hard balance to strike. You have to give potential customers enough information to get them to click without overwhelming them . When in doubt, ask a copywriter or marketer for a second opinion!
To Recap
We have discussed the formula to generate leads from social media:
A quality profile, followed by quality content and relevancy will ignite your process of increasing your organic reach. Simultaneously, your strategies to ignite conversions will increase your conversion rate, resulting in higher qualified leads.
Pay attention to the Personality Gems. This is a great guideline to use for creating content; especially if you’re launching something new this year.
Looking for an Instagram story tutorial – 2021 edition?
Here’s a shameless tutorial on how to use Instagram Stories in 2021, for those of you who want to pull the plunge into Instagram stories in 2021.
It’s not too late to start!
How To Market On Instagram Stories
Instagram Stories is a very popular feature that enables Instagram users to post various short videos and photos that disappear after 24 hours. You might be wondering why would you want to spend a lot of time crafting content that will disappear in 24 hours? It makes no sense, right?
It’s important to understand what an Instagram Story is and what this feature is all about.
Stories content doesn’t appear in your feed and isn’t visible in your profile. This is what makes Instagram Stories unique. You can add Stories to your profile as highlights which don’t vanish after 24 hours.
A Social Media Trend For 2021
Instagram stories are the backbone of influencer marketing. Influencer marketing is growing even more in 2021.
Influencer marketing is on track to become a $15 billion dollar industry by 2022 and it shows no sign of slowing down.
63% of marketers intend to increase their influencer marketing budget in the next year. Source: Later.com.
What’s The Hype About Stories?
The marketing strategy is called ephemeral content.
Ephemeral content is rich media that is only accessible temporarily (usually 24 hours) before it disappears forever. It can take many forms, including photos, live-stream videos, product demos, narrative stories, and more.
Ephemeral content can currently be published on three primary platforms: Snapchat, Facebook, and Instagram.
When you post an Instagram Story, your profile image will feature a vibrant ring around it to inform other Instagram users letting them know that there’s new content that will disappear in 24 hours.
Why should You Use Instagram Stories to Promote Your Brand?
You get a superior user experience when you use Instagram Stories. There are numerous reasons why you ought to opt for Instagram Stories if you are a brand.
✔️The most important and significant one is that in contrast to Snapchat, the number of individuals you are likely to reach out to on Instagram is considerably higher. Nearly 1 billion accounts use Stories format daily.
✔️Content that is shared via stories generates more engagement than the regular content.
✔️ 1 in 4 Millennials and Gen Z-ers look for Stories of the products and services they want to buy.
✔️ 15%–25% of people swipe up on a link in branded Stories.
✔️ One-third of the most-viewed Instagram Stories are from businesses.
✔️ 36% of businesses use Instagram Stories for product promotion.
✔️ 59% of brands link Instagram Stories to a shoppable page.
✔️Instagram Stories accounts for 34% of Instagram’s sponsored content.
✔️15%–25% of people swipe up on a link in branded Stories.
✔️One-third of the most-viewed Instagram Stories are from businesses.
✔️36% of businesses use Instagram Stories for product promotion.
✔️59% of brands link Instagram Stories to a shoppable page.
Furthermore, Instagram Stories provides a great platform to come up with creative content. This helps you to inch closer to your goal (have someone download a particular song, read some blog post, etc.).
Instagram stories will help you humanize your brand, which will result in conversions.
There is no end to the number of ways you can get creative on this amazing platform. Instagram Stories is very much like a small television channel where you can broaden your horizons and come up with innovative and unique concepts.
How to Share Promotions To Your Instagram Story
Keep in mind that stories have a different format than a regular Instagram post. Stories are great to share your promotions and reach your audience in a personalized and creative way.
✔️ In 2021, Instagram stories that have user-generated content are becoming a trend. A great example of user-generated content is a video testimonial. Your users will feel more connected with your product or services if they feel like they can relate to the stories that you share.
✔️Use branded templates to increase brand loyalty. Canva.com is a great resource to craft unique stories, basically for free.
✔️ Add polls to initiate conversations with your audience. This is a very unique feature. When you add a poll to your Instagram story, you will be able to see who is participating from your poll and have conversations with them.
✔️ Get more engagement by adding stickers to your stories. Stickers are powerful (kind of silly) features that grab the attention of your users. Instagram has added new features this year, so make sure you
We saw lots of enhancements to Instagram Stories in 2019, such as:
Adding music to stories
Layout feature to add multiple pictures at once in different frames
Superzoom
Hands-free
Create
Normal- with stickers, filters, artificial makeup, backgrounds, and the famous halo!
Adding Instagram Effects is fun, plus gives your brand a human taste. If all of this is new, no worries, you can learn more about these features here. Also, you can always delete a story is for some reason you feel like you didn’t do it right.
Once you have uploaded your story, you can click on the 3 dots to the bottom right and activate the menu so you can save it, share as a post, view your story link, copy it, promote, or tag a partner.
Pro tip: copy the link of your Instagram Story and include it on your email campaign to let your audience know that something special was posted via stories and will disappear in 24 hours. This adds urgency!
Checking the Views of Your Instagram Story
Would you like to know if people have seen the Instagram story that you just posted? This is how you can find out:
1. On the top left section of the Home screen, tap your story to bring it up.
2. You can see the count of how many individuals have seen the story at the bottom left area of every Instagram Story post.
3. If you would like to see a list of people who have seen every single post in your Instagram Story, all you need to do is swipe up.
Bear in mind that you will only be able to check the count of how many users have viewed every post in your Story for 24 hours. You can, however, see the viewer count for more than 24 hours if you save a particular post to your Instagram Story highlights.
If you have added some features like polls, for example, you will be able to see actions taken from your stories, including the engagement from polls.
If you have added hashtags, then you will notice that #’s also will have views.
If you would hide the contents of a Story from a certain person, press the three dots adjacent to that person’s user name and then press “Hide story from [name of the user].”
This action will conceal any future Instagram Story posts from that particular user. However, they will still be able to view your profile and see the regular posts that you put up.
How to Save Your Instagram Stories Permanently
You can easily download any of your Instagram Stories to your phone if you find yourself too close and attached to a particular Story and do not wish for it to vanish forever. What you need to do is open your Instagram story and press on the three dots that are present at the bottom right part of the video or photo. Next, press “Save Photo.”
You can save your Instagram Stories on your camera roll as well. To do this, you need to head over to your profile screen, press the menu, and then select “Story Settings.” Turn the option on which says, “Always Save Videos and Photos.” This option will be present under the camera heading.
Each time you create an Instagram Story, the images and videos will save automatically to the camera gallery on your smartphone. You may even save the entire Instagram story as a single video if you are using an iOS operating system.
Instagram Story Creative Features
These Stickers are emojis, images, and GIFs that you can easily add to your Instagram Story. Instagram Story Stickers bring an extra and unique dimension to the content of your posts that makes it even more appealing.
Adding a Selfie Sticker
You will observe a camera icon adjacent to the “# hashtag” once you press the “stickers” icon. You can take a selfie by clicking on this icon, and then press on the image to include a white circle around the said image. Alternately, you may leave the image be with glowing edges.
You may be as creative as you like by taking a selfie with this sticker. For instance, you may insert your face to a picture of the moon and pretend to be an astronaut! There is no limit to the ways you can experiment with this feature!
Adding Geotags:
By pressing the happy face icon at the top right part of your screen, you can get access to the stickers. Here, you will observe a ‘location’ sticker. A string of options will pop up once you press this sticker. You can also search for your location if you cannot see it amongst the options.
Similar to the selfie and location sticker, all you have to do is scroll and find the one that you would like to use.
The story posted above has a poll, my selfie, and under the selfie (hidden) I added a geotag. You can’t see it and this is to create a cleaner version of the story!
Changing your Sticker Size
You can easily increase and decrease the size of your Story sticker by expanding or pinching it with your two fingers.
Deleting Stickers from your Instagram Story
You need not worry if you are not content with your sticker placement. It is pretty simple to remove them from videos and pictures. All you have to do is press and hold the sticker you want to delete. After that, drag it down to the garbage icon located at the bottom of your screen. The trash icon does not show up until you start the process of dragging an item.
Adding a Link to the Instagram Story
Instagram allows you to add links to your Story once your audience base crosses the 10,000 thresholds. This is a splendid feature to promote a particular product, your website, or your recent blog post.
Simply select the link icon placed at the top part of your screen and put in the link you would like to include. Next, press “Preview Link” to ensure the linking is working fine before pressing “done.”
The viewers will then observe the text ‘See More’ right at the bottom area of the Instagram Story with an arrow that tells them to swipe upwards on the screen to open the attached link.
Adding a Link to the Instagram Story Without 10,000 Followers
If you don’t have 10,000 followers yet, don’t worry. You can use IGTV and use links on the description of your videos. Once you upload your IGTV, you will be able to share your video via stories and your users will be able to access your content from there.
Another option to bypass the 10,000 followers mark is to use Linktree. A free feature that builds a mini landing page where you can let your followers know about your multiple updates and add multiple links.
You might want to explore Fastlykke. They build Instagram followers organically. Buying followers is not a tactic that fits every brand but if it does, you certainly want a provider with credentials
Steps to Use Instagram Story Polls
These polls are essentially stickers that enable you to receive feedback directly from the viewers of your Instagram Stories. In contrast to a regular Instagram post, these Instagram Stories have limited options for engagements. Hence, poll stickers are a splendid way in which you can involve your audience and viewers.
i. After you have begun your Instagram Story post, press the smiley icon placed at the top of your screen. Upon clicking the icon, a variety of stickers will show up.
ii. Choose the “poll” sticker and enter the text of your question.
iii. To put in your own poll responses, press the default “No” and “Yes” buttons.
iv. Drag and pinch to alter the location and size of the poll sticker as per your needs.
v. Sometimes a poll is hard to observe. In this case, you may use the brush tool to include a solid color behind the spot where you have placed the poll sticker. This helps to make the poll more conspicuous.
If you want to check out your poll results, you have to swipe upwards on the post so that you can observe the views of your Instagram Story. This will allow you to see which individual voted for which option. You can also get the number of total votes for every choice made.
Bear in mind that whoever responds in your poll will also be able to observe how many votes each option in the poll got.
Using Instagram Story Shopping
This feature allows ecommerce brands worldwide to produce an appealing digital storefront for individuals to check out your best merchandise with a single click.
To make use of this Shopping feature in Instagram Stories, you need to have an Instagram business account instead of a personal profile.
After you have your account ready, you will need to get approval from Instagram. This approval enables your Instagram account to make use of the Instagram Story Shopping feature.
The following are the precise steps that you have to take:
1. Upload the catalog of your product via the catalog manager on Facebook.
2. Wait for the approval from Instagram approval. This might take a couple of days, so you need to be patient.
3. Open your Instagram profile after the approval comes through. Click on “Settings.”
4. Click on Business-> Shopping-> Continue.
5. Press “ Done” after having selected your product catalog
You may begin adding product stickers to your Stories after you are 100 percent set up for Instagram Shopping.
i. Begin your Instagram Stories post.
ii. Press the smiley icon positioned at the top of your screen. Once you click the icon, a variety of stickers will come up.
iii. Choose the “Product” sticker.
iv. From your product catalog, select the relevant product.
v. You can drag and pinch to alter the product sticker size and move its location to wherever you want.
You may add one product sticker for every Instagram Story. Instagram Stories that feature a product sticker may also show up in the Shopping section.
Additional Tips to Use Instagram Stories
Adding GIFs to your Instagram Story
The ideal way you can add GIFs to your Instagram Story is by downloading or converting your GIF into a video clip. You then send it over to yourself and then add the file to your Instagram story through the camera gallery.
Incorporating music to your video
The process of adding music in your video is similar to the one in Snapchat. You can play the music from any device and from any streaming service that you like. You can also play music from your own library if you want! All you have to do press “play,” head back to the Instagram Story and click “record.” It is that simple!
Adding face filters
You will see a face icon at the bottom corner of your screen when you are in the camera view. By tapping this icon, you can access various face filters.
Tips To Convert Followers Into Real Customers
Polish Your First Impression
Online marketing is all about first impression. If users can’t trust in your ability to show up professionally, they won’t do business with you. Make sure you use the showcase feature on Instagram Stories by highlighting the content that helps users to form a great first impression of you.
Instagram Stories isn’t any different from any digital marketing channel. You want to attract users to you. However, it’s not about YOU. It’s about them. Plan your content strategically. Consider that you only have 15 seconds to form a great first impression, and make them feel like they can like you, trust you, and believe in you.
Build Trust By Showing Vulnerability
Your audience is not expecting to see picture-perfect stories. They want to see you- the real you. Authenticity and vulnerability play a very important role here. The more authentic, real, and vulnerable you are, the more your users feel like “you get them”.
Direct Message & Follow Up
Since you will have access to the accounts who watched your stories, don’t hesitate to reach out. This is the best way to build relationships and work on your sales funnel with class! Don’t be spammy. People hate those accounts. You will be blocked.
Bottom Line
There is no denying that when used at their maximum potential, Instagram Stories are indeed a very powerful and effective tool. Moreover, the Instagram Stories features that are available to all users provide you with a blank canvas. This allows you to exploit your creativity as you like!
However, you ought to keep in mind that when using Stories, you should put your focus on developing and nurturing relationships with your viewers and audience.
Finally, the most important thing is that regardless of how you use Instagram Stories, you should have fun!
When my husband asked me for a picture of us in 2009, I immediately knew the #10yearchallenge went viral. He is never up to social media trends! So, of course, I wanted to jump into the challenge… until I checked out the stories that people were sharing.
What’s wrong with the #10yearchallenge?
There is nothing wrong. In a simple answer, you’re just supposed to share a picture side by side comparing your life in 2009 vs your life in 2019. The problem is that the trend went way too far in how people curated their lives.
In case you haven’t checked, go ahead and search on Instagram for the #10yearchallenge. You will the search results and will find Instagram influencers with unbelievable stories! Based on those search results, you will think that the world turned into a better place within the last 10 years.
This made me wonder… why do most people feel the urge to curate their lives on social media? Don’t we connect better when we are vulnerable and real? Then, why don’t people just show more vulnerability?
If you’re wondering where the line is between sharing your life- raw and vulnerable and attracting people to you- the real you, then keep reading!
The Mandatory Question: What The Heck Is Vulnerability?
One of the most quoted definitions of vulnerability is from Brené Brown “Vulnerability is about showing up and being seen. It’s tough to do that when we’re terrified about what people might see or think.”
As small children, we are open and free, sharing all of ourselves with others. Until something very painful happens: your best friend reveals your secret to someone and that someone decides to share with everyone. And now you’re exposed. This can be one of the most traumatic experiences for a child. Did you ever experience how is like being exposed and ashamed as a kid? I did… plenty of times.
As we grow and mature, we soon learn that the world can be a very painful place. We learn that not everyone is on our side, and not all situations are going to go our way. We get disappointed and go through growing pains, and that’s how the fear of vulnerability is formed.
Think about your first love. You believed in eternity. You thought this was the only person you could ever loved. And then… You got hurt.
The fear of vulnerability is ultimately a fear of rejection or abandonment. You have been hurt before, so you seek to minimize the risk of being hurt again.
Why Is Vulnerability A Good Thing, Especially For Your Marketing?
Vulnerability is scary. However, if you are business owners, c-suite executives, leaders, or trying to build a name and a personal brand, vulnerability is needed.
Here’s why:
The well-known neuroscientist, Antonio Damasio stated, “We are not thinking machines that feel rather, we are feeling machines that think.”
Damasio made this discovery: every human decision depends on emotion — every single one.
We make each choice somatically. In other words, we feel each decision out.
In sum, it’s about EMOTIONS.
Your personal-vulnerable stories will get you closer to your audience. Even more than your superhero stories. In general, people relate more with struggles than with wins.
Vulnerable Leaders Are Confident
People who do have a lot of self-confidence, are actually willing to show more of themselves. They’re willing to be vulnerable because they’re not afraid that someone might come in and take advantage of that. A recent set of studies calls this phenomenon “the beautiful mess effect.” It suggests that everyone should be less afraid of opening up—at least in certain cases.
The best example: video marketing!
Have you ever used video to increase your business? Have you thought about it but decided it wasn’t for you? Did you try it and feel embarrassed and not want to do it again? Even if you are a pro in video marketing, you know that the struggle is real, especially for women! We need to have the perfect background, the perfect hair and makeup, perfect nails, and of course, the idea of what we are saying. It’s exhausting.
With video, the more you do it, the more confident you get on camera, and then you learn that it’s ok if you mess up. You laugh and move on. By the way, I want to add a side note here and feature Barnes Team Media from Austin, Texas. They are educators on how to perform better on camera. You should check them out! Mike & Kim Barnes!
The next time you’re hesitating about sharing a great message on video, just think about the beautiful mess effect. People love messy! People love reality shows!
But what about your content marketing, in particular, social media marketing, how vulnerable do you really need to be? Where is the line between vulnerability and privacy?
The Golden Rule of Social Media: Be Personal, Not Private
In my book, The 6 Golden Rules of Social Media, rule #3 is Be Personal, But Not Private.
We all have that one friend on social media who tells us what she had for breakfast, what she wore to work today, the fight she just had with her mother, the supervisor at her job that constantly calls her out and, you know, I could go on and on about her life, or, just go check her social media pages to tell you exactly what is going on with her.
This is exactly WHAT NOT TO DO on social media. It is a desperate cry forattention and while you need the attention and you want new visitors to your social media profiles and pages, this is not the way to get it. In fact, this type of behavior attracts the attention you really don’t need.
You need to be more intentional with what you share on social media, especially if you want to attract a high-level profile.
Think about what your friends want to see from you.
Normally, people are open to know about things that benefit them, such as:
How to save money
How to make more money
How to save time, or
How to save efforts.
Those are the top motivators. You see, it’s not about you! It’s about them.
People don’t want to remember how dramatic your life is or how tough it is to be a parent. We all go through highs and lows. People don’t want constant reminders of your lows; especially when you have poor judgment on your images.
Your friends don’t need to see your c-section scar, bleeding, to know that you have a baby and it was a c-section.
You are entitled to a private life that you share with your family and close friends, away from your business. Do not cross the line of displaying your private life on social media.
Marketing is all about igniting human connections. You want to activate the power of emotions by being a human, to ignite those connections and then, give your audience what they want.
Is that simple! If you’re a content creator, having a clear understanding of how to humanize a brand without crossing the line is very important.
I wish I could tell you that in 10 years, I moved a magic wand and my life changed mysteriously. Well, that’s not true.
I wish I could tell you that in 10 years, I went from my 30’s to my 40’s and I retired with millions of dollars in the bank. This isn’t the case. I had multiple wins between 2010-2013 and several losses in 2014. Those generated plenty of changes for all of us. Changes that were scary, but we are now grateful for all.
I wish that in 10 years I didn’t find myself 50 pounds heavier, and still struggling with my diet. But that’s not the case.
In reality, I can claim some wins. More wins than losses. But I would be a fraud if I tell you everything has been incredibly great. Our family of 6 has seen adversity. It’s extremely difficult pursuing your personal goals, business goals while raising a family with intentionality. I wish more people were real when sharing their #10yearchallenge.
My goal for the next ten years is to be present. To be real. To be vulnerable. This might explain why my personal Facebook is off. I want to figure some things out before I go ahead and create content: for whom?
The last decade was all about growing a massive audience. For some reason, it doesn’t serve me well. I’m all about quality, not quantity.
I have realized how much I love being a small business owner, in particular, a solopreneur and how much I love helping others succeed; especially those who need me the most.
This is me- the real me. With grammatical errors and a crazy accent.
Being vulnerable has opened plenty of doors for me. I wish I had known this 9 years ago, when I was hiding my mistakes, my accent, and tried to be someone else.
If you’re in the process of building a personal brand, take vulnerability seriously and build an audience that you can connect with. Find that line that allows you to connect with your tribe, for real. And just focus on being you, just a little bit better each day.
Don’t Forget This Marketing Secret
The most important element of your content marketing strategy or social media marketing strategy is your reputation. Without great customer service and a great reputation, every marketing effort will be worthless.
Many small businesses struggle with measuring marketing performance. How do you know what you are doing right? What are you doing wrong? Analyzing these issues often requires time and resources that most small businesses simply can’t spare.
Luckily you don’t have to be left out. I’m demystifying the analytics for you!
What is Marketing Analytics Precisely?
The practice of analyzing and measuring marketing performance to improve ROI and overall marketing performance is referred to as marketing analytics.
It allows you to look at your business’s marketing efforts with an objective lens. Once you gauge the efforts, you get a better idea of utilizing the company’s marketing budget.
From SEO rankings to email marketing metrics, marketing analytics apply to virtually every aspect of your business. For instance, social media marketing can be a distraction without marketing analytics.
There’s a good chance you have a “love and hate” relationship with analytics and perhaps it’s because you see insights from Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, your CRM, Google, Website, but you can’t get to sync all of it to understand what’s happening in your business. Let alone the fact that most of those metrics won’t measure the performance you need to measure to grow your business, so they are vanity metrics.
Marketing Strategies Are Only As Good As the Results They Produce
Many business owners I work with tell me flat “if marketing pays on its own, I’m in”. Whereas it’s a big challenge, I show them exactly where is the profitable zone and how can we get there quicker.
According to research conducted by LeadPages and Infusionsoft, 47% of the small business owners surveyed handle the marketing efforts on their own, struggling to track their return on investment to understand whether their marketing activities are effective.
This number might be even bigger when we consider that a significant amount of small business owners are solopreneurs. 😰 So it’s not that their marketing efforts are not working; it’s just that they can’t see it.
A successful marketing strategy only needs 2 things:
A defined path to achieve visibility in front of future buyers and
Actionable metrics to measure performance.
It’s that simple.
Part 1: Your Path To Visibility: Customer Journey
Your marketing strategy needs to have a clear path to achieve visibility in front of future buyers. Keep this in mind. You don’t need to reach millions of users; just users that will find value in what you offer.
Start your path by becoming clear about who is your future buyer. Imagine just ONE person and think about as many details as possible about them. Keep in mind, their journey can start in different places:
They could search online and find you
They could have a conversation with a friend and a friend referred them to you
They were scrolling on a social media channel and saw you, and decided to learn more about you
Never assume that all users start at the same marketing channel. That’s the beauty of following the onmichannel marketing approach. We can consolidate information for all the stages of the user in just one place.
For example, on Instagram, you can use story highlights to feature content that you want your future users to watch. This is a great place to organize your content strategically. Think about your categories, reviews, and promotions. Again, think like Amazon!
Understanding metrics will be your next step! Marketing analytics play a big role at this stage of your marketing strategy. I believe most business owners go with their gut and this is the beginning of chaos.
Take the time to do market research, meaning your future users. I am a big fan of creating blueprints, in particular, the future buyer’s journey. In this way, you can have a thought path to achieve visibility.
Some of the best practices to utilize marketing analytics in the best possible way to map your future customer’s journey:
1- Establish the void you are trying to fill. For e.g. keyword density, keyword analysis, competition analysis etc. Let’s say for instance, that your client had an excellent month in May, but things have not been going so smooth after that. Try to calculate the gap between the current day and the client’s best month. It should be enough for you to determine the first benchmark.
2- Think about your future users’ emotions during each stage of their decision-making process.
As a forensic marketer, I’ve always been fascinated with blueprints, maps, and algorithms, which is the reason why user webflow is one of the favorite things I do.
3- I recommend using Empathy Maps to visualize your audience. This is a simple, visual and effective tool for discovering insights about customers. It is great for understanding audiences, including users, customers, and other players in any business ecosystem.
Part 2: Performance Goals: Tracking and Measuring
Remember what I said above, a successful marketing strategy only needs 2 things:
A defined path to achieve visibility in front of future buyers and
Actionable metrics to measure performance.
Defining each step of the decision-making process is crucial to measure your performance. Especially at the very beginning.
For instance, I just finished a mastermind call with my Business Accelerator members and today the topic was “How do I know that my content is working if I don’t get any subscribers or comments?”. This is a very valid question that I am sure you might have.
During our session, we discussed the user explorer section from Google Analytics and she was surprised to see that users were actually reading her content and coming back for more! Below is an example of how the user explorer report looks like. You can open each transaction and will see all the steps each user has taken.
We identified the goals she needed to set up within her Google Analytics to she could see what her users liked and simply do more of it.
According to Google’s research study conducted with Greenberg Strategy, 88% of consumers favor brands that provide helpful information along every stage of their journey, from research to purchase. Despite that clear preference, only 47% of brands customize and serve information across the customer journey.
Google Analytics is like gasoline for your content marketing strategy. But it’s not the only one. We recommend to also set up Google Search Console to make sure your website is always visible.
Monitoring Performance To Define Your Marketing Plan
Many business owners request a “marketing plan” when we start working. I sort of scratch my head because I can’t just spill a plan without walking your future buyers’ journey. Marketing doesn’t start from the seller’s point of view. It starts from the other way around your end-users.
You can’t create a path to visibility using your intuition. I mean, you could, which is what a lot of business owners do. They just follow role models and copy what they are doing (which sometimes it ends not being effective).
1- Review your Google Analytics at least once a week but don’t make decisions on performance before seeing at least a 90-day period. Once you have at least 90 days of data, you can make decisions. But data alone won’t tell you what you need.
2- Dig deeper!
3- A holistic approach is the only way to make marketing analytics work in your favor. Keep in mind that marketing analytics does not merely constitute of Google analytics. Sure, you should use Google analytics for extracting data and making optimizations but do not solely rely on it.
4- Marketing analytics requires us to gather data from various channels of marketing, including email, social media, online advertising, and SEO.
Unfortunately, I found that not too many business owners have set up data-driven systems. They kind of go by revenue. If sales are happening, they assume that marketing is working.
5- You can delegate! Sure you can learn how to read reports but, is this a profitable task for you? What takes you 5 hours will take an expert 20 minutes.
Seek advice from experienced professionals. They can help you simplify digital marketing analytics practice with ease. It will make you feel at ease and you prevent the overwhelming feeling that tempts people to abandon ship before they give a holistic analytics approach even a try.
Part 3: Using Insights to Craft a Winning Strategy
As many experienced marketers claim, several marketers limit their data’s potential by using it for supporting decisions they made already, instead of driving action. Most of us are familiar with the plan where we can find stats for backing up virtually every argument that comes in front of us. It is only a matter of what stats you have, how you use them, and your way of presenting them.
The same goes for marketing analytics. If you start searching data to support your decisions, chances are that you will certainly come across some. However, in order to create a strategy that really capitalizes on available insights; you need to allow the data to lead your planning and decision-making.
To form a strategy based around analytics, follow the tips mentioned below:
1. Accept Your Mistakes: A significant part of allowing data to determine your plan is to leave behind the initiatives that do not do the trick anymore.
2. Approaching Data from Various Angles: No one is infallible in the field of marketing. There are several ways of interpreting marketing data, therefore, have a partner or someone to help you make sense of everything. It is useful for ensuring that you do not miss some key perspectives.
3. Test, and Test Again: There is nothing better than marketing analytics to let you determine how things could potentially be just by looking at the current state of things. You will need to put your theories and tactics to the test to succeed.
4. Listening Is Your Best Friend: The biggest mistake that you can make in your analytics efforts is ignoring important information that the analytics are providing you. Keep your eyes and ears open and let the data do the talking.
Allowing Analytics to Steer Your Marketing Strategy
Some marketers do not know how valuable resource analytics are. It would even be fair to say that they are a gold mine to take your business to the next level. If you use them correctly, your business will generate more revenue than you ever imagined.
Try to draw reliable insights and use them for improving your marketing efforts. Using those insights in the right times and places will improve your efforts by tenfold.
Holistic Is the Way to Go
We are lucky to live in an age where we have advanced tools to gauge the performance of our marketing efforts. When you have tons of metrics at your disposal, just looking at one of them simply does not do the trick anymore. You have to approach it holistically. Only then will you be able to attain optimum results.
It’s hard to know where to start when it comes to social media marketing.
You could spend hours reading blog posts and watching tutorials, or you could simply get a social media marketing plan for life coaches that considers the needs of your practice.
And that’s what this article is all about. You’re about to get a well-oiled social media marketing plan that will end with the struggle of what to post on social media to grow your coaching business accounts.
Let’s roll!
How do I market my coaching business on social media?
There’s one thing that separates a life coaching business from other businesses: your clients won’t hire you unless they can trust you. They don’t buy from you because you are the cheapest. Hence the reason why promotions are not really effective for life coaching businesses. You want people to hire you because you are the best and you can help them solve a problem.
For this reason, when we outline content for a life coach, we need to consider first their future buyers and their journey.
What should a life coach post on social media?
Since your clients need to like you, trust you, and believe in you, before they even consider working with you, your social media content needs to have a balance between those goals.
Our process to find content for social media for life coaches:
1. Figure out which social media platform(s) your target audience is using the most. If your website has traffic, check your analytics and find out where are they coming from the most. We’re finding that Facebook and Instagram are still at the top of the platforms for life coaches. For example, you can use Instagram Reels to drive new people to your channel, then, via Instagram Stories, offer them to download a guide, so you can follow up with them via email.
Pro tip: always pick the shortest journey. For example: sharing a video, then asking them to click so you can grab their email versus sharing a video, inviting them to a Facebook Group, and expecting the group to help you generate leads and sales. Pick the shortest route!
2. Research. Once we define our journey to connect with the ideal client, we research for topics so we can see how the audience has responded. In that way, we don’t need to invent the wheel. Seasonality plays a big role here. Let’s say that you want to help women who are going through life transitions. If the holidays are approaching, create content that considers their struggles during that season.
3. Create long-form content. We love using social media to identify conversations. Then we create long-form articles using SEO tools that give us content ideas that are relevant to the topics. Having a well-oiled content writing system is key. In our social media marketing agency, our life coaching clients get 4 articles per month, plus 15 posts for their social media. This allows us to build a fresh calendar each month, so they never run out of content.
4. Build your editorial calendar. If you haven’t built a social media calendar, having a done-for-you social media planner will help you tremendously. Here’s our social media planner.
If you have a chance, watch this video series where I discuss the process to building a monthly calendar for your social media.
I have a 3-step process that simplifies your content creation process. I cover it all in Social Greatness- a FREE series where you’ll get a year of content, written for you. This social media tool will save you dozens of hours!
5. Ordering graphics. Your main role in your marketing is to build your network. You’re not a graphic designer. Therefore, delegating this process is crucial to take your business to the next level. I could make graphics; but I won’t. Since you will be ordering graphics after having your editorial calendar ready, your process will flow effortlessly.
Your social media graphic order should look like this:
Inspiration: add a link to a style you likes
Text to include: clearly write what the text will say
Sizes: ask for the graphic in multiple sizes so you can use it for your feed and stories
6. Writing captions for your social media posts. Once your graphics are ready, it’s time to write captions. But, you won’t write them! For this phase, you can use AI to get social media captions. We’ve been using Jarvis (a software that writes professional content for you) and it has saved us hundreds of hours! Click here to check them out.
7. Use a scheduling platform. Facebook has enhanced their scheduling platform and it’s free! Use it!
Should I hire a social media marketing agency?
The short answer is NO.
As a life coach, you need more than a social media marketing agency. You need to grow your online presence, build authority, create content to monetize it, and attract clients. And all of this, while serving your clients. That’s a lot!
Your best hire will be a digital marketing team of experts that can be efficient and give your business what it needs so you can take it to the next level ASAP.
And if that team has a one-stop-shop where you can also create and produce content, even better! For those of you in Austin, Texas, MFG Agency is that one-stop-shop. We offer packages for life coaches, content creators, brands, and e-commerce businesses. Click here to chat about your business.
How do I advertise myself as a life coach?
I know that sometimes it’s not easy to “brag” about yourself.
But… if you don’t share how amazing you are, who will?
Pay attention to conversations and find opportunities to get featured.
Get on the spotlight as much as possible!
Get featured in publications
Get interviewed
Win an award
Join a conference
Play team with other industry leaders
Join networking associations so you can expand your sphere of influence
Pro tip: Use your offline marketing to create content for your online marketing.
Your users are watching you. They want to see that “you are the real deal”. And this is the kind of influence that will inspire them to work with you.
How do coaches grow on Instagram?
Coaches grow by growing their reputation. Your reputation, meaning reviews, is currency these days.
Take some time to ask your amazing clients to leave you a review on Google, Facebook, and LinkedIn. Then, use those reviews to create content and share it on Instagram. Not only you will gain followers but you will be able to turn them into clients.
Again, just because you don’t have a fancy social media presence today doesn’t mean you can’t change it. And the best part, you can do it today.
Bottom Line
Follow the tips mentioned above to get your life coaching business going. Focus on being genuine and organic on avoiding roadblocks in your coaching journey. Becoming successful in this field is not an overnight thing. It requires patience, passion, and perseverance. Keep on trying, and after some time, you will have more customers than you could possibly handle.
Who is Jessica Campos
My short bio:
Jessica Campos, JD, BBA
Forensic Digital Marketing Mentor & MFG Agency Founder with over 15 years of experience. I found my way to escape from my law firm to start my beach life, over a decade ago. I’m a living testimonial that you can truly live from your mastery and talents and work from anywhere in the world while having a life. I have 4 children, a loving husband, and 2 amazing dogs. The word busy is not included in my vocabulary 😁I replaced it with “I am intentionally living a purpose-driven life and business.
Standing out from the crowd on social media these days requires more than a great caption and great visuals. With so much raw data floating around the internet, it’s vital to remember that in order for human minds to be able to actually process all the data, strategic visual architecture is required.
If you’re wondering what it takes to turn your social media into a real community with raving fans, this article will bring you some light.
My challenge is that by the end of this reading you’re turned into an information architect. And I’m up to it! Are you ready?
Understanding Information Architecture (IA)
Architecture is important. Castles made of sand fall apart with the tides. But built upon a strong foundation, a house can stand a thousand years or more.
Digital spaces are no different.
There is an enormous amount of information on the internet. But how much exactly? For example, Google receives over 63,000 searches per second on any given day. (Source: SearchEngineLand)
That’s the average figure of how many people use Google a day, which translates into at least 2 trillion searches per year, 3.8 million searches per minute, 228 million searches per hour, and 5.6 billion searches per day. Pretty impressive, right?
The foundation of IA is how you organize the data for your users to find. Can you think of a website where the data has been extremely well organized so users can navigate easily? Amazon? For sure.
Amazon.com is famously usable. They provide all the information users need to understand where they are heading and what’s waiting for them when they get there. The information is accessible, findable, usable, and intuitive.
This is a fantastic example of IA done right. A strong foundation from which the other maxims of our information pyramid can be layered. Their menu is a great example of information architecture done right.
Amazon has a lot of information when you load the homepage, but they do a good job of laying out the information in a hierarchical manner that allows the users to perform different tasks, but concentrate on the primary goal of not leaving the site without a purchase. The main design patterns used here include an autosuggest search bar, that allows the user flexibility and help without being intrusive, and a Tab Navigation pattern, that allows for accessibility by allowing a user to navigate on through the use of a keyboard.
Note to remember: the very best optimized sites can contain a massive amount of information that visitors will happily and easily process in a matter of seconds.
In simple words, you’re an information architect if you’re able to organize the data in a way that users can find it easily.
Information Architecture And Social Media Marketing
While marketers can’t change the design of the social media platforms, certainly, they can use UX design and IA principles in their social media marketing strategy.
See how Amazon promotes its “Happy Gifting” campaign on Facebook and Instagram.
They used Facebook Live with Oprah, following a QVC show format. This is great for mature audiences (ages 34-over).
The same campaign (Happy Gifting) was shared with their Instagram followers but using different formats. Short clips, and showcasing products that fit younger audiences. (15-30ish).
Both platforms have a voice- and it’s different.
The content promotes Amazon’s brands and brand partners, all under one umbrella.
Amazon’s social media accounts have been built according to their brand architecture.
I hope this is giving you ideas for your next social media marketing plan.
Integrating Information Architecture (IA) And Content Strategy
Between your website, your blog, emails, and social media channels, you might be producing at least 20 pieces of content every month, at the most conservative. Some organizations produce 100’s!
But how do you ensure you can get your readers, viewers or listeners the content they want in the right format? In other words, how can you maximize the value of your content?
The answer lies in information architecture and content modeling.
Information Architecture (IA) can be used by every small business owner! Business goals, brand, your voice, your content, your marketing, sales systems … etc.!
The 8 Principles of Information Architecture
These 8 principles from IA will help you design your next marketing moves!
The principle of objects: Content should be treated as a living, breathing thing. It has lifecycles, behaviors, and attributes.
The principle of choices: More is less. Keep the number of choices to a minimum.
The principle of disclosure: Show a preview of information that will help users understand what kind of information is hidden if they dig deeper.
The principle of exemplars: Show examples of content when describing the content of the categories.
The principle of front doors: Assume that at least 50% of users will use a different entry point than the home page.
The principle of multiple classifications: Offer users several different classification schemes to browse the site’s content.
The principle of focused navigation: Keep navigation simple and never mix different things.
The principle of growth: Assume that the content on the website will grow. Make sure the website is scalable.
Design Your Content Using UX Personas
Creating an awesome user experience is the end goal of UX designers. But getting from good to awesome takes a lot of trial and error.
One way to get closer to that all-important awesome user experience is through user personas.
UX personas are created from various research methods and are used to drive great user experiences whereas marketing personas are based on market research about your existing customers.
In short, a persona is just a snapshot of the person you’re targeting with your design or marketing efforts.
Information in a UX persona traditionally covers:
Name
Age
Profession
Specific competencies
Goals
Values
Technical skill (i.e whether your user is a technophobe or a technophile)
When it comes to a persona, the more detailed the better. See the image below for an example.
If you have a company blog, you might have two distinct personas in your sales funnel: one which prefers list articles and another which prefers long form informational content. From knowing this, you could develop your content calendar to accommodate both of your personas.
When we understand our audience we are able to cater to them and this will (hopefully) nudge them further down the sales funnel.
According to Rob Petersen, marketing personas account for 90% of a company’s sales. And HubSpot says using personas makes websites 2-5 times more effective and easier to use by targeted users.
Who knew that understanding IA could be so beneficial?
Conclusion
As you work to define your revenue goals, it’s important to also define your Information Architecture. Without it, you might just be creating noise.
Are you looking for innovative ideas to refresh your marketing plan? What can be a better place than studying lessons from Chipotle’s comeback?
Chipotle is making big news after a series of food quality and safety issues. Named a marketing maven by Inc Magazine, due to its centralized, digital-first campaigns, gives us marketers a great case to study and learn.
For those marketers and small business owners who are preparing for their best year ever, get ready to add some avocado and carne asada to your marketing plan this upcoming season!
Let’s dip in!
Digital Experience Should Be Your Number 1 Priority
Part of the main ingredients of Chipotle’s comeback has been its commitment to go all digital. The company wanted to give its customers a sleek, modern, food-forward experience. Their app has a proprietary “smarter pickup time” technology that enhances the food experience even more.
To make sure they fulfill their commitment with great user experience, Chipotle conducts ongoing research into how customers interact with the company. They iterate, test, and learn.
User experience should be the number one priority in your marketing strategy. 88% of online shoppers say they wouldn’t return to a website after having a bad user experience.
Chipotle has been playing a very smart move by shifting from the traditional bo-go and coupons that casual food restaurants use to drive traffic, to take the time and design a digital experience for their users.
Narrow Your Generation And Find Them Where They Are (TikTok)
Chipotle has realized quickly the power of Millennials and Gen Z when their online orders impulsed by their app were happening from their younger consumers.
In order to conquer those generations, in particular, Gen Z, they have partnered up with TikTok for marketing campaigns like #GuacDance challenge and the #Boorito challenge.
They launched the #GuacDance challenge and customers submitted a total of 250,000 video submissions, resulting in Chipotle selling 802,000 sides of guacamole. Then, for Halloween, the company encouraged its customers to make a TikTok video in their costume glory using the hashtag #Boorito.
In order to spread the word, Chipotle partnered with several top TikTok stars, including Zach King (25.7 million followers) and Brittany Broski (1.6 million), who posted their own videos.
In case you didn’t know TikTok has surged in popularity, surpassing the likes of Facebook, Instagram, YouTube, and Snapchat in monthly App Store installs and Q4 2018 worldwide downloads. While the app doesn’t appear to differ much from other looping, short-form video-sharing apps, TikTok has enticed and captivated consumers with a proclivity for binge-watching video content. Brands are capitalizing on the app’s remarkable success to launch influencer marketing campaigns with top TikTok creators.
But Chipotle isn’t just targeting the younger generations. It seems like they segment their campaigns. They recently launched a brand awareness campaign on their new menu conforming to Keto diet, Paleo and Whole 30 diets.
A lesson learned here: marketers need to design their campaigns generation-specific. Not all audiences respond the same way, especially digitally.
Reversing Social Media Marketing With User Generated Content (UGC)
Chipotle’s massive digital success has been driven by their app downloads and their direct efforts to spread their campaigns strategically.
When you see their social media (Facebook and Instagram) you will notice a different approach from the typical “food porn” marketing.
Chipotle made a u-turn on the traditional social media platforms! No more #foodporn!
Perhaps you imagine the fancy videos showing fresh guac and pico, full or colorful veggies. Well, NO! That’s NOT what their Facebook and Instagram is about.
They have taken a totally different approach: authentic marketing first, aesthetics second.
Take a look at their accounts and you will notice how raw, real, and authentic their content is. We predict that this is a trend that will grow even more in 2020.
Users are tired of seeing perfectly curated feeds and Chipotle knows it!
Why user-generated content (SGC) really matters?
UGC is digital word of mouth. 92% of consumers trust word of mouth more than any kind of advertising. 84 percent of millennials report that user-generated content has some influence on what they buy. These are big numbers that business owners can’t afford to miss.
People trust other people more than they’ll ever trust your marketing alone. Rather than hearing from a brand, they’re getting the genuine opinions of consumers just like them. By showcasing social proof, you’re instantly positioning your brand as more trustworthy.
If you truly want to generate revenue from your digital marketing efforts, your digital marketing strategy needs to prioritize user-generated content, especially Facebook, Instagram, and Youtube.
Chipotle has concentrated its production efforts to enhance its employees’ benefits program and customer loyalty program. The rest of their social media marketing is USG. It’s so simple!
Successful businesses are taking the function of enterprise content seriously. They are moving beyond the one or two ad hoc practitioners supporting the whole business – to specialized teams focused on strategic content in marketing and communications.
A centralized content marketing program connects sales and marketing. Topics flow from sales to marketing and content flows from marketing to sales. There’s no need to follow guerilla tactics when you define a clear roadmap to generating content that users want to consume.
Sixty-seven percent of B2B organizations are fully committed to the practice of content marketing, and half these organizations expect budgets to increase over the next year. In B2C, it’s a similar story. Fifty-seven percent are looking at increased budgets, and 64% say their organization is fully committed.
Chipotle’s CMO Chris Brandt spoke at Advertising Week about ignoring conventional turnaround wisdom to achieve a $1.2 billion revenue increase in three months.
Without a doubt, a centralized content marketing program saved the brand.
In February, Chipotle worked with documentarian Errol Morris to capture workers’ routines and why those employees remained loyal to the brand despite low points, with footage clipped into TV and digital spots. Employee-driven marketing eventually grew into new experiments on social channels. A video of an employee doing a lid flip trick with one of Chipotle’s bowls was shared to the brand’s official Instagram page, racking up 1 million views.
What’s the lesson that all brands need to learn? Content is not just about features and benefits.
Boost Your Organic Traffic With Content SEO
Organic traffic is traffic that comes to your website when someone types a query into Google and clicks on your organic listing in the search results. Anytime lands on your website from the search engine results pages (aka SERPs), you’re receiving organic search traffic.
Take a look at the website traffic that Chipotle’s website has- ORGANIC. A shy 4.8M searches per month – organic. We see very little paid search (AdWords).
Organic search traffic brings in highly qualified prospects and it’s because of their search intent. When you produce content that fits the search intent of the users, your website visitors are almost like leads!
Search Engine Optimization (SEO) has been in the digital marketing space for a long time now. Some marketers believe (wrongly) that SEO is dead. 93% of online experiences begin with a search engine. How can SEO be dead?
Leads from search engines have a 14.6% close rate, while outbound leads (ex. cold-calling, direct mail, etc.) have a 1.7% close rate.
Can SEO drive traffic to a restaurant? You bet!
One of the very first campaigns that hit the search engines was “Behind the Foil,” the most intimate look into the company’s operations in its history.
The documentary-style digital and TV spots, shot by documentarian Errol Morris, aimed to “pull back the foil” by featuring behind-the-scenes footage of Chipotle restaurants, including its kitchens, equipment and prep routines, and featuring Chipotle employees and the farming partners that grow the brand’s real ingredients. This spot is titled “The Guac Smasher.”
Content SEO is a key part of any SEO strategy. Without content, it’s impossible for your site to rank in search engines. It’s, therefore, crucial to write and structure quality content!
Need a fresh marketing strategy? Let’s chat today.
Takeaways From Chipotle’s Digital Marketing
Brand loyalty can be achieved without marketing your products and benefits. The new approach? Marketing that recognized the core values of the company.
Social media marketing needs to make a U-turn and features authentic content. Brands need a centralized plan to execute content distribution.
Your targeted generation is crucial to define what marketing campaign to launch and how will it look.
Considering revamping your marketing efforts? Debating between hiring a full-service agency or in-house?
This article will enlighten your decision-making process.
Dream Teams Have A Content Marketing Strategist (And Managers Too)
Today’s consumers are more informed and proactive than ever before. While a bulk of purchases still occur at conventional brick-and-mortar businesses and retail stores, for a majority of customers, the journey to purchase starts elsewhere. And this means that modern brands must now be publishers.
This is where content marketing comes in.
Hiring a content marketing strategist makes a lot of sense for small business owners, such as doctors, lawyers, and therapists. If you run a legal or dental practice and are constrained by your budget, you may not want to hire a big agency. In this case using a content marketing strategist will do the trick without draining your budget.
Content marketing is usually an inexpensive and very effective way to reach your potential customers and serve current customers as well. It has quickly become the preferred way for small businesses to reach out to customers and build their brand. Especially local business owners and service-based professionals who prefer word of mouth marketing.
In today’s tech-driven world, content marketing for all small businesses is essential. Although content marketing might be a relatively new term, there is certainly nothing novel about the concept.
Content marketing is about creating unique content that offers value to your consumers instead of producing material designed to produce direct sales. Content marketing takes a different approach to marketing campaigns. It’s not transactional but educational.
You will be shocked to know that 60% of these businesses have no information listed online. Often, many small businesses understand that they need to produce content, but they are stuck trying to determine how to generate quality content on a long-term basis. We can help you with it.
If you are a small business owner, content marketing can come to your rescue. Content marketing can achieve conversion rates, which are 6 times higher than other types of marketing.
The Evolution of Content Marketing Jobs
In its early days, it seemed like content marketing was just a fancy word for blogging. I see this misconception a lot! In fact, I’ve seen websites that don’t have a blog because their web developer told them they didn’t need to write posts.
In case you’re wondering if you need a blog, YES! You do! But actually, content marketing encompasses a lot more — particularly today.
Your audiences are online everywhere. They are visiting your website, connecting on social media, engaging in many channels including texting about you! If you have a blog, they will read your articles (and emails too). How do you keep up with all of that in a cohesive way? How can you put all those pieces of a puzzle and actually generate revenue? That’s exactly what content marketing strategy is about!
So, just like almost anything else in our world, content marketing isn’t something that sprouted out of nowhere and took the world by storm.
Content marketing was created and developed, and it further improved over the years. Although it is no secret that content marketing for small businesses has skyrocketed in popularity in the past couple of years, the core principles of content marketing have perhaps been around for centuries. Also, it would do savvy content marketers good to have a couple of classic examples to bust out at strategy meetings and even corporate parties.
In the past five years, there has been strong support for various positions, such as content director, content manager, and content marketing specialist. This is not surprising given the rise in popularity of content marketing. Not just are there considerably more content marketing jobs available throughout the globe now than in the past, more prospective applicants, as well as firms, are looking for them too.
From its infancy, content marketing has gradually evolved to include more detailed and sophisticated storytelling, a greater emphasis on the customer experience, and smarter distribution techniques.
And one thing is for sure: great content definitely stands the test of time.
What is a Content Strategy?
Content strategy is a digital marketing strategy that companies use to create honest, educational, and transparent content consistently for an ideal buyer profile. So, it involves the management of almost any tangible media that you have created and own, such as written, downloadable and visual. In most cases, the goal of a content strategy is to use the promotion and publication of content to drive more organic website traffic, improve qualified lead generation, and empower your sales team to close more deals faster.
Your content strategy helps connect your company’s content efforts and initiatives with business goals and consumer needs. Everything that you do with regard to content must map back to those requirements.
A content strategist is responsible for identifying those business interests that can be satisfied through content. They design a plan for developing and distributing such content.
Content Marketing and Sales Funnel
One of the biggest differences between a content writer or even a social media manager and a content marketing strategist is that content marketing strategists are revenue-oriented.
Your production of content should have tactical points of contacts and that’s essentially a “sales funnel”.
Sales funnels come in many different forms. Also, keep in mind that different influencers and experts may call the various stages by different names. It is worth noting that the conventional sales funnel has been gradually changing to a content marketing funnel, and many businesses are still trying their best to figure it out.
The Basic Sales Funnel
You are probably aware of a basic sales funnel. It has the following steps:
Ø Awareness
Ø Interest
Ø Decision
Ø Action
The top of the sales funnel is called awareness. You have to feed the top of the sales funnel by generating more brand awareness. You have to keep people moving through the sales funnel by getting them interested in your products or services. And then you provide them the information they need to make a decision. They will then take action.
Marketers can now support sales in a new and unprecedented way by specifically targeting each part of the sales funnel with stage-specific and unique content types that will help qualify, nurture, and convert prospects and leads into long term customers.
Note that a content marketing funnel tends to work much the same. It has 4 stages:
· Attract
· Convert
· Close
· Delight
It helps guide people through various stages with engaging content. However, it has one important distinction. A content marketing funnel recognizes the significance of delighting customers as a great way to continually replenish the funnel.
Here are some examples of content that’s suitable for each of the marketing funnel stages:
· Attract (Ads, website, landing pages, videos)
· Convert (Social media, webinars, and whitepapers)
· Close (Questionnaires, ratings, and reviews)
· Delight (Special Offers, emails, blog posts and giveaways)
What Does A Forensic Content Marketing Strategist Do?
Content marketing strategists are marketers who are responsible for developing and managing a brand’s content strategy.
A content marketing strategist creates content that resonates with an existing fan base, and at the same time, is engaging and differentiated enough to draw in new, overlooked or underserved consumers. The goal of content marketing strategists is to develop a content strategy that drives more targeted inbound traffic while guiding visitors through the sales or marketing funnel.
A content strategist or content strategy manager oversees and manages the planning, design, and development of informational content that is produced by a company. So, they take into consideration what the marketing content is, what it can be, and come up with ways to curate content so that it communicates the core values of the organization.
They also ensure the content is clear and compelling and is suitably distributed across mobile, web, and social platforms, adhering to a consistent brand philosophy.
In other words, content marketing strategists lead your content marketing factory! If you don’t have one, they create one for you.
A forensiccontent marketing strategist is also a great fit for a marketing team since its role is to maximize ROI.
Responsibilities of Content Marketing Managers
Content marketing managers have the challenging and exciting role of promoting a brand through engaging content and stories.
Filling a content marketing manager or strategist’s position often requires tremendous effort.
Here are some of the main responsibilities of content managers:
Accountable for all content marketing efforts and initiatives to drive engagement, traffic, and leads, which delivers sales and customer retention
Analyze competitors
Identify the target audiences
Collaborates across various functions to deliver an effective and suitable content marketing strategy along with an editorial plan in order to meet the business objectives of a company at the lowest cost
Management of various creative resources in a company, including writers, designers, and other personnel
Some editorial requirements, such as basic SEO understanding, content structure and categorization, content development, content distribution, and measurement.
Knowing which platform, such as social media, different types of content are best suited to
Development of comprehensive editorial governance to ensure content is consistent with a company’s brand voice, tone, and style
Develop and manage editorial calendar and organization workflows
Some other responsibilities are implementing SEO best practices, and developing and fostering strategic partnerships.
For startups, a content marketing strategist is able to advise on how to build an audience to get clients faster.
Our office focuses on analytics in-depth, which is why we say we do Forensic Content Marketing. We find the gap between your revenue goal and your marketing efforts.
Skills Needed to be a Forensic Marketing Strategist
The following sets of skills are immensely beneficial for a content strategist to use on a daily basis.
1.Writing and Editing Skills
This is one of the most important skill sets. If you cannot write engaging and quality content, it does not matter how well you plan and distribute it. It is no secret that the writing process is one of the most important aspects of content marketing. In addition, you will also have to develop strong editing skills to make sure that the marketing content that your team is creating is top-notch.
2.Project Management
Content editors are often project managers with a comprehensive understanding of what a brand should say and how they should say it.
3.Search Engine Optimization (SEO)
SEO is important for all content writers and managers. As a content manager, you not only have to understand good search engine optimization practices as they work today, but you will also need to understand what’s coming around the corner.
4.Analytics
Good content marketing requires in-depth knowledge and understanding of common analytic tools, such as Google Analytics, Kissmetrics, and Omniture, etc. as well as various optimization approaches, like A/B testing and multivariate tools.
5.Content Monetization Skills
Content probably is not the way you directly generate revenue unless you work at a media company. Instead, the goal of producing content is to get people to purchase your products and services. As a content marketing strategist, you have to plan how the content can be effectively monetized and communicate it to your executive team.
If your business has implemented a content marketing plan but results are not coming as expected, a forensic content marketing strategist will be a great fit.
Elements of a Successful Content Marketing Strategy
An effective content marketing strategy for your small business can set your brand apart from your competition, drive new business, and shorten sales cycles. Although no two content strategies are alike, all should have a few essential components. An effective content strategy often incorporates a range of tactics, such as:
Search Engine Optimization
This is important as SEO tactics can considerably improve your rankings on many popular search engines, like Google and Bing. Note that strategically crafted content on your site that’s informative, unique, and original will enhance your SEO results.
Social Media Marketing
For small businesses, social media is an invaluable element of a content marketing strategy. Keep in mind that industry influencers, customers, and reporters all use social media to interact with your brand and find information.
Media Outreach
By coordinating with the bloggers and media to schedule interviews and coordinate contributed article opportunities, you will be able to receive third-party validation of your business, products, and expertise.
Outsourcing vs. In House Content Marketing Strategist
The first and most important content marketing choice, many small businesses must make is outsourced vs. in-house. Keep in mind that there are pros and cons to each approach.
Pros of Outsourcing
With outsourcing, you have a lot of choices. For example, you can find and hire content editors and niche contract writers through LinkedIn, or have an independent agency do all of the legwork for you. Outsourcing also means that you can lean on the marketing knowledge, expertise, and network of the marketing agency that you partner with.
If you would like to publish content on a more frequent basis without compromising on the level of quality, you will need more writers and editors. This is where an external agency can help you scale up as you can easily outsource as much content as you want.
In most cases, outsourcing content creation is much cheaper, especially for small companies.
Pros of In-House Teams
Using an in-house team means that you get industry expertise as well as a deep understanding of your brand. Also, an in-house content creation team means a much speedier approval process with considerably less back and forth. Keeping this function in-house will also ensure that your marketing has direct control over the messaging.
Our Forensic Content Marketing Approach
Here’s our favorite recommendation: when the business is starting, outsourcing will facilitate speed. Typically, marketing agencies hire us for the strategy component and they execute.
When the business reaches a healthy cash flow, then an in-house team will be a great move. And we work with those business owners as well.
Creating effective Instagram Ads is a goal for many social media marketers and entrepreneurs who don’t have unlimited budgets.
If you are looking to add Facebook and Instagram Ads to your social media marketing strategy, but don’t want to feel like you’re throwing money blindly, this article is for you.
What Is The Best Budget For Instagram Ads?
The only true answer is “It depends.”
The truth of the matter is that your costs will vary depending on the industry, month, day, hour, location, and the status of your advertising account(and those are just a fraction of the variables at play).
As a general advice, I tell my clients to consider $1,000 to start, as long as they are targeting an audience that’s between 400,000- 700,000 people.
Please take this advice with a grain of salt.
Apple’s iOS 14 Release May Affect Your Ads
Apple has announced changes with iOS 14 that will impact how Facebook receives and process conversion events from tools like the Facebook pixel.
As more people opt out of tracking on iOS 14 devices, ads personalization and performance reporting will be limited for both app and web conversion events.
In response to these changes, Facebook has issued new Facebook ads guidelines in 2021 for its advertisers, covering the details of the updates and offering solutions.
Facebook said its internal research has found that small businesses earned 60 percent less in sales when they were not able to use the kind of targeted advertising Apple aims to limit.
In a post called Speaking Up for Small Businesses, Dan Levy, the VP of Ads and Business Products, claims that the “new iOS 14 policy will have a harmful impact on many small businesses that are struggling to stay afloat.”
Levy believes the changes will impact businesses in these ways:
Force businesses to turn to subscriptions and in-app payments
Make advertising less efficient and effective
Cause a loss of personalization that could result in 60% fewer website sales from ads
That loss of personalization could lead to a drop in revenue by 50% resulting from Facebook app install ads
Make it more difficult for small businesses to reach their ideal audience, limiting growth
Facebook created a page for small business owners to “add your voice” in opposition to the iOS 14 updates. Facebook even created a toolkit to help you share posts, videos, and stories to #SpeakUpForSmall businesses.
Now let’s move on to the base question. Shall we?
First Step To Create Instagram Ads (Or Facebook Ads): Budget Structure
The first logical question when you’re purchasing ads is related to MONEY, right?
You want to know how much will this cost versus how much will you get in return from your Instagram Ads (or Facebook Ads).
Run A Competitor Analysis
Your budget depends from your industry. If other advertisers are trying to reach the same audience members, costs go up as newsfeed space is not unlimited.
For example, if you are in the fashion industry and your target audience is similar to Spanx, you can go to Spanx’s Facebook Page and visit their ads manager to have an idea of their current ads.
To find Page Transparency of any Facebook Page, check around the About section and you will see it. From Page Transparency, go to Ad Library.
The Ads Library of any public page will reflect all the campaigns they are running.
As a marketer, this step can give you insights about what your users are expecting from you, especially for creative and visuals.
Your bidding strategy needs to consider your bidding competitors, in order to determine how much money you will spend in ads.
Can you compete with them? Absolutely yes.
But you need to find ways to stand out from the crowd!
If you’re starting, you can let Facebook find the best bidding strategy for you, but you still need to understand some fundamentals in order to set up your campaign goals.
Second Step To Create Instagram Ads (Or Facebook Ads): Audience Targeting
Target Your Audience Using Custom Audience Features
Facebook has automatic ads that users can just follow to get more visibility. While you can get some results such as comments, shares, video views, and website clicks, we don’t recommend starting there.
If you haven’t been using your Facebook Page or Instagram Business account that much, before paying for ads, implement a strategy where you can activate data from the following features:
Website traffic
Email list
Facebook live
Video library
Events
Instagram profile
IGTV
Facebook custom audience feature is where you will tell Facebook that you want to find people with similar qualities of the ones you already have.
How To Set Up Custom Audiences
From Business Manager– go to shortcuts Audiences – Create Audience – Create a Custom Audience.
These custom audiences might not be ready to use. But you want to still create them to start the process.
What if you don’t have any audience? Can you still start with Facebook Ads?
You can, but just know that you will pay more.
To avoid the painful big invoice with no results, start your campaign with organic events that can guide Facebook into who is your target audience.
This process can significantly reduce your Facebook Ads cost at least by 50%. If Facebook needs to do all the work, from ground zero, you will pay much more. This is why we say that your ads account status plays a big factor in the budget you’ll need for Facebook and Instagram Ads.
Third Step To Create Instagram Ads (Or Facebook Ads): Pixel & Pixel Events Setup
Set Up Pixel & Pixel Events
The Facebook pixel is a tool that allows you track all the activity that happens within Facebook and Instagram.
For example, when someone engages with your Instagram post, Facebook Pixel will track that user.
Think for a second here… those users who play the “follow – unfollow” game on Instagram will still see your Instagram Ads! 😜
The pixel also tracks activity within your Facebook and Instagram accounts.
You can target people who followed you on Instagram in the last 365 days (even if they unfollowed you, they still will see the ad).
You can target those who messaged you on your DM or Facebook Page messenger.
You can target those who clicked on your Link in Bio!
Essentially, every single reaction from your users is getting tracked by the Pixel. This is why you can’t skip this step.
A pro tip: if you want to track users that visit your website and click a particular side of your pages, you can use Facebook events setup tool to connect your website to the Facebook events.
This tool will help you getting granular metrics. You’ll be able to see exactly where your customers are in the funnel, and create campaigns with different objectives.
For example: you can launch a testimonial campaign with a “reach” objective. Using Facebook Attribution model, you’ll be able to track if those who saw your Ad went to your website, and which product they considered.
This information will help you setup another ad, targeting those website visitors – by product page.
Facebook Attribution tool has saved our e-commerce clients up to 40% in ads budget.
Here’s where you take your competitor analysis to a deeper level. Take some time to research so you can design a solid strategy for your Instagram ads.
Who will be the users?
What motivates them to follow you?
What could be ONE struggle you could help them with, right now?
What is your BEST-ONE solution that will them with their struggle, right now?
How can they trust in you?
What will take those motivated users to say yes to your offer?
The success of your campaign starts with strategizing. I wrote for Social Media Examiner a guide that explains how to model a customer journey. Click here and save this article for later.
Let’s cover one of our best campaigns, step by step.
Fifth Step: Creating Your Instagram Ad Using Facebook Ads Manager
Campaign: Customer Testimonial
Due to its nature, when you share a customer’s testimonial, it is very much like word of mouth – the single most effective tactic for driving customer purchases. Yes, you read this right. According to Nielsen, 92% of people trust recommendations from friends and family over any other type of advertising.
When you share a testimonial from a customer, you’re encouraging your future buyers in a positive way to make a decision; which is what we want to achieve from your campaign!
When you hear “customer testimonial”, perhaps you think you need a professional video or image, similar to those ads on tv. High quality, high production, picture-perfect!
That’s actually not the case!
Customer testimonials might be a bit more honest and authentic nowadays.
Here’s The Anatomy Of A Testimonial Ad Campaign
Ad format:
For your testimonial ad, you want to create a visual that blends with your brand, to give the native look. The goal is to inspire users to read your content and click on the call to action.
Why an image and not a video?
“Video marketing” is one of today’s hottest industry buzzwords. You might have read that posts with video get more engagement. The truth is, 85% of videos on Facebook are watched without sound. For this reason, we recommend a highly optimized visual with your testimonial ad, instead of risking it with a video.
See the image below, for example. For this campaign, we use an image that represents a homeschooled student. No text on the image. We want users to read the testimonial and then click on the “learn more” button.
This particular campaign has brought a great performance during a 30-day period:
Reach: 47,968
CTR: 3.59%
Conversions (landing page views) 3,231
Cost per result: $0.23
Choosing your ad format is crucial for a winning campaign. This is where you will put in practice what we mentioned earlier about functionality and experience.
Visuals:
For your testimonial campaign, you will choose a visual that represents your client.
What if I can’t share my client’s pictures?
We recognize that some industries have regulations and have to protect their clients’ identities, like our homeschool kids, for example. It’s ok if you have to use stock images.
When choosing your visual for your ad, ask yourself these questions:
Will my users recognize what are we promoting in less than 3 seconds?
Is the visual clean and inspiring?
What kind of emotion this visual is triggering?
Is it too promotional?
Caption:
There’s something to be said about a real testimonial, which is what we encourage you to do. We recognize that not all your clients are great writers, so we want to give you an extra tip that will help you produce the best stories for your testimonial ads!
Here’s an example of how to ask your favorite client for a testimonial:
Hi _____, we’re inviting new users to check out our services and we need your help! Can you please share some words with us? What challenges you had when you reached out to us? How are those challenges today in comparison to when you started with us? Can you share some specific wins or how your life has changed now that you’ve seen the results? Thanks a lot! M
Let them answer those questions for you. You will be surprised by the words they pick to describe your work.
When you receive your client’s testimonial, feel free to polish the copy in a way that flows a narrative.
Call to action
The call to action in your ad has 2 elements:
Your headline: describe the “what” and make it very simple. In our example, the headline is: Homeschool Writing Curriculum Online + DVD + Online Community
The call to action button: Since this is a testimonial ad, we want to follow a more organic approach. A great call to action button will be “learn more”.
Objective
Choosing your objective is not just about what’s your marketing objective. Here’s an area where we need to integrate other metrics in order to make the decision of what objective to use.
Your account might not be ready for a conversion ad-objective, and here’s why
Facebook advertising guides give us benchmarks on conversion ads. Keep in mind the 10,000 fires because this is your new benchmark. If your Facebook pixel is registering at least 10,000 pixel events on your website in the last month (or 30 days), then you can select conversions as your ad objective.
If you don’t have the required 10,000 pixel fires per month, then your ad objective will be Traffic, if you have a very defined audience. If you haven’t done ads, then we recommend starting with Engagement as your objective.
Placement
When it comes to placement, you will notice 2 options: automatic or manual. NEVER leave it on automatic placement. Open the manual placement and you will notice their options.
Our best performing testimonial campaigns have just ONE placement: Facebook Feeds. That’s it.
We know our audience very well and we know that they will most likely read a testimonial ad from Facebook. We encourage you to make a decision based on what your audience wants and how will they engage best with your testimonial ad.
We like recommending just Facebook News Feeds, simply because everybody is used to seeing a post and leave a comment if they have questions. It’s a very predictable and easy experience.
Why not marketplace or messenger? Marketplace and messenger are great placements, but not for every industry. These are placements that fit best a flash sale, last-minute promotion, or anything in that nature.
A testimonial ad isn’t your traditional promotion so you don’t want to waste budget. Keep it vanilla-simple!
Audience Targeting
Audience targeting is one of the most fascinating features that Facebook offers.
Where to start?
A great place to start gathering intelligence about your target audience is on Facebook Audience Insights. You will be able to see details about your audience that are beyond demographics, like digital behavior for example. This means that Facebook already knows what kind of content and especially what kind of ads will most likely appeal to your audience.
From Audience Insights you can also save your audience. Just make sure this audience is saved on your correct Facebook Ads account.
If you’re not sure, just use the data from Audience Insights and create a new audience from your business manager.
On Business Manager menu, go to Assets- Audiences
Once you’re on Audiences dashboard, select “create a saved audience”.
This is the process to create a new audience, which we recommend, just to craft a fresh campaign. Try to have an audience just under 1M users. This will be relevant when it comes to selecting your budget.
Budget
When it comes to budget, we like to suggest a formula based on the estimated daily reach and estimated conversion rates.
Remember (again!) the benchmark of 10,000 views.
Here’s a way to strategize your 10,000 benchmark in a 30-day window: 300,000 accounts reached with a 3% CTR = 10,000 views (tracked as “pixel fires”). How can we do it within 30 days? Choosing the right budget!
See, for example, a campaign with $20 a day for 30 days. This has an estimated reach of 1,800 to 5,100. If we hit the best-case scenario, (5,100 per day), this means that in 30 days we have 153,000. But… that’s not the benchmark!
Let’s see the same campaign, with a daily $100 budget. Best case scenario went 4x higher. 22,000 a day. That’s a 660,000 accounts reach. But remember, that’s your best-case scenario.
What budget should you use then?
Start this campaign with the $100 a day. You will have much quicker results (and better). You can always adjust the budget during your campaign.
For example, set up campaign for week 1, $100 a day, then monitor results for the next 3-5 days.
Week 2, $80 a day and monitor the results.
Remember, this is a testimonial ad will also be placed on your business page and will reach people organically as well.
Don’t be afraid of adding a reasonable budget to your campaign. Playing with $5 a day “to see what happens” won’t give you the best results. Facebook has ways to deliver you the best results possible, with their campaign budget optimization feature.
A note on the pixel fires: For the purpose of 10,000 pixel fires, every website traffic source matters. In other words, if you’re blogging and using SEO, those visitors count towards the 10,000 goal. Blogging is good!
Instagram Stories Ad
Instagram Stories is another way for you to tap into people’s passions and inspire them to take action. In fact, of the 500 million accounts using Instagram Stories,1 one-third of the most-viewed stories come from businesses, and one in five stories gets a direct message from its viewers.
Why are stories a big component of your upcoming campaigns?
It’s because of novelty. People always tend to be drawn to novelty products and ideas. When you’re presenting them with a message in a new format, in theory, based on the psychology of novelty, it will make them curious, at the very least.
What’s the catch?
Instagram stories offer another level of creativity. From interactive filters, to swipe, and even music!
When you’re promoting your business using Instagram stories, adding your Facebook Ad to Instagram won’t make the cut.
Should you use videos or images for stories?
Users have short attention spans and will only spend this much time on a content. Animation evokes emotions that resonate with the viewers. It sparks conversations and makes your audience want to follow the story.
Since stories are 15 seconds max, videos will help you stand out! Especially boomerang videos you can make with your Instagram app. Very simple.
There are tons of great apps and tools like Mojo and Over that can help you create fun animations for your Instagram Stories posts, without having to hire a graphic designer or spend hours learning how to edit videos.
Advertising Stories
Both, Facebook and Instagram have stories. The best way to manage your stories campaign will be from your Facebook Ads Manager.
Ad Objective
Your goal is to bring awareness of your amazing products or services. For this campaign, your ad objective can be video views, since the story will have a 15-sec video. Select your objective and add your campaign name.
Notice that you can click on campaign budget optimization. This option renders a great value for your ads. So, turn that on!
Ad Placement
Since we are creating your stories ad, we will select only stories placement.
Optimization & Spending Controls
Your story only has 15 seconds. It seems like it’s a short time, but it’s not, when you consider the rest of the message you will send to your audience. Optimize your campaign for thru plays and this will give you access to more engaged users.
Producing Your Video
Videos will be the best way get your audience curious. Make it about a flash sale! These are great to make your audience responding fast.
There are many ways to produce stories with videos. Just make sure all your content is in 1 video, under 15 seconds.
You can create the story directly from Instagram or even Snapchat. Showing your audience the new product, letting them know they can get it on sale.
You can create a custom animated graphic without being a graphic designer! Made With Over is a great app! They always have cutting-edge templates that you can curate.
Edit Your Media, Especially Thumbnail
Facebook allows you to edit your stories which is great! You can change background, image, and pick the preview image from your video!
If you are uploading a video you recorded from Instagram stories to place your ad, note that you will be able to add text and also use templates. Click on Text Overlay and Logo Overlay. Customize it as much as you want!
Even if you created the video, double-check that your media is looking sharp!
Text & Links
Remember that novelty is what you want to create when users take a look at your promotion. Make sure you use words like:
4 hours left
Last call
Bo-Go
Save 75%
Promote! Don’t be shy about showing the world you have a great product. Then link your sales page.
Budget
Use Facebook reach estimator and find a number of reach that can potentially take you to the most-wanted 10,000-mark. As we explained above, you can start this campaign with $100 a day. You will have much quicker results (and better). You can always adjust the budget during your campaign. You can always adjust within the next 3-5 days.
To Recap!
Instagram Ads & Facebook ads are a great way to boost your social media presence. Design a strategy for your ads, segmenting the different steps of the process:
Strategize your target audience. Remember to study your competitors.
Design custom audiences. It might take a few weeks, but it’s better to market to a warmer audience and also to let Facebook know that you want to find other users like them.
Stay away from automated ads, automated placements.
Be aggressive in your budget, even if you won’t spend it.
Set up your Pixel events.
I hope this inspires you to learn more about Facebook Ads.
If you’re a marketer and want to learn advanced Facebook Ads, let’s chat!
Wondering if your leadership skills are setting you up for success? How do you know if you truly influence people?
Your leadership matters. And what’s very interesting, is that leadership is one of those skills that are needed for everything we do. As individuals, parents, and professionals.
With leadership being such an important quality, refining those skills should be a top priority. At least it is for me!
So, I learned about a leadership training that uses horses to help you become a better leader and was so curious that decided to give it a try! This has been, by far, one of the most fascinating experiences!
If you’re up to learning everything I got from my partner – a horse! Keep reading!
The Story of Equine Therapy
You might think that equine therapy is a new-age thing but actually it’s not. Horses have been used in therapy for a long time!
Hippocrates, commonly referred to as the father of modern medicine, wrote about equine-assisted therapy being used in ancient Greece.
Therapeutic riding rose to prominence in the 1950s and 1960s in Europe, bolstered by Danish Olympic dressage silver medallist Lis Hartel, who claimed to ride helped her recover from polio.
Children with autism also benefit from equine therapy due to the motor, emotional, and sensory sensations that come with riding a horse.
Although equine therapy itself hasn’t been deeply studied, research shows that horses are acutely tuned in to human emotions, and anecdotal accounts of their therapeutic impact abound.
Recently, life coaches who are equine specialists are using horses to facilitate their coaching sessions with their clients.
Why horses?
Unlike smaller therapy animals like dogs and cats, these gentle giants have a calming effect that’s magnified by their size and empathy.
Horses are herd animals known for attuning themselves to human emotion, often reflecting the behaviors of those around them.
Since horses are herd animals, it’s important to have an understanding of their herd “rules”.
When horses are in a herd, their behavior is hierarchical; the higher-ranked animals in the herd eat and drink first. Low-status animals, that eat last, may not get enough food, and if there is little available feed, higher-ranking horses may keep lower-ranking ones from eating at all.
Traditionally, scientists study how animals communicate with one another focused on traits that humans also have, such as body language. However, Jennifer Wathan, a Ph.D. student at the University of Sussex in the U.K. decided to study communication avenues that humans lack.
For horses, moving ears is one of the fascinating facts on how do they communicate. Source: National Geographic.
Horses are one of the most perceptive of all domestic animals. Since they are a prey species, they must be able to detect predators. A stimulus unnoticed by humans is often a cause for alarm for horses; as riders and trainers, we commonly mistake this reaction for “spookiness” or bad behavior.
Horses are highly social animals. They are not happy about being alone.
Benefits of Equine-Facilitated Coaching
You might think “do I really need to work with a horse”? I get it! I’m afraid of horses too! But the more I read about this topic, the more interested I became.
Trying to get a thousand-pound animal to do what you want is no easy task.
If you are unaccustomed to being honest and communicating clearly, the task becomes more difficult. Oh boy! That made me nervous but intrigued at the same time.
Why Is Equine Coaching So Powerful?
Horses can be an emotional mirror for humans. They respond to the feeling state we show.
Horses can help individuals identify their feelings. Addicts, in particular, are known for numbing their feelings through the use of drugs and alcohol. When they get clean, they don’t know what to do with, or often how to identify, their feelings. This is a confusing and frustrating period for addicts. The horse, however, provides information to the client. If one walks angrily toward a horse, snatching its halter or lead, the horse will yank its head back and pull away.
During a session, the facilitator might ask the person, “What are you angry about?” Most of the time, the client will deny being angry and need to be shown the evidence of the horse’s behavior to identify the feeling.
Addicts and other trauma survivors have to learn how to identify their emotions in order to work through them. Horses are a good tool for therapists to help clients do just that.
Equine Coaching
Equine Therapy is commonly used in individuals who need to release from trauma. However, that’s not the only modality where horses can assist.
A life coach can be an equine specialist and coach their clients using horses as a resource to facilitate an experiential coaching session or coaching events and that’s where the term equine coaching comes from.
Equine Coaching in Central Texas
Central Texas is blessed to have Genesis Farm, founded by the Hollywood actress Sandra Dee Robinson whose mission of making a difference by empowering others to find their passion and live the life they’re supposed to live.
Sandra is a motivational speaker, corporate trainer, life coach, equine specialist, and part of our amazing Inner Circle of entrepreneurs. When she first spoke about her leadership workshop and communication training program assisted by horses, I couldn’t help but research.
Sandra’s Leadership Retreats are very special, as they can only be hosted when Texas’ weather allows it. So I’ve been patiently waiting for this retreat!
Since Austin ranked No. 4 in the country among the top cities to start a business, I believe that Genesis Farm’s location attracts professionals and business owners who are driven, motivated, and always open to receive growth strategies.
Recap of My Retreat at Genesis Farm
First and foremost, this recap is totally coming from my personal experience and I am pretty sure that if the other ladies that came to the retreat write their recap, it will look completely different.
We were a group of 6 amazing ladies. Sandra welcomed us with a refreshing breakfast at her cowgirl barn, followed by caffeine of course! It was a cool morning, but we had plenty of resources to stay warm.
After receiving a brief overview of how horses can help us grow, we were ready to go to work! At that point, none of us had no idea of how “working with a horse partner” looked like. But 100% of us were totally curious.
The retreat consists of 4 exercises directly interacting with horses which I totally loved! Then we had other dynamics that encouraged us to reflect on what we learned. The best part? You walk away with a breakthrough that will impact your life forever.
The fact that you’re able to get so much wisdom within hours of interacting with your horse partner, it’s just great. It reminds me of SI (strategic intervention) method used by Tony Robbins.
In a nutshell, SI is a healing methodology that consists of ground-breaking strategies incorporating the revolutionary Human Needs Psychology and other high-quality disciplines, to release stress, anger, fear, overeating, depression, pain, negative patterns, sexual dysfunction and even long term addictions. Nelson Mandela and Mahatma Ghandi are examples of masterful Strategic Interventionists that transcend religion, culture, institution, job description, or political philosophy (as Strategic Intervention should).
While we can’t quite say that equine coaching is a methodology under the SI umbrella, I’ve personally worked with facilitators of the SI method and their ability to help others change habits and overcome limited beliefs is just as impressive as the horse therapy I experienced at the retreat.
Learning From Horses (Lessons From The Hoard)
Our first exposure to the horses gave us the chance to observe the herd. One thing that Genesis Farm does is that they make sure their horses rotate. This is important for both the participants and the horses.
We were asked to pay attention to how the horses were using their body language. Some horses were together, modeling, pretty much, what one horse was doing. Then, another horse was in the opposite direction.
Who is the leader? If you think it’s the dominant horse, think again. The dominant horse is rarely the one who makes the first move to get the herd going. The first lesson is there! So… if you’re the type-A personality who is used to be dominant and strong, to show others who is boss, this will make you reconsider your leadership style.
So, who is the leader then? Leadership, in a herd, has been defined by experts as the ability to initiate, recruit, synchronize, and coordinate the movement of others. Horses are prey, so the leader is the one who is able to keep calm and lead the way.
In the horses world, leadership has nothing to do with gender. It can be male or female. So here’s another instant lesson that I took as a woman. We have the ability to lead and take charge, no matter what.
Another lesson we learned by observing the herd is that great leaders are highly intuitive. The intuitive nature of horses can be easily understood as it is a prey animal. In order to survive it has to know the intentions of all those within its proximity. “Am I safe?” is a question the horse is constantly asking. The horse actually intuits whether or not it is safe, if it can trust those around it to support its safety and, rather than thoughtfully analyzing its situation, actually feels through its intuition the correctness of its actions.
Our First Challenge: Show The Horse Who is Boss
In theory, all you need to show the horse who is boss is to project safety for your horse. But how can you project safety when you’re afraid?
If you think for a second, this is a very common scenario that we get to practice in real life, every time that we are exposed to any of the following:
A job interview
A sales presentation
A public talk
A workshop
Your first date
A difficult meeting
All of the scenarios above expose us to be nervous! How many times you’ve been so nervous that you turned yourself into a fool and showed no presentation skills? I’m sure you think of that moment and you wish you could disappear from the scene!
I’m glad I gave myself permission to stretch from my comfort zone. This was my very first time interacting with a horse. I’m not a horse lover and had very little information about horses, prior to this event. But I wanted to try something different!
Using our intuition, we picked our horse partner, and with Sandra’s assistance, we were told to “show the horse who is boss”.
For all of us, the first couple of minutes were very difficult. Our natural instincts made us be gentle, soft, and careful. However, that’s not being the boss.
Some of us during that first session had a very difficult time taking charge of the 1,500 pounds animal when you simply don’t know if you’re getting them upset. And guess what? This is another lesson that you can apply in real life to develop your personal leadership, especially if you’re a mom.
Do you feel like you give in too fast? Are you not taking charge and making difficult decisions to discipline your kids, simply to avoid chaos? These are all life skills we can learn.
Sandra guided us on how to use our voice, energy, and body to make the horse feel connected and trust in us. She also gave us pointers to understand the horse’s body language. This was so interesting!
It turns out that, every time we get angry, scream at our kids to project authority, to ask them to do something, we are failing at parenthood. This is why kids don’t do what we ask them to do. They either ignore us or avoid us. We get mad and the cycle continues! This is where a communication skills training comes handy!
When your kids avoid you, what do you do? Scream louder? Punish them? Threat them? Those seem to be the most common options. Well, horses can teach you that there is a different way to parent your children. Wait, that too?
Yes. When the horse is not paying attention and you want to show them who is boss, you reclaim your connection and gain their attention. Then you reclaim trust in the relationship. This is exactly how you do it with your horse. And of course, you can do this with pretty much anyone! This first step – how to show the horse who is boss was my entire lesson for the day!
This first challenge made us taking a leadership practices inventory!
After seeing the dynamic of showing your horse who is boss with all the participants, I was able to see patterns and develop my own leadership lessons. I called it how to be a loving leader.
Becoming A Loving Leader
Projecting trust and confidence requires more than knowing what to do. A recent study by Bloomberg revealed that four in 10 corporations and almost half of the academic institutions believe that recent graduates lack certain so-called “soft skills” needed in the workforce to be successful, including emotional intelligence, complex reasoning and negotiation, and persuasion.
Becoming a good leader is about influencing others to follow you in a positive way. I personally added “loving” leader because I personally prefer a leadership style that is gentle but assertive and clear, rather than dominant and based on fear.
The way we lead the horse reminded me of some of the lessons Dale Carnegie revealed in his book How To Win Friends and Influence People:
Begin in a friendly way.
Be a good listener. Encourage others to talk about themselves.
Become genuinely interested in other people.
Ask questions instead of giving direct orders.
Arouse in the other person an eager want.
Use encouragement. Make the fault seem easy to correct.
Make the other person happy about doing the thing you suggest.
So How Do You Show The Horse Who Is Boss Without Getting Hurt?
It took us 3 interventions with the horses to really learn the lesson on how to show the horse who is boss.
To me, during the first intervention, I needed to control my fears in order to connect with my horse partner. The way I was able to connect was by simply ask her questions like “can I touch you?” “is it ok I stand up here?”. Those lead me to gain more confidence in the process.
Once I gained confidence, my next task was to make the horse follow me. Keep in mind, there are distractions.
How can you get the horse to follow your lead?
You increase your energy, your connection, and keep focused so the horse can “sense” that you’re the boss.
The 5 Elements Of Leadership (Learned From The Horses)
Connection– this connection needs to be honest, transparent. The horse will sense if you’re not honest. You need to be “grounded” and present.
Belief– you need to believe you’re a leader, or else the horse won’t sense that you’re the leader.
Trust– the horse needs to trust you, in order to follow you. Sometimes this step is all about you trusting yourself.
A plan of action- the horse will take you up on the leadership charge and is expecting that you tell them what to do. You need to take action!
Congruency– once you get the horse moving, you must keep up your connection, belief, trust, and execute your plan of action, or else the horse will stop following your lead.
These lessons were transformational for me and I could immediately see opportunities to improve some of my most meaningful relationships and roles.
Learning How To Set Up Boundaries
Have you ever been in a relationship where the other person took a lot from you, and you ended up receiving nothing? Not even a thank you note? Has this happened more than once? Is there a chance that you can see a pattern?
Our belief system has been programmed for so long that we no longer notice that something is necessarily wrong. We just learn how to live like this. The longer we accept the “just ok” living, the farther we get from living the life we truly want.
We become a people pleaser, complacent, and others take advantage of us. Or, on the other side of the spectrum, we close our lives and decide not to trust anyone. We become isolated, depressed, frustrated, and unable to keep a healthy relationship.
Horses can teach you how to set up those boundaries!
This intervention was fun! Our buckets had food and we needed to show the horses that they can’t get it.
During this exercise, I was able to “channel” all my energy to ignore the horse completely. At first we had just one. Then we had two!
I feel like my plan worked out! Both horses tried to distract me but quickly realized that I wasn’t gonna give in. I wish I can do this with my kids when they ask for things and put that irresistible face! No is no!
This was, again, another lesson we all can use forever!
Can you notice in the picture below the body language? By the way, the beautiful white horse’s name is Blue. And the smaller one is Coco. They are both so cute. It was hard to say no! But we did it without feeling guilty! This is another area where having a life coach comes handy! They see what you can’t see.
Keeping Up Your Great Energy
Interacting with the horses the entire day made me realize how important is to keep a great energy individually and collectively.
We saw how the horses were stressed when we, as a group, were nervous and afraid.
In the afternoon, the energy was different. All of us experienced different experiences with our horses. It was easier to lead for sure. I wasn’t afraid. I was convinced that I can take charge! The horses were way more relaxed too!
For someone who has never been comfortable around these big animals, this picture is for sure the breakthrough.
I’m definitely coming back for more!
What are your thoughts? Do you consider yourself a great leader? What do you think the horses will say?
Everyone wants to sell more, but not everyone seems to have the secret to more sales. Marketing is supposed to drive more sales, but, with so much information flooding our eyes, entrepreneurs struggle to distinguish the genuinely helpful marketing and sales strategies from the borderline useless.
Nobody has unlimited time and money to test every tool to determine which ones work best.
Instead of following the process of elimination, which practically seems like throwing spaghetti against the walls, and see what sticks, entrepreneurs should focus on designing and optimizing a sales process.
Simply put, stop trying the new marketing tactic on the block, and, instead, design a sales process that allows you to correlate your revenue-generating activities with your growth.
If the word sales process is making you cringe and your skin gets itchy, do not worry. I am going to debunk a sales process that will make you fall in love with sales. Pinky promise!
What Is Social Selling?
Buying and selling have always been social activities. If I ask you to think about your first sale ever, perhaps you were 7 years old or so.
Mine was in first grade and I had to knock on doors asking for donations for the Red Cross. I still remember the sound of the soda can where we had all the coins. My pitch was “Mrs. ____, would you like to cooperate with the Red Cross?”.
Actually it was a regular campaign that our school had, so, by age 11 I won the top producer award! I created a bake sale, in addition to knocking on doors and asking for a favor! I guess we can say, I was born for marketing and sales.
I’m pretty sure you have some memories too!
But what is social selling? Is it about being social and selling to people? The answer is NO. Social selling is a buzzword and there is a lot of misconception about the term.
Some people associate social selling with generating sales directly from social media channels, which is NOT accurate.
A social selling method is predicated on the fact that consumers “socialize” with others as part of their decision-making process. This means, instead of selling directly to a consumer, convincing them about their needs and featuring the benefits of your products or services, you ignite those social conversations so consumers can make their decisions.
Social selling wasn’t born because of social media.
Before our lives were lit by a thousand screens full of stories and boomerang videos, and every other glowing corner of the internet, people asked others they knew for buying advice. Social media happens to empower social selling which is why generating revenue through social media should be one of your goals.
The State of Social Selling
93% of sales executives have not received any formal training on social selling (source)
80% believe their salesforce would be more productive with greater social media presence but, 2/3 of companies have no social media strategy for their sales organization (source)
50.1% of social salespeople spend 5-10% of their time on social media (source)
53% of salespeople want help in understanding social selling better (source)
Marketers spend an average of 4-6 hours a week on social media (source)
61% of US marketers use social media for lead generation (source)
Ingredients Of A Successful Social Selling Strategy
When I teach social selling on my workshops, in particular, LinkedIn Workshops, I explain my Hamburger Method. It’s a multi-ingredients formula that needs to be applied as a whole. Just like when you eat a burger (or vegan burger!). You can’t just eat cheese and say it’s a burger. Y
A social selling strategy is effective once all the ingredients are together.
Consultative selling is an approach that focuses on creating value and trust with the prospect and exploring their needs before offering a solution. The salesperson’s first objective is building a relationship; their second is providing the right product.
Don’t make the mistake that plenty of sellers make: approach people, request them as a connection, and pitch them. That’s not what relationship marketing is about.
Being consultative helps sellers accomplish two important things:
1.By maintaining their focus on building relationships and connection with the client, respecting where they are, and genuine caring about them, they create a positive buying experience for the client that fosters an ongoing relationship and trust.
Relationships = trust.
2. Because they build trust, they gain needed information to deeply understand client needs, identify the right solution, and tailor what they say about products to ensure relevance and impact.
Research shows that 62% of customers say they share bad customer experiences with others. If you want to increase your customer experience, make no mistake, social selling will help you reach your goal.
2) Content That Can Lead Decision Makers Considering Your Solution
Notice that I wrote content and not content marketing. Content marketing is also a buzzword. This puts entrepreneurs at risk of receiving wrong advice and, therefore, getting wrong results.
Your content is a derivative of your communication. Your communication gets shared via your message. A clear message is needed, before putting a content marketing plan in place. This is an ingredient that, in my opinion, many entrepreneurs miss.
Perhaps you heard that you need a blog and share information so you can get people to find you on Google. While that can be true, blogging will be considered a key factor of your social selling strategy if the content is relevant to your target audience. In particular, decision-makers.
According to the statistics collected from Kapost, website conversion rate is 6 times higher for those who’ve adopted content marketing strategy than those who haven’t & there is a whopping 75% increase in marketing qualified leads through content only.
Content is not just about writing a blog post. To activate social selling, consider sharing content that ignites social interactions. Some examples:
Give people a story to tell.
A fact that they didn’t know.
Ignite hope that they can solve their biggest problem today.
Show them how much you care about them.
Recent stats reveal that 84% of conversations about your brand happen offline. This is why I insist that you can’t measure the impact of your social media channels by your likes and shares anymore. That’s in the past.
Next time you go to an event, pay attention to how many conversations are happening and people are using their mobile devices to show something.
So, yes, social media can ignite your social selling, but it’s not the only way.
3) Culture
Culture is an unmissable ingredient of our recipe for success, especially if you are building a sales team. But what exactly is culture?
Culture is essentially a combination of the values and behaviors instilled in a company’s workplace. Some people call it corporate culture or organizational culture.
While it’s being referred to as an element needed to attract good talent, it also helps to attract great customers.
At the end of the day, I believe that when we align ourselves with people that share the same values, magic happens.
No matter the size of your sales team, in order to attain success using a social selling / consultative selling approach, everyone needs to be on board with the following behaviors that are a reflection of your values:
Lead with education
Represent a culture of respect
Being a positive influence in their community
But why all of this is relevant to sales? Because sales happen when people have positive conversations about your services or your products. And when we say people, we refer to conversations that happen both offline, and online, mainly in social media.
Using social media marketing to showcase your company culture can not only boost staff morale, but can show potential clients and customers yet another reason why your organization is great to do business with. Here are 6 strategies you can use to embrace your company culture through social media.
4) Connections
So, your new sales approach has so far 1) Consultative selling approach, 2) Content, and 3) Culture. With these 3, it’s time to put the theory in practice. Connecting with your audience.
Connecting with individuals can seem like a “common sense”. However, you will be surprised by how many sales efforts fail at this level.
When we say you need to have connections as part of your new social selling approach, we don’t give you the go-ahead and spam 50 people a day. Believe it or not, this is what plenty of professionals do on LinkedIn as their “LinkedIn marketing”.
If your only usage of LinkedIn account has to do with sending 50 connection requests per day, chances that those “new connections” will turn into a sales opportunity are smaller than you climbing Mount Everest.
LinkedIn is a great platform to expand your network and get rich connections. But they won’t happen at the “connecting button level”. Your goal is to showcase your expertise and ignite engagement. This will happen, for instance, via LinkedIn groups and hashtag walls.
Imagine you and I just met at a doctor’s office and you ask me “would you like to lose 10 pounds”. Would that be appropriate? Absolutely not.
The same rule goes for online conversations. This is common sense, right? It doesn’t seem to be a common practice for some social media users.
Now that you are turning your social sales game on, you need to get used to some “data waste management”.
You commit to only engage in sound conversations and, at the same time, you become more selective with the data that comes to you. Don’t be afraid to delete people, remove them from your connections, or even block them.
Did you know that LinkedIn takes in consideration the quality of your connections? Yes. It’s not fair but it’s the truth. The more quality connections you have, the more visibility your profile will get.
You might be wondering, but how much time do I need to do all of this? To prepare content, connect with people with authenticity, and ignite real conversations.
I’m not gonna lie here. A social sales strategy is commonly rejected by sales teams because of the amount of time it takes. The best practice is to outsource parts of the implementation of this strategy, such as:
Content research
Content writing
Content distribution
Preliminary connections
Outsourcing these tasks will give you more time to practice social selling offline.
Networking events
Speaking and workshops
Attend to conventions
Now that you have a social selling mindset, your activities will be more strategically. Don’t just go out to socialize. Apply social selling instead.
6) Conversions
The last C of our 6 C’s of social selling is conversions. See the graphic below! Social selling is effective.
So many people want a high conversion rate without researching, defining what is a conversion, and testing their conversion sources. Don’t be one of those people.
Like any marketing activity, if you can’t measure it, you can’t predict it.
Some of the metrics you should watch to make sure your strategy is in good health:
Monitor web traffic with Google Analytics.
Monitor the organic search appearances with Google Search Console.
Add a clear call to actions on your website, including your blogs
Typically, until you reach about 5,000-6,000 web visitors per month, consistently, your main focus should be increasing web traffic. After you hit the benchmark (5,000) then you can focus on increasing conversion rates.
For now, implement your social selling strategy and define clearly your conversion points and strategies.
What Results Should You Expect Immediately?
As soon as you establish your sales strategy and have real social conversations, you should experience an increase in engagement on social media, an increase in the number of people reached, and new connection requests from new people. This should happen within your first 48 hours. Yes, it’s that effective.
If you’re a business owner, no matter if it’s small or big, you crave 1 thing: brand loyalty. A strong brand loyalty transfers into repeated customers who buy your products or services, regardless of changes in price or convenience.
Brand loyalty isn’t about likes and followers. You can’t deposit likes in your banking account! So we need to make sure your marketing & sales efforts translate into steady cash flow and profit, of course. Make no mistake, your focus needs to be on building a strong brand, followed by developing brand loyalty.
Does that make sense?
If so, experiential marketing should be part of your next marketing strategy. What is experiential marketing and how can you start running some experiential marketing campaigns? Keep reading, because I’m covering it all.
What Is Considered A Strong Brand
Amazon CEO Jeff Bezos defined brand very simply as “what people say about you when you’re not in the room.”
Seth Godin, a popular entrepreneur and blogger, gives a longer definition:
“A brand is the set of expectations, memories, stories, and relationships that, taken together, account for a consumer’s decision to choose one product or service over another. If the consumer (whether it’s a business, a buyer, a voter, or a donor) doesn’t pay a premium, make a selection, or spread the word, then no brand value exists for that consumer.”
Your brand gets represented through in pretty much everything that your business does on a regular basis, including the following four areas:
> Visual Brand Identity, such as your logo, website, and color scheme
> Brand Voice, such as your blog posts, mission statement, social content, and website copy
> Brand Values, such as the types of causes your company supports
> Brand Personality, such as your company’s culture and customer service philosophy
The path to build a strong brand doesn’t need to be complicated. Many marketers make the mistake of narrowing their efforts to customer acquisition. If this has been your approach, you’re doing exactly what your competitor is doing. How can you stand out?
The way you overcome this obstacle is simple. Build something money or products can’t get you: a genuine connection with your customers, or community.
A strong brand is a result of connection and community. You can have the most beautiful website or write the perfect sales page, but you won’t build a strong brand or reach your revenue goals effortlessly until you build a strong connection and community.
Kendra Scott – A Strong Brand Example
When I think of a strong brand, I like to think about Kendra Scott, for example. If you know of her jewelry, chances are you know about her story. How she went from a $500 project in the spare bedroom of her home to a billion dollar fashion brand loved globally.
If you have visited one of her stores, chances are that you have a memorable experience.
And just in case you still haven’t heard about Kendra, let me give you some context. She’s one of the top America’s richest self-made women and she ranked higher than Taylor Swift, Beyoncé, Donna Karan and Diane Von Furstenberg. It’s amazing when you think that beading classes and $500 we all she needed to start a business.
There’s a reason why Kendra Scott’s locations are flourishing in the middle of the retailpocalypse. She’s been able to create a connection and a strong community, using experiential marketing.
What Is Experiential Marketing
Experiential marketing, also called “engagement marketing,” is a marketing strategy that invites an audience to interact with a business in a real-world situation. Using participatory, hands-on, and tangible branding material, the business can show its customers not just what the company offers, but what it stands for. Source: Hubspot.
Experiential marketing is all about facilitating consumer interaction so they can have a brand experience. And this can be achieved when consumers can meaningfully connect with your brand, and, of course, can also meet and mingle with each other.
Let’s not forget the 2 important elements of a strong brand that lead to brand loyalty: meaningful connections and community.
Here are some of the experiential marketing examples:
✔️Classes or workshops
✔️Product testing or tasting
✔️Factory or headquarter tours
✔️Giveaways and competitions
✔️One-time phenomenon like street art, installations, pop-up concerts, and even pranks.
How To Build Successful Experiential Marketing Strategy
In order to have success in your experiential marketing efforts, you need to see it as a strategy, not a tactic.
The terms tactic and strategy are often confused: tactics are the actual means used to gain an objective, while strategy is the overall campaign plan, which may involve complex operational patterns, activity, and decision-making that govern tactical execution.
A tactic is something you do a few times, but there is no repeatable system that can be duplicated. A strategy consists of a series of steps, all connected, aligned with a main goal, that can be duplicated.
Now let’s discuss the key elements for a successful experiential marketing strategy.
Design Your Experience
How do people feel about our brand? is a fundamental question that every product or service creator must answer.
Without getting too technical, there are some basic UX principles that can be applied in order to plan your experiential marketing strategy more efficiently.
User journey mapping is an excellent exercise that can shed light on that. User journey map is a visualization of an individual’s relationships with a product/brand over time and across different stages of their journey.
Below is a map of the user experience journey that we designed to enhance the experience of our Networking Events for our Austin Networking Community.
Our map traced the different stages of the users, from their first contact with our community, all the way up to brand loyalty. Then, on each step, we map the user’s mindset and identify opportunities to make a better experience for them.
Make sure you keep your map visible so you build your experiential marketing strategy according to your design.
Purpose Driven Instead Of Revenue Driven
Have you been invited you to a party and you ended at a business presentation? This is exactly what not to do!
When you’re opening your doors to receive people, you can’t do it with the sole idea of turning everyone into a client. Your goal is to build connections.
A connection can give you introductions, ideas, and can also turn into a client. But don’t just focus on the third one.
The most successful experiential marketing campaigns leave attendees with a great story to tell.
Kendra’s brand leverage charity events to bring their customers together at their location.
Take a look at their invitation and note how their message is all about giving back. This makes consumers coming for a reason beyond than buying an accessory they want.
If you adopt a purpose-driven strategy instead of a revenue-driven, you will be able to serve others, have fun, and create a much pleasant experience. Just trust the process. You are building your brand. Users will help you build revenue. It will happen!
Narrow Audience Over Broad Audience
Since you will bring people together, you want to think about an audience that actually blends well.
Think about their interests, behaviors, demographics, and location.
Facebook Ads are a great resource to find your target audience. Using the saved audience feature, you can target your audience. However, you don’t always need ads to find your target audience.
Let’s explore briefly the 4 categories:
Interests: People’s hobbies, favorite activities, and favorite sources of entertainment. For example, if you’re hosting a beer festival, you might include people who list beer brands in their interests.
Behaviors: Device usage and purchase behaviors. If you’re hosting a tech conference, you might target people who have the latest models of devices or complex purchasing behaviors.
Demographics: Traits like age, gender, relationship status, education, and job titles. A leadership workshop might want to target individuals who have “manager” or “director” in their job title.
Location: Where people live (for example, your event’s city or neighboring cities). If you host an event in Austin, you can easily target anyone in the Austin city + 25 miles around it.
Research! Don’t just rely on what you believe. Take some time to research the audience. One of my favorite tools for audience research is Facebook Audience Insights.
How to use Audience Insights to find your target audience, free?
Let’s say you want to attract women who are into holistic health from ages 25-40 who live in Texas.
Using Audience Insights you will be able to see the communities or pages they already like. Take your time to explore each of these recommendations. You will be able to get an idea of the kind of experience this audience is used to.
Audience Insights also reveals your audience’s digital behavior. How do they consume digital content, what things they like, comment, and share.
Knowing their behavior will allow you to make smarter decisions of what channels to use and even the format of content you should create to get their attention.
Narrow Your Channels
You don’t need to have a campaign all over social media. The more channels you have, the harder it will be to create meaningful connections.
In other words: less is more.
I’ve been hosting networking events for professionals & entrepreneurs of Austin for over 2 years now. Our key channel is our Facebook Group. We build meaningful connections and invite our members. We get sold out 100% and it’s all organic.
If you notice our experience journey map below, we only planned to use 4 channels to attract users: Facebook Group, Facebook Ads LinkedIn, Eventbrite.
As a matter of fact, we haven’t needed any Facebook Ads at all.
Take the time to identify which of your current channels can bring you more opportunities.
The best efforts are those who can be implemented effortlessly.
Always Lead With Authenticity
The more virtual our lives get, the more we hunger after something genuine.
Gone are the days when you could succeed with flashing big checks, luxury cars, and a picture-perfect lifestyle.
Simply put, being authentic means staying true to who you are, what you do and who you serve. In an environment in which more human elements matter it creates value and benefits for your connections as well as improving your business.
Authenticity works because…
It elevates your business above the competition
It builds your identity and image into something influential
It gives substance to your business, services and products
It enables people to relate to your business
It helps people understand how what you offer is of benefit to them
It tells people that what you offer is of high quality
It marks you out as a reliable, trustworthy company
It encourages engagement and can turn audiences into advocates
When you lead with authenticity, you will find that your users will feel free to take your brand as it belongs to them. They feel connected. It’s because they are part of it.
Kendra Scott now opened a Women’s Entrepreneurial Leadership Institute. Make no mistake, this has been possible because of her strong community. It goes beyond a product. It’s a mission that every Kendra’s jewelry user feels like it belongs to them.
To Recap
You will design an experiential marketing strategy because you want to develop a strong brand and brand loyalty. You want acommunity.
Some of the experiential marketing activities can be:
✔️Classes or workshops
✔️Product testing or tasting
✔️Factory or headquarter tours
✔️Giveaways and competitions
✔️One-time phenomenon like street art, installations, pop-up concerts, and even pranks.
The first step to a successful experiential marketing strategy is design. Start with a basic user experience journey map so you can craft the user experience with all the details in mind.
I hope you get inspired to adopt experiential marketing to build your brand. It’s one of my favorite strategies.
Just in case you want to learn more about me, here’s part of my BIO.
Jessica Campos, JD, BBA is an educator, author, forensic digital marketing expert & strategist who is passionate about UX. She traded in her law career in order to pursue her passion: helping entrepreneurs build wealth by taking advantage of the thriving content economy.
Jessica‘s 15+ years of experience in entrepreneurship, background in law and business, tracked online sales record, and her network, represent a wealth of resources for professionals and entrepreneurs that want to attain success.
Want to discuss your future experience marketing strategy?
After Mark announced the famous line “the future is private” during F8, we have been trying to decode what that means.
Some theories say newsfeeds will disappear. Certainly, that’s not happening anytime soon. I believe we no longer have to think about what he meant. And you’re about to discover some fascinating news about the future of marketing.
It’s chat marketing!
Let’s remember, in 2014, Facebook purchased the messaging service WhatsApp for $19 billion. The acquisition price was staggering for an app that made little money and was largely popular outside the United States. Now this entire transaction makes sense!
Buckle up!
I just came from a 3-day convention hosted by ManyChat and got to see the future of marketing. The conversations I had with marketing legends like Mari Smith, Neil Patel, and the founder of Many Chat were just amazing. I had the chance to speak with entrepreneurs and marketing directors from prestigious marketing companies like Social Media Examiner. This is a convention that will be a regular on my calendar of events!
So literally I’m back from the future to tell you that Chat marketing is a mandatory strategy for your biz!
No matter the size of your business or the industry, you must have a plan to include chat marketing! Take this as my official Motion To Add Chat Marketing to Your 2020 Plan. By the way in case you don’t know I’m an attorney!
Reason 1: SMS Wins Email Marketing
Texting versus email. Is that a real debate? I don’t think so.
I personally don’t believe that email marketing is dead. But certainly, users don’t treat all emails the same way.
I’m sure you have subscribed to your favorite mentors and they send you newsletters, updates, promotions, and invitations. You might have plenty of those that you haven’t opened. Then, on the other hand, you purchase something from Amazon and they send you the order confirmation and of course, you open that one!
Email opening behavior has dramatically changed. You can blame the marketers! With 269 billion emails being sent per day, and nearly 50% of these being spam, our inboxes are becoming increasingly cluttered. For this reason, transactional emails are the ones getting read.
There’s gotta be a better way to communicate with our contacts in bulk and get on their eyes.
SMS open rates are as high as 98%
Research shows that SMS open rates are as high as 98%, compared to just 20% of all emails. And, on average, it takes 90 seconds for someone to respond to a text and 90 minutes to respond to an email.
Furthermore, 75% of people have suggested that they’d be happy to receive an offer via SMS – this is why 65% of marketers say that SMS marketing is a “very effective” method for them.
Why SMS open rate is so high?
SMS messages are great because they’re short and get straight to the point. If you are targeting, for example, c-level executives or influencers, SMS will get you to them.
With a 160-character limit, organizations have to be sharp in their approach and can’t fill their SMS messages with loads of fluff and pointless information.
Short, precise copy that grabs attention is a must, plus any links to vouchers, tickets, surveys, and attachments.
If you think these numbers are impressive, let me tell you about Chat marketing.
Reason 2: Consumers Prefer Life Chat
As marketers, we need to listen to the audience more closely and act upon the trends that we see! Consumers are more educated. They know what they want and they want it fast. For these reasons, consumers prefer live chat support.
If a customer has a question, they are now more likely to visit your website and try to engage with a member of your team via live chat. Do you have a live chat?
You might have tried to add live chat and it gave you nothing but frustrations. It seems like businesses fail to meet live chat demands.
For instant support, customers opt for live chat. But they’re rarely satisfied – most customer chat experiences end with frustration.
Businesses prefer speed – quick connection times and quicker responses. But here’s the disconnect: consumers care more about getting their issue resolved, even if it takes a bit longer.
Businesses that prioritize customer satisfaction over live chat speed metrics will see huge benefits. Consumers are more likely to remain loyal, engage in positive word of mouth, and spend up to $500 extra per month with businesses that provide effortless live chat experiences.
Facebook messenger bots came up with a plugin to serve as live chat. Many business pages are using them as growth tools, which takes us to reason number 3!
Reason 3: Facebook Messenger Users Are Skyrocketing
Messenger marketing has become so hot. It’s the art and science of reaching customers at scale using Facebook Messenger platform, much in the same way marketers have relied on email marketing and newsletters. Messenger marketing can yield over 80 percent open rates, multiples more effective than email.
To see the scale of its popularity, check out a comparative look at the top mobile messaging apps by monthly active users. Messenger outpaces the runner up by more than double. (Source)
This makes developing a marketing strategy around Messenger critical to your business. Imagine your social media communicating with people who truly find value in your content and then your bot platform will help them with customer service. You = 🙂
You’re probably thinking … who has time to do all that? Who will be answering all these questions on messenger? Do I need to give up my entire life to just chat with anyone on the planet? NO! All you need is a bot to answer. And that takes us to reason 4!
Reason 4: Alexa, Siri, and Google Home
Artificial intelligence (AI) is no longer in fiction movies. We all have it at home. And to be honest, giving our hands and eyes a break from typing and reading is very nice. Especially when you’re cooking and multitasking.
We are a family of 6 and we have Google Home. Our Google is in our kitchen. It’s our best friend! We ask about the weather each day. If there’s a holiday, we ask the story of the holiday. If kids want to know “what’s the ugliest animal on the planet”, they get it! (It’s really useful, to say the least).
What’s the business strategy behind Alexa and all of the AI we know by now?
Alexa is the public face of Amazon’s AI efforts; the facilitator that will help customers navigate – and consume – Amazon’s empire.
In simple words, you should have an Alexa representing your business.
✔️ Design a bot
✔️ Give it character
✔️ Be fun
✔️ Be useful, even when it takes your users a bit longer to get the info, they will get used to!
As you can tell, I’m very motivated about chat marketing in 2020.
I just released my messenger chatbot and her name is Marice. She would be so happy to meet you!
Meet Marice. She’s Jessica’s assistant. She has big dreams. She has been loaded with tools that can help visitors learn, grow, and build wealth. She says she wants to win Alexa. And she rocks!
PS- we are at 5% of our content load with Marice so she is still learning!
I’m sure you will have lots of questions about messenger marketing. Subscribe to notifications so you can get alerts as soon as I write another article about this.
So you’re here because you just spent hours building a new website (or months, or years). That’s exciting, and you should feel proud!
Now it’s time to figure out how to let all the search engines know that your website exists so you can get traffic to this brand new website.
This post will show you exactly how to do that and will cover a wide range of website launch tips that won’t require any code or advanced technical SEO.
True story: 90% of the clients I consult tell me they didn’t know they needed to publish their website after it was done. They handed their website to a web developer or built the website themselves and thought that it was just enough to get website visitors. If that was the case, everyone could have 1Million visitors per month!
You have worked so hard to get to this point so we need to get your brand new website some visibility, right away!
Here’s An Overview Of The 5 Steps I Will Cover In This Article:
Your new website might have been installed on WordPress, Wix, or Squarespace. Depending on the platform you use, they all have SEO settings. If you set up the website on your own, don’t panic. The settings I am talking about are not that complex.
On WordPress, I recommend Yoast SEO plugin. Download it and activate it, following the simple steps they provide.
On Wix, use SEO Wix and complete the settings by just following the steps.
Squarespace has a built-in SEO package. It automatically adds meta tags to your site if you complete the SEO settings on each page.
SEO Settings That Each Page Needs
SEO titles – Creates meta title tags for individual pages and collection items.
SEO descriptions – Creates meta description tags for individual pages and collection items. This increases CTR (click-through rate) which means that people will see your description and will click the link to read more.
Site title – Creates the title tag for your whole site.
SEO site description – Creates the meta description tag for your homepage.
Essentially, everything you have uploaded (pictures, videos, audio) will be published. Google reads it from the “metadata”. So it helps to describe all that media.
If you’re with Squarespace, here is a very informative article about their SEO package.
For bloggers, your taxonomy, categories, and tags are gonna be your bread and butter, so make sure you leave these settings ready to use! This article from WP Beginners will turn you into a taxonomy pro!
Lastly, a very common step that is forgotten, remember to add social sharing capabilities so that people can easily share your website with their social networks. Note: this is different than having your handles so you might want to add new plugins. Easy social share is one of many.
Step 2: Prepare Your Launching Campaign
Assuming all your technical settings are completed, now it’s time to have some fun! Just like having a baby! You announce the gender, share the progress, and when it’s born, you share the big news!
Activate your creativity and plan this website launch just like if you’re planning a very special event. You’ve worked hard!
Your launching campaign consists, normally, of 3 stages:
✔️ Pre-launch: This is when you create “teasers” coming up soon. Exactly what you see when a movie is coming up. Or even better, when Iphone is launching a new phone. By the way, did you see the new IphoneXI Pro?
✔️ Launch: The day when your website it’s gonna be born. Again, just like a newborn baby, plan to have headshots revealing the new website. And if you want to get even more traffic, plan about 4-5 blog posts that new website visitors can read once they land. If you’re in Austin, my favorite branded headshot photographer is Jerrel Trulove. He is amazing! He also shoots in other cities!
✔️ Updates: Keeping up with the same example (the baby), the first week update, the first month, and so on. Plan for those. You want to keep bringing up traffic to your site.
Pro tip: keep creating more content, but schedule it so readers have a reason to come back to your website.
Step 3: Fetch And Render Your Website
If this is the first time you’re hearing these words, I’m very happy to be your teacher today!
I know they sound very technical, but it’s just like everything when it’s new. It sounds scary but it’s simple, once you understand.
The SEO world has cool words like that. For instance, the process when Google reads your website is called “crawling”. So that’s another new word for you.
How Does Google Crawl The Web?
If you’re curious enough, you will want to understand this process. Here’s some amazing guide that Google provides for developers.
Google gets information from many different sources, including:
✔️Web pages,
✔️ User-submitted content such as Google My Business and Maps user submissions,
✔️Book scanning,
✔️ Public databases on the Internet, and many other sources.
However, this page focuses on web pages.
The short version
Google follows three basic steps to generate results from web pages:
The first step is finding out what pages exist on the web. There isn’t a central registry of all web pages, so Google must constantly search for new pages and add them to its list of known pages. This process of discovery is called crawling.
Some pages are known because Google has already crawled them before. Other pages are discovered when Google follows a link from a known page to a new page. Still other pages are discovered when a website owner submits a list of pages (a sitemap) for Google to crawl. If you’re using a managed web host, such as Wix or Blogger, they might tell Google to crawl any updated or new pages that you make.
✔️Get your page linked to by another page that Google already knows about. However, be warned that links in advertisements, links that you pay for in other sites, links in comments, or other links that don’t follow the Google Webmaster Guidelines won’t be followed.
✔️ If you ask Google to crawl only one page, make it your home page. Your home page is the most important page on your site, as far as Google is concerned.
✔️ To encourage a complete site crawl, be sure that your home page (and all pages) contain a good site navigation system that links to all the important sections and pages on your site; this helps users (and Google) find their way around your site.
Google Search Console
Google Search Console is a free service offered by Google that helps you monitor, maintain, and troubleshoot your site’s presence in Google Search results. You don’t have to sign up for Search Console to be included in Google Search results. Search Console helps you understand and improve how Google sees your site.
If all your information is ready for new website visitors to check it out, let’s get you on Google Search Console! Click here.
Note that Google Search Console and Google Analytics are not the same. Your developer will install the codes to track your traffic and your digital marketing expert will help you decode what those numbers say.
Step 4: Announce It On Your Social Network
Making and posting a website for Google to crawl so the internet can find you is only the first step. How do we bring in not only viewers, but active viewers? How can we ensure that those active viewers will turn into real sales opportunities?
The short answer is: making sure your users are clear about the solution you provide for their needs.
Social media channels are a great to accomplish this goal.
Top Social Media Channels To Launch Your Website
Your top social media channels will depend on your industry and audience, as you already know. Regardless, at the end of the day, your users want to have a human connection. Whether you like it or not, they will search for you! So we need to make sure they find you and have a great first impression!
Let’s cut some corners!
Facebook Profile
I’m sure you know this already, but… just in case, your Facebook profile has the “About Me” section. Make sure you edit it and add your website.
A pro tip: publish a life event! Life events are great because all your friends receive a notification, so you get to hack the algorithm. Just don’t abuse! Here’s an example of mine.
Expand Your Facebook Network
There’s a good chance that until now, you’ve been using Facebook just to connect with intimate friends. So when you think of Facebook marketing, you think about those friends who can’t stop to share in social media about their products. Well, that’s not gonna be you!
First of all, you can adjust your Facebook settings and organize your Facebook friends by creating lists so your college friends don’t see your business posts!
Using a list, you can post an update for specific people, like your coworkers or friends who live near you. You can also see updates from specific groups of people (example: close friends, family).
You can add or remove friends from these lists at any time. People won’t be notified when you add them to these lists.
Facebook Business Page
Facebook business pages are great to announce your business. It adds credibility and will for sure help you to reach new connections. That’s great! Complete the settings to have your business page, but don’t expect too much from it, unless you are using Facebook Ads.
Instagram Business Profile
One of the current best social media platforms out there is Instagram. It’s growing and it won’t stop any time soon!
How Can Instagram Help You Drive Traffic To Your New Website
A very short version of this complex Insta-world that can help you get it started!
Where to start on Instagram?
Set up a business profile
This will allow you to see how many people click on your profile and the interactive communications with your viewers.
Make sure your new website is listed on your business profile.
Instagram is all visuals. Build a theme for your Instagram that makes users identifying what you do in less than 2 seconds.
Make sure you plan your visuals so you can meet the audience’s standards.
Later app is a great tool that is easy to use! It can help you plan your feed in advance and can schedule posts in advance.
Search on Instagram for similar accounts that relate to yours.
This will be helpful to start with the platform. With time, you will notice you don’t need any inspiration anymore, as it will all come from you. Let’s go back to the example of the health coach. By simply typing health or fitness coach, thousands of pages will automatically pop up with the most popular and engaging at the top. Explore these accounts, those following them, and constantly commenting on them. Chances are engaging with these people will bring you new clients!
Remember what we explained in Step 2 (planning your campaign), you will use the content that you planned for this launching campaign.
Notice that brands use Instagram to announce their deals! So you will be doing the same. Build campaigns around your new website.
✔️Share a new offer for new clients only.
✔️Give away
✔️Collaborate with influencers
Share Your New Website News Via Instagram Stories
Too many posts on their timeline isn’t pleasing to viewers, so a more effective option is Instagram stories. These allow you to make beautiful and creative posts without spamming the audience.
The Catch With Instagram Stories
You can’t add website links until you have 10,000 followers or more.
Can you buy Instagram followers? Yes you can. I wrote an article on how to buy Instagram followers. If Instagram is a great social media channel for you, this one will be a great read.
Step 5: Google My Business
Getting a local business listed on Google My Business (GMB) is one of the fastest and easiest ways to get a local business to start showing up for local search results on Google. Google My Business connects businesses directly with their customers — whether they’re searching on Google Search or Maps.
Most SEOs who work with local clients consider claiming their GMB listing the first step in their SEO strategy. Surprisingly, 56% of local businesses haven’t claimed their Google My Business listing, according to the Local Business Institute.
How To Get Started With Google My Business? Is This Free?
Yes, it’s a free service, which is the irony of this amazing tool. It costs nothing for you to list your business. You can use it, for example, to bring traffic to your blog. Now, to be transparent with you, the listing alone won’t just do magic and take your business to rank on the first page of Google maps or the Google search.
For now, open your GMB listing. Google might ask you to confirm your physical location so it might take a few days. Claim your GMB listing here.
A pro tip: optimize your listing for local SEO and get local search ranking using other tools like Google local guides and Google maps so you can have more advantages and visibility.
I really hope you go back and follow these 5 steps. When you do, please report back to me! It really helps to know when I can help entrepreneurs like you with just an article. If you wanna chat, hit the connect icon here and you will find me!
For micro-influencers who are looking for ways to monetize their audience, more views on their Instagram stories are on their wish list.
Are you a micro-influencer with audacious goals to turn your Instagram channel into a platform? Are you looking for strategies to launch a successful influencer marketing campaign? If so, this article will be spot on!
I will be telling you quick hacks that will turn your Ig stories into real money-making activity.
Instagram Stories Are One Of The Top Marketing Channels In 2019
You have probably noticed from doing your micro influencer marketing that your stories get more views than your regular-organic posts. If you want to monetize your account, don’t get discouraged just because you don’t get hundreds of likes on your posts. You still can show your prospect marketing partners lots of reach via Instagram stories.
Stats That Stand Out About Instagram Stories In Almost 2020
Stories really did start out as a simple add-on feature. Instagram publicly copied them from Snapchat which is what happens in the tech world anyway!
With brands being able to connect so well with their audience through Stories content (especially with increasingly interactive options like Stories polls, stickers, and story highlights, it’s not surprising that the number of Stories is catching up to the number of posts people are publishing.
Stories vs Feeds
46% of all content on Instagram is coming from Stories, falling only slightly behind the 54% of organic posts on news feeds.
Notice that this image is from January 2018 and this makes me predict that by 2020 stories will surpass the number of posts that brands share on Instagram.
You might be able to tell if my prediction is right if you check right not your circle of Instagram connections. What do you notice? Where do they post more? I personally post more frequent on Ig stories than in my feeds. How about you?
Marketing Essentials In Influencer Campaigns
Now that you’re gonna be playing a bigger game, we need to get you to get some new words that will help you discussing money with your future clients.
✔️ Audience Metrics. Your future clients are brands or local business owners who are looking to get more visibility. They probably have heard about influencer marketing but that doesn’t mean they will open their wallet without any proof that they will get something in return for their bucks. This is why you need to always carry your metrics.
I recommend you getting a subscription with Later.com. They produce clean reports, especially for stories and hashtags, which is intelligence that you will need.
✔️Storytelling Mastery. One of the essentials I teach my influencer marketing clients is storytelling. Listen, this is a degree on its own. So, make no mistake, that professional storytelling will take you some learning and some practice with the big warning: you must be OK with sucking at this at first. And it’s ok. 🤷♀️
The essence of a great story is “its ability not only to make you care, but also to make you forget; forget your worries, your problems, even your pain. The story helps you enter a new, magical world that is extremely appealing. The person who helps you achieve such a thing automatically becomes extremely appealing too.” Says one of the most famous storytellers in the world, creator of Toy Story, Andrew Stanton.
Do you think marketing is about recording a video and share with a target audience? There is more!
What kind of process occurs in our brains that can help us experience all of the feelings evoked by a good story?
Let’s say you are in a meeting room and you have to attend a PowerPoint presentation by one of your colleagues. During this process, two parts of your brain, the Broca’s area, and the Wernicke’s area are activated.
These are the language-processing areas, which help us decode words and determine meaning. Other than that, they don’t do anything. Therefore, when this process takes place alone, it is almost impossible for our brains to feel engaged with the speaker, and we consequently lose interest.
When we are being told a story, however, things change dramatically. Not only are the language processing parts in our brain activated, but so is any other area of our brain that we would use to experience the events of the story.
In essence, you are not just listening to a story, you make yourself part of it. Evidently, a story can put your whole brain to work. And yet, it gets better. You can read more about this topic here.
Sorry for taking you on this side-track, but I figured you would not mind a deeper explanation with the science of persuasion!
There is something extraordinary happening during the narration of a story, something that helps the brains of the narrator and the listener to synchronize.
✔️Consistent Voice: if my client wants to hire an influencer, I will make sure they have a consistent voice. A captivated audience, interested in knowing more about my product or my services.
For example, a local restaurant that wants to launch a new vegan menu will be interested in collaborating with a micro-influencer that features vegan food, consistently. We look to see if they have a real community.
We check their stories, highlights, and comments, way before reaching out to them.
This is something you need to be aware of. You never know who is watching you! So always stay consistent with your voice. And hey, if there are reasons to stay out of your brand voice, you can always explain on the post or clean it later.
✔️Charisma: a charismatic voice will always be preferred by brands who are looking for micro-influencers. And the best way you can show this is via stories. Show us the real you! Smile more. Be intentional about showing us your charisma! It will help you tremendously.
✔️Responsive: Stories are fast! They disappear in 24 hours so you want to make sure you can be able to respond and engage with those users who are seeing your story. This is crucial.
A pro tip: If you notice a brand looking at your story, don’t be afraid of sending a personalized message to let them know you appreciate them. Say something that stands out. Don’t be a copy cat!
I manage accounts for brands and the messages we get are way too spammy. We don’t pass those to our clients. So, be aware of this! Brands have marketing teams and they won’t recommend you if you’re just another one.
Enough with lecturing, let’s get you more views!
For the sake of keeping this post under 2,000 words, I am assuming that you are a pro at designing templates and graphics. If not, I wrote this article with my favorite templates. Now let’s go to the hacks!
Finding the Right Time
You already take careful consideration and planning when managing your Instagram account. But it’s time to take it to the next level. And that means optimizing your posts.
Finding the right time is one step. Consider when your followers may be online. You can do this by checking on your Instagram analytics.
Simply go to your “My Profile” page and take a look at your metrics. When do you see the most traffic? Maybe you have early risers checking your posts by 9 am. Or perhaps your followers lead busy lives and don’t have time to check out Instagram until bedtime?
These times can help when planning for stories. Think of them as deadlines. You want to hit these peak times as much as possible to ensure the most readership.
Furthermore, keep your most active time zones in mind. You might live in sunny Los Angeles, but if the majority of your followers are in New York City, you may want to post according to their time zone and not your own.
I feel like getting the timing right takes care of at least 50% of your growth.
Invisible Hashtags: How To Add Invisible Hashtags To Your Instagram Story
Do you want more people to see your stories, Instagram profile and all the hard work you put in? OH YASS you do, that is the whole point, right? Then you need to learn how to add invisible hashtags to your Instagram story.
There is a way to put your favorite #hashtags into an Instagram story. There is also a way to make them invisible so no one else will find out your secret hashtags, or even that you use them at all!
When you have written your hashtag, simply tap the pen. We love this pen since it can match the text to any color visible in the photo.
Drag the pen across the screen (to the background of the text) until the hashtag matches the background.
Don’t know how to edit colors or want to try something else? You can also hide your hashtags with a sticker!
Why put #Hashtags in your Instagram Story?
When people search on hashtags there’s a story-section! This means that your story is visible to everyone who watches your hashtag’s story!
Pro tip: go for the very popular hashtags here. This isn’t the same as your Instagram feed. Hashtag stories are pinned at the top and they are hard to find, so you need to use the ones that are getting lots of views.
Location Tags
There’s a feature on Instagram that many people either don’t know about, or don’t really understand how to use. This feature is geotags. And the benefits of using geotags on Instagram can actually be really valuable to your business if you learn to use them properly!
First, in case you’re not aware, let’s make sure you know what a geotag is. Instagram defines it as: “Geotagging is a technical term for storing the latitude and longitude of your current location with your photo. This data is collected by the GPS device in your phone or tablet and is accessible to Instagram if you grant permission.”
Basically, when you take a photo, the coordinates of where you were are attached to that photo. If (and only if) you tell Instagram to publicize this location, you can tag your photo with the location where you are. To be clear, Instagram will not post your location data on any photo until you choose the “Add to Photo Map” during the upload process.
Adding location tags (geotagging) is also a great way to get more views. If you don’t want to show the location of if the story already looks too busy, hide it behind a sticker, but always tag the location (or any location even if you’re not there).
Pro tip: find location trends and check yourself in those! This will help you to hack that Instagram app!
Call To Action (WITFM)
Remember what you just learned about storytelling? I feel that this is an area where even the best influencer can fail. Because they don’t understand the art of storytelling.
A great call to action integrates your story and makes the audience to take action in an extremely appealing way.
This is very important, especially because you’re about to get hired by brands, and they want to see their money! So you will need some practice!
Some tips to get more conversions and responses from your call to action:
✔️Use teasers. If you’re about to reveal something very interesting, tease me for a few days. Seduce me. Make me remember that I have something very special that can’t miss, and make it very easy for me to remember.
✔️Ignite conversations where your users need to tag a friend. This can almost double your views.
✔️Novelty. Our brains respond to novelty. If you’re offering me something I’ve never seen, I will consider it.
✔️Urgency. Add times and due dates, and remind your audience as much as you need, so that they take action. You will be surprised by how many people wait last minute to do something!
✔️Tag your own account so they can follow you. This is so common sense but we forget!
OVER TO YOU!
What kind of views you got after implementing all of these strategies? Do you have any other tips? I would love to hear!
Do you care about how you make people feel when they connect with you on social media? I do!
You want to make sure that you use social media for what is good: making new connections and keeping up with the old. But you also want to make sure that you are reaching your business goals and social media is also great for prospecting.
Your prospecting goals can turn social media into a very complex world. That’s why we are here today! Let’s solve this puzzle today!
I’m assuming you know what content marketing is. But just in case you want my version of content marketing, ultra-simple, here it is:
Your brand’s voice needs content marketing to live like a car needs wheels to move.
Content marketing is not just typing keywords. If it was about that, anyone can succeed in the digital economy. You know very well that’s not the case. Our lives are so cluttered that we can’t keep up with all the data we get every second.
Just to put you in perspective, there are 2.5 quintillion bytes of data created each day at our current pace, but that pace is only accelerating with the growth of the Internet of Things (IoT). That’s why you feel like it’s impossible to keep up with all notifications.
✔️ Email
✔️ Text
✔️ Facebook notifications
✔️ Facebook business notifications
✔️ Facebook stories
✔️ Messenger
✔️ Instagram feeds
✔️ Instagram messenger
✔️ Instagram stories
✔️ LinkedIn
✔️ Twitter
✔️ Youtube
✔️ Google my business
✔️ Other apps
✔️ Your mom
✔️ And real life!
How can people remember your name and your story, on top of everything else they are doing?
It’s all about your brand.
Your communication is a function of your personal brand. And your content marketing strategy is a factor of your brand strategy.
Even if you didn’t have a business, your persona is a brand. You just don’t call yourself a brand, but you are!
Creating a personal brand is crucial to cultivating a successful career. Marketing yourself and your career or business as a brand is more than just about creative business cards or pretty fonts– it’s about how you present yourself to potential clients, customers, and anyone else imperative to your career.
I think you understand, the idea and purpose of content marketing. The main struggle my clients share with me is about keeping a balance between their business accounts and personal accounts. Where is the work life balance when it comes to content marketing and social media marketing?
I’m not your guru. I happen to be a recovered attorney and online marketing nerd who has been on social media as a personal brand before it was even a thing, back in 2009. The strategy I will tell you is the one I follow. Let’s dive in so I can tell you the good, the bad, and the ugly of balancing your business account with your personal account.
The Anatomy of A Perfect Content Marketing Calendar (The Branding Burger)
You want to find a balance between your personal life and your curated life. In order to do that, you need to consider multiple ingredients. Just like the burger!
As a personal brand, your work life balance, in regards to your social media accounts, is a function of the following factors:
Brand voice
Brand voice is the uniformity in the selection of words, the attitude and values of the brand while addressing the target audience or others.
The objective of a brand voice is to result in the formation of a uniform personality, positioning, and an image. It is essential to set up and communicate branding strategies in a consistent way to obtain such results. Hence, it is important that the brand voice has a uniform vocabulary, values, and other characteristics.
Think about Disney.
Disney has an edge over any of its competitors because of one important quality – consistency. People can imagine a whole new world when they talk about Disney. Be it Disneyland, Disney’s social media network page, or any of the Disney product, Disney has its own vocabulary, values, and tone.
Your voice is the core of your brand strategy.
Your real life
Whether you’ve got 10, 100, 1000 or a million followers on social media, posting pictures and videos they’ll actually enjoy viewing is a great way to encourage engagement and keep your followers coming back for more.
Wishpond’s data says that overall, photo posts get 120% more engagement than the average post, and photo albums actually get 180% more engagement.
People love seeing your real life, to connect with the real human, especially your values.
Your real life is the top of the branding burger!
What’s on your mind
In real life, what’s on your mind? I will tell you mine so you can have a framework:
60% of the time my mind is focused on key activities related to my business goals.
40% of the time I’m focusing on my personal goals.
On a typical workday, I dedicate almost the entire morning to my morning ritual and fitness activities. I get behind my computer, typically around 11 am. I block my time from 11 am until 3 pm so that when kids come from school, I am available. My mind goes into “mom duty” until kids go to bed around 9 pm. Then I spend time with my husband and sometimes I get to mix some of my creative work. That’s my 60/40 and feels like a healthy work life balance to me, considering the season I’m in.
If you follow me closely on my social media accounts, especially Facebook and Instagram, you will notice this by the stories I share. I try to show my friends how does real life look like. Why? Because they have told me they enjoy them!
A pro tip: make your content about them. If you’re sharing what’s going in your personal life, ask your audience for their opinion!
Brand authority refers to the trust a brand has earned among customers, and the degree to which they see your brand as a subject-matter expert. This is where you draw a line.
You want to share personal things, but not private. That’s the kind of content that will turn off your credibility and trust in front of your friends and professional connections. And of course, in front of your prospects too!
Do we really need to see you with a few extra drinks? How will that be compatible with your brand identity? What do you want people to think about you?
A pro tip: if it needs an explanation, delete it or don’t post it. Just because you have a “personal” account doesn’t mean that you expose your dirty laundry.
Your creativity
Creativity and storytelling are like Oreos and milk – separate, they’re nice, but together they’re magic. When it comes to telling our own story, so much of what we accept as reality is just the habitual stories we tell ourselves. To articulate a new vision, you need a new story.
Coining that new story depends on your ability to tap into those creative juices and dig in to who you are. Really, the story has been there all along – you’ve just been too entrenched in it to see it! Learning how to reframe and tell your story in a creative, engaging way is crucial to creating a deeper connection with your audience. If something in your story hasn’t quite clicked yet, this could be the piece you’ve been missing.
See, for example, Alex Murphy. He’s a professional content creator who is currently building his personal brand, after running a successful video production company in Austin. Producing videos for brands like Jesse Elder got him to be inspired and use his own strategies to build a personal brand. It’s great seeing his storytelling and creative skills on social media!
I’m sure you have a friend who has a great social media account that keeps you coming back for more!
Your curated life
Within the first seven seconds of meeting, people will have a solid impression of who you are — and some research suggests a tenth of a second is all it takes to start determining traits like trustworthiness.
The beauty of social media is that you can always curate your life, to add value to your audience so they come back for more.
Think about your social media content as if you’re the editor of a magazine. Make it easy for them to follow your life, learn about your business and what you have to offer, in such a beautiful way that they feel inspired to share with their connections.
Your user experience
UX is what dictates your game plan. Think about what your audience wants to see from you. What kind of content makes them come for more. And do JUST that!
Consistency and empathy are crucial to create a great content marketing calendar. You will make people easy to follow you, adapt to your style, and consume your content. This is how they will be able to learn about your products or services without you having to feel like you’re selling them.
A pro tip: Combine social media with your blog posts / web content, but make sure your web content is optimized for UX.
Back in 2006, Jakob Nielsen published an article about the “F-Shaped Pattern For Reading Web Content”. In an eye tracking study 232 users were recorded navigating thousands of web pages, Nielsen’s team found that the users scanned the web content in the so called F-shaped pattern.
According to the article: “Users first read in a horizontal movement, then move down the page a bit, then read across and finally scan the content’s left side in a vertical movement. This creates an F – shaped reading pattern (which can sometimes look like an E).
You might be thinking that this is old news and that it does not apply anymore, especially for new mobile devices. Well, at the German Research Centre for Artificial Intelligence (GRCAI) researchers found a similar “F” pattern for reading on smartphones.
GRCAI researchers pointed out other important findings regarding reading patterns on mobile devices:
✔️60% read a block of text at a time before scrolling to see more
✔️20% read one page, more or less, completely and then scrolled so that all of the screen’s content was replaced with new text
✔️20% read line-by-line — they focused on a single or very few lines on the screen while scrolling almost constantly to keep new information flowing
*Image from a poster of the study*
Even though social media timeline formats have been changing (most of major social platforms’ shape and navigation are more and more similar, especially for mobile devices), this F-pattern still applies for areas with less visual and complex design such as notifications, private/inbox messages list, etc. In other words it’s still important to pay attention to the avatar, username and the introductory text.
What To Share, When, And Where?
Now that you know the strategy behind your content marketing calendar, it’s time to simplify your content creation process.
What To Share? Follow The 60/40 Rule
You want to at least post daily in the social media channel where you are 100% focused to connect with your prospects.
Instead of just sharing what’s on your mind or an industry tip, I want you to think about the entire burger! Create your editorial calendar ahead of time, so you can balance it out.
Create campaigns for consistency
For example:
Motivational Monday, Transformation Tuesday, Tip Thursday, and Fun Friday. These campaigns will help you to build a content calendar faster. You don’t have to use the names all the time. This can be just for internal purposes.
You don’t always have to use a sales type of content in order to remind your audience about your product or service. A story is more powerful than any other promotional content you can create.
Where To Share? Craft A Facebook Strategy.
Facebook Groups
Facebook Groups have been a trend after the business pages’ organic traffic died. Find professional groups and hang out with other professionals. Your end goal is to build an ecosystem. A system where people share referrals and introductions.
Rumors say that news feeds on Facebook might be removed. We don’t know if this is real, but we know that Facebook Stories are a great placement. Start using them more! Especially for your creative posts! They disappear in 24 hours so take advantage!
Facebook videos
Marketing studies have confirmed that videos get 20 percent more clicks than images. As we are crafting a new Facebook marketing strategy, we need to take video marketing seriously.
Take Imperfect Action And Just Do It
I think you’re very lucky to have blueprints and roadmaps! When I started using social media, there wasn’t anything like this. We needed to learn how to build a brand, by just doing it and making mistakes.
I wrote a book, The 6 Golden Rules of Social Media that talks about how social media is like the Golden Rule. You treat people the way you want to be treated and you will be good.
So, when you’re creating your content marketing calendar, always put yourself in your audience’s shoes. If you were you, following your account, what would you do differently?
Next Steps? Watch My Webinar On-Demand!
Master your social media marketing in just 2 hours a month! Click here.
In the modern digital economy, “UX” is the latest buzzword. Organizations everywhere are looking for creative thinkers capable of transforming their businesses through imaginative interfaces and beautiful user experiences.
But what is UX anyway?
If you’ve recently heard about this and want to know a perspective from a marketing educator who is not an engineer, you will enjoy reading this!
UX is user experience. And you are interacting with it every single minute you’re in front of your phone or your computer. You just don’t know the word and the meaning, just yet.
After hundreds of hours of research, I’ve curated the best stats and facts that will enlighten you about user experience and why it matters today more than ever.
UX Overview – Strategy
By definition, a UX strategy is the plan and approach for a digital product. UX strategies help businesses translate their intended user experience to every touchpoint where people interact with or experience its products or services.
Brands have been implementing user experience strategies for a while now. My favorite example is Amazon.
I found an article in Quartz that shows a screenshot of Amazon’s home page circa 1995 (see below). In today’s digital everything world, this website won’t make the cut.
Here’s what is interesting about this dinosaur-looking website!
At the time, of course, the discipline of user experience design for the web was in its infancy, just like Amazon itself. But, as Amazon grew from fledgling bookseller start-up to the world’s largest internet-based retailer, it thought about the ROI of UX and continued to invest heavily in providing the best possible user experience for its customers.
Why? Because the company realized there was a direct connection between the quality of the user experience and the bottom line. As founder Jeff Bezos noted back in 2000 about those early days:
“In our first year we didn’t spend a single dollar on advertising… the best dollars spent are those we use to improve the customer experience.”
Hmmmmm … I think we are into something!
Amazon reasoned that if they could improve the customer experience to the point where they could easily find what they wanted and buy it with a couple of mouse clicks, then sales would grow. And grow they did! Take a look at Amazon’s path to $1 trillion in revenue.
What can we learn about UX from the Amazon example?
The primary takeaway from my perspective is that it clearly illustrates the direct relationship between the quality and sophistication of the user experience and the bottom line. Any good design obviously needs to weigh the specific business objectives of an application against the user experience, so it’s not surprising that there is a strong link between the two.
This was the case with Amazon as it launched and continually refined its e-commerce website, and it’s the case today for companies developing software applications for consumers and businesses.
An outstanding user experience can have a positive, quantifiable impact on the business in several ways, whether it’s saving money, selling more product, or increasing customer loyalty and satisfaction.
I think every business owner needs to have marketing budget to implement user experience strategies. But where to start?
Mapping The User Persona
What does this mean? Getting granular about all the qualities you know about your future buyers, beyond the demographics and their pain.
✔️How much do I know about their digital behavior?
✔️Where do they engage with brands?
✔️What kind of customer service channel do they prefer? Email? Chat? Bots? Phone?
✔️What kind of visual design this person would prefer?
✔️How do they use social media?
✔️If your online users go to a physical store, what do they expect?
Consumers are savvy. This is why a very low amount of them respond to traditional advertising practices anymore.
Experts have found that you are 276.74 times more likely to climb Mt. Everest than click on a banner ad.
Sadly, I hear marketing agencies saying that PPC is the only thing that has a real ROI.
If users don’t engage with banner ads when they are searching, what kind of human computer interaction they prefer?
The answers are all part of UX design scope. This is exactly what user experience consultants do. Making sure that your digital marketing efforts match the end-user experience. That’s where you see conversions happening.
Decision Mapping
As a forensic marketer, I’ve always been fascinated with blueprints, maps, and algorithms, which is the reason why user webflow is one of the favorite things I do.
When you build a website these days, you no longer buy a template with a pretty homepage. It’s all about mapping the experience that you want to create for your users when they are navigating. Especially from mobile.
Empathy maps and customer journey maps are great tools to analyze your user experience. The goal is to understand the user’s mindset. It sounds like common sense, but sadly, it’s not how most websites have been designed.
A customer journey map is a visualization of the process that a person goes through in order to accomplish a goal tied to a specific business or product. It’s used for understanding and addressing customer needs and pain points.
In its most basic form, journey mapping starts by compiling a series of user goals and actions into a timeline skeleton. Next, the skeleton is fleshed out with user thoughts and emotions in order to create a narrative. Finally, that narrative is condensed into a visualization used to communicate insights that will inform design processes.
Social Media & UX Trends We Can’t Ignore
Social media channels, rather than being transactional channels, serve as a communication channel. For this reason, it’s important for social media specialists to redefine their game plan.
Is It Time To Implement Omnichannel Marketing?
Multi- and omnichannel approaches differ in that omnichannel marketing really puts the customer at the core to ensure a completely consistent, unified experience at every touch point as opposed to simply enabling that touch point. You can think of it this way, too: multichannel means many, omnichannel means all (the customer is literally at the center).
In fact, companies with well-defined omnichannel customer experience strategies in place achieve a 91% higher year-over-year increase in customer retention rate on average, compared to organizations without omnichannel programs in place.
For a good example of seamless omnichannel marketing, think Disney—Walt Disney World, to be exact.
For park visitors, the omnichannel experience starts right away with its trip-planning website. After making a reservation, future guests are prompted to download the My Disney Experience app, which lets them explore the park’s interactive, GPS-enabled map; check wait times; buy tickets; and learn more about scheduled events and restaurants.
During their vacation, guests can use the same app to manage their itineraries, store and edit photos, and even play games while waiting in line.
Then, there’s the Magic Band: A wristband that doubles as a Fast Pass, room key, photo storage device, and cash register.
For more inspiration on Omnichannel Marketing, this article from Hubspot is great!
A Minimalist Approach To Social Media
Now that we are leading your online marketing strategy from the UX perspective, it is totally ok to minimize the number of platforms you use to promote your brand.
Maybe go from seven accounts to three or four quality channels that align with the vision of your brand. Focus on the health of your brand by growing customer relationships and contributing to a conversation. Just think of the kind of value this could add to your business.
The hard part of pursuing a minimalist social media strategy is selecting which channels are the ones that will bring you the most value. I think it’s also hard because of FOMO (fear of missing out). I see this a lot!
Again, lead your decision thinking of the kind of experience this could add to your users. And for sure, start with your website!
If you were looking for ways to increase your customer acquisition, customer engagement, retention, and loyalty, I really hope these UX stats and facts added value to your game plan!
Want to get connected and receive more UX hacks? Let’s get you on the UX list so you don’t miss anything! We are bringing more amazing content and feature UX local consultants like UX With Ease so you can have nothing but the best.
I am also planning more events for the UX tribe in Austin Texas! Opt in to stay tuned.
Instagram and influencer marketing have skyrocketed since it first made its mark.
The reason is mainly associated with how consumers make decisions these days. You will be shocked with some of the most recent stats about how customers purchase:
✔️ 57% of consumers prefer to shop online, 31% of consumers prefer visiting the physical shop, while 12% of consumers said both ways are the same for them. (Bizfeel)
✔️ About one-third of consumers said the top reason to shop online is the ability to shop 24/7 (32%), followed by a lower price (29%), convenient (22%), and save time (17%). (Bizfeel)
These numbers are only getting bigger year after year.
These stats might vary depending on the industry, but we can’t deny the impact that social media has on the decisions consumers make; which is why brands and small business owners want to sprint their likes and followers on social media.
How do you get real Instagram followers for free? You’re about to have lots of strategies here.
Getting Social Media Followers Won’t Fuel Your Banking Account Unless You Understand One Thing
Social media is not a SALES channel, it’s a COMMUNICATION channel. It needs multiple participants in order to have real communication.
In order to exude the “coolness” factor, it’s essential that you take the time to build a well thought out content marketing plan, so that your message is communicated in front of the right audience and they can feel compelled to engage with your content.
Instagram Followers And Likes Still Matter (And Facebook Too)
As of April 2019, Facebook is by far the most popular social network with over 2.3 billion global monthly active users but Instagram, the mobile photo and video-sharing application launched in 2010, is quickly growing in popularity.
According to the company, the secret to their success is their unique visual storytelling approach to social media.
Users registered with the platform can upload pictures and videos, to which they can also apply filters, frames and other effects. They can also attach captions, tags of other people/accounts, whether friends, celebrities or companies and hashtags, which make the media easy to find if one is looking for specific subjects.
There are a reported 60 million photos uploaded to Instagram every day. Therefore, small business owners and brands need to have a game plan before jumping into the Instagram world.
It’s not just about uploading emojis and funny pictures. It’s about the experience that your users (followers) will have with your world. This is why, before I give you hundreds of strategies to boost your followers, we need to make sure your Instagram feed and Facebook timeline pass the test!
How do you make a good Instagram feed?
Create Content For A Niche
Your social media channels are robust marketing instruments capable of reaching a massive audience faster than you can imagine.
You need to create content regularly for your Instagram feed. But not just any kind of content. Focus on a particular niche first, so you can have a group of people with similar interests.
Create your content on a variety of topics in your niche that your target audience is searching for on the internet and boost your content with visuals so that you can stand out.
Once you have a captivated audience, communicate with them to find out what types of content they love to read and create those.
Use social contests, throw a question or two at your audience on social media. At the end of your post, ask them what they will love to read or see next.
It should not take you more than a few weeks to see those conversations happening, just from the content you share.
Build Brand Trust by Being Active On Stories
Regular posts consisting of relevant Instagram content on your Instagram profile is crucial to building trust.
Many brands and small business owners fail to use stories to share their content. Mainly because they don’t understand how powerful they can be.
Think about stories as your avenue to share the “behind-the-scenes” of your life and/or business. When you show you’re human, authentic, and transparent, you can almost instantly begin to break the ice to genuine connection.
Remember that Instagram users love stories. Use them to show them how passionate you are about your business. Don’t share products. Instead, invite them to learn more details on your website. In this way, you build your email list, while building trust with your audience.
Instagram stories are a great way to build your email list.
Build Awareness By Having A Visual Voice
If you are a business, I cannot stress enough the importance of finding your visual voice.
Your feed is your business card and the face of your business. Behind every face, there is a personality. Your Instagram theme is that personality. Which is why it is important to get that right.
Look at our favorite Instagrammers right now. Most of them usually talk about the same topics all the time. They talk about what they are passionate about and this is why you are following them. These topics make people want to come back for more.
Pay Attention To Metrics
Most people confuse impressions with reach. Impressions are the number of times your post will show up on someone’s timeline. Impressions can inform the potential of your content’s visibility, but reach is the number of accounts that actually saw your content.
If you want more engagement, your first metric to pay attention is the reach. Once you reach a healthy audience, the next metric to pay attention is website traffic.
Don’t make the mistake of thinking that your social media channel is going to be your sales channel. Again, social media is your point of conversation. People find you via social media, but that’s not the only channel they will use as a factor to make the decision to work with you.
With this in mind, let’s explore how to gain followers on social media!
I have a list of 100 ways so I’m giving you 75 here and you can download the rest and study later!
But, again, keep in mind that more followers alone won’t grow your revenue.
75 Ways To Grow Your Social Media Followers (Expert Advice)
1.Clean your first impression starting with your profile and cover photo. Use Photofeeler.com and get unbiased reviews.
2. Great new headshots and do an announcement! People respond to novelty.
3. “Ask for recommendations” post. Invite people to give you their opinion about something. Everybody has an opinion! Pro tip: use the recommendations feature on Facebook.
4. Add your social media handles in your email signature.
5. Cross promotion. If you want to build Instagram followers, share your handle in other platforms: LinkedIn, Facebook, Facebook Groups.
6. Before/After Story! Share a before and after story and ask your current followers to share. People love great stories!
7. Your tagline. Ask your warm market! “I’m looking to connect with ____. Who do you know who ____?” Since you are building followers, use that space to ask for new followers!
8. Start with your warm list and send a warm email to ask your connections for followers.
9. Be a conversation starter in groups where you can reach people from your Avatars (ideal client profile). Facebook Groups, LinkedIn Groups.
10. Use your personal accounts to feature the other accounts you want to grow. Example: share your business page with your friends.
11. Team Tag! Select a few friends who want to grow followers. Play team tag so you can reach their audience and attract new followers.
12. Visit popular Facebook Pages and leave amazing comments. (Guerilla Marketing 101). Not sure which ones? Use the Audience Insights IQ feature.
13. Craft a tour of your city and show your audience your favorite places. Take great pics and tag as many public places as you can! You should get 100’s of followers per visit if you select the right spots! Pro tip: use Facebook live to get more engagement!
14. From the same tour grab videos and upload them to YouTube. Add your social media handles on the description so people can find you!
15. From the same tour, build a Pinterest board. Add your other social media handles in the description.
16. We are not done! Take your images and upload them to Google Maps. Add your handles as well.
17. Hashtag boards on Instagram. Find them and leave comments under relevant accounts. Procure to leave real comments not just emoji.
18. Find hidden spots on the Internet and leave your social media handle in comments. Quora.com is a great spot.
19. Your business card! Add your handles so people can find you.
20. Build a Facebook Group and offer a freebie to every new member (you will need to solicit them using your profile)
21. “Operation 10-5-1”, play detective and send a cold request (no spamming). This strategy is explained in my book, The 6 Golden Rules of Social Media.
22. Host a 10-Day show! You want to be in front of people as consistent as possible.
23. Host a Challenge. Instead of a quick video tutorial, create a series of steps and tell people you will reveal one new step every day. This brings your followers together.
Pro tip: use ManyChat (Facebook Bots) to get more followers in automatic pilot!
24. Weekly show- perfect for Facebook live or Youtube. Add your social media profiles in the description of each episode.
25. Use OBS to stream old videos using Fbk live or the new Facebook Premiere.
26. Build a personal profile with friends and their connections and turn that into a business Page! This will get you a new page with followers. Your profile’s followers, friends and friend requests will get notified that you’ve created a new Page! Click here to learn more.
27. Giveaway
28. Contest
29. Press release add your social media handles
30. Submit blog to newspaper
31. For live events, booths, add your social media handles to a stand-up banner
32. Marketing collateral- promo materials
33. Flyers
34. Feature brands in your posts and use #’s so other followers can find you
35. Feature micro influencers (share their content)
36. Build a blog and use Google SEO to drive traffic. Then turn your Google traffic into social media followers.
37. Interview experts.
38. Leave book reviews on Amazon.
39. Blog about your Netflix show or share it via social media and tag the show’s page.
40. Participate in community pages and have real conversations about things that you enjoy in life.
41. Sponsor local events so they share your social media page!
42. Sponsor online events! Online summit!
43. Instagram stories – craft your own template and make sure you know the #’s secrets
44. Poll
45. Podcast – you start one
46. Podcast- you get interviewed
47. Use SEO to optimize your YouTube channel
48. List your services via Upwork
49. List via Freelancer.com
50. List via Fiverr.com
51. Network with Facebook friends of friends so you can expand your network
52. Add your handles on your Linkedin summary
53. Create a Guide and share via social media (freebie)
54. Pinterest board (leave your social media info)
55. Pinterest connections
56. Get interviewed at some else’s Youtube
57. List your services at Thumbtag
58. Search for job postings and find people who work at those companies
59. TaskRabbit
60. Alignable
61. Google local guides
62. Upload pics on Google My Business
63. Leave reviews on Yelp
64. Leave reviews on Google
65. ServiceWhale
66. SlaveLabour
67. Meetup
68. Search on Facebook – events
69. Linkedin search- advanced search. Find people to connect with.
70. Direct mail campaign
71. Chamber of Commerce listing
72. Build a profile on SoundCloud
73. Create infographics.
74. Use real images instead of stock images.
75. Leverage the power of video and create amazing content.
In Conclusion
I want you to imagine a year from now, your social media accounts are lead engines. Imagine what that could mean for your business growth!
We didn’t get to talk about Twitter which means we have more to talk about!
Hiring a social media manager almost a decade ago was unheard of. All you needed was a business idea, a location, flyers, and people would come to you. Right?
Wrong.
Gone are the days when a prime location would guarantee a flying success.
These days, not having a social media presence is NOT an option. For small business owners, the struggle is real. They know they need to be on social media. They try to learn because it seems like the most cost-effective thing to do. But it takes them a few months to realize they can’t spend the time just posting on social media.
So what’s the solution? I’m sure that you’re reading this because you want to know where is the balance between outsourcing your social media and still keeping your authentic voice.
Which tasks should be kept in house and which ones should be delegated?
What’s the best way to hire a social media manager?
Well-qualified social media managers on your team can positively affect the ROI of your social media efforts. As a small business owner, you already know that you can’t grow your business without a marketing strategy in place. On the other hand, you might have other priorities and commitments, and social media management doesn’t seem to be feasible or “necessary.”
Your social media accounts are a great way to find new potential leads and turn them into customers. Did you know that 77% of consumers say they are more likely to buy from a brand they follow on social media over one they do not? Source: SproutSocial.
By utilizing social media the “right way,” you’re able to engage authentically with your audience, highlight who you are, and win over the trust of potential clients and customers.
If you do decide to hire a social media manager, it’s important that you, the business owner, have certain assets in place so that they can create valuable content for your social networks.
5 Things You Need To Delegate Social Media Marketing The Right Way
Let’s dive in and discuss what’s the “right way” to hire your social media specialist and get your social media magic done!
1. Branding Guide With Details About Your Voice And Vision
You social media manager may have an idea of what to post, but in order for the content to accurately reflect your business’ voice and style, it would be helpful to find and share with them a brand style guide (branding guide).
What’s a branding guide anyway?
A brand style guide is the primary visual DNA of your company’s branding, though it can also reference grammar, tone, word usage and point of view. Essentially, it’s a document that describes, defines and presents examples of what your brand looks like in various visual media such as print, Internet and broadcast.
To be effective it must clearly define the rules around your online presence in all channels such as websites, landing pages, mobile sites, online ads, blogs, social media channels and email communications (including email signatures!).
It’ll also help if you provide specific details about your voice and style. Find other social media profiles that you admire. Note what you like about their posts and what you don’t prefer. This is why it’s important for any business owner to get clear on their brand vision before putting out content. You want your brand to connect with your target audience in a natural and authentic way. For your social media manager, having this information upfront will allow them to do a more effective job in creating your presence and increasing brand loyalty.
Don’t expect your social media specialist to also work on your brand. That’s totally another set of skills that your digital marketing team (and you as the CEO) should handle.
On a side note -you can take it as a direct pitch 😉 – the brands we help using Forensic Digital Marketing, get the perks of having us orchestrating the full strategy, so business owners can sit down and relax!
2. Content Marketing Strategy
It’s important to know that not all social media managers are content marketing strategists. Content marketing comes before social media marketing. Content marketing is about the entire process, including the distribution platforms and how it’ll be promoted. Social media marketing is the pipeline by which your content will reach your potential clients and customers. Therefore, it’s important that you is about the entire process, including the way you distribute and promote your content.
Before hiring a social media manager, make sure you have a clear content marketing strategy, or else you will have a marketing calendar, but full of irrelevant content. As the business owner, you should lead the content marketing strategy and guide them on what to share.
Not sure where to start your content marketing strategy?
Think about the top 5 products or services you sell. What are their features and benefits? How can you communicate with future buyers of those top products to help them find you, trust in you, and buy from you? That’s the kind of content that will bring in new customers, new clients, and more revenue!
3. Promos
The majority of the social media content created will be evergreen – meaning it can be used at any time. However, make your social media manager aware of any special promotions you want to run. It could be a holiday sale, a special deal, certain events, or anything else that is time-bound. That way they can integrate it into their schedule.
If you’re not sure how much are Facebook ads, understand that there are many different types that can suit your ad budget. It can be a bit overwhelming at first, but if you utilize the Facebook ads guide, you can then plan for your budget in terms of Facebook advertising costs, lowest cost for ad type, appropriate lead ads, and of course, precisely incorporate this into your social media content calendar.
If your social media strategy includes paid advertising on Facebook and running Facebook Ad campaigns (which I hope you are!) for any of your promos, your social media manager should know the basics. But don’t expect them to be website developers, sales experts, and traffic experts. Those are completely different skills a digital marketing expert have.
Your digital marketing expert should be able to hand over to your social media manager — a Facebook account with the right activated pixel, the target Facebook audience, custom audience, and lookalike audiences. It’s very important to designate teams to specific tasks so your social media marketing team can run like a well-oiled machine.
4. Pictures Behind The Scenes
We are in an era where everything is visual. Posting images can help increase engagement and shares on Facebook. Photo posts account for 93% of the most engaging posts on Facebook. They can get 53% more likes, 104% more comments and 84% more click-throughs on links than text-based posts! Source: Buffer.
If you’re currently using stock photos on your website or throughout your social media channels, I recommend to test with your own image and you will notice that stock photos won’t get as much engagement as your own images!
These days, people want to see the “realness” behind your brand. Your clients and customers want to know as much as possible about your brand. There’s no better way to showcase your brand than with beautiful and authentic images. There will be situations where pictures will need to be posted in real-time. Make sure your social media manager is able to post pictures on the spot on your behalf!
Trust is earned when people can see what you’re all about. If you don’t have the budget to invest in a photographer, your smart-phone is the next best option, or you can barter with a local photographer in exchange for your products or services. The point is, if you want your brand to be represented in the best light possible, avoid stock photos at all costs.
5. Community Manager
There is a difference between social media and community manager. And while the two may seem like they are similar to one another, their functions are quite different. Depending on your budget and time, you either serve as the community manager or assign this role to an existing employee. Your social media manager is NOT a community manager.
What does a community manager do?
A social media manager is responsible for showcasing the brand on social media. Their role includes content creation, copy for posts, responding to comments, and much more as the brand. They will be able to interact and deal with people who have either heard of, or already have a relationship with your brand.
Community managers typically will boost awareness, and focus on engaging with those who may not have a relationship with the brand. They have great customer service skills and business development skills.
Whether you have a community manager or not depends on, once again, your time and budget. If you do not have a community manager, then remember to engage and connect with your audience, always.
Over To You
Your social media profiles don’t exist for fun and keeping up with old friends. When used effectively and with intention, they can actually grow your business. Use these helpful tips as you set out to hire your first social media manager. Onboarding fresh new talent can definitely help you accomplish your business’ goals.
If you’re looking to hire your first social media manager, then you’re in the right place. Get instant access to your branding guide template.
True story: I’m in conversations with the management of a very popular local business in Austin, about planning an event. During the process, I was asked a question that made me stop and think.
The question was, “Are you an influencer?”
My instant response was, “What do you mean?”So they said, “How did you turn yourself into an influencer? How does your influencer events work? What is your process? We want to know, because we hear a lot about influencers and see them on Instagram but we don’t really understand how does that work.”
Bingo! I then understood the nature of their question.I told them my story.
This makes me feel very old, but I had to clarify, I became a brand ambassador during a period that people didn’t even know that word meant, back in 2009-ish. I never planned to NOT work as an attorney, but my success, which was a result of recommending products, working from home and spending time with my babies, made total sense. Who wants to divorce people when you can make more money taking selfies and doing creative videos? NO ONE!
How did I become an influencer?
I clarified to them, I am not an Instagram Influencer. I consider myself a professional marketing strategist who has a background in law and business, that happens to be a natural connector and is passionate about helping people.
I know that some people think that influencer is a buzzword, but actually, influencer marketing isn’t new. What has changed is the number of people that have “influence” in this modern age of media. And now, our ability to measure the impact of influencer marketing has .increased and morphed into what we once knew as the ability to influence.
If you’ve ever been in direct sales, you probably were presented with a Get it Started Guide at some point and were asked to make a list. If you were a top recruiter, you know about the Memory Jogger.
I did direct sales for about 6 years and was a top recruiter. I used to teach a lesson on how to enroll 20 people in 30 days and it all had to do with ONLY prospecting influencers FIRST. Not family and friends. That strategy got duplicated and it was one of the ingredients of our recipe for success.
The conversation I had with these business owners inspired me to write this article. So buckle up and get ready to read my manifesto about the power of micro and local influencers these days.
So What Makes Instagram Influencers So Popular These Days?
Instagram influencer marketing is a $1.7 bn industry, and shows no signs of slowing down. Google searches for Influencer Marketing grew 1500% over 3 years, according to Influencer Marketing Hub.
And while these numbers speak for themselves, the number one question that most people ask is: what exactly is an influencer? Here are the 5 traits I consider, before calling someone an influencer.
The 3 Types of Influencers
Since Instagram Influencers is such a buzzword when you first think of social media influencers, you likely picture individuals with flawless Instagram aesthetics, and follower counts in the millions. That’s the perception of most people, however, there are different kinds of influencers that exist:
✔ Micro Influencer. The emerging stars. Most in this category are personal brands who have a significant group of followers who trust in their recommendations. They can also be called brand ambassadors. You can find them by mostly searching under popular hashtags and will notice that they have gotten some posts viral (not always organic).
✔ Local Influencers. Local influencers are leaders in their community. This concept refers to those who have an active voice in their community. They might not consider themselves as an influencer (but they are).
Despite the various types of influencers, they have things in common:
✔They are passionate about their interests, are wildly authentic, and genuinely engage with their audience.
✔They have earned the trust and respect from their audience (so they can influence them).
✔Their influence is due to their authentic connection with their audiences, developed by being a leader or expert in a particular field, and directly engage with their community.
One thing to remember: influence is directly related to leadership. Would it be more accurate to then make a difference between Instagram influencers and local leaders?
I say yes, to end with the confusion!
Local Influencers Are In High Demand
More than 65% of businesses say they find it challenging to find relevant and suitable micro-influencers or local influencers.
I believe that business owners are very open to adding influencer marketing to their marketing endeavours; but they don’t understand how it works. In some cases, they have reached out to Instagram influencers because they hear the buzzword, without a clear strategy, and don’t see the expected results.
Small Business Owners Should Implement An Influencer Marketing Strategy
Small business owners very often spend many resources in their location, operations, staff, and management, and leave their marketing for the end of their priorities, with very limited budgets. So it makes sense for them to rely on the audience from influencers to push their products or services, instead of paying for expensive Google Ads or Facebook Ads. This is Eespecially true if they are in an industry where their cost per click is prohibitive (fashion, makeup, luxury brands).
Social media influencers are a great addition to a marketing campaign, but in my opinion, this can’t be the only piece of their marketing strategy.
How To Find The Right Local Influencers (Or Leaders)
Define your goals.
Do you want to drive traffic to your location or website? Online or offline?
Some influencers have an amazing online presence, but they have no offline presence. So you need to make sure that you define your goals and if, for example, you want to host an event and want the influencer to invite people to your event, clarify if they are experienced in hosting events. This is a very particular skill set that will be needed.
Launch your influencer marketing campaign to a niche
Even when your audience is all women from 25-75 years old, you don’t want to launch an influencer marketing campaign to such a broad crowd. Be specific as much as you can so you can have the right influencers representing your campaign.
Build Your Influencer Marketing Playbook
The more equipped you are for this campaign, the more successful it will be. Define clearly what is the message that you want. For example your brand, your story, facts about your business, all of those are pieces of information that you need to provide to the influencer, so they can share a very clear message.
Create a folder where you can add all the information about your business and share with the potential influencers. Get into the habit of tracking your activities by adding codes or links, for example.
Interview Process
Your business is special. Your audience is special. If you are working with a local influencer, call them for an interview. Again, their main quality should be charismatic. But what if they are not? We see so many cases where people are amazing in pictures, but they are completely the opposite in real life.
Another factor to consider is their values. I love this definition by Paul O’Brien, one of the listed top influencers of Austin.
To recap, Instagram influencers are not necessarily Local influencers. Local influencers, not only have followers who like them and trust in them, but they go the extra mile to help others.
Are you ready to meet some of the top movers and shakers of Austin?
Meet Some Amazing Austin’s Local Influencers (Summer 2019 edition)
Since I have no choice but claiming the influencer status, I want to shout out to some powerful leaders in our Austin community and local influencers, in case you are considering adding influencer marketing to your business and need a voice for your message!
Lani Rosales Has been named in the Inman 100 Most Influential Real Estate Leaders several times, co-authored a book, co-founded BASHH and Austin Digital Jobs.
Julie Larkin Niehoff Speaker, author, and marketing coach, named one of America’s Top Small Business Influencers by Small Business Trends magazine in 2011, and founder of Local Biz Camp.
Cash Matthews Founder of The Solomon Group and creator of Money University. Cash also leads one of the top fun and productive networking events, Austin BONG.
Jennifer HutchinsTV producer, Leader in branding, networking, fundraising, pitching, and creating projects & characters that rise above the rest.
Julia McCoy, Founder of ContentHacker.com and Expresswriters.com, named by LinkedIn as top content marketing experts, keynote speaker, and an amazing friend to many.
Elisa Sepulveda A community builder who thrives on mobilizing people toward a common goal.
John P Garrett Founder of Community Impact Newspaper. He has been named Best CEO by the Austin Business Journal and a Distinguished Young Alumnus by Sam Houston State University.
David Poku Founder of ATX Food Truck Fest, a community builder, event producer, and advertising genius.
So here’s the list of local influencers of Austin, Summer 2019 edition! Check out their communities, attend to their events, and reach out! They are successful leaders, connected, and believe in giving first!
If you know a leader in Austin who is giving-first oriented and have an active community, please reach out! We want to expand the list!
We are always into planning amazing events in Austin, Texas, connecting local business owners, so follow our events page!
Using social media to promote your products or services into the world can be an amazing opportunity. It’s free and gives you the chance to connect with pretty much billions of people around the globe.
The virtual land is so powerful … it represents so many possibilities …
Wow! Right? …
… Until it’s NOT. It can be toxic, busy, overwhelming, especially if you’re a business owner.
Because there are so many social media platforms, and there is so much to do, most entrepreneurs and business owners see their social media as a heavy lifting chore or necessary evil and end up spending more time trying to learn social media marketing than marketing their business.
In my seminars, webinars, and conferences when I go and speak, I hear ALL THE TIME “where do I start?” “what do I post?” “where is the best platform to share content?”
The constant “getting ready to get ready” turns into marketing fatigue. That’s the danger zone. This brings them to do zero marketing and have zero clients. They get into desperation mode and sign up for 50 meetups a month. The fatigue is now even worse.
Are you in the danger zone or getting closer?
I’ve constructed this guide to help entrepreneurs and small business owners without unlimited marketing budgets understand the erratic world of social media.
This ultimate guide gives you my favorite social media marketing tools that you can use to boost your social media without breaking your bank account.
I’m here to simplify your game by telling you exactly which tools I use as a small business owner and strategist with over 10 years in digital marketing.
I’m dividing the amazing tools into the 4 job categories that a social media specialist performs. I chose the specialist role because it’s the most comprehensive one. I will cover “the what” which is the strategy and “the how” which are the tools.
Let’s catapult this complex world of social media marketing to take you out of the danger zone!
Chapter 1: Social Media Skills and Job Description
Social Media Marketing, What Exactly Is?
Social media marketing is a degree on its own.
In fact, if you were looking for a social media job, you will find all these different names:
Director, Social Marketing and Brand Communications, Social Media, Social Media Relations, Coordinator, Engagement Manager, Internet Marketing Coordinator, Social Media Account Executive, Social Media Analyst, Social Media Editor, Executive, Coordinator, Producer, Social Media Specialist … and Strategist.
Did the list confuse you even more? No worries. Chances are that you’re a social media specialist or a small business owner trying to learn how to market yourself. Regardless, you have to run most of the listed roles on your own, at least at the moment.
A Brief Job Description of a Social Media Specialist
Before we discuss the tools, let’s first cover the fundamentals of what the scope of a social media specialist looks like. This will help you, as a business owner, to understand the kind of skills you need and the time you need to set aside to make this work.
Here is a job brief of a Social Media Specialist from Workable.com.
We are looking for a driven Social Media Specialist to attract and interact with targeted virtual communities and networks users.
What does a Social Media Specialist do?
The goal is to gradually achieve superior customer engagement and intimacy, website traffic and revenue by strategically exploiting all aspects of the social media marketing roadmap.
Social media specialists should have a solid understanding of how each social media channel works and how to optimize content so that it is engaging on those channels. You are responsible for joining relevant conversations on behalf of the brand and “soft selling” the product by providing support to current and prospective customers.
Responsibilities
Build and execute social media strategy through competitive research, platform determination, benchmarking, messaging and audience identification
Generate, edit, publish and share daily content (original text, images, video or HTML) that builds meaningful connections and encourages community members to take action
Set up and optimize company pages within each platform to increase the visibility of company’s social content
Moderate all user-generated content in line with the moderation policy for each community
Create editorial calendars and syndication schedules
Continuously improve by capturing and analyzing the appropriate social data/metrics, insights and best practices, and then acting on the information
Collaborate with other departments (customer relations, sales etc) to manage reputation, identify key players and coordinate actions
Requirements
Proven working experience in social media marketing or as a digital media specialist
Excellent consulting, writing, editing (photo/video/text), presentation and communication skills
Demonstrable social networking experience and social analytics tools knowledge
Adequate knowledge of web design, web development, CRO and SEO
Knowledge of online marketing and good understanding of major marketing channels
Positive attitude, detail and customer oriented with good multitasking and organisational ability
Fluency in English
BS in Communications, Marketing, Business, New Media or Public Relations
You Think You Can Be A Great Social Media Specialist?
That’s exactly why you’re here!
Don’t get intimidated by the formal education the job description required. I happen to have a JD and a BBA, but, honestly, I didn’t learn any of the social media strategies from school. It was all from practice.
Social media marketing, thinking big picture, is about: communications, creative, technology, and analytical tasks. So let’s cover each task and the tools you need to become a great social media marketer.
Chapter 2: Communications
If you’re like most small business owners, you want to promote your business without breaking the bank.
And there is no better way to do that than by managing your own PR campaign internally without retaining the services of a media relations company or a full-service marketing company.
Wait! Do you mean PR as public relations? Free, like free lunch?
Exactly! If you take ownership of your own marketing communications strategy, you’ll learn how to build lasting relationships with your connections, including journalists and influencers, get free press, and acquire more customers through a sustainable organic approach.
Let me see your smile!
If you have no problem with having sales conversations with future clients, then, sharing your message on social media should not be a problem. You already know what to say so that’s a great step.
But what if you’re not that confident about what to say or how to say it?
No worries!
You’re here and that means you’re open to learning new skills. That’s a smart move. The last thing you want is burning your audience by sharing the wrong message and confusing them. A confused mind can’t make a decision.
What Is A Marketing Communications Strategy?
A Marketing communications strategy defines the entire range of activities you will do to market your products. It includes:
Your message (what is to be said),
The medium (where it is to be said), and
The target (to whom your message is reaching)
If you’re marketing yourself, knowing what to say is, perhaps, one of your struggles.
Have you taken the time to reflect about your why? (Hint: It’s not to make money.)
Think about the core purpose of your business, and then think about how you market your products or services. Are they aligned? As Sinek has found, having loyal customers is all about attracting the people who share your fundamental beliefs. Remember: People don’t buy what you do. They buy why you do it.
Yes, this might seem obvious, but it’s a critical step that is often overlooked. If you were (or are) the founder of your business, wouldn’t you want the people marketing it to know why you started it in the first place? Understanding “why” is essential to knowing how to communicate the “how” and “what”.
Life Gets Easier When You Work With Clients That Share Your Values
Keep this in mind when you’re planning your content and your target audience. You don’t want to just work with anyone. You want ideal clients.
When I say ideal clients, I mean clients with a strong connection. How strong? Well I guess it depends on your culture and values. For me, mi casa es su casa. Clients come to my home office, know my family, and are invited to special events. I consider my clients like family. But that’s maybe part of my culture. I’m Puerto Rican and we are completely open to host people. We love spending time with people! You don’t have to copy my model. But you certainly want to connect with those who hire you or buy your products.
A Great Communications Marketing Strategy Helps You Attract Ideal Clients
If you take ownership of your own marketing communications strategy, not only you will be able to build stronger relationships with your network, but you will also have the opportunity to participate directly in conversations.
When your message reflects your values, the right people will feel attracted to you. That’s attraction marketing!
If you haven’t experienced the benefits of attraction marketing, go back and review your messaging.
Are you sharing your why? Consistently?
Does your message have the right voice?
How about the vibe?
These factors are crucial when it comes to create a communications marketing strategy that let people say: “you’re talking to me”.
Best Tools To Have An Amazing Communications Marketing On Social Media (Spring 2020)
Monitor the web for interesting new content (including content about you). That’s right. You should set an alert to monitor your name and business name. Google Alerts is one of Google’s hidden gems. It’s a really powerful tool to keep track of trends, interesting topics, or anything really new that appears on the web. If you’re not using it already, here are a few creative ways to get started with it.
Google Alerts may not be one of Google’s most popular services, but it’s definitely one of the most useful.
BuzzSumo is a research and monitoring tool you also want to have. The functionality is broken down as follows: Find content that is most shared on social media channels – you can enter your own domain or another domain, and see what has been shared socially. Find influencers related to particular topics.
The best way I can describe what is content marketing?
Content marketing is a full strategy that tailors your communications to make people come to you rather than you reaching out to them.
According to the CMI, 72% of marketers say content marketing increases engagement and is a great lead generation tool. I’m certainly part of the stats.
Traditional sales methods assume that you’re exposing your product or service and the person is giving you 100% of their attention. As you know, in the digital-everything economy, that’s not the case. You’re lucky if someone gives you 60 seconds!
Even the best advertisers are having a hard time these days!
So what’s the solution? Avoid advertising? Let the consumer dictate the flow? Maybe! Of course not! That’s where content marketing comes in place.
✔ Content marketing gets three times more leads than paid search advertising.
✔ 47% of buyers viewed 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
✔ Marketers who prioritize blogging efforts are 13x more likely to see positive ROI.
Do you need to maintain a blog to be successful on social media?
✔ 66% of marketers surveyed used blogs in their social media content. (Social Media Examiner, 2019)
✔ 43% of B2B marketers say blogging is their most important type of content. (Social Marketing Industry Report, 2017)
Based on these interesting stats and my personal experience, the answer is yes. However, before getting into the blogging production, your brand needs, what I call, the core content marketing pieces so that you can activate attraction marketing and see results in less than 30 days.
I teach a method called The Ice Cream Cone to create a content marketing strategy.
You plan your core content marketing pieces thinking about the ice cream cone, as follows:
Top Funnel: think about the sprinkles of the ice cream. The more visually appealing is, the quicker you want it. This is very important because you want to activate emotions!
You want to create the I Want This Now factor!
Middle Funnel: they liked you! They are reading your content. Now it’s your duty to make them feel like they need to know what you know. Lead with your expertise, and give them what they want. However, you need to keep a balance between free tips and expert-level content. That’s why we have the bottom funnel.
Bottom Funnel: Here’s where you invite those who trust you already, to experience another level of working with you, period. No need to add flashy discounts. Those who are meant to receive your help, will be ready for you!
The Ice Cream Cone is how I teach my clients how to create content to launch their brand and attract ideal clients. Before even writing blogs, these pieces of content will be shared on their website pages and across all their social media accounts.
When you activate a great content marketing strategy and mix with a great social media marketing strategy, you will start experiencing word of mouth marketing. Your followers will turn into advocators and they will share your amazing content with their network. Those who came recommended will trust you even faster.
According to Nielsen, 92% of people trust recommendations from friends and family over any other type of advertising.
Curious about what people trust these days? Source: Nielsen.
If content writing isn’t your talent and you want to learn, find content marketing mentors and follow them on social media. My favorite is Julia McCoy. Her content marketing practices have amazing case studies, including her own agency. She built it from 0 to $4M in 7 years using just content marketing.
The key to create profitable content is easy (please write this down): give people what they want!
Be strategic with your communications and share what people want. This means:
Stop sharing viral videos.
Create a content marketing plan and structure your days.
Listen to your audience. Find out the format your audience finds most valuable. If they tell you they love your videos, then, do more videos! If they tell you they love to read your long posts, then do more long posts.
This is a great Chrome extension that will make your writing super easy. It gives you real-time spell check and ideas to communicate your message correctly.
Communications Tool #5: Headline Analyzer
Now that you know what to say, how to write it, it’s time to learn how to market it. Believe it or not, sometimes, you can get more engagement by having a compelling headline. Check this headline analyzer by the Advanced Marketing Institute.
Check for example the headline I tested for this article. I typically settle for a 41-50% since it’s considered a PRO headline. You might want to test your writing abilities and get back to me!
So, you will get all the ideas and will systematize them to only share the profitable ones, based on what your audience wants.
Communications Tool #6: SEM Rush.
For those of you who are more advanced, especially freelancers that want to implement SEO and social media strategies, SEM Rush is going to be your best tool ever!
What is SEMrush?
SEMrush is an all-in-one tool suite for improving online visibility. Our tools and reports the following digital marketing services:
If you’re not familiar with this amazing -and free- service from Google, you just discovered a gem!
It’s your e-cabinet organizer. You should have a social media marketing folder and inside, different sub-folders and documents.
Open a content marketing folder. Inside this folder, create 2 separate documents: 1 for content ideas and 1 for content production.
This will be your bank or ideas and will turn eventually into your content factory!
Why Would You Consider Outsource Your Social Media?
A social media specialist will take care of your communications and content marketing (at least at my social media management company, we take care of that), so you can just sit down and have conversations with your targeted audience. That’s a big reason to even consider this solution, so you can focus on what matters the most.
Communications Tool #8: Trello Boards
For those of you who have a team, Trello Boards are great! For example, you can have a board per social media account and add tasks related to each.
Some of the tasks, for example, that you might have for LinkedIn tasks like: change the profile picture, connect with local professionals, and edit your BIO. Each task goes inside your LinkedIn board. You can always expand or delete as much as you need to.
So that’s it for communications. Now let’s talk about visuals!
Chapter 3: Visuals
When it comes to visuals, you might think that most entrepreneurs who are promoting themselves on social media, have this part very clear.
There is a lot of confusion, in particular, about branded content.
So let’s talk about “the what” first, and then discuss the amazing tools I have for you!
A Simple Rule To Create Amazing Visuals For Your Brand
8 out of 10 entrepreneurs I consult, use their social media channels as a billboard. All they do is talk about themselves, share promotions, and ask their audience to buy from them. This is wrong.
So, if you’re considering hiring me for your marketing team and all you have been doing on social media is talking about your product, that will be the first thing we will need to change.
To show you an example of what not to do on social media, take a look at this restaurant marketing.
Does it look pretty? Yes.
Does it call your attention? Maybe.
Would you return to their page if all you see is this content, daily? Maybe not!
If you want to discover how long your users are following your content from your Facebook Business Page, a great metric is Retention. If you dig into your analytics you will see this metric and will be able to understand what people want and what makes them coming back.
Click here to learn more about User Retention and Active Users Metrics. If it’s too complex, we can always have a conversation about this. Trust me, this part is essential, especially when you’re building your brand and your audience.
How Much Do Your Visuals Really Matter?
Shoppers can make snap judgments about a product in only 90 seconds, and 90% of them will base this perception purely on color.
PowerReviews Finds that 88% of Consumers Seek Visual Content Prior to Purchase
So, yes, your brand should be well represented by both, your content in writing and your content in visuals.
You might have heard about “branded content”. This is a concept that marketers can’t seem to agree.
Some entrepreneurs and marketers think that branded content is about adding a logo, phone number, and website to a picture and with that, they refer to their social media posts as “branded posts”. They see social media as an advertising channel, and all they care is about their ROI: leads and sales.
But guess what? Today’s consumer is way more educated.
“People don’t like being sold to. It’s a discomforting experience, so the challenge for content marketers is to make sure the entertainment value of the content outweighs the discomfort.” Mike Clear, Digitas
Branded content (also known as branded entertainment) is the practice of marketing via the creation of content that is funded or outright produced by an advertiser. Source: Wikipedia.
Perhaps you’re even more confused by this definition! I don’t blame you!
The Content Marketing Institute has argued passionately for the term to be dropped, insisting it gives content marketing a bad name.
Branded content gives agencies permission to keep talking about themselves, adding a bit of storytelling to product pitches. It should not be like that! This is actually what advertising is.
Now that we know what NOT to do with your visuals, let’s then discuss what kind of visuals should be part of your strategy.
Your visuals should have the power to ignite emotions and create a perception of the experience that the individual will have. Anything that interrupts the thinking process, will create friction (which is what you don’t want).
Think about your social media platforms as the store front. When people are in front of it, how do they feel?
Do they feel inspired by your content?
Do they like what they see?
Can they perceive the experience of your product or your service?
Will they be motivated enough to explore more?
Will they have something to say about your store? Did they see something unique?
Match Your Local Market’s Expectations
I consider myself lucky by having the privilege of being in marketing and in Austin! Trust me, the “keep Austin weird is real”. We should do a contest of the weirdest sign!
I will start with 3 Austin’s “interesting” marketing messages and see how far this list goes.
Rudy’s BBQ “worst BBQ in Texas”. Seriously? Why would you have a negative slogan?
2) El Arroyo. This location is a landmark! Their funny signs give people a reason to remember them! Plus, their $1 margaritas 😀 Some content they share is quite controversial, but they are ok with it. Again, it’s Austin!
3) Of course, the Austin Motel.
Now you see why I told you I’m lucky?
Marketing to consumers living in Austin gives you flexibility and green light for your imagination.
And don’t think it’s only to certain industries. Even attorneys get their creative going! David Komie is a great example!
Creative is the most important skill you want to develop for social media.
Dare To Be Contrarian
I’m a big fan of Russell Brunson. Since you’re into digital marketing, following Russell’s content is great.
Russell says the key to stand out in the crowd digital marketing space is to be prolific.
What exactly does that mean? That means you’re not too crazy or too boring.
Let’s say you’re an attorney and want to be known as the lawyer who represents dads during custody cases. Your message should be prolific and clear enough so people can remember you. Can you think of ideas?
Check, for example, the law firm The Firm For Men. I like they named their practice with a clear name and if you check their social media, their message goes into the prolific zone. It’s fun, creative, but delivers the message.
Case Study: Junkluggers
Junkluggers wanted to increase web traffic from social media. We identified several opportunities in their messaging and visuals.
By removing promotional posts and adding messages with a high prolific index, their website traffic from social media went from 26% to 67% in less than 2 months. That’s amazing growth, by just implementing 2 strategies on their social media marketing: messaging and visuals
Best Tools To Create Visuals
Now that we talked about the power of visuals and you have a plan, let’s then talk about the how!
As of spring 2020 here is the list of tools I’ve been either personally using for my social media marketing company, or have received great references from my great connections.
I hope this list saves you some time, pain, and energy! For simplicity, I will separate visuals in 2 sub categories: graphics and photos.
Recently enhanced with amazing templates for your Instagram stories. Also, their app got revamped and it’s a lot easier to use. Check Canva App. I use this tool a lot, even to create planners to track my personal goals. Here’s an article I wrote showing examples of how I use Canva.com.
Visuals Tool #2: Over App
These days you, your team (and your clients!) can create content using intuitive visual content apps, including amazing typography and image creation tools…all on your mobile phone. Over is my go to app! I love that I can even do videos! A great plus for Over app is their bank of images.
Visuals Tool #3: Magisto
Speaking of videos, Magisto, recently acquired by Vimeo, is an amazing app to create videos quickly. I’ve tried many video apps and they have music without the copyrights and your videos get flagged. That has never happened with Magisto so that’s why I recommend it.
Placeit is a useful online tool that allows you to create logos, images, videos, and mockups. I just published my new book on social media marketing and personal writing! So… see the mockup I just created using Placeit by Envato, for free.
So your stock images are great, but selfies and great shots of you and your team are even better. For those days when you need to fix some unwanted spots, or if you’re into Instagram filters, I have some recommended apps that are great photo editors for non-photo editors.
Visuals Tool #7: Apps and websites to make great photos
For this one I surveyed my Facebook Group of professionals and entrepreneurs, since the tools I use are pretty much 2: Facetune and Afterlight. But… it’s because I have a professional photographer on my team so I’m spoiled.
But, our group of professionals gave me their favorite apps so I created this top 5 photo editing apps:
Facetune: for the days when you need to do some light brushing or reshaping
PhotoLab – favorite for their artistic photo effects and options.
Snapseed gives even more editing features like advanced cropping and removing people from images. (Much needed sometimes)
Wondering How To Create Amazing Instagram Feed In Minutes?
Visuals Tool #8: Preset filters
For those of you who have Adobe Lightroom, you can actually buy a preset filter. Check Victoria Bee’s Etsy shop! She’s amazing.
In case you’re not into visuals that much, consider this!
Visual content is like music. In a flash, it connects you to a moment, message, and experience. And like a song, images are sticky…
How About Infographics?
People following directions with text and illustrations do 323% better than people following directions without illustrations. If you’re using a consultative sales model, this means you’re all about creating amazing content, mostly educational.
Infographics can increase web traffic by up to 12%. When the images are relevant, readers spend more time looking at the images than they do reading text on the page. This means better SEO too!
You might think you need to be a pro to design amazing infographics. Actually, that’s not the case at all.
Make amazing videos with open captions for your social media
Online videos, films, TV programs, video games…captions are gradually becoming a norm and many of us are expecting to have the option to check whether it’s available and to switch it on (whether it’s available or not is another debate).
But one thing that many of us have noticed is that there are 2 types of captions: open and closed captions.
As suggested by Media Pouch, a local video production company in Austin, open captions will give your videos a tremendous advantage.
Just think about it: Visual marketing is to you what music is to an artist.
A virtual calling card. An instant association with your business, giving voice to your content.
And with visuals earning a whopping 94% more shares than any other type of content.
Chapter 4: Distribution Channels
Scheduling Content On Social Media. Should You Use A Scheduler?
I used to be a firm believer that Facebook’s algorithm penalized accounts that used third-party schedulers. This lead me to only post native uploads to the platforms, per client. (Actually, I still do it for some clients).
It is truth that Facebook uses your edge rank to determine who will see your content. However, the third-party scheduler has very little effect. If your content doesn’t add value and people don’t interact with it, it won’t reach a lot of people, no matter if it came from a native post (using Facebook) or from a third party.
Once I switched my approach from “hacking the algorithm” to “add value to my audience”, I see the distribution channels much differently.
A Simple Rule To Automate Your Social Media Content
Think about the user experience first.
The days when we would take a look at the social media insights that told you “the best hours to post” are over. If your social media strategy follows advice that’s been given to billions of users, this will put your social media marketing in the danger zone.
Save yourself some time and don’t focus on what the platforms tell you.
The best times to post have to do with the best time that works for your audience.
Let’s say for example, you are targeting moms. You need to be mindful of their schedule. When do they go online? What do they do? Are they able to join you on a 45-min Facebook live? Will they rather read silently instead of playing a video? Those questions are part of the user experience.
One of the elements that makes Google successful is their ability to purify their algorithm to make sure they give users the best experience possible. Facebook’s attempts to change their algorithm model Google’s strategy.
Many social media gurus live by algorithm hacks. I have to admit, I love hacking too. However, at the end of the day, the best social media marketing strategy is the one that provides long-term and scalable results.
For that reason, I must tell you: lead with the user experience all the time.
Do you enjoy talking to bots? If you don’t, then chances are your audience won’t enjoy either.
Do you enjoy seeing 10 selfies from your best friend in 1 day? Maybe not! So, don’t do it either.
The Golden Rule will certainly help you here!
I wrote a book a few years ago that is so relevant, today, more than ever. In The 6 Golden Rules of Social Media I gave 50 examples of how to add value to your audience and how to generate leads the classy way.
Best Posts To Share (Profitable Social Media Content)
I will remind you, one more time, your goal with social media marketing is: more ROI and spending less time. Right? That’s why you’ve been reading this for over 10 minutes now. And I will honor my promise.
Let’s discuss what are the best posts to share.
Generally speaking, your goal is to get visibility. You want people to see your social media, feel intrigued, engaged with your content, and take action.
What does “take action” look like?
Post a comment
Share your content
Click the link shared on your post
With these 3 activities in mind, let’s make sure your posts play one of the following roles:
They stir some emotions
They catch attention
They entertain people
They send some powerful message
Don’t forget about a strong headline. In addition to images and descriptions, the title can be changed, and you do not need to use the headline from your article if you do not find it attractive enough for your social fans. Always remember about the audience you are trying to reach with your posts.
I’m sure you want more ROI and less wasted time. So I’m gonna give you my list of tools I use to plan the content and share it strategically!
My Go-To Social Media Scheduling Tools
You will notice something here! The list isn’t long! Again, I’m more focused on the user experience and giving people what they want.
I will recommend you tools that will help you plan and schedule posts a month ahead, and then, tools that will balance the automation and authenticity.
Scheduling Tool #1: Social Media Marketing Planner
You’ve probably seen fancy calendars and planners. I’m actually not a big fan of those scrapbooking style tools.
I rather get things done. I guess it comes with having a strict agenda and plenty of things to do.
So, for simplicity, your calendar can be just a Word Doc or Google Doc.
Here’s the format I use to plan my social media marketing every month:
Just think about this, on a Google document, super simple.
Part 1: Theme of the month: Growth. We want to share content that inspires, educates, and invites people to consider us for their business growth needs.
Part 2: Target audience: small business owners in their first 3 years of their business.
Part 3: Events of the month: Webinar week 2 and Networking event, week 4.
Part 4: Blogs to publish during the month: Ultimate guide of social media and Instagram tutorial
Part 5: Marketing Campaigns: #MembersMonday #SummerSocial
Your Facebook Business Page comes with the option to schedule posts in the future. Now with Creator Studio, if you have multiple pages, you can post and schedule multiple pages, all from the same dashboard.
Creator Studio integrates Instagram as well. You are able to see Instagram’s content library from Facebook. We still can’t post to Instagram from Creator Studio, but I won’t be surprised if that will come soon.
Scheduling Tool #3: Facebook Group Scheduler
Facebook Groups are a great way to grow your audience on social media. It’s by far one of my favorite social media tools.
In full transparency, I use Hootsuite for my agency. I like how authenticates and I can just add team members and assign accounts. So, for agencies, I believe they are staying competitive.
For solopreneurs, Hootsuite’s new pricing model might not make sense.
You only need a scheduler like Hootsuite for your Twitter and LinkedIn, since Facebook has its own scheduler. Buffer is a good alternative.
For those of you looking for more robust social media management tools that can offer curation and content suggestions, MeetEdgar is a great option.
Scheduling Tool #5: Later | Planoly
For those of you who are 100% Instagram marketing, you then need a social media management tool that specializes on the platform.
My research narrowed to 2 options and I chose Later.com. I liked their ability to add teams so I can get my team working on our clients while still having access to the accounts. Some of my clients use Planoly.com and are very happy too.
Later and Planoly also work for Pinterest.
Scheduling Tool #6: Sprout Social
Sprout Social does what Buffer and Hootsuite do but in a more complex way, but this platform is best for small-large agencies as their analytics feature beats Hootsuite and Buffer hands down. They provide full reporting details for their premium members, breaking down each account in bits. You can even compare your competitor’s figure and see where they are and how best to tackle them. It’s that deep.
The down side with Sprout Social is the fact that it is far more expensive than Buffer and Hootsuite put together and they have no free plan, just a 30 day trial.
Sprout Social works with Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, and Instagram.
You’ve set up a Facebook page, Instagram profile, you respond to customer questions, follow fans, post important news, and thank your advocates for their support.
Beyond that, what are you doing to track and monitor these social interactions?
How do you really know if social media is working?
The answer will sound intimidating. The good news is it’s easier than you think to measure your ROI of social media efforts.
Metrics Tool #1 : Google Analytics
I know that perhaps you delegated your website project to your web guru and this is an area you don’t understand that well. Or maybe you built a website on your own. Regardless, Google Analytics is like the eyeglasses you need in order to see your digital footprints.
The CMO survey 2018 claimed only 23.3% of marketers are able to prove the impact of social media marketing quantitatively.
How can you make sure you track the results of your social media efforts? The answer is simple! By leveraging the power of Google Analytics.
Start by opening your Google analytics account and getting the code. Add the code on your website and it will start tracking for you. Sprout Social has a great step-by-step tutorial on how to use Google Analytics to track your conversions from social media by adding conversion rules. This might sound advanced so don’t panic. If at least you can install this code, you’re good!
What’s the difference between Google Analytics and Google Search Console?
Google search console = Health Report
How is your website performing
Any errors in your site
How many backlinks
For how many keywords your website and respective pages ranking for
CTR, impressions, ranking data
Any spam action has been taken
How many pages indexed
Google Analytics = Analysis Report
Where you getting traffic
Source of traffic
How many users landing on your page
User behavior – landing, activity, time spent, browser, technology details
Goals & conversions – how many visitors are converted into your customers
You need both tools, Google Analytics and Google Search Console.
Metrics Tool #3 : Facebook Analytics
For business owners, Facebook offers the Business Manager dashboard. I recommend you open a business manager account so you can have access to other tools like Analytics.
Facebook Analytics gives you data, not only from the page, but from behavior captured from your Facebook Pixel.
How the Facebook pixel works
When someone visits your website and takes an action (for example, buying something), the Facebook pixel is triggered and reports this action. This way, you’ll know when a customer took an action after seeing your Facebook ad. You’ll also be able to reach this customer again by using a custom audience. When more and more conversions happen on your website, Facebook gets better at delivering your ads to people who are more likely to take certain actions. This is called conversion optimization.
Metrics Tool #4 : Facebook Page Insights
Insights provide information about your Page’s performance, like demographic data about your audience and how people are responding to your posts. Keep in mind that you can only access data in Page Insights for the last 2 years, and demographic data, such as age, gender and location, are available in Page Insights once there is data for 100 or more people. Pages categorized as a Community Page don’t have Insights.
You can use Insights to:
Understand how people are engaging with your Page.
View metrics about your Page’s performance.
Learn which posts have the most engagement and see when your audience is on Facebook.
Keep in mind, you can change the date of the report and even export it. If you manage a Facebook Group, you can also check your insights.
Metrics Tool #5: Visibility Factor
Don’t google this you won’t find this.
I don’t want you to rely just on the numbers to measure how your social media is helping your business. From my personal experience, numbers will ever capture the conversations that happen offline, based on the stories they see online.
Pay attention to the connections you make on social media! Are you getting requests from influencers? Introductions? Referrals? You should! If you’re not seeing these kinds of results, maybe it’s time to work on your visibility factor. It’s not just about the numbers but the influence of your connections. A connection can transform your life and your business!
Metrics Tool #6: Bad Reviews Removal
Objection is a free negative reviews removal tool. They have a test designed to help you decide whether to respond to the review, to try to remove it based on its unique content and reviewer.
In Closing
My amazing friend, this is it! You made it until the end! I’ve shared it all with you. Now it’s your turn to leave me in comments what was your favorite tool!
Do you have favorite tools we should know about? Feel free to share!
SEO marketing is in high demand. There is a good chance you heard about it and have been searching for SEO definition, SEO agencies near you, etc. You’ve found me, so I want to honor your time and explain our journey with this amazing marketing strategy called Search Engine Optimization.
I’m in Austin and I’m a forensic marketer. So technically, I can say I run an Austin SEO Agency, but the name won’t be fair. So let’s say I’m not an agency. I’m a consultant, mentor, and lead a team of amazing marketers, on a project-based, to get my clients the success they deserve. That has been the best way for me to avoid paying outrageous overhead and making marketing for small business owners.
We’re Not A Traditional SEO Agency
Many SEO agencies and firms will outsource their work (your website) to third-party providers, mostly in India, at a cheap rate to do subpar optimization. We don’t.
I work with clients that have sensitive compliance requirements and I like to give my client full access to everything I do on their behalf.
You probably have heard horror SEO stories! I’ve heard them too (and see them). A client of mine hired an agency overseas for their SEO work. Months later, they started to get spam emails (hundreds) and hundreds of comments on their Facebook business page that were very inappropriate. Guess why that happened?
When I checked their traffic, I showed them that their website had been shared in sites with restrictive content. And let me tell you one more detail about this client. They were plastic surgeons so their images had sensitive content. Use your imagination and guess where their website had been shared. Did you guess?
Your SEO marketing goal isn’t just about driving website traffic. My plastic surgeon client was seeing growth. But, what kind of growth? This is why I like to clarify how lead my SEO marketing projects.
Special note: if you talk to “the best SEO agency” you should ask them to explain the process they use.
So What Is SEO (Search Engine Optimization) Anyway?
Search Engine Optimization is the process of increasing the quality and quantity of website traffic by increasing visibility of a website or a web page to users of a web search engine. SEO refers to the improvement of unpaid results and excludes the purchase of paid placement. You want this!
Let’s say you are a Divorce Attorney. One of the free SEO tools is Google search! When you type in Google “causes for divorce in Texas” notice that Google gives you suggestions. Those suggestions are called “long tail keywords” based on the questions people are asking.
How Much SEO Do You Need?
Most clients we help don’t know anything about their rank.
I’ve seen established businesses that, sadly, only have a few keywords and, therefore, don’t have any website traffic coming from Google search or any other search engines.
On the other side, I’ve seen businesses that were having success and all the sudden, their Google analytics show no traffic.
Generally speaking, every business needs to be improving search results, to make sure that they stay in business. Google Search Console is a great place to learn about your website traffic.
My Personal SEO Chaos (Don’t Make The Same Mistakes)
I’ve been in the digital marketing space for over a decade and recently my website traffic fell through the cracks. Not only we lost all the work that at some point we had 1 million hits from it, but we needed to migrate our website with over 100 pages. Painful.
Why did it happen? There was an error on the tagging codes and that created several broken links.
Every website experiences a few broken links now and then, and a few may not destroy your website’s life, but, when all your “tag” pages are landing at the error page, you’re in trouble. In case you’re not familiar with taxonomies and what a “tag” page is, you can learn more about it here.
Google is all about providing a user-friendly experience, which includes protecting users against websites with broken links.
Broken links are not the only factor that can affect your SEO.
✔️Tags
✔️Description of your content “meta description”
✔️Post type
✔️Duplicate content (cannibalization)
✔️Speed
✔️Readability
✔️Headlines
✔️And many other factors!
After I went through that nightmare I promised myself to always pay attention to Google Analytics. Now I’m there almost daily.
My before and after! From a 100% bounce rate to 35% in 3 months.
A big shout out to the amazing Julia McCoy from Expresswriters.com. I’ve learned so much from Julia. Please follow her and take her courses. She’s amazing! I recommend starting with her Write Blog.
A Poor Website Is A Poor Reflection Of Your Business (And Not Having One, Too)
Remember when websites were like a collage of links? I’ve done thousands of digital strategy assessments and the main focus is the website. Without a powerful website, there’s no point of building a social media channel. I mean, you could, but people will take you more serious if you have a professional website.
If improving your website appearance and visibility is your goal, you’re not alone.
Social media, websites, email, SEO, videos, and content are the most popular digital marketing channels and tactics with small businesses, according to recent research from The Manifest.
The report was based on data from a survey of 529 people who own or work for small businesses in the United States.
Nearly three-quarters (73%) of respondents say their business engages in social media marketing; the same proportion also use a website to market their firm.
Some 57% of small businesses engage in email marketing, 49% in SEO, 34% in video marketing, and 32% in other types of content marketing.
As a forensic digital marketing strategist, I recommend to integrate your online marketing efforts with SEO. Trust me, it’s not that complicated.
There Are 3 Main Types Of Seo That An Seo Strategist Can Focus On:
On-page SEO: This SEO focuses on the content that’s “on the page,” and how to optimize that content to help boost the website’s ranking for specific keywords.
Off-page SEO: This SEO focuses on the links that are directing to the website from elsewhere on the internet. The number of “backlinks,” and the publishers carrying those links, that link to your website helps you build trust in the eyes of a search engine. This causes your website to rank higher as a result.
Technical SEO: This SEO focuses on a website’s architecture, examining the backend of that website to see how each webpage is “technically” set up. Google cares as much about the code of a website as it does its content, making this specialty quite important to a website’s search engine ranking.
SEO Services We Provide
Like I mentioned in the beginning, I’m not a traditional SEO agency. I’m a consultant and a digital marketing nerd. All the work you see (except for correcting my grammar because I speak English with a Spanish accent and I’m bilingual) is my work.
I lead a team of SEO experts who can do the ninja work. But, before talking with the team, I create your digital marketing strategy, integrating SEO and social media marketing. The main deliverable of my strategy session is a Visibility Method. A blueprint that allows business owners to have a plan to market their business the right way.
Overview of the SEO tools we use
1- Keyword Magic Tool
We use paid keyword research tools, because it’s just a premium service we do for our clients. There are free SEO tools, but they are more like a one-time use. Having a list of keywords that feeds you opportunities it’s gold.
2- Keyword Planner
Google has a keyword planner, but the one I use it’s 100% for SEO, so it integrates with other SEO tools (and PPC too). Plus I have even more data – all in one place, which makes it easy for us to scale.
It takes me a few hours to work on a strategy and send you a keyword planner. This is great if you’re creating, for example, a sales page, or a course.
We start with a list of 100 keywords and draft content to target those, 25 keywords at a time. It takes about 2 months to index 50 words.
Our SEO system monitors performance and gives us alerts of opportunities.
3- Content Marketing Analysis
I see marketing from a holistic perspective, instead of tactical. Gone are the days of claiming “the secret to get clients from a funnel”. Consumers are educated and they rather do their research before making a commitment. Especially when it comes to hiring a professional at a high price value.
What is Content Marketing?
The Content Marketing Institute defines content marketing as a strategic marketing approach focused on the creation and distribution of content that is relevant, consistent, and valuable, which is aimed at both attracting and retaining a clearly defined audience, and ultimately driving profitable customer action.
The keywords are “valuable,” “relevant,” and “consistent.”
Content marketing isn’t a tactic you do once and it’s done. Instead, it’s a process that requires a strategy and a series of repeatable steps to build results over time.
The content you create – whether for blogs, social media, etc. – needs to have relevance, value, and consistency to win readers.
Why Most Marketers Prefer Content Marketing?
Another great thing about content marketing is that people prefer it over paid advertising.
A study from WP Engine found that 66% of consumers preferred to read content directly from their favorite brands. In contrast, one in five people use ad blockers all the time, every day, according to a Kantar Media study.
Ads are annoying. Content is useful.
First Steps To A Successful Content Marketing Strategy
We are here to learn about SEO so I won’t get too technical about content marketing. Most of my clients understand their duty to create amazing content. However, they don’t know if their ideas are amazing enough and they don’t have access to professional marketing tools.
Hubspot has a blog idea generator that brings many creative options. I use it sometimes, when I’m trying to get inspiration for captions or headlines. But for my SEO projects, our SEO software comes with their own idea generator tool.
The bottom line: we do our social media management using SEO practices, so you share content that actually adds value to your community. It’s the key to stand out from the crowd.
4- SEO Writing Assistant
The SEO writing assistant is honestly my favorite. I know exactly what I need to say to rank the article, while I’m writing. For example, to write this article, my target keyword amount was 1,958. This means that I need to write over that number if I want to have a shot to get visible. I also need to keep a readability score under 62 so this helps me to use plain language (great because I could get technical). Then the writing assistant uses the keywords suggested by the writing templates and adds suggestions and examples.
For those who are writers, having this framework will help tremendously.
What If You’re Not A Writer?
You can outsource that to us! I have access to amazing writers with amazing writing packages that will make your life very easy! A professional blog post can be less than a $100.
Need me to produce great content for you? Schedule a call with me to discuss your writing needs.
Need me to produce great content for you? Schedule a call with me to discuss your writing needs.
5- Marketing Calendar
The tools discussed above have been more related to content marketing using SEO best practices. Our SEO project will have on-page SEO and this means optimizing (SEOing) your content that has been published already.
We take those SEO tasks with the ideas to produce in the future and create a calendar with the actionable steps.
6- On Page SEO Tracker
Like I mentioned above, on-Page SEO means optimizing (SEOing) your content that has been published already. In some cases, we get clients who consult us before building their website (this is a great idea) so they don’t waste time.
Our software has a tracker and makes the on-page SEO work doable. It can even be combined with Trello.
You’re probably wondering who does this work? It depends. I don’t have a one-size-fits-all. Typically, big organizations have a marketing team that can handle this work. Once I share the findings and filter them (not all the findings are relevant), their team execute.
If they don’t have a marketing team, we filter the actionable steps and create a project. I have SEO experts on my team who can execute these “monkey work”. I call this “monkey work” because it’s not high-level strategy. It’s more about meta tags, fixing headlines, paragraphs, etc.
So that’s pretty much the foundation of SEO. Obviously, it’s not a one-step deal. It requires love and care! So let’s discuss how does this look.
7- Organic Traffic Insights
Monitor your traffic and look for trends and opportunities. This is for sure high-level strategy. Typically my clients like me to “call the shots”. And I have to say, I’m very assertive in predicting the readers behavior.
8- Lead Generation Optimizer
Once we have healthy keywords and healthy traffic it’s time for a change! What? Starting again?
Yes.
Your website traffic will be analyzed using complex tools to decode your path to turn your web visitors into clients. I’m at that level with 2 organizations and it is amazing. I must confess, I’m jealous! I wish I had taken SEO more seriously before! Don’t you?
At lead generation optimization means landing pages and call to actions. But for now, don’t worry about it! Let’s concentrate on the fundamentals!
9- Social Media Strategy And Implementation
You probably thought that I’m a social media manager, ha!
No.
It’s way more than that.
I hope you can see it! It’s more of a big-picture strategy. It’s like me going for a trial, without having to deal with the judicial system! It’s heaven to me! Digesting the facts, formulating a theory to present my winning formula, and winning!
We have an amazing team of marketing experts who can take care of your social marketing heavy lifting.
10- Accountability
I won’t be surprised if by now you’re overwhelmed just by reading this. I don’t blame you. Here is the reality: leave this work in the hands of people who truly LOVE doing this nerdy work. Lead your marketing activities like a CEO, instead of doing everything yourself.
I do all of this myself because this is therapy (and I don’t watch tv!).
What results can you expect?
The graphic below is my website- after the massive fail. I needed to start ALL OVER. Look how we are quickly moving up, all with relevant keywords to attract the right traffic. For some industries, 400 keywords are ok to win their competitors. My industry is highly competitive, so I need to work a bit more strategically.
Notice how:
✔️ SEO has a compound effect. It means that once you dominate a set of keywords and take the next set of keywords, all the traffic gets combined and this creates momentum, unlike other online marketing methods that, if you stop them, they stop working. For example, Google Ads or Facebook Ads. If I stop the ad, then the traffic stops.
✔️ SEO, in my opinion, it’s like creating a passive income, by having a sales force called “Google searches” working for you, driving people your way.
How do we get things done:
Onboarding
✔️Once you’re an active client, we schedule your VIP Session. This is a 4-hr session and can be done in a day or in 2 separate meetings.
✔️We get familiar with your business model and draft a strategy to grow your business.
✔️We use several tools to help our clients to have a clear vision of how they want to grow their business and what are the strategic key steps. Very often, we find that business owners are spending a lot of time in non-productive activities. We analyze all aspects of your business.
Are you a lawyer, either solo practitioner, freelancer, or perhaps you’re in charge of marketing a law firm and need some out-of-the-box strategies? You got it!
I’m a recovered attorney and now a forensic digital marketer and UX consultant. Not sure what that means? Well, I do the kind of work you would do in preparation to win a trial. I find the gaps between your message and your target audience. And I do it using data and science. This isn’t about “hope marketing”. That doesn’t work. Social media marketing for law firms is a passion!
In full disclosure: when I built my law firm, there were no social networks. I had to rely on word of mouth and referrals, which we can say is “hope marketing”. But you don’t have to do it! We have data and science.
Hope Marketing Won’t Pay Your Bills
You hear other attorneys saying they only take clients by referrals and you’re wondering how can you get to that level. I don’t blame you. When I started, I was exactly at this place. I remember the days when I would just go to court just to watch other attorneys litigate. In retrospect, I was lucky I found a friend who connected me with a builder who later became my only client. But it didn’t happen overnight and I certainly don’t recommend that you hope to find a friend that can introduce you to a great lead. Hope marketing won’t pay your bills.
I call hope marketing when you’re kind of hoping that future clients see your phone number somewhere where you left your business card. You dream with the idea of winning a great case and get all the chasing you so you can build your name (I did some of that). That could happen; but there’s no need to hope when we have so many opportunities to get clients from digital marketing.
Essentials In Digital Marketing For Lawyers
I’m sure you’ve considered boosting your social media marketing, amongst other digital marketing tactics like paid search (Google Adwords, BING, YELP), SEO, buying leads, web design, etc.
The number of options can be overwhelming. The last thing you want, after going to law school and all the hard work to pass the bar is to learn how to market. So, unless you have a background in business and marketing (like my case), you will be open to understanding big-picture strategies, as long as they are relevant, precise, and effective.
Search Engine Optimization (SEO)
Perhaps you already know this. Search engine optimization is focused on improving your site in order to increase your organic search engine rankings. SEO primarily revolves around placing keywords strategically throughout the site, link building, establishing site authority and using meta data that’s crawlable by Google.
In theory, if you add keywords to your website, Google then grabs your content and displays to potential clients when they are searching for those keywords. Unfortunately, that’s far from truth.
SEO these days involves a series of complex strategies and law firms and attorneys looking for a marketing plan to drive more clients need to be aware of. One keyword isn’t going to take you to the next level. This is why I recommend my law firm clients to start with a list of 25 long tail keywords which is a combination of at least 4 keywords.
Let’s say, for example, you are a divorce attorney and want to attract clients who are looking to hire a lawyer and use Google search. Based on this preliminary research, you can benefit from using a content marketing strategy featuring keywords like “divorce attorney”, “divorce attorney near me”, “divorce attorney ___ (your city)”.
Your goal is to reach some visibility using those keywords, provided that they are showing an SEO score that represents potential. This is how I get to design a keyword plan and strategize which content to produce, based on the combination of keywords that most likely will give us the fastest path to visibility.
We don’t need to “hope” anymore. There are search engine marketing tools that allow us to craft your legal marketing campaign so that your name comes up in the search results.
I spend hours looking at data in order to craft a digital marketing strategy. Something that is totally needed when it comes to working in a legal social media marketing plan, or any other marketing plan for your industry. Make no mistake, your industry is competitive and moves fast. When people need a lawyer, they have no time to waste.
I personally use SEMRush for search engine optimization and content marketing intelligence. But that’s not the only one. Google Keyword Planner is another great tool. Backlinko has a great tutorial on how to use this tool. You should check it out.
So now I can officially say, welcome to my world! What I love to do is using forensic marketing (data, patterns, research) to find real opportunities.
Now that you have access to some intelligence on how to get more visibility, the next component of your digital marketing plan is brand awareness.
Why Is Brand Awareness Important For Lawyers?
As a lawyer, you may not have thought much about the importance of branding. You may believe that the quality of your work will speak for itself and that you will become well-known simply by practicing good law. That may have been the case a generation ago, but not anymore.
With hundreds of competent lawyers out there all doing the same thing, what makes you and your firm so different? What makes you stand out from the crowd? What is it about your firm and the service you provide that compels clients to choose you instead of some other firm? The answers to those questions are part of the message that is needed to market to your audience, as part of the brand awareness campaign.
Make sure your website has a compelling message:
✔️Develop the about me page and showcase the values of your firm.
✔️Produce a rich blog.
✔️Pro tip: produce a Youtube channel with potential Q&A. Leverage social media and Facebook ads to share your content with a highly targeted audience.
The American Bar Association’s Legal Technology Survey Report on the use of technology in the legal profession of 2018 explains why branding is important for lawyers.
With an increasing number of lawyers available for clients to choose from, lawyers need to differentiate themselves, which often requires establishing their expertise in a particular niche field, an area of practice or industry, or with a particular audience or group of people.
How Can Lawyers and Law Firms Create Brand Awareness?
Our keyword search took us to the Law Firm Cordell & Cordell. They have an amazing SEO plan, but also a great Facebook marketing plan in place. If you check their page, you will notice how their name is Cordell & Cordell- A Domestic Litigation Firm. This is great for brand awareness because in 2 seconds you can identify what they do.
Reviews are great for brand awareness. I will say, they help also for consideration. If the individual is actively searching for a lawyer and checks 2 websites and 2 social media accounts, the one with stronger reviews will win.
A recent survey by Podium suggests that 93% say online reviews do impact their purchasing decisions. A great strategy to maximize those reviews is to share them on your social media channels.
Your brand awareness should happen at the website level, with great content, then sharing it via social media. The more you “humanize” your brand, the more approachable you will be.
As an attorney, I understand the necessity of maintaining an ethically-sound Web Presence and take care of your reputation. Those are 2 non-negotiable steps of any law firm marketing plan.
How Are Lawyers Using Social Media Marketing?
It’s almost 2020. The ABA has finally acknowledged the place of Social Media in the legal world. The ABA’s House of Delegates — its governing body — considered the recommendations of the ABA Commission on Ethics 20/20, which has proposed revisions to the Model Rules of Professional Conduct to address changes in technology.
Notice how they are encouraging lawyers to showcase their expertise with a variety of content.
Lawyers who simply state on their websites that they have expertise or knowledge in a specific area are going to be at a disadvantage when compared to attorneys who demonstrate that expertise with articles, video, and other content that shows that they are not only proficient in their area of the law, but that they understand the issues their clients face on a daily basis.
From the same report, we have some interesting social media for lawyers stats:
✔️ Use of Facebook is up slightly to 63% this year after being between 56-58% in the previous three years.
✔️ Twitter use among firms is still uncommon; only 14% of respondents reported that their firms maintained a presence on Twitter.
✔️ Use of Martindale also dropped from 41% in 2016 to 31% in 2018.
✔️ LinkedIn use by law firms has been declining since 2015 when 93% of lawyers reported the use of LinkedIn. Even so, firm use of LinkedIn still exceeds every other platform.
✔️ Use of social media by individual lawyers for professional purposes remains strong, with 79% of respondents reporting that they use one or more social networks for professional purposes.
✔️ 82% of all individual lawyers are using LinkedIn themselves for professional purposes, as compared to 47% on Facebook, 27% on Avvo, and far fewer on the other platforms surveyed.
Lawyers Are Not Taking Full Advantage Of Digital Marketing
A healthy keyword planner and a strong social media presence should help you grow your law practice; especially if you combine organic (free) strategies with paid traffic strategies. Try to avoid full delegation and automation during the early stages of your practice. Prioritize your duty to humanize your brand, so that your audience can relate more.
ABA’s 2018 Legal Technology Survey Report shows that lawyers are not taking advantage of analytics or reports to determine the effectiveness of their marketing initiatives.
You won’t be part of those stats! Your digital marketing strategy will also have tracking and monitoring, so you can predict results.
You will be surprised by how much, even a simple change on your website design, can help you get more clients from your digital marketing efforts.
Our Forensic Marketing For Lawyers
If you’re interested in increasing your client base or enhancing your presence in the community, take a step further and request a complimentary Marketing Assessment.
We will create a comprehensive Social Media strategy tailored to fit your practice’s needs.
Every small business should be on Facebook. With more than 2.27 billion monthly users, small businesses can use Facebook in a number of ways to promote services, increase customer support and boost recognition.
The question is not about if your business should be on Facebook. It’s more about how can your business get visibility on Facebook.
Facebook has suffered multiple changes and updates. I don’t want you to panic, but certainly, it’s important for you to know about Facebook’s latest algorithm change, how does that look, and how what Facebook marketing strategies you should be focusing on.
Facebook’s Algorithm Changes Again
Facebook likes to throw a few curveballs our way, and they’re changing the algorithm once again to keep us on our toes (and, you know, improve the whole user experience and all that).
They just announced two different ranking updates to affect what people are seeing in their feeds.
The first prioritizes friends that the individual user is most likely to want to hear from (based on past engagement) and the second focuses on increasing visibility to the links that the user might find most valuable.
While having more relevant content showing up in users’ feeds sounds like a dream, Facebook’s past algorithms haven’t always been friendly to Pages with their declining organic reach.
Facebook has claimed, however, that these algorithm updates are not designed to impact Pages; they’ve also hinted that if you’re sharing links that your audience will find valuable, it may even help you.
You Can See The Algorithm In Effect
Let’s do this test. Open your Facebook App, and go to your feeds. I’ve done this with my clients and we all have noticed the same. Your top posts are from friends who have active conversations on messenger with you. If you scroll, you won’t noticed updates from business pages or from ads, until you scroll a few times.
This is not the only change Facebook has made to its algorithm this year, which takes us as marketing strategists to put all the dots together in order to come up with a game plan that considers all the changes as a whole.
Facebook wants to reward video creators who produce quality content for viewers. Over the coming months, many updates will be implemented to distribute more original videos that engage viewers beyond the one-minute mark, particularly videos longer than 3 minutes. Videos that receive repeat viewings will also see a boost in News Feed distribution. Conversely, videos that do not offer much originality or value will see demoted distribution as well as videos and Pages that promote sharing schemes.
Facebook Marketing Strategy
Research from Facebook shows that groups are seeing a lot more engagement than Pages. This is because Facebook groups enable members to start conversations more seamlessly than a Facebook Page does, while it’s also part of the broader shift away from public sharing to discussions in more enclosed, private space.
Now I know what you’re thinking: “Jessica, you’re really asking me to put another social community on my plate?”
Yes I am, but only if it makes sense for your business (if you will be generating revenue), and/or if you have the time to maintain a Facebook Group.
Open A Facebook Group Using Your Business Page
Facebook wants us to have real interactions with their users. Since Facebook Business Pages are limited in the interactions they can have with users, Facebook Business Groups make the most sense.
Recent research shows there is a gap between what businesses believe trust means and what it means for consumers. So it’s important for businesses to communicate effectively with their audiences, whether through news articles, events, blogs, social media platforms or other vehicles.
Your best bet in building relationships with your audience in the social media landscape is to build relationships and a sense of community.
This, of course, can be a little difficult via post threads and comments, and building a community on your own website can take tech (and money) that you may not have access to.
Facebook groups enable you to build a sense of community, which is great to get your message in front of potential customers and get them to trust you.
To start, go to your Page settings, make sure your template has groups enabled, and then create a Facebook Group. To do that, click “Create Group”. If you have a Facebook Group already, you will be able to “Link Your Group”.
Once your Business Page claims your group as a Business Facebook Group, it will appear in your Business Page and your page will be able to interact on that group. Therefore, you don’t need to use your personal profile to engage with your community.
Your team can help you manage your group without the hazard of using a personal Facebook profile. Check your Business Page settings, go to Groups, and you will be able to manage roles, add other group owners, remove them, etc.
Advertise Your Facebook Business Group
If you want to build a community, I recommend adding your Facebook Business Group as a call to action. This is a new feature so you might have to edit your current call to action.
By changing your Business Page’s button to “visit group”, your call to action will allow you to convert your Facebook Page users and potential customers to Facebook Group users. And this is where your whole new strategy will start!
You might want to activate ads to get more users; but that’s only if you have a clear content marketing and a conversion plan for those users. If you do, then, go ahead and promote your page, just to get people to like your page, which will take them to your main call to action (visit group).
Another way to use Facebook Ads to get more people visiting and joining your group is by sharing your group as a post, and place an ad to promote the post. Do not use boost. Make sure you are using the more advanced features to target the right people.
How Many Business Groups You Can Have?
A Facebook Business Page has the ability to start a group or add a group. You can add multiple groups, but that’s not really the question. The question is, how many groups, strategically, your business will be able to grow, nurture, and achieve conversions?
My advice for any social media marketing tactic: simplicity is the key. You might want to have a group for your paid clients, and a group where you are leading a community of like-minded individuals.
What if I am a realtor, insurance agent, but I don’t own my brand?
If you don’t own your brand, meaning, you represent a corporate brand, remember that you still can take advantage of building your personal brand.
You can open a Facebook Business Page and a Facebook Business Group too. Focus more on local interests, so you can build a broader audience. Then, use content marketing to build trust. Lead your Facebook Group with the same principles you would lead a networking group. Relationships should come first.
Top 3 Activities To Drive Conversions
Remember, a Facebook Business Group is not a point of sales. It’s a point where you build trust.
To build trust and ignite people’s interest in your business, I recommend these top 3 activities:
One: Host events for your group.
These events can be online, using the watch party feature. I wish I had this feature when I was building my direct sales business
Two: Start a poll.
The best way to know who are your top engaged users, is by launching a poll. You will be able to see them and interact with them.
Three: Welcome new members post.
I wait until we accumulate up to 50 people and then launch the welcome post. On that post, customize the message and add, for example, add a link to your upcoming event.
I’m telling you all my secrets here! I hope you’re taking great notes!
Facebook Marketing Has A Lot To Offer For Small Business Owners
If you’re interested in generating a powerful Facebook Marketing Strategy that can help your business boosting awareness and conversions, I would love to strategize with you!
I just shared a step-by-step tutorial for my clients on how to incorporate Facebook Business Group to drive more website traffic to their landing pages, webinars, events, etc.
Now that you know all about Facebook Groups, it’s your turn to implement! Let me know if you have any questions.
You don’t always need 10,000 Instagram followers to enable the “SwipeUp” feature on Instagram. You are reading this right.
Read until the end, since we are sharing with you a step-by-step to share your story, get more followers, and boost your Instagram content with the swipe-up feature. Also, since Instagram added a new feature where you can also get followers and boost your engagement, I’ve added a video about Instagram Reels for you!
Instagram stories are a great way to turn your followers into leads and clients. If you are planning to revamp your social media marketing in 2021, then plan to use Instagram Stories more!
Once you’re up to level up your Instagram Stories, you will realize the power of the Swipe Up. This is your “call to action”. The swipe up feature allows marketers to nurture and convert leads. While currently this feature is only available to accounts that hit over 10,000 followers, there are ways to have the Swipe Up feature, even without hitting your 10,000 benchmark.
Swipe Up Instagram 2021
The Instagram Story Link or Swipe Up link is a feature that allows the user to add a link when he/she swipes up as the name suggest. This link is usually one that redirects to the users’ website, a blog, a Youtube video to increase views or any external site that you may want to drive traffic to.
If you have or are running a business account that is verified or you have 10 000 followers or more, the “Swipe-up” link to your story is usually available.
This is a game changer for driving traffic to your website, a sale you may have going on, a freebie or simply to drive traffic to your website. The ‘Swipe-Up’ feature is perfect for businesses and influencers looking to share new content or products for their followers to easily have access to!
The feature also eliminates the need to add the infamous “link in bio” call to action to all your posts.
There are two “Swipe Up” link options:
Swipe On Option 1: The IG Story Swipe- Up Link
Swipe On Option 2: The IGTV Swipe- Up Link
How to Add a ‘Swipe-Up’ Link to Your Instagram Story (10, 000 Followers or Verified Accounts Only)
Go to your main Instagram feed, and tap the camera icon in the top left corner to create an Instagram Story.
Create your Instagram Story by taking a photo, Boomerang, or video. You can also swipe up to access your library of previously captured content.
Tap on the chain link icon and enter your URL. (Remember, you can only add links if you’re a verified user or an Instagram business account with over 10K followers) *Planoly Tip: Any user can add an IGTV video link to an Instagram Story image.
Always add a call to action on your Instagram Story with links, so that your followers will know to swipe-up!
What If I Don’t Have 10,000 Instagram Followers?
If you don’t have a verified account or 10,000 followers, you can use IGTV to activate the swipe-up feature.
In order to do so, you must switch to a business account if you don’t already have one.
Create a video using IGTV. You can add a link in the description of the video and that’s the way to get leads, for example.
Go to your main Instagram feed, and tap the camera icon in the top left corner to create an Instagram Story.
Create your Instagram Story by taking a photo, Boomerang, or video. You can also swipe up to access your library of previously captured content.
Tap on the chain link icon and add “call to action”. Your IGTV library will come up, so you will select the video related to the story you’re featuring.
More Ways To Activate Swipe Up Without 10,000 Followers:
Create story ads from Ads Manager.
Even if it’s $10, you can build ads from your Ads Manager so your stories can get the swipe up feature.
How to create a stories ad from Ads Manager to activate swipe up?
Use this Instagram Ads tip to just activate your swipe up for specific stories that you would like to feature. Remember, you can do this just with a $10 budget. If you want to activate a new Instagram Ads strategy, read this article next.
Add an image to go with your item. Images must be at least 500 x 500 pixels.
Enter a name, description and other details for your item. Some information is required and some is optional. We recommend that you enter as much information as possible to enhance the quality of your catalog and help customers discover your items later.
Connecting With A Partner Account Who Has The 10,000 Followers
You might want to be creative here! So… find a marketing partner who can share the link on your behalf.
IGTV is the way to add multiple links if you don’t have your 10,000 followers. They all will turn clickable. Make sure you turn your IGTV creativity on and start taking advantage of this amazing feature.
My name is Jessica Campos, JD, the attorney-turned-into-forensic-marketer. I’ve been launching brands in social media since 2012. Almost $20,000,000 in tracked revenue has been generated through my proven online marketing strategies, growing my own personal brand to over 50,000 nurtured connections, and teaching 1000s of students in my online courses and programs.
I teach how to market for greatness.
How to monetize.
I’m an author.
I’m a strategist.
I’m here at MarketingForGreatness.com with a team of amazing people.
Where is my accent from? Puerto Rico! I moved to the US at age 30. It has taken me all this time to get comfortable writing and making videos in my second language. Thank goodness for my team of editors!
I’m up to fulfilling my life purpose and calling of helping people claim their voice.
Where do I live? I currently live in the beautiful city of Austin, Texas!
Wondering how to add a link to Instagram Story (or what in the world an Instagram Story is)?
This article will be your life savior!
The short and simple definition: it’s a near perfect match to the increasingly popular Snapchat stories function. Let me guess… you’re not the master Snapchat user. (No wonder you don’t know what’s a story and why stories are so popular.)
Stories only last for 24 hours and if you want to keep them, you can use stories highlights. Those are the fancy circles that you see in some profiles. You can use them to save your Instagram story links as collections.
Where is everything?
If your profile is public, so are your stories, so if the people you follow have public profiles then that means their story will appear on top of your Instagram feed in little circles. It looks pretty, FYI.
How do I post my own Instagram story?
From your home menu, you will see a camera icon at the top. Once you do it, then a screen that activates your camera. Don’t worry, it’s not automatic so don’t panic.
You can write over your story, make the writing different colors and even go wild and make it look like lights. Fancy.
Be prepared to spend time learning the many new features, as Instagram keeps adding more creative gadgets (similar to what Snapchat does).
How can I view my own story?
The same way you would look at someone else, go onto your profile and click on your profile picture to see your own.
You sure can – go onto your Instagram account settings and click ‘story settings,’ then ‘hide story from.’ The rest is pretty self-explanatory, just write the name of the person you want to hide your stories from.
Can I save my stories?
Of course, you can. Press the three little dots on the right-hand bottom corner, then click ‘save photo.’ You can also share it to your Instagram feed if you want. Fancy!
Can I see how many people have watched it?
Again, yes. When watching your own story, at the bottom a number will appear with the number of views it’s had. You can swipe this up to see what people have watched. Sneaky!
How To Add A Link To Instagram Story? How to add swipe up?
If you have over 10,000 followers or if you have a verified account, you have an incredibly effective tool at your disposal — the swipe up link. This will allow you to add a clickable link on every story, which is great because Instagram only allows you to share one link (in your bio).
I saved this quick tutorial so you can see directly from the app how to add a picture or video, how to add your link, where are the features to tag or mention other brands, and there is a bonus at the end!
How do I create branded Instagram Stories template using Over? (Watch this video)
I feel like a broken record! You need to get your 10,000 Instagram followers as soon as possible. Of course, if you’re a business profile.
Using the swipe up feature (once you have your 10,000 followers) you can add a call to action to every story. Your instagram strategy will allow you to get more leads and unique sales opportunities.
Stories are a great fit to post exciting content regarding a new product, service, or event, and then encourage those users to “swipe up for details.” You can link a blog post or videos from your Youtube channel.
Note: if you just got your 10,000 followers and click the link icon and nothing happens, please note that it might take a couple of hours to get active.
Instagram Stories Polls
If you’re looking to engage with your audience and grab their attention, Instagram polling features are a great way to stop your followers from swiping past your story!
Instagram Stories polls not only grab your audience’s attention, but they also create an opportunity to hear directly from your followers and customers.
Use Instagram Stories Polls to Learn More About Your Audience
One of the easiest ways to get to know your followers (and get them talking) is to simply start asking questions!
Your poll results will reveal your followers’ likes, dislikes and what they’d like to see more of from your account.
I get it. You want to hire a social media manager. You Google “best social media manager near me” and start reading the top pages and see “social media marketing consultant”.
Why? What is the difference?
You can’t really tell the difference. They all look the same: social media marketing.
You then follow their social channels and all looks the same. All the candidates have a good social media presence to you.
You check their social media services but you still can’t tell exactly if a social media manager will remove your current pains about social media.
✔️Will they create your social media strategy or that is something separate?
✔️How about nurturing your audience and guide you to build a lead generation system?
✔️Will they craft blog posts for your website? Will they help you rank in Google?
✔️Can they take all your ideas and turn them into beautiful pieces of marketing?
✔️What about graphic design? Will they make your brand look like you?
✔️What kind of work do they expect from you? Will they manage your tasks or will they take over the entire role?
✔️How about payment terms? Do you pay hourly or fixed? How many posts are included on their fee?
This isn’t exactly the kind of job you enjoy as an entrepreneur. I’m sure that you rather be at the beach right now, than comparing the different social media marketing jobs, descriptions, social media marketing or social media strategist.
The struggle is real.
Let me simplify this for you.
Hierarchystructure.com added this infographic that covers the different roles within social media marketing.
Perhaps you see the infographic and think “that’s for big companies with big budgets”. You are totally right. However, I will argue with you with your outsourcing strategy.
If you are into growing your business, on a limited budget, you will be better outsourcing other things, but social media management.
I know this will sound like the opposite of what I should tell you since I run a social media marketing agency in Austin, but let me clarify my 7 reasons why!
Reason Number 1: A social media manager is not equipped to develop your overall branding, messaging, and communication strategy.
If you’re looking to get paid clients from your social media marketing efforts, having a social media manager that posts 7-15 times on your behalf won’t be effective. You want to have access to an expert who can lead your marketing strategy and find ways to position your brand on top of your competitor, not limited to social media marketing.
Reason Number 2: Social media managers know very little about social media optimization
Most marketers are familiar with Search Engine Optimization (SEO) on some level. Using the reach of search engines like Google or Bing to fuel your marketing campaign has been a successful strategy for years. But as social media grows as one of the top platforms to reach consumers, new approaches to digital marketing have emerged. One of the top strategies used by businesses looking to maximize their reach online is Social Media Optimization (SMO).
Social Media Optimization is essentially using social media as a catalyst to grow your company’s online presence. Where some companies tend to just set up a profile on Instagram, Facebook or Twitter to be where their customers are, SMO is about strategically creating, building and maximizing your social media plan to connect with your target audience. SMO allows you to:
Strengthen your brand
Generate leads
Get more visibility online
Connect with your audience
The typical scope of a social media manager includes ideas of copy, information about the target market, and guidance for visuals. Conversions will be defined as more likes and followers, but you won’t be able to use social media as a catalyst to grow your company because they don’t have the skills required to grow a brand and monetize it.
If you want to grow your business, you need social media optimization services.
Reason Number 3: You need to get visible in front of your targeted community. You need a community manager more than a social media manager.
A community manager helps build, grow and manage a company’s or brand’s online communities. Using analytics tools to monitor social media outlets, online forums and blogs, a community manager finds out what people are saying about a company or brand. A community manager also engages with customers and fans, and uses social media and live events to help increase brand loyalty.
Reason Number 4: You need to leverage all forms of online marketing. Not only social media marketing.
If you like Shark Tank, let me remind you of the episode of The Cut Buddy. The entrepreneur, Joshua Esnard, invented the first beard and haircut template to be patented and the only one with multiple curves. With no formal entrepreneurship experience, using Youtube influencers, sold over 100,000 units. He had 1 video going viral with over 11 million views. The sharks asked him but why you need us? He said, “I am an inventor, not an entrepreneur and I need light.”
No matter how successful we think we are, part of the success formula is to have a growth mindset. You want to be challenged.
Reason Number 5: You better hire a ninja if they will play on Facebook and Instagram ads with your money
Advertising on social media is not PPC. It’s not even traditional advertising. If you followed any of my Facebook ads training, I explain the 9 step process to master Facebook Ads. It is not something you want to delegate to someone who has no experience. Trust me here. One mistake can cost you a fortune.
I have seen a fair amount of ad accounts with a 5 x in ad spent, simply because they selected the wrong campaign objective.
Social media managers might know the basics of promoting a post. But they don’t do advertising full time as social media advertiser does.
Reason Number 6: A social media manager is not your brand ambassador
If you’re not familiar with the idea, a brand ambassador is a person who’s tried your product or service and loves it — loves it enough to say amazing things about it. Not a paid endorser. While those can be helpful as well, they usually lack the authenticity of a brand ambassador, who is not paid and has either expertise in your marketplace or an “every person” appeal. Or both.
When you start your business, all you need is visibility. Three main things will take you there:
✔️Paid media
✔️Social media
✔️Public relations (outreach marketing).
A great brand ambassador can cut through the clutter and say things about your company and brand with more credibility than you can because they won’t make money as a result. That credibility is important for both direct outreach such as advertising and indirect such as pitching stories to reporters. Having a good band ambassador, or several of them, is a powerful and versatile tool to raise your company or product awareness.
We kind of left the best for the end!
Reason Number 7: You need a marketing professional that specializes in the full cycle of inbound marketing
Inbound marketing, in simple terms, is a comprehensive strategy that uses as many channels as possible to attract ideal clients and nurture them via funnels.
It has been increasing, consistently, for over a decade now.
Every expert in inbound marketing is an expert in social media marketing, but not every social media marketing expert is an inbound marketing ninja.
You probably need:
✔️A full B2B marketing strategy
✔️SEO services
✔️Event marketing
✔️Influencer marketing
✔️Facebook marketing
✔️Instagram marketing
✔️Linkedin marketing
✔️Video marketing
✔️Content marketing
✔️ Advertising
… and a director to lead all of those projects and turn them into revenue.
So, do you see now why I said you don’t need a social media manager?
More than 50% of small business owners won’t make their dreams come true. My mission is to fight that number. I started Marketing For Greatness, a social media marketing company in Austin. Discover what makes us unique!
What is Forensic Marketing?
Experience it now! Complete this assessment and we will schedule a demo so you can discover your missing opportunities. Forensic marketing is all about ROI and monetization. Yes, I’m an inbound marketing nerd too!
Did you know your follower count has an impact on your visitors’ first impression of you?
They say you should not judge a book by its cover; but it’s inevitable. The number of followers displayed on your profile can either make people want to follow you or turn them off completely.
Most people think that posting more content will result in more followers. Not quite! Followers don’t fall from the sky. Social media has nothing to do with Google search or any search.
If you want people to find and follow your profile, you need to focus on ways to grow your channel, combining tactics from the platform with some “guerilla marketing” so you can grow faster.
Best Tips To Grow Your Social Media Channels Today
1. Optimize your profile.
Your profile needs to be optimized to get the most traction. You should start with your first impression, keeping in mind that strangers will look you up and your goal is to inspire trust.
Branded headshots make you look like you mean business and are trustworthy. Invest in great new headshots and do an announcement! If you want to attract new followers, this is crucial.
3. Publish an “ask for recommendations” Facebook post.
Want instant engagement? Dedicate a post to asking your followers for recommendations on who else you should be following.
4. Share a “before and after” story.
Everyone loves to see these kinds of authentic journeys. Ask your current followers to share it and watch your reach grow.
5. Ask your current followers for help making new connections.
All you have to say is, “I’m looking to connect with ____. Who do you know who ____?”
6. Use your email list.
Start with your warm list and send a warm email to ask your connections for followers.
7. Make your email signature stand out.
This is a good way to draw attention to you/your brand. Link to your social media in the signature, too. Look at the example below for inspiration – it includes a picture, social media links, and even brand logos.
8. Post in different groups where you can reach people from your Avatars.
If you haven’t joined any social media groups yet, what are you waiting for? This is the perfect opportunity to reach people in your audience.
Facebook and LinkedIn Groups are very popular. Instagram does not have groups; but you can still build a community using Hashtags to find conversations and Instagram Stories to engage with your followers and create the community experience.
9. Use your personal accounts to feature the other accounts you want to grow.
Promote your business accounts to your personal network – reach everyone you can!
10. Do a giveaway/contest.
Social media giveaways and contests are engagement magnets. Find a worthy prize and remember to require that all entrants follow you and tag a friend in the post comments.
What’s the Number One Social Media Manager-Approved Tip To Get More Followers on Instagram?
Remember, these are just tactics. You still need a social media marketing strategy in order to grow your followers, grow engagements, and grow your revenue mixing multiple accounts. In my opinion, this is where forensic marketing plays a role, as it helps us deciding where to focus.
Recently, a prestigious magazine interviewed me. One question made me realize I should explain the name of my marketing firm, Marketing for Greatness:
“Jessica, you co-founded Marketing for Greatness in 2012. It is a bold name for a company to say the least. Can you tell us about starting the company and its early years?”
It IS a bold name for a company, but I think it matches up with the bold moves I had to make to start my social media training in Austin.
Here’s the story.
How My Company, Marketing for Greatness, Got Its Bold Name
As I look back at my journey, I’m reminded of when I was interviewed for Smart Hustle Magazine. They used the phrase “When life gives you lemons, you go and make lemonade.” That’s a good way to describe how I was able to start Marketing for Greatness.
Back in 2008, I was working as a real estate attorney for a high-profile bank in Puerto Rico. The deepening recession caused a full-blown crash at the company, one we didn’t plan for.
As everything crumbled around me, I was left with over $100,000 in debt from school loans. Of course, I knew crying or waiting for a miracle weren’t options.
I ended up moving out of Puerto Rico – one of the scariest things ever! Leaving my friends and family is something that still hurts to this day, but I needed to do it to start a new life.
Moving on to Greatness in Marketing
Luckily, moving forward, my B.B.A. gave me a background in business, accounting, and marketing. My law degree and almost a decade of experience gave me both content and context to succeed in life.
I named my company Marketing for Greatness because when you succeed under circumstances when anyone would fail, to me, that’s greatness. It’s easy to start a company with funds, with backup from your parents, or with investors. I had NONE of that.
I’m the first generation from my entire family to break the poverty barrier. I’m an exception, though. Nationally, 89 percent of low-income first-generation students leave college with no degree within six years, according to the First Generation Foundation.
Things that have helped me to reinvent my life:
Personal growth. Whatever path you choose, make a goal to be a better person every day.
Dig deep to find your core competency and learn how to be great at what you’re good at.
Mentorship – It helps tremendously to keep yourself focused and your vision alive.
Fast-forward 11 years, and I now have a consulting firm with amazing employees. I have a tribe of relentless individuals with a huge desire to change the world.
I attract entrepreneurs and organizations that want to make a difference in people’s lives. That’s what I get to do with Marketing for Greatness!
Looking to the Future: Social Media Training in Austin
If there is something I’m very passionate about this year, it’s teaching entrepreneurs practical tools that help you reach that amazing 6-7-digit revenue we all aspire to.
Want to find your own road to marketing greatness? Check out our courses for social media training in Austin, or set up a coffee connect session with me!
How does a person working with social media for the first time keep up with it?
That’s a good question because social media can move very fast. Most people are posting daily, if not multiple times a day. It’s even harder to keep up when you’re juggling your business, family life, and other obligations.
So, how can you keep up without losing your mind?
I have some tips that might help.
5 Tips for Keeping Up with Your Social Media Strategy
Keeping up with social media is hard unless you have some tools to help you do it. These are my top tips:
1. Set Up Tangible Goals
First, set up goals based on what you can handle.
Are you looking to engage with future users of your product or services? Are you looking to establish relationships with professionals that could be partners? How many new contacts would you like to have per week?
It all depends on what can you handle. Once you know that, we can reverse-engineer.
2. Eliminate Chaos by Organizing Your Time
Social media can easily be a distraction unless you organize your time to work as a social media marketer.
Plan out when you will post and what you will post in advance. Create a calendar that lays it all out, then follow it.
Learn the basics of social media marketing (SMM) so you’re not going in blind.
Did you know that SMM is a degree? It’s a very complex world. That’s why you need to set up expectations and allow yourself to be a student!
Personally, I love when entrepreneurs are willing to learn by shadowing a marketing expert. It’s actually the main purpose why I started my online school.
4. Choose a Posting Frequency
How many updates you should share? If you’re not so active, then 3 updates a week is okay. Pick 3 themes and run with them the entire month. Here’s my suggested posting schedule:
Expert tips: 1 every Wednesday
Success stories: 1 every Friday
Sharing industry news: 1 every Sunday
5. Collect a Bank of Content Ideas
Producing consistent content WILL be a pain (it is for most of us). For this reason, we recommend our clients collect a bank of content ideas and produce them during the month.
6. Allow Time for Direct Conversations
Learn how to FIND prospects by engaging and talking to them directly.
Get yourself a script.
Track your connections.
My book goes into more detail on how to talk to prospects.
My favorite class that teaches on this topic is a good start if you’re new to social media.
Ready to Conquer Social Media?
Using social media consistently is a great way to boost your brand and build your online presence.
Instagram is a great platform for spreading brand awareness and building a community around your business.
You might be posting great photos, using the right hashtags, and engaging with some followers (mostly friends), but did you know there’s more you can do to get more build your audience, get more followers, and turn them into real leads?
Specifically, I’m going to share some tips on how to craft an Instagram geotagging strategy that’s sure to bring more attention, followers, engagement, and leads your way.
What Is Geotagging?
Geotagging is how you add location and geographical information to media like photos and videos. A few examples of geotags include:
The latitude and longitude of a place
The location name
The state or country where the photo/video was taken
5 Tips for Your Instagram Geotagging Strategy
To show up in location searches on IG, geotagging is essential. Here are 5 tips to get it right.
1. Make Sure Geotagging is Enabled
To make geotagging super easy, make sure Location Services are ON for Instagram. This will let the app find your location automatically and suggest nearby geotags to use when you’re creating posts.
To make sure geotagging is enabled on an iPhone, go to Settings > Privacy > Location Services.
Make sure Location Services are on, then go to Instagram in the list of apps below.
Under the Instagram location options, select “While Using the App” to let the app automatically find relevant geotags of your location when you’re posting photos.
2. Tag Yourself in Different Locations (Even When You’re Not There)
To help increase your reach on Instagram, tag your photos in different locations – even when you’re not physically at those places.
For example, if you mention a place in your caption, you can tag that place so your photo will show up in the feed for that tag.
Don’t just tag random places, though. Keep your tags relevant, useful, and related to your photo or caption in some way.
3. Follow a “Location” Tag and See What People are Posting
One of Instagram’s most recent features is the ability to follow hashtags and geotags. Following relevant locations will help you see what people are posting and what’s getting engagement.
That will allow you to create relevant content and relevant hashtags for that particular market.
4. Make Sure Your Location is on the Map
Local business owners very often DONT have their location on the map! This is a mistake because you’re missing opportunities for people to geotag you in their photos.
If your business geotag doesn’t exist, create it. According to Instagram, you have to create your location on Facebook before you can add it to your IG posts. To learn how to do that, read this guide.
5. Tag Locations Via Stories
Did you know you can geotag your IG Stories, too? This is another great way to extend your brand’s reach and get in front of more leads.
If you have over 10,000 followers, you can then add a link to giveaway freebies and collect emails on these same Stories posts.
Use Instagram Geotagging to Help More People Find You
To get more targeted followers and turn them into leads, geotagging is perfect to use as part of your Instagram strategy. Follow these tips to maximize how and when you show up in relevant location tags, and let more local people find you!
What’s next?
You can keep learning tactics from blogs and videos, hoping you get clients, or you can take a guaranteed path to get clients by working with us. Check out my Instagram Course!
Having a social media account without content is like having a microphone without power. Your social media channels are amplifiers of your message and your content is your message.
Content marketing can be confusing, especially when you consider the dynamics that take place when you combine your social media marketing, your new followers, engagement, video… It’s a lot!
If you have been looking for a formula to generate content for your social media accounts that brings in revenue, keep reading!
What is Content Marketing?
Content Marketing is a marketing type, which entails the creation and distribution of online items to a clearly defined audience. Content marketers do this to arouse interest in various services or products.
The online material (mentioned above) includes material such as e-books, educational articles, entertainment, webinars (these answer specific queries individuals have about the marketed products/services), and videos. By creating and sharing this content, you can turn the product that you are selling into something unique that is not available elsewhere.
You should bear in mind though that Content Marketing is not a strategy that you employ once, and it is completed. On the contrary, content marketing is a process that requires a series of steps, which you have to repeat to achieve results over the passage of time.
Why do People Favor Content Marketing for Their Business?
Content marketing is a preferred tool for several businesses worldwide. Some of the many prime benefits of content marketing include:
Cost-Effective Means of Bringing in Fresh Leads
There is no denying that content marketing aids your business in gathering fresh leads. Small businesses that depend on constant traffic to boost their sales rely heavily on lead generation. Content marketing is not only an ideal solution for lead generation, but it is a very economical marketing strategy as well.
Content marketing generates around 2.5 times more leads than conventional marketing strategies and costs about 60 percent less as well. Content marketing’s ‘easy to afford’ factor makes it a useful tactic for small organizations that wish to maximize their revenue on a limited budget.
Enables you to Highlight your Expertise in your Field
All your followers want to know that they are interacting with experts who know sound knowledge of their industry. With the help of content marketing, you can demonstrate your know-how in your subject matter and facilitate your readers/followers to make an informed buying decision.
Let’s assume that either the consumer has the option to buy a product/service from a business that frequently publishes quality informative content or from one that does not provide any content. In this scenario, the customer is likely to buy from the company that has showcased their knowledge via their content. In this manner, the consumer can rest assured knowing that he/she is well taken care of by industry professionals who will competently answer any future questions he/she about the purchased product.
Why do Social Media and Content Marketing Complement Each Other?
Think about social media as the all-important automobile that takes your content to the ideal destination.
There are a plethora of platforms that you may use on social media such as Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, Snapchat, and many more. What this means is that you do not have to confine your content marketing motor vehicle to a single street! With the help of social media, you can connect with your targeted clientele and reach out to a diverse customer base when building your brand awareness.
Many entrepreneurs and marketers make the mistake of pursuing tactics on social media, such as how to get more likes, how to get more followers for free, how to write captions that get more likes. While those tactics are important, it’s important to have a big-picture strategy first. The last thing you want is to chase vanity metrics. You can’t deposit likes or followers in your banking account.
To ensure that your content marketing strategies are an unmitigated success, you must align these with social media. This alignment requires planning.
However, before we dive into the strategies to align content marketing for social media, it is important to know the chief components of a content marketing strategy:
-Business objectives: Your goals for content marketing and the Key Performance Indicators you will assess to measure the level of success.
-Mission Statement: What will you accomplish via your content?
-Distribution Strategies: What social media channels will you make use to distribute your content to your audience?
-Target clientele: Who do you plan to reach out to distribute your content?
-Measurement: Which metrics will you use to measure your success in social media content marketing?
These content marketing components will also serve as the crux of your social media plan. Here are some useful tips to assist you in aligning content marketing with social media.
What Should a Great Social Media Content Plan Have?
When you look for an efficient content marketing and social media plan, you should ask yourself some important questions:
-What do your social media followers require? Keep in mind that each platform will connect you with different followers. Treat each platform independently. For example, I won’t share on LinkedIn the same posts that I share on my Instagram. My content for Instagram is more personal than my content for LinkedIn.
-What do your social media followers need to know regarding your brand? Branded content is a must, if you want to use your social media channels to attract qualified leads.
Make sure your content includes the following:
What makes you unique?
What’s your story?
Who do you help?
What do your clients say about you?
–What online content/material piques your followers’ interest?Facebook Audience Insights is a great tool to find inspiration for your content. You will be able to find similar pages your audience have an idea of the content that drives their attention.
-Which social media platform you ought to leverage? Less is more. If you won’t be actively engaging in a platform, it’s better just to have a minimal presence. Review your leads and clients and see if you can track how did they find you. You should be able to find a pattern and see which social media platform is generating the best ROI.
–What are your objectives for social media? Set up the right expectations from your social media channels. While there are industries that have burst their sales using just social media, for the most part, especially for B2B businesses, social media serves as a place to raise awareness and build authority. However, they won’t expect to close deals from social media.
How many updates will you be sharing per week? Brands need to find the balance between staying in touch versus staying on your face. A general rule: if you don’t have great content to share, then don’t share. Your audience will appreciate you for respecting their time. Make it easy for them to follow you!
–How would you go about measuring your results on social media to know your progress? As a forensic marketer, this is my favorite part! Most marketers and entrepreneurs miss to track their content, especially content they share via social media. Don’t make the same mistake. Build your UTM codes so you can track your content using Google Analytics.
Importance of Understanding your Clientele
It is of paramount importance to know clearly who your targeted audience is and how these individuals make use of various social media platforms to look for information. You need to create and tailor your content in a way that your social media followers like it. By utilizing this approach, you will be the first choice for your audience when they look up for information online.
Make sure that you create the perfect blend of image and content. To that end, you need to keep your followers’ needs and interests in mind at all times. Put yourself in their shoes!
Stay Abreast of Trending Subjects
Staying abreast of trending topics is a great way to flourish when it comes to integrating content marketing with social media for your line of business. This enables you to become an important part of the conversations that interest your followers.
Just make sure you post your content at the correct time to maximize reader engagement as much as possible.
Hook Your Reader Base
When it comes to content marketing for social media, effectively engaging your readers is very important. You have to make sure that you connect with all your readers with the right content at the correct time. This will keep them hooked, and they will look you up frequently to check for new content. This also why it is necessary to post content frequently on social media.
However, posting too regularly in a single day might backfire as well. If you have quality content for your audience, limit yourself to post a couple of times per day. In this manner, you do not overload your readers with information and keep your followers engaged by providing them with useful content from time to time.
By using social media analytics, check out which type of content gives you the best reader engagement. Get a better understanding by studying the likes, shares, and comments received on the content. A thorough analysis of this kind will go a long way to help you to learn what best strikes your readers’ fancy. You will be able to efficiently boost reader engagement once you find out what your readers and followers like.
Ask the Audience
If you have no clue as to how, to begin with the marketing and require a sense of direction, you should take advantage of social media to find out the content type your followers/readers are actually looking for.
When it comes to content material, your targeted clientele will provide you valuable insights and point you in the right direction. Conducting a poll is the best way to get these insights. In this way, you will get assistance from your social media followers to promote and market your particular product/brand.
What Do You Use For Social Media Planning?
As a social media marketing with senior-level experience, I get to plan social media marketing calendars in no time. But it’s because at this point we use a strategy to design marketing campaigns.
If you’re starting, come up with a list of possible topics to post. Try to keep that list handy, so that can be your bank of ideas.
The infographic below outlines the social media content ideas that can be included in your content calendar.
Inspirational Quote
Feature a partner (or a vendor)
Share A Tip Or Trick
Share an article from your blog (showcase your expertise)
Share A Free Resource
Invite them to an event (or webinar)
Share an Interesting Story (be vulnerable)
Free trial
Highlight testimonial
Create a Poll
Highlight a cause
Show your audience behind the scenes
Infographic
Quick Video Training
Promo / Coupon
Ask me anything post!
Tips:
Perform an audit of your existing content
Make an overview of the major events that garner the interest of your audience
Think of the interests of your audience
Conduct research on the best content to post and share nothing but the best!
What did you plan to achieve by incorporating content marketing with your social media strategy? Are you using social media as your main channel to get discoverable? Do you have a website with existing traffic? Do you have an email list?
Knowing your starting point is crucial in order to set up your social media strategy.
Social media marketing can get you leads and sales, especially if you are incorporating content marketing into your social media marketing.
Your content marketing should help you communicate with your audience, in particular, with those who need your product or services TODAY. That will be key in order to see conversions from your social media marketing.
Mix Awareness, Consideration, and Promotions
A great way to simplify what to say in social media is by creating weekly campaigns, for example:
Motivational Mondays
Testimonial Tuesdays
Winning in Life Wednesday
Tips Thursdays
Fun Fridays
These are campaigns can help you craft a very simple content calendar.
Every brand is different and that’s why I don’t believe in the one-size-fits-all approach when it comes to creating a content marketing strategy for your social media.
Bottom Line
Needless to say, content marketing tactics should be a critical element of every social media strategy. In this way, you can expand your clientele reach, boost your brand awareness, and generate revenue, and leads by influencing potential customers at all phases of the sales funnel.
Similar to most things in life, a successful content marketing social media strategy takes time to perfect. To that end, be sure to experiment with new tactics and amend your strategy accordingly frequently.
Someone from my audience recently asked me a great question:
“How can I maximize my social media accounts?”
It made me think about where most people fail at taking advantage of all the free tools at their fingertips.
With that in mind, I have compiled a list of the 4 most underrated, underused, and FREE social media strategies and tools.
4 Free Social Media Tools and Strategies You’re Forgetting to Use
Sometimes, the best tools for social media are the ones right under your nose. Have you forgotten about any of these amazing features?
1. Direct Messages (DMs)
Social media is great for making new connections, and yet, people still choose to connect solely with people they have met in person.
Hello!? Grow your network online!
Facebook gives you the opportunity to make thousands of friends. Meanwhile, the average user has less than 500.
To find more connections, learn how to approach people via direct message without spamming them. Don’t be afraid to network, either. Ask them to go grab a coffee – you never know what might come out of it.
2. Facebook Albums
What’s another major tool people forget about on social media?
Albums.
Facebook, in particular, gives you the option to categorize your pictures and create albums. Look at how Weight Watchers uses Albums to feature their members in the Member Spotlight.
That’s brilliant!
And free!
3. Profile Pictures
Your profile picture is your first impression on social media.
That’s powerful!
Luckily, you can jazz up your picture to make it more memorable and get people interested in checking out your profile.
For instance, try adding a description (tag line) to your profile picture. I also recommend Photofeeler for real feedback and data about your images, which you can use to choose the best one.
4. The Community Around You
Social media brings people together. It’s great to create, collaborate, and engage in conversations.
It’s also a learning tool!
If more people used it for positivity, we could reduce depression and anxiety associated with social media.
To use your social media community to your advantage, try to engage more. Leave thoughtful comments on posts, join live feeds and chats, and share content.
Spread positivity and it will come back to you!
Want More Tips to Maximize Your Social Media Accounts?
Social media can seem intimidating, but it doesn’t have to be.
You don’t have to rely on hacks or secrets to get the most out of Facebook, Twitter, or Instagram. Remember to use the tools at your fingertips to engage with your community.
I share many more tips and tricks in my free ebook, The 6 Golden Rules of Social Media. Download it today!
There are over 1 billion people using Instagram, so every business should have an Instagram profile to increase their exposure.
But the problem is, you’re only allowed one measly link in your bio to a website. Just one.
Unless.
Unless you can unlock the “swipe up” feature. The “swipe up” gives you the power to embed any link in your Instagram stories.
But the catch is, you have to hit 10,000 followers first.
How to Get More Instagram Followers Quickly
There are lots of ways to grow your Instagram account organically, with a modicum of effort. Let’s look at some of the most common — and effective — ways.
1. Cooperate with Your Community
Collaboration is huge on Instagram because this platform functions like a community. You can create private groups with other influencers in your industry to boost the performance of your posts and theirs. And, you can use Instagram story shout-outs to give your collaborators — and yourself — a nice boost of exposure.
2. Reach Out to Ideal Clients
You’re a part of the Instagram community, so you’re welcome to send a direct message (DM) to people you determine are your ideal followers any time.
You don’t have to (nor should you) sell them on your business or service. Just be real. Ask questions about pain points or offer to help.
This can turn up valuable information that can help you fine-tune your marketing to make deeper connections.
3. Skyrocket Your Stories
Make the most of your Instagram stories by offering shareable content, simple shareable templates followers can fill out, or a branded hashtag to host a giveaway.
Giving away usable goodies on Instagram helps followers see — and share — the value you’re providing.
Okay, this last suggestion isn’t organic, but it’s definitely worth it if you’re trying to gain 10,000 Instagram followers to unlock the “swipe up” function!
Instagram ads require a tiny investment and a lot of creativity to boost likes and follows and get your profile noticed.
Ads can take many formats, including stories, video, carousel, collection, or simple photos.
You’ve Got Swipe Up — Now What?
Once you’ve got this function, you can use it to drive engagement in a number of ways.
Here are some clever ways to link customers to you using Instagram swipes:
There was a time when the more time you spent networking in a trade circle, the better it was for the business. It was tough for the newcomers as they faced challenges such as hefty amounts of finances for an office, hiring many employees, paying the bills etc. etc.
Social media took all that hassle away and staged the whole world as a market on our mobile screens. Traditional marketing strategies are of limited use when it comes to the online world. Therefore, to use this opportunity to its full potential, we must learn how to navigate through it, especially on the marketing front.
Marketing has always been amongst us, so have the 7 Ps of how to do it, even before the social media scene burst into action. The 7 Ps are the golden rules to lead your business on to a path of success and sustainable ROI. With Social media establishing itself as the next-gen frontier for marketing effectively, 7 Ps have also evolved to a whole new level of business strategy planning.
Let’s be honest, every business prioritizes to ensure a bigger, better name of its brand. Brand value has been a major player in saving many businesses from going bust in the last few decades.
In the world of social media, your online platform is the face of your business, whether it is a website, Instagram, or Facebook page. Any or all of these represent your business ideology and product; therefore, they must depict relevance to your desired clientele, and continuously evolve to add value to the business.
The trick to a successful social media marketing strategy is, to perfectly align your digital promotional strategies with the marketing norms of the present. Doing so will not only enable your business to stand the test of times but also help you develop a successful brand awareness campaign for sustainable growth.
So, if you are about to start a new business or build a brand name for your product, then make sure you have applied the following 7 Ps of social media marketing.
Planning
To plan your business is like playing a game of chess; it requires focus, a strategy, and the right move at the right time. Your marketing strategy is integral to your growth. Therefore, you must adapt to the latest trends in promotion provided by social media. To do so, make sure your long-term goals are in line with your short-term goals.
You will be amazed to find out that according to experts, social media marketing has a flawless lead-to-close rate at 100%, and over 80% of businesses prefer to use one the online platforms or the other. If you play your cards right, this will set a momentum for you and your business towards success.
For you to come up with a plan that suits your brand or product, you have to ask yourself some very basic questions, the first of which is whether your business needs more awareness or publicity. If yes, then
Which platforms are suitable for your needs?
Is there a time-constraint on how soon you want to achieve your goals?
Have you utilized your current marketing resources in place, before you move to social media?
Are you planning to promote your business or product in a market you already exist in or are you expanding into a new market?
Where your brand stands in the market right now?
Presence
Let’s face it; evading social media presence is not an option – You want to target audience, you have to go get them where they are, and it’s ‘online.’ However, easier said than done, as the statistics show that it’s a make or break in a split of a second when it comes to online visitors establishing an opinion of your brand. Therefore, you have to be smart about how to make your online presence look appealing, reliable, and legit for the targeted audience.
There are many online tools such as RiteTag or hashtagify.me available for you to find out what topics and hashtags are trending in your arena. It will help you to engage with your targeted audience, but also keep up with the ever-evolving trends in the online world.
It is imperative that you steer clear of anything remotely negative that might affect your brand’s perception amongst the consumers. Having an online presence is not enough. Therefore, choose wisely, where you promote your business.
Perception or People
Third in line but probably the most important P of them all – Yes “People” your targeted audience. Always remember consumers put brands on the map, not companies. I cannot emphasize enough how vital it is for you to base and build a reputation and persona of your product around your clientele. Positive perception is only achievable if you strive to meet the expectations of your consumers.
To build an effective and appealing persona, you must consider some areas of focus.
Are you marketing a specific age group?
Are you marketing a gender-specific product?
Are you marketing internationally?
It is advisable to use the 80/20 rule, also known as the ‘Pareto Principle.’ In social media marketing terms, you must use 80% of your interaction with the customer, i.e., conversations, content and activities, to that useful and relatable to them. You can utilize the remaining 20% for promotional purposes. Sharing trustworthy content with your audience, backed up with well-thought marketing claims, will establish your authority with trust amongst the masses.
Technological advancements have facilitated this to a great extent, as all major players in the market now have chatbots to cater to the users in a personalized manner. Similarly, social media offers a variety of options for you to provide a more personal service to each client, such as private messaging, business pages, live broadcasts, and chats. It’s a proven phenomenon time and time again that customers feel content when they receive a positive and personalized service; this compels them to repeat business.
Product
Ever wondered what your audience thinks of the product you offer? And will they be willing to pay a premium price for it? Or do you have a miracle idea to turn your business into a star-brand?
The entire answer to the above is, it all depends on how well you know your product and its distinctiveness. If you are aware of the strong-suite your brand offers over others, it will be easier for you to identify, prioritize and showcase what your audience sees as featured services as they browse through your social media platform.
Do not forget to mention what a consumer can expect in the packaging you offer. We all get confused between guarantees and warranties, so be extra careful to state the right information as this can make or break your trust in your niche. Bragging a bit about the benefits and features never harmed a business, so ensure you customer knows that they are getting value for money. After all, you want a brand name that resonates with your patrons.
You and I witness one of the most recent and far-reaching strategies on YouTube. Companies are paying popular YouTubers to create unboxing content for their products, creating awareness amongst millions on a global scale. Similar strategies are in place by other social media platforms such as Instagram influencers marketing products via paid content.
Prominence or Placement
Those days were history when you needed a gimmicky website, a fancy outlet, or a corporate office to establish a brand name in the market. Social media can combine all of that in one and deliver your product to the mobile or laptop screens of every household globally. However, this incredible opportunity comes with a set of its complications – One of the most important ones in which social medium you must choose to showcase your brand. Will a FaceBook page suffice, or is Instagram a viable platform for you? Snapchat is trending or a simple tweet will make your product the next best thing? Maybe you should use all of them or should you? Decisions, decisions.
I would strongly suggest for you to address some factors while formulating your ideal social media placement strategy. You must know where your audience hangs out the most. There are several ways to find this out, such as ask yourself which social media you would visit if you were to buy a product similar to yours? Or a more direct approach is to email your customers for opinion.
You must also consider other factors like what type of feedback you are expecting from your consumers. And are you marketing a product or a service?
You have to ensure that you choose the social media platform that will best suit your business or product. You wouldn’t go to buy a bike at a meat shop, would you? So to be in the right place has never been more important for that strategic product placement online.
Power or Performance
To be able to succeed and evolve in the world of social media as a trendsetter, you must establish a viable framework of KPI in line with the industry’s standard benchmarks. A regular audit on how compliant you have been with your defined parameters.
To gauge your social media marketing performance, you must strive for expansion byways to attract a new audience. Ability to correctly predict the response from the masses can do wonders, as you will always be one step ahead of the supply and demand cycle. Higher a creative team of individuals to come up with content that can go viral, and last but not the least always monitor the traffic on your website or social media platform; as hikes or dips in hits to your page can tell a great deal, whether you are going in the right direction or not?
Processes
In layman’s term, it’s the mechanism that is responsible for delivering your brand to the consumer, but when it comes to social media marketing, it’s all about how it promotes your brand to the niche.
Not long ago, Primark, UK, faced a backlash from its consumers when it came to light that their outsourced factories in Bangladesh were breaking child-labor laws. Although Primark claimed they may or may not be aware of it, I bet they now keep a close tab on what goes on in their factories now.
Once you create a guideline that defines every step in your process, not only will you be clear about what each step is responsible for and the best resources to enhance it, but also how integral are they to your bigger marketing strategy individually?
As a starter, you may consider the following steps to define your social media marketing plan.
Create trustworthy content
Ensure the uniform distribution of your content throughout all your social media platforms for consistency. It will help avoid any confusion and doubts amongst your audience.
Stay on top of your social media management; many successful players in the market hire a team to do so.
Assign a budget for your paid content on social media platforms, as I mentioned a few scenarios earlier about YouTube and Instagram.
Come up with creative and appealing content, increasing its chances to go viral. You and I both know it; all it takes is one viral trend to make a product into a global phenomenon. Remember ALSA (The Ice Bucket Challenge)?
If possible, try to organize or participate in events to show your presence both online and offline.
It is safe to say that if you create somewhat similar steps, then you will have a process for your social media marketing. But do not stop, there is always room for improvement.
Conclusion
Now that you and I both know the 7 Ps of Social Media Marketing; I would like to reiterate that, although all of them are important to create a successful marketing strategy, some of them might be more integral than others depending on the nature of your business, services or the product.
There is no standard formula for success when it comes to social media marketing. Think critical and smart, identify your strengths, and apply the 7 Ps as they suit your brand.
Standalone vs Integrated Applications
Your explorer page will show public Reels at the top.
Image source: 
Use Instagram Stories Polls to Learn More About Your Audience
